SIMPLY CLEVER

OWNER´S MANUAL

ŠKODA Octavia
Preface

You have opted for a ŠKODA – our sincere thanks for your confidence in us.
The description of the vehicle operation, important information about safety, vehicle care, mainte-
nance and self-help, as well as technical vehicle data, are included in this Owner's Manual.
The operation of some functions and vehicle systems is carried out via Infotainment.
Please do not read just this manual, but also the Infotainment Owner's Manual carefully as well. Oper-
ation in accordance with the two instruction manuals is a prerequisite for the correct use of the vehi-
cle.
When using the vehicle, the general binding country-specific legal requirements (e.g. transporting
children, deactivating the airbag, tyre use, road traffic, etc.) must always be observed.
We hope you enjoy driving your ŠKODA, and wish you a pleasant journey at all times.
Your ŠKODA AUTO a.s. (hereinafter referred to as ŠKODA or manufacturer)
 Service interval display 49 Driving
Table of Contents SmartGate 50
On-board literature 4 Starting-off and Driving 120
Unlocking and opening 53
Starting and stopping the engine using the
Notes 5 Unlocking and locking 53 key 120
Anti-theft alarm system 58 Starting and stopping the engine at the push
Structure and more information about the
Owner's Manual 6 Luggage compartment lid 59 of the button 122
Electric boot lid 60 START-STOPsystem 124
Abbreviations Window operations 61 Brakes and parking 126
Panorama sliding/tilting roof 64 Manual shifting of gears and pedals 128
Safety Automatic gearbox 129
Lights and visibility 67
Passive Safety 8 Lights 67 Running-in and economical driving 132
General information 8 Interior lights 74 Avoiding damage to your vehicle 134
Correct and safe seated position 8 Visibility 76 Assist systems 135
Windscreen wipers and washers 77 General information 135
Seat belts 11
Rear mirror 79 Braking and stabilisation systems 135
Using seat belts 11
Inertia reel and belt pretensioners 13 Seats and head restraints 81 OFF ROAD-mode 138
Seats and head restraints 81 Parking aid (ParkPilot) 140
Airbag system 14
Seat features 85 Rear View Camera 143
Description of the airbag system 14
Park Assist 144
Airbag overview 15 Transporting and practical equipment 89
Cruise Control System 148
Deactivating airbags 19 Useful equipment 89
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) 150
Multimedia holder 99
Transporting children safely 20 Front Assist 155
Luggage compartment and transport of
Child seat 20 Selection of the driving mode (Driving Mode
cargo 100
Fastening elements 23 Selection) 157
Variable loading floor in the luggage
Proactive passenger protection (Crew Protect
Using the system compartment (Estate) 107
Assist) 160
Net partition 109
Lane Departure Warning (Lane Assist) 160
Cockpit 27 Roof rack 110
Traffic sign recognition 162
Overview 26
Heating and ventilation 112 Fatigue detection 164
Instruments and warning lights 28 Heating, manual air conditioning system, Tyre pressure monitoring 165
Instrument cluster 28 Climatronic 112
Hitch and trailer 167
Warning lights 31 Auxiliary heating (auxiliary heating and
ventilation) 117 Hitch 167
Information system 40 Trailer 172
Driver information system 40
Driving data (Multifunction display) 41
MAXI DOT display 44

2 Table of Contents
General Maintenance Technical data
Care and maintenance 178 Technical data 236
Service work, adjustments and technical Basic vehicle data 236
alterations 178 Vehicle-specific information depending on
Washing vehicle 181 engine type 244
Cleaning vehicle exterior 182
Interior care 186 Index
Inspecting and replenishing 189
Fuel 189
Engine compartment 194
Engine oil 197
Coolant 198
Brake fluid 200
Vehicle battery 201
Wheels 205
Tyres and wheel rims 205
Winter operation 209

Do-it-yourself
Emergency equipment, and self-help 211
Emergency equipment 211
Changing a wheel 213
Puncture repair kit 217
Jump-starting 219
Towing the vehicle 220
Remote control 223
Emergency unlocking/locking 224
Replacing windscreen wiper blades 225
Fuses and light bulbs 226
Fuses 226
Bulbs 230

Table of Contents 3
 On the move brochure
On-board literature The On-the-road brochure contains the importer's customer service number
You will always find this Owner's Manual and the Service plan in the on-board and the service number in the individual countries, as well as the emergency
literature for your vehicle. numbers.

Depending on the equipment, the on-board literature may also include the In- Online user manuals
fotainment Owner's Manualand in some countries also the brochure On the
road.
Owner´s Manual
This Owner's Manual applies to all body variants of the vehicle and all related
model versions as well as all equipment levels.
This Owner's Manual describes all possible equipment variants without identi-
fying them as special equipment, model variants or market-dependent equip-
ment variants. Consequently, this vehicle does not contain all of the equip-
ment components described in this Owner's Manual.
The level of equipment in your vehicle refers to your purchase contract for the Fig. 1
vehicle. For questions regarding the scope of equipment, please contact a
ŠKODA Partner.
Using this QR code, the web page with a model overview of the ŠKODA brand
The illustrations in this Owner's Manual are for illustrative purposes only. The is opened.
illustrations can differ in minor details from your vehicle; they are only inten-
ded to provide general information. The page can also be accessed by entering the following address in the web
browser.
ŠKODA AUTO a.s. pursues a policy of constant product and model develop-
ment. Changes to the scope of delivery with regard to design, equipment and http://www.skoda-auto.com/en/mini-apps/owners-manuals/
technology are therefore possible at any time. The information listed in this ▶ Select the desired model - a menu for the user manuals is displayed.
Owner's Manual corresponds to the information available at the time of going ▶ Select the construction period as well as the language.
to press. ▶ Select the desired manual - it can be displayed either online or in pdf format.
Therefore legal claims cannot be made based on the technical data, illustra-
tions and information contained in this Owner's Manual.
We recommend that web pages that are referred to in this Owner's Manual are
displayed using the classic view. Not all necessary information may be dis-
played correctly if the mobile view is chosen.
Service plan
The service plan includes the documentation of the vehicle handover and in-
formation relating to the warranty and service events.
Infotainment Owner's Manual
The Infotainment Owner's Manual contains a description of the Infotainment
service and possibly also some functions and vehicle systems.

4 On-board literature
 Note
Notes
Texts with this symbol contain additional information.
Terms used
The on-board literature contains the following terms relating to the service
work for your vehicle.
“Specialist” - Workshop - a workshop that carries out specialist service tasks
for ŠKODA vehicles. A specialist can be a ŠKODA Partner, a ŠKODA Serv-
ice Partner, or an independent workshop.
“ŠKODA service partner” - a workshop that has been contractually authorized
by the manufacturer or its sales partner to perform service tasks on
ŠKODA vehicles and to sell ŠKODA Genuine Parts.
“ŠKODA partner” - a company that has been authorized by the manufacturer
or its sales partner to sell new ŠKODA vehicles and, when applicable, to
service them using ŠKODA Genuine Parts and sell ŠKODA Genuine Parts.
Explanation of symbols
An overview of the symbols used in the Owner's Manual and a brief explana-
tion of their meanings.
Reference to the introductory module of a chapter with important infor-

mation and safety warnings
 Continuation of the module on the next page
 Situations in which the vehicle must be stopped as soon as possible
® Trademark
 Telephone operation in the MAXI DOT display
 Text display in the segment display

WARNING
Texts with this symbol draw attention to threats of a serious accident, in-
jury or loss of life.

CAUTION
Texts with this symbol draw attention to the risk of vehicle damage or possible
inoperability of some systems.

For the sake of the environment

Texts with this symbol contain information on environmental protection as
well as tips for economical operation.

Notes 5
Structure and more information about the Owner's
Manual

Structure of the manual

The Owner's Manual is hierarchically divided into the following areas.
■ Section (e.g. Safety) - the title of the Section is always indicated at the lower
left-hand side
■ Main chapter (e.g. Airbag system) - the title of the main chapter is always
indicated at the lower right-hand side
■ Chapter (e.g. Airbag overview)
■  Introduction to the topic – Module Overview within the chapter, in-
troductory information about the chapter content, if necessary, valid for
the entire chapter notes
■ Module (e.g. Front airbags)

Information search
When searching for information in the Owner's Manual, we recommend using
the Index at the end of the manual.
Direction indications
All direction indications such as “left”, “right”, “front” and “rear” relate to the
forward direction of travel of the vehicle.
Units of measurement
The volume, weight, speed and length data is given in metric units, unless oth-
erwise indicated.
Display
In this Owner's Manual, the screen on the MAXI DOT display is used as the dis-
play illustration, unless specified otherwise.

6 Structure and more information about the Owner's Manual

Abbreviations Abbreviation Definition
Nm Newton meter, measuring unit for the engine torque
Abbreviation Definition
Diesel engine with turbo charging and common-rail injection
TDI CR
rpm Engine revolutions per minute system
ABS Anti-lock brake system TSA Trailer stabilisation
ACC Adaptive cruise control TSI Petrol engine with turbo charging and direct injection
AG Automatic gearbox VIN Vehicle identification number
AGM Vehicle battery type W Watt, unit of power
TCS Traction control Wi-Fi Wireless data network
CNG compressed natural gas XDS Functional expansion of the electronic differential lock
CO2 Carbon dioxide
COC Declaration of conformity
DPF Diesel particle filter
DSG Automatic double clutch gearbox
DSR Active driver-steering recommendation
EDL Electronic differential lock
ECE Economic Commission for Europe
EPC EPC fault light
ESC Electronic Stability Control
RD Rim depth
EU European Union
G-TEC Labelling for natural gas vehicles
GSM Global System for Mobile communications
HBA Hydraulic brake assist
HHC Uphill start assist
KESSY keyless unlocking, starting and locking
kW Kilowatt, measuring unit for output
LED Lighting element type
MCB Multi-collision brake
MG Manual gearbox
MPI Gasoline engine with a multi-point fuel injection
Panel van intended exclusively or mainly for the transporta-
N1
tion of goods

Abbreviations 7
 ▶ Protect children in suitable child seats with correctly fastened seat belts
Safety » page 20, Transporting children safely.
▶ Adopt the correct seated position » page 8, Correct and safe seated posi-
Passive Safety tion. Tell your passengers to assume the correct seated position.

General information Driving safety

 Introduction The driver is fully responsible for himself and passengers, especially children. If
your driving safety is effected, you place yourself and the oncoming traffic at
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
risk.
Before setting off 8
The following guidelines must therefore be observed.
Driving safety 8 ▶ Do not become distracted from concentrating on the traffic situation, (e.g. by
In this section of the instructions you will find important information, tips and your passengers or mobile phone calls).
notes on the subject of passive safety. ▶ Never drive when your driving ability is impaired, (e.g. due to medication, al-
cohol or drugs).
We have combined everything here which you should be familiar with, for ex- ▶ Keep to the traffic regulations and the permissible speed limit.
ample, regarding seat belts, airbags, safety of children and anything similar. ▶ Always adjust the driving speed to the road, traffic and weather conditions.
You will find further information on safety, which concerns you and those trav- ▶ Take regular breaks on long journeys (at least every two hours).
elling with you, in the following chapters of this Owner's Manual. The following list contains instructions for the Passenger which, if not ob-
The complete on-board literature should therefore always be in the vehicle. served, may cause serious injuries or death.
This applies in particular, if you rent out or sell the vehicle. ▶ Do not lean against the dash panel.
▶ Do not put your feet on the dash panel.
Before setting off The following list contains instructions for all Passengers which, if not ob-
served, may cause serious injuries or death.
For your own safety and the safety of the people travelling with you, please ▶ Do not sit only on the front area of the seat.
pay attention to the following points before setting off. ▶ Do not sit facing to the side.
▶ Ensure that the lighting and the turn signal system are functioning properly. ▶ Do not lean out of the window.
▶ Ensure that the function of the wipers and the condition of the wiper blades ▶ Do not put your limbs out of the window.
are free of any defects. ▶ Do not put your feet on the seat upholstery.
▶ Ensure that all of the windows offer good visibility to the outside.
▶ Adjust the rear-view mirror so that vision to the rear is guaranteed.
▶ Ensure that the mirrors are not covered. Correct and safe seated position
▶ Check the tyre inflation pressure.
▶ Check the engine oil, brake fluid and coolant level.
 Introduction
▶ Secure all items of luggage. This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
▶ Do not exceed the permissible axle loads and permissible gross weight of the
Correct seat position of the driver 9
vehicle.
▶ Close all doors as well as the bonnet and boot lid. Adjusting the steering wheel position 9
▶ Ensure that no objects can obstruct the pedals. Correct seated position for the front passenger 10
Correct seated position for the passengers in the rear seats 10 

8 Safety
 WARNING  Adjust the head restraint so that the top edge of the head restraint is at
■ The front seats and all head restraints must be adjusted to match the the same level as the upper part of your head C » Fig. 2 (not for seats
body size at all times and the seat belt must always be fastened properly to with integrated head restraint).
provide the most effective levels of protection to the passengers.  Correctly fasten the seat belt » page 11, Using seat belts.
■ Each occupant must correctly fasten the seat belt belonging to the seat.
Children must be fastened » page 20, Transporting children safely with a WARNING
suitable restraint system. ■ Always assume the correct seated position before setting off and do not
■ By sitting incorrectly, the occupant is risking life-threatening injuries. change this position while driving. Also advise your passengers to adopt
■ The seat backrests must not be tilted too far back when driving, as this the correct seated position and not to change this position while the car is
will impair the function of the seat belts and of the airbag system – risk of moving.
injury! ■ Maintain a distance of at least 25 cm from the steering wheel, and a dis-
tance of at least 10 cm between the legs and the dash panel at the height
of the knee airbag. Not maintaining this minimum distance will mean that
Correct seat position of the driver the airbag system will not be able to properly protect you – hazard!
■ When driving, hold the steering wheel with both hands firmly on the out-
er edge in the “9 o'clock” and “3 o'clock” position » Fig. 2. Never hold the
steering wheel in the “12 o'clock” position or in any other way (e.g. in the
middle, inner edge of the steering wheel or similar). In such cases, you
could severely injure the arms, hands and head when the driver airbag is
deployed.
■ Ensure that there are no objects in the driver's footwell as they may get
caught behind the pedals when driving or applying the braking. You would
then no longer be able to operate the clutch, brake or acceleration pedals.

Fig. 2 Correct seated position for the driver/correct steering wheel posi- Adjusting the steering wheel position
tion

 Read and observe on page 9 first.

For your own safety and to reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accident,
the following instructions must be observed.
 Adjust the driver’s seat in the forward/back direction so that the pedals
can be fully depressed with slightly bent legs.
 For vehicles with driver knee air-bag adjust the driver's seat in a for-
ward/back direction so that there is a gap of at least 10 cm between the
legs and the dash panel in the vicinity of the knee airbag - B » Fig. 2.
 Adjust the seat backrest so that the highest point of the steering wheel Fig. 3 Adjusting the steering wheel position
can be reached with your arms at a slight angle.
 Read and observe on page 9 first.
 Adjust the steering wheel so that the distance A between the steering
wheel and your chest is at least 25 cm » Fig. 2. The height and forward/back position of the steering wheel can be adjusted. 

Passive Safety 9
› Swivel the safety lever under the steering wheel in the direction of arrow 1
Correct seated position for the passengers in the rear seats
» Fig. 3.
› Adjust the steering wheel to the desired position. The steering wheel can be  Read and observe on page 9 first.
adjusted in the direction of arrow 2 .
› Pull the safety lever in the direction of arrow 3 to the stop. To reduce the risk of injury in the event of a sudden braking manoeuvre or an
accident, the occupants on the rear seats must observe the following.
WARNING  Adjust the head restraint so that the top edge of the head restraint is at
■ Never adjust the steering wheel when the vehicle is moving only when the same level as the upper part of the head C » Fig. 2 on page 9.
the vehicle is stationary!  Correctly fasten the seat belt » page 11, Using seat belts.
■ The safety lever must be locked so that the steering wheel cannot acci-
 Use a suitable child restraint system if transporting children in the vehicle
dentally change position – risk of accident!
» page 20, Transporting children safely.

Correct seated position for the front passenger

 Read and observe on page 9 first.

For passenger safety and to reduce the risk of injury in an accident, the follow-
ing instructions must be observed.
 Position the front passenger seat back as far as possible. The front pas-
senger must maintain a distance of at least 25 cm to the dash panel so
that the airbag offers the greatest possible safety if it is deployed.
 Adjust the head restraint so that the top edge of the head restraint is at
the same level as the upper part of your head C » Fig. 2 on page 9 (not for
seats with integrated head restraint).
 Correctly fasten the seat belt » page 11.
In exceptional cases the front passenger airbag can be deactivated
» page 19, Deactivating airbags.

WARNING
■ Maintain a distance of at least 25 cm to the dash panel. Not maintaining
this minimum distance will mean that the airbag system will not be able to
properly protect you - hazard!
■ Always keep your feet in the footwell when the car is being driven – nev-
er place your feet on the instrument panel, out of the window or on the
surface of the seats! You will be exposed to increased risk of injury if it be-
comes necessary to apply the brake or in the event of an accident. If an air-
bag is deployed, you could suffer fatal injuries by adopting an incorrect
seated position!

10 Safety
 WARNING (Continued)
Seat belts
■ A seat belt which is hanging too loose can result in injuries as your body is
Using seat belts moved forward by the kinetic energy produced in an accident and is then
suddenly held firm by the belt.
 Introduction ■ The belt webbing must not run across solid or fragile objects (e.g. specta-
cles, ball-point pens, keys, etc.). Such objects can cause injury.
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
The physical principle of a head-on collision 12 WARNING
Correct routing of seat belt 12 Information on dealing with the safety belts
Fastening and unfastening seat belts 13 ■ The belt webbing must not be jammed in-between at any point or twis-
ted, or chafe against any sharp edges.
Seat belts that are fastened correctly offer good protection in the event of an ■ Make sure you do not catch the seat belt in the door when closing it.
accident. They reduce the risk of an injury and increase the chance of survival
in the event of a major accident.
WARNING
Properly fastened seat belts hold occupants to correctly set seats in the right Information on the proper use of the safety belts
seat position. ■ No two persons (also not children) should ever use a single seat belt to-
Particular safety aspects must be observed when transporting children in the gether.
vehicle » page 20. ■ The lock tongue should only be inserted into the lock which is the correct
one for your seat. Wrong use of the safety belt will reduce its capacity to
WARNING protect and the risk of injury increases.
■ Fasten your seat belt before each journey – even when driving in town! ■ The slot of the belt tongue must not be blocked otherwise the belt
This also applies to other passengers - there is a danger of injury! tongue will not lock in place properly.
■ The maximum protection which seat belts can offer is only achieved if you ■ Many layers of clothing and loose clothing (e. g. a winter coat over a jack-
are correctly seated » page 8, Correct and safe seated position. et) do not allow you to be correctly seated and impairs proper operation of
■ The seat backrests of the front seats must not be tilted too far to the rear the seat belts.
otherwise the seatbelts can lose their effectiveness. ■ Do not use clamps or other objects to adjust seat belts (e.g. for shorten-
ing the belts for smaller persons).
■ The seat belts for the rear seats can only fulfil their function reliably
WARNING
when the seat backrests are correctly locked into position » page 87.
Information on the correct routing of the belt
■ Always ensure that the webbing of the seat belts is properly routed. Seat
belts which are not correctly adjusted can themselves cause injuries even WARNING
in minor accidents. Information on the care and maintenance of the safety belts
■ Adjust the height of the belt in such a way that the shoulder part of the ■ The belt webbing must always be kept clean. Soiled belt webbing may im-
belt is roughly positioned across the middle of your shoulder – on no ac- pair proper operation of the inertia reel » page 188.
count across your neck. ■ The seat belts must not be removed or changed in any way. Do not at-
tempt to repair the seat belts yourself. 

Seat belts 11
 WARNING (Continued) In the event of a frontal collision, occupants of the car not wearing a seat belt
■ Check the condition of all the seat belts on a regular basis. If any damage are thrown forward and strike parts of the interior of the car, such as the
to the seat belts, seat belt connections, inertia reel or the lock is detected, steering wheel, dash panel, windscreen in ways which cannot be controlled
the relevant seat belt must be replaced by a specialist garage. » Fig. 4 - . In certain circumstances you could even be thrown out of the vehi-
■ Damaged seat belts which have been subjected to stress in an accident cle, which could cause life threatening or even fatal injuries.
and were therefore stretched, must be replaced – this is best done by a Rear seat passengers who have not fastened their seat belts are a danger not
specialist garage. The anchorage points for the belts should also be only to themselves but also to those seated at the front » Fig. 4 – .
checked.
Correct routing of seat belt
The physical principle of a head-on collision

Fig. 5 Routing of belt webbing over the shoulders and the lap belt/Rout-
ing of belt webbing for an expectant mother
Fig. 4 Driver without a fastened seat belt/rear seat passenger without a
fastened seat belt
Fig. 6
 Read and observe on page 11 first. Front seat: Seat belt height ad-
juster
As soon as the vehicle is moving, so-called kinetic energy (the energy of mo-
tion) is produced both in terms of the car as well as in terms of the occupants.
The magnitude of this kinetic energy depends essentially on the speed at
which the vehicle is travelling and on the weight of the vehicle including the
occupants.
Doubling the speed of the vehicle from 25 km/h up to 50 km/hour increases
the kinetic energy four times.  Read and observe on page 11 first.
For example, a person's weight of 80 kg “increases” at 50 km/h to 4.8 tons
(4800 kg). It is important that the belt is properly routed to ensure seat belts offer the
maximum protection. 

12 Safety
The shoulder part of the seat belt must never run across the neck but must Fasten
roughly run over the middle of the shoulder and fit snugly against the chest. › Use the lock tongue to slowly pull the webbing over your chest and pelvis.
The lap part of the belt must run across the pelvis, must not be positioned › Insert the lock tongue into the belt buckle for the seat » Fig. 7 -  until it
across the stomach and must always fit snugly » Fig. 5 - . audibly clicks into place.
Seat belt height adjusters for front seats
› Pull on the belt to check that it has engaged correctly in the lock.
The seat belt height adjuster makes it possible to adjust the routing of the Release
front seat belts in the area of the shoulder to the body size. Release the seat belt only when the vehicle is stationary.
› Press the height adjuster and move to the desired position » Fig. 6. › Press the red button in the belt buckle » Fig. 7 - ; the lock tongue pops out.
› Then pull firmly on the belt to ensure that the seat belt height adjuster has › Manually guide the belt back so that it is easier to fully roll up the webbing,
correctly locked in place. the seat belt does not twist.
Seat belts with pregnant women CAUTION
Expectant women must also always wear a seat belt. This is the only way of When releasing the seatbelt ensure that the tongue of the lock does not dam-
ensuring optimal protection for the unborn child. age the door trim or other parts of the interior.
With pregnant women, the lap part of the belt must be positioned as low as
possible on the pelvis to avoid exerting any pressure on the lower abdomen Inertia reel and belt pretensioners
» Fig. 5 - .
 Introduction
Fastening and unfastening seat belts
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Inertia reel 13
Belt tensioners 13

Inertia reel
Each seat belt is equipped with an inertia reel. When pulling slowly on the seat
belt, the belt can move freely.
When pulling sharply on the seat belt, the movement is locked by the inertia
reel. The belts also block when during full braking, when the car accelerates,
when driving downhill and when cornering.
Fig. 7 Fastening/unfastening the seat belt
WARNING
 Read and observe on page 11 first.
If the seat belt does not lock when pulling sharply on it, have it inspected
Before using the seat belts the following conditions must be met. immediately by a specialist garage.

 Correctly set head restraint (not for seats with integrated head restraint).
 Correctly adjusted seat (applies for the front seats). Belt tensioners
 Correctly adjusted steering wheel (applies to the Driver's seat ). Safety for the driver and front passenger wearing their seat belts is enhanced
by the belt tensioners fitted to the inertia reels of the front three-point seat
belts. 

Seat belts 13
If there is a collision the seat belts are tightened by the belt tensioner so that
unwanted body motion is prevented.
Airbag system
The three-point seat belts are automatically tensioned in the event of a frontal Description of the airbag system
collision of a certain severity.
The front seat belts are automatically tensioned in the event of a side collision  Introduction
of a certain severity. This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Belt tensioners are not activated in the event of minor frontal, side or rear- System description 15
end collisions, in the case of a roll-over and also not in accidents in which no Airbag deployment 15
major forces are produced.
The airbag system supplements the fastened seat belts and provides addition-
WARNING al occupant protection in severe frontal and side collisions.
■ Any work on the belt tensioner system, including removal and installation
The functional status of the airbag system is indicated by the indicator light 
of system components because of other repair work, must only be carried in the instrument cluster » page 35.
out by a specialist garage.
■ If the belt tensioners have been deployed, it is then necessary to replace WARNING
the entire system. ■ An airbag can only offer you optimal protection in combination with a
fastened seat belt.
Note ■ The airbag is not a substitute for the seat belt, but instead forms part of
■ The belt tensioners can also be deployed if the seat belts are not fastened. the complete passive vehicle safety concept.
■ Smoke is generated when the belt tensioners are deployed. This is not an in- ■ To ensure passengers are protected with the greatest possible effect
dication of a fire in the vehicle. when the airbag is deployed, the front seats must be correctly adjusted to
match the body size » page 8, Correct and safe seated position.
■ If you do not fasten the seat belts when driving, lean too far forward or
adopt an incorrect seated position, you are exposing yourself to increased
risk of injury in the event of an accident.

WARNING
Information on the use of the airbag system
■ If there is a fault, have the airbag system checked immediately by a spe-
cialist garage. Otherwise, there is a risk of the airbag not being activated in
the event of an accident.
■ No modifications of any kind must be made to parts of the airbag system.
■ Any work on the airbag system including the installation and removal of
system components due to other repair work (e.g. removal of the steering
wheel) must only be carried out by a specialist garage.
■ Never make any changes to the front bumper or the bodywork.
■ Do not manipulate individual parts of the airbag system, as this might re-
sult in the airbag being deployed.
■ The airbag system must then be replaced if the airbag has been deployed.

14 Safety
System description The following airbags will be deployed in the event of a severe side collision.
▶ Front side airbag on the side of the accident.
 Read and observe on page 14 first. ▶ Rear side airbag on the side of the accident.
▶ Head airbags on the side of the accident.
The inflation of the airbag is carried out in a fraction of a second.
When an airbag is deployed, the following occurs.
When the airbags are deployed they fill with gas and inflate. ▶ The interior light comes on (if the automatic operation of the interior light is
A grey white or red, non-harmful gas is released when the airbag is inflated. switched on - switch ).
This is perfectly normal and is not an indication of a fire in the vehicle. ▶ The hazard warning lights are switched on.
▶ All the doors are unlocked.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the airbag system consists of the ▶ The fuel supply to the engine is interrupted.
following parts.
▶ Front airbag for the driver and the front passenger » page 15. When there is no air bag deployment?
▶ Driver’s knee airbag » page 17. With minor frontal and side collisions, rear collision, overturning of the vehicle
▶ Side airbags » page 17. or vehicle roll-over there is no airbag deployment.
▶ Head airbags » page 18.
▶ Airbag warning light in the instrument cluster » page 35.
Airbag overview
▶ Key switch for the front passenger airbag » page 19.
▶ Warning light for the front passenger airbag in the middle of the dash panel  Introduction
» page 19.
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Airbag deployment Front airbags 15
Driver’s knee airbag 17
 Read and observe on page 14 first.
Side airbags 17
The airbag system is only functional when the ignition is switched on. Head airbags 18
Triggering conditions
It is not possible to generally determine which deployment conditions apply to Front airbags
the airbag system in every situation. An important role is played by factors
such as the type of object that the vehicle hits (hard/soft), the impact angle,
vehicle speed, etc.
A decisive factor for the deployment of the airbags is the deceleration which
occurs. If the vehicle deceleration which occurs and is measured during the
collision remains below the prescribed reference values specified in the control
unit, the airbags are not deployed although the vehicle may well suffer severe
damage to the bodywork as a consequence of the accident.
The following airbags will be deployed in the event of a severe frontal
collision.
▶ Driver’s front airbag. Fig. 8 Locations of the airbags / gas filled airbags 

▶ Front passenger airbag.

▶ Driver’s knee airbag.

Airbag system 15
 WARNING
Fig. 9
Safe distance to steering wheel Front airbag and transporting children
■ Never transport children on the front seat of a vehicle without using a
proper restraint system. If airbags are deployed in the event of an accident,
the child might suffer severe or even fatal injuries!
■ The front passenger airbag must be deactivated if using a rear-facing
child seat on the front passenger seat » page 19, Deactivating airbags. If
this is not done, there is a risk of the child suffering severe or even fatal
injuries if the front passenger airbag is deployed.

In the event of a severe frontal collision, the front airbags offer additional pro- WARNING
tection for the head and chest area of the driver and front passenger. General information
The driver's front airbag is located in the steering wheel, the front passenger ■ The steering wheel and the surface of the airbag module in the dash pan-
airbag is located in the instrument panel above the glove compartment » Fig. 8 el on the passenger side must not have stickers attached, be covered or
-. modified in any other way. These parts should only be cleaned with a cloth
that is dry or has been moistened with water. No objects (such as cup hold-
The airbags inflate in front of the driver and front passenger when they are
ers, mobile phone mounts, etc.) are to be attached to the covers of the air-
deployed » Fig. 8 - . The forward movement of the driver and of the front
bag modules or be located within their immediate vicinity.
passenger is cushioned when they make contact with the fully inflated airbag ■ Never place objects on the surface of the front passenger airbag module
and the risk of injury to head and chest is thus reduced.
in the dash panel.
WARNING
Information on correct seated position Note
■ It is important that the driver and front passenger maintain a distance of ■ In vehicles with a driver's front airbag, the text  can be seen on the
at least 25 cm to the steering wheel or dashboard A » Fig. 9. Not maintain- steering wheel.
ing this minimum distance will mean that the airbag system will not be able ■ In vehicles with a front passenger airbag, the text  can be seen on the
to properly protect you – hazard! The front seats and the head restraints dash panel on the passenger side.
must always also be correctly adjusted to match the body size of the occu-
pant.
■ The airbag develops enormous forces when triggered, which can lead to
injuries if the sitting position or seated position is not correct.
■ There must not by any further persons, animals or objects positioned be-
tween the front seated occupants and the deployment area of the airbag.

16 Safety
Driver’s knee airbag Side airbags

Fig. 10 Installation of the airbag / Gas-filled Airbag / Safe distance be- Fig. 11 Installation locations of airbags: in the front seat/the rear
tween the legs and the instrument panel

The driver's knee airbag offers adequate protection for the driver's legs.
The driver's knee airbag A is located in the lower part of the dash panel below
the steering column » Fig. 10.
The forward movement of the body is cushioned when it makes contact with
the fully inflated airbag B and the risk of injury to the legs of the driver is thus
reduced.

WARNING
■ Adjust the driver's seat in a forward/back direction so that there is a gap
of at least 10 cm between the legs C and the instrument panel in the vi- Fig. 12 Inflated airbags
cinity of the knee airbag » Fig. 10. If it is not possible to meet this require-
ment due to your body size, visit a specialist garage. In the event of severe side collisions, the side airbags provide additional pro-
■ The surface of the airbag module in the lower part of the dash panel be- tection for the upper body (chest, stomach and pelvis) of passengers in the ve-
low the steering column not have stickers attached, be covered or modified hicle.
in any other way. This part should only be cleaned with a cloth that is dry or
The front side airbags are housed in the upholstery of the seat backrests of
has been moistened with water. Nothing may be attached to the cover of
the front seats » Fig. 11 - .
the airbag module or located within the immediate vicinity.
■ Do not attach any bulky and heavy objects (bunch of keys etc.) to the igni- The rear side airbags are located between the entrance area and the seat
tion key. These can be ejected by the knee airbag when it is deployed and backrest » Fig. 11- .
can cause injuries. The load of the occupants is cushioned when plunging into the fully inflated
airbag » Fig. 12 and the risk of injury to the entire upper body (chest, stomach
Note and pelvis) is reduced on the side facing the door. 
In vehicles with a driver's knee airbag, the text  can be seen on the side
panel on the driver's side.

Airbag system 17
 WARNING Head airbags
Information on correct seated position
■ Your head should never be positioned in the deployment area of the side
airbag. You might suffer severe injuries in the event of an accident. This ap-
plies in particular to children who are transported without using a suitable
child safety seat » page 22, Child safety and side airbag.
■ There must not be any further persons, animals or objects positioned be-
tween the occupants and the deployment area of the airbag. No accesso-
ries, such as cup holders, should be attached to the doors.
■ If children adopt an incorrect seated position when travelling, they may
be exposed to an increased risk of injury in the event of an accident. This
can result in serious injuries » page 20, Child seat.
Fig. 13 Location of the head airbag/gas-filled head airbag
WARNING
■ Do not place any objects within the deployment area of the side airbags – In the event of a severe side collision, the head airbags offer additional protec-
risk of injury! tion for the head and neck area of passengers.
■ The airbag system operates using pressure sensors located in the front The head airbags are positioned above the doors on both sides of the vehicle
doors. For this reason, no adjustments may be carried out to the doors or interior » Fig. 13 - .
door panels (e.g. installation of additional loudspeakers). Further informa-
When deployed, the airbag covers the window area of the front and rear doors,
tion » page 180, Airbags.
as well as the area of the door pillar » Fig. 13 - .
■ Ensure that there are no excessive forces, such as violent knocks, kicks
etc., impact on the backrests of the seats otherwise the system may be Head impact with interior parts is reduced by the inflated head airbag. The re-
damaged. The side airbags would not be deployed in such a case! duction in any impact to the head and the resultant minimizing of any move-
■ Any seat or protective covers which you fit to the driver or front passen- ments of the head additionally reduce the risk of injuries to the neck area.
ger seats must only be of the type expressly authorized by ŠKODA. In view
of the fact that the airbag inflates out of the backrest of the seat, use of WARNING
non-approved seat or protective covers would considerably impair the pro- ■ There must not be any objects in the deployment area of the head air-
tective function of the side airbag. bags which might prevent the airbags from inflating properly.
■ Any damage to the original seat covers in the area of the side airbag mod- ■ Only hang light items of clothing on the hooks fitted in the vehicle. Never
ule must be repaired immediately by a specialist garage. leave any heavy or sharp-edged objects in the pockets of the items of
■ The airbag modules in the front seats must not display any damage, clothing. Additionally, clothes hangers must not be used to hang up items
cracks or deep scratches. It is not permissible to use force in order to open of clothing.
the modules. ■ The installation of impermissible accessories in the vicinity of the head
airbags can considerably impair the protection offered by the head airbag in
Note the event of it being deployed. When the deployed head airbag is inflated,
parts of the accessories fitted could, conditions permitting, be thrown into
■ In vehicles with side front airbags, a label with the text  is located on
the interior of the car and injure the occupants » page 178. 
the front seat backrests.
■ In vehicles with rear side airbags, the text  can be seen between the en-
trance area and the rear seat rest.

18 Safety
 WARNING (Continued) The front passenger airbag can be switched off with the key-operated switch
■ When objects are attached to the sun visor, the visor can not be pivoted » Fig. 14 on page 19 - .
to the side windows. This might result in injuries to the occupants if the We recommend that you ask a ŠKODA service partner to deactivate any other
head airbag is deployed. airbags as appropriate.
■ There must not be any further persons, animals or objects positioned be-
tween the occupants and the deployment area of the airbag. In addition, Deactivation indicator
none of the occupants should lean their head out of the window when driv- Display of the airbag deactivation » page 35,  Safety systems.
ing, or extend their arms and hands out of the window.
Note
A ŠKODA service partner will be able to inform you which, if any, of your vehi-
Note
cle's airbags can or must be deactivated.
In vehicles with head airbags, the text  can be seen on the B column clad-
ding.
Deactivating the front passenger airbag

Deactivating airbags

 Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Deactivating airbags 19
Deactivating the front passenger airbag 19

Deactivating airbags
If you sell your vehicle, provide the complete vehicle documentation to the Fig. 14 Key-operated switch for the front passenger airbag/warning light
new owner. Please note that the information relating to the possibility of de- for the front passenger airbag
activating the front passenger airbag must be included!
If an airbag in the vehicle is to be turned off, then the buyer is to draw atten- Only the front passenger airbag is deactivated with the key switch.
tion to this fact! Key switch positions » Fig. 14 - 
Deactivating an airbag should be considered in cases such as the ones  Passenger front airbag deactivated
outlined below.  Passenger front airbag activated
▶ If a child seat must be used on the front passenger seat, where the child is
Switch off
transported facing rearward » page 20, Transporting children safely.
▶ If not being able to maintain a distance of at least 25 cm between the middle
› Switch off the ignition.
of the steering wheel and chest, despite the driver's seat being correctly ad-
› Open the storage box on the front passenger's side.
justed.
› Fold the key bit out completely for the radio key » .
▶ If special attachments are required in the area of the steering wheel because
› Carefully insert the key into the key slot in the key switch as far as the stop.
of a physical disability.
› Use the key to turn the slot of the key switch » Fig. 14  carefully into the
position .
▶ If other seats have been installed (e.g. orthopaedic seats without side air-
bags).
› Pull the key out of the slot in the key switch » .
› Close the storage box on the front passenger's side. 

Airbag system 19
› Check that the warning light   underneath the text   Transporting children safely
» Fig. 14 -  lights up after the ignition is switched on.
Switching on Child seat
› Switch off the ignition.
› Open the storage box on the front passenger's side.  Introduction
› Fold the key bit out completely for the radio key » . This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
› Carefully insert the key into the key slot in the key switch as far as the stop.
› Use the key to turn the slot of the key switch » Fig. 14  carefully into the Use of a child seat on the front passenger seat 21
position . Use of the child seat on the front passenger seat 22
› Pull the key out of the slot in the key switch » . Child safety and side airbag 22
› Close the storage box on the front passenger's side. Classification of child seats 22
› Check that the warning light   underneath the text   » Fig. 14 Use of child seats fastened with a seat belt 22
-  lights up after the ignition is switched on.
To avoid serious injury or death children are always to be in an appropriate
The   warning light goes out 65 seconds after the key switch status has
child safety seat with regards to height, weight, and age.
changed or after the ignition is switched on.
For safety reasons, we recommend that you always transport child seats on
WARNING the rear seats.
■ The driver is responsible for whether the airbag is switched on or switch-
ed off. Child seats complying with the ECE-R 44 Economic Commission for Europe
■ Only switch off the airbag when the ignition is switched off! Otherwise a standard must be used.
fault can occur in the system for deactivating the airbag. Child seats that comply with the ECE-R 44 standard have a test seal that can-
■ If the warning lights     flash, the front passenger airbag will not not be removed: a large E within a circle with the test number below.
be deployed in the event of an accident! Have the airbag system checked
With child safety seats in groups 2 and 3, make sure that the loop-around fit-
by a specialist garage immediately.
tings attached to the child seat headrest is positioned in front of or at the
■ Do not leave the key inserted in the key-operated switch while driving -
same height as the loop-around fittings on the B pillar on the passenger side.
vibrations can cause the key to turn in the slot and switch on the airbag!
The airbag could be triggered unexpectedly in an accident - it may result in WARNING
injury or death! ■ One should never carry children, and also not babies! - on one's lap.
■ Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. Certain outside climatic
CAUTION conditions can cause life-threatening temperatures in the vehicle.
An insufficiently folded out key bit can damage the key switch! ■ The child must be secured in the vehicle during the entire travelling time!
Otherwise, in the event of an accident, the child would be thrown through
the vehicle and as a result may suffer fatal injuries, and also injure other oc-
cupants. 

20 Safety
 WARNING (Continued) Use of a child seat on the front passenger seat
■ Children are exposed to an increased risk of injury in the event of an acci-
dent if they lean forward or adopt an incorrect seated position when the Does not apply to Taiwan
vehicle is moving. This particularly applies to children who are transported
on the front passenger seat as they can suffer severe, or even fatal injuries Fig. 15
if the airbag system is deployed! Sticker on the B column on the
■ Pay particular attention to the information provided by the manufacturer front passenger side.
of the child safety seat regarding the correct routing of the belt. Seat belts
which are not correctly adjusted can themselves cause injuries even in mi-
nor accidents.
■ Safety belts must be checked to ensure that they are running properly.
One should also ensure that the belt is not damaged by sharp-edged fit-
tings.
■ It is essential to switch off the front passenger airbag if using a child seat
in which the child is carried with its back facing the direction of travel on
the front passenger seat. Further information » page 21, Use of a child
seat on the front passenger seat.
■ When installing the child seat on the back seat, the corresponding front
seat must be adjusted so that there is no contact between the front seat
and the child seat or the child being transported in a child seat.

CAUTION
■ When installing a child seat in which the child faces forward, adjust the head
restraints so that they are as high as possible.
■ If the head restraints still prevent the child seat from being installed, even in
Fig. 16 Front passenger sun visor / label
the highest position, you will need to remove them » page 82. After removing
the child seat, refit the head restraints.  Read and observe and on page 20 first.

Note Never use a rearward-facing child restraint system on a seat which is protec-
We recommend that you use child seats from ŠKODA Original Accessories. ted by an active airbag. This could cause serious injury to the child, even
These child seats were developed and also tested for use in ŠKODAvehicles. death.
They meet the ECE-R 44 standard. The following advice must be heeded when using a child seat in which the
child is carried on the front passenger seat.
▶ It is essential to switch off the front passenger airbag if using a child seat in
which the child is carried with its back facing the direction of travel » .
▶ If possible, adjust the front passenger seat backrest so that it is as vertical,
so as to ensure secure contact between the passenger seat backrest and the
back of the child seat.
▶ If possible, move the front passenger seat backwards so that there is no con-
tact between the front passenger seat and the child seat behind it.
▶ Set the height-adjustable front passenger seat as high up as possible. 

Transporting children safely 21

▶ Set the front passenger seat belt as high up as possible.
Child safety and side airbag
▶ When using a child seat where there is a height adjuster in the upper area,
the height of the passenger seat belt is to be set so that the belt is not
“kinked” in the height adjuster. In the event of an accident, there is the risk Fig. 18
of injury to the neck of the child carried due to the seat belt! Incorrect seated position of a
child who is not properly secured
WARNING – risk from the side airbag/Child
■ Never use a rear-facing child seat on the front passenger seat if the pas- properly protected by safety seat
senger airbag is activated. This child safety seat is positioned in the deploy-
ment area of the front passenger airbag. The airbag may cause the child se-
vere, or even fatal injuries, in the event of it being deployed.
■ This fact is also indicated by the label that can be found in one of the fol-
lowing locations.  Read and observe and on page 20 first.
■ On the B-column on the front passenger side » Fig. 15. The sticker is
visible upon opening the front passenger door. The child must not be positioned in the deployment area of the side airbag
■ On the front passenger's sun visor. In some countries, the sticker is lo- » Fig. 18 - .
cated on the front seat passenger's sun visor » Fig. 16. There must be sufficient room between the child and the deployment area of
■ Once the child seat, in which the child is transported with the back to the
the side airbag to ensure that the airbag can provide as much protection as
direction of travel, is no longer used in the passenger seat, the front pas- possible » Fig. 18 - .
senger airbag should be switched on again.
Classification of child seats
Use of the child seat on the front passenger seat
 Read and observe and on page 20 first.
Applies to Taiwan
Classification of child seats according to the ECE-R 44 standard.
Group Weight of the child
0 up to 10 kg
0+ up to 13 kg
1 9-18 kg
2 15-25 kg
3 22-36 kg

Use of child seats fastened with a seat belt

Fig. 17 Front passenger sun visor / label
 Read and observe and on page 20 first.
 Read and observe and on page 20 first.
Overview of the usefulness of child seats fastened with a seat belt on each of
No babies, infants or children are to be carried on the passenger seat. the seats in accordance with the ECE-R 16 standard. 

A label to this effect can also be found on the passenger's sun visor » Fig. 17.

22 Safety
 Front passenger Rear seats Rear seat  is a system for securing child seats quickly and safely.
Group
seat External Centre There are two attachment points between the seat backrest and seat cushion
0 of the outer rear seats and front passenger seat for fixing a child seat with the
U U U  system» Fig. 19.
up to 10 kg
0+ First remove the caps to access the locking eyes.
U U U
up to 13 kg
After removing the child seat, replace he caps.
1
U U U
9-18 kg WARNING
2 ■ Always refer to the instructions of the manufacturer of the child seat
U U U
15-25 kg when installing and removing a child seat with the  system.
3 ■ Never attach other child seats, belts or objects to the attachment points
U U U intended for the installation of a child seat with the  system – risk of
22-36 kg
death!
U Child seat category “Universal” - a child seat designed for fastening on
the seat with the seat belt.
Note
■ A child seat fitted with the  system can only be mounted in a vehicle fit-
Fastening elements ted with a  system if the child seat has been approved for this type of ve-
hicle. Further information is available from a ŠKODA Partner.
 Introduction ■ Child seats with the  system can be purchased from ŠKODA Original Ac-

This chapter contains information on the following subjects: cessories.

Attachment points of the -system 23

Use of child seats with the  system 24
Attachment points of the   system 25

Attachment points of the  -system

Fig. 19
Labels of the system 

Transporting children safely 23

 Use of child seats with the  system
Overview of the usefulness of child seats with the  system on each of the
seats in accordance with the ECE-R 16 standard.

Size class of
Group Front passenger seatb) Rear seats outside Rear seat middle
the child seata)
0
E X IL-SU X
up to 10 kg
E
0+
D X IL-SU X
up to 13 kg
C
D
C
1 IL-SU
B X X
9-18 kg IUF
B1
A
2
- X IL-SU X
15-25 kg
3
- X IL-SU X
22-36 kg
a) The size category is shown on the label attached to the child seat.
b) If the front passenger seat is fitted with system attachment points, it is suitable for the installation of an  child seat with “Semi-Universal” approval.

IL-SU The seat is suited for installation of a  child seat with “Semi-Universal” approval. The “Semi-Universal” category means that the child seat with the
 system is approved for your vehicle. Observe the information in the list of vehicles which comes with the child seat.
IUF The seat is suitable for the installation of a  child seat with “Universal” approval and attachment with the   system belt.
X The seat is not fitted with -system attachment points.

24 Safety
Attachment points of the   system

Fig. 20 Attachment points of the  -system

  is a fastening system, which restricts the movement of the upper part
of the child seat.
The attachment points for attaching the belt for a child seat with the  
system are located on the rear side of the outer rear seat backrests » Fig. 20 -
.
Some country-specific models may also feature an attachment point on the
back of the middle rear seat backrest » Fig. 20 - .

WARNING
■ Always refer to the instructions of the manufacturer of the child seat
when installing and removing a child seat with the   system.
■ Only use child seats with the   system on the seats that have the
attachment points.
■ Only ever attach one belt from the child seat to a locking eye.

Transporting children safely 25

 Fig. 21 Cockpit

26 Using the system

 22 Light switch 68
Using the system 23 Bonnet release lever 195
Cockpit 24 Storage compartment on the driver's side 90
Fuse box (behind the storage compartment on the driver's
Overview side) 227
25 Operating lever for adaptive cruise control 152
1 Electrical power windows 62 26 Lever for adjusting the steering wheel 9
2 Electric exterior mirror adjustment 80 27 Depending on equipment fitted:
3 Door opening lever 57 ▶ Ignition lock 121
4 Air outlet vents 116 ▶ Starter button 122
5 Parking ticket holder 90 28 Pedals 128
6 Operating lever (depending on equipment): 29 Handbrake lever 127
▶ Turn signal light, headlight and parking light, headlight 30 Depending on equipment fitted:
flasher 69 ▶ Gearshift lever (manual gearbox) 128
▶ Speed regulating system 148 ▶ Selector lever (automatic gearbox) 129
▶ Headlight assist 71 31 Depending on equipment fitted:
7 Steering wheel: ▶ 12-Volt power socket 93
▶ With horn ▶ Cigarette lighter 92
▶ With driver’s front airbag 15 32 Bar with keys depending on the equipment fitted:
▶ With buttons for operating the information system 40 ▶  Central locking system 55
8 Instrument cluster 28 ▶  START STOP 124
9 Operating lever: ▶  Traction control TCS 136
▶ Windscreen wiper and wash system 77 ▶  Electronic Stability Control ESC 136
▶ Information system 45 ▶ / Selection of travel mode 157
10 Infotainment » Owner's Manual for Infotainment ▶  Park Assist 144
▶  Parking aid 140
11 Air outlet vents 116
▶  Tyre pressure monitoring system 165
12 Button for hazard warning light system 73
33 Shelf/phone box 91
13 Warning light for the front seat passenger airbag 19
34 USB/AUX input » Infotainment Owner's Manual, chap-
14 Interior rear-view mirror 79
ter USB/AUX Inputs
15 Storage compartment on the front passenger side 95
35 Depending on equipment fitted:
16 Front passenger airbag 15 ▶ Operating controls for the heating 113
17 External Infotainment module (in the front passenger storage ▶ Operating controls for the air conditioning system 113
compartment) » Owner's Manual Infotainment ▶ Operating controls for Climatronic 114
18 Key switch for switching off the front passenger airbag (in front
passenger storage compartment) 19 Note
19 Air outlet vents 116 The layout of the controls on right-hand drive vehicles differs partially from
that shown in » Fig. 21. The symbols on the controls and switches are the same
20 Door opening lever 57
as for left-hand drive models.
21 Power window in the front passenger door 63

Cockpit 27
 Instruments and warning lights Overview

Instrument cluster

 Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Overview 28
Revolutions counter 29
Display 29
Coolant temperature gauge 29
Fuel reserve display - Natural gas 30
Fuel reserve display - Petrol / Diesel 30
Counter for distance driven 30
Setting the clock 31 Fig. 22 Instrument cluster
The instrument cluster gives the driver basic information such as the current
speed, engine speed, the state of some vehicle systems and the like.  Read and observe on page 28 first.

If there is a fault in the instrument cluster, the following message will appear 1 Engine revolutions counter » page 29
in the display. ▶ with warning lights » page 31
 Error: instrument cluster. Workshop! 2 Display » page 29
 COMBI-INSTRUM_ WORKSHOP 3 Speedometer
▶ with warning lights » page 31
Seek help from a specialist garage.
4 Depending on equipment fitted:
WARNING ▶ Coolant temperature gauge » page 29
▶ Gas gauge1) » page 30
Concentrate fully at all times on your driving! As the driver you are fully re-
sponsible for road safety. 5 Bar with warning lights » page 31
6 Button for:
Note ▶ Setting the time » page 31
▶ Resetting the counter for distance travelled (trip) » page 30
■ If the message SAFE CP appears in the instrument cluster display, the compo-
▶ Displaying the distance and days until the next service interval
nent protection for the instrument cluster is active. Further information
» page 180, Component protection. » page 49
■ With the ignition switched on the instruments are also illuminated. The 7 Gasoline / diesel reserve display » page 30
brightness of the instrument illumination is set automatically depending on
the ambient lighting throughout.

1) Applies to G-TEC vehicles

28 Using the system

Revolutions counter Note
Depending on vehicle equipment, the MAXI DOT display can be either mono-
 Read and observe on page 28 first. chromatic “(black and white)” or colour.
The tachometer 1 » Fig. 22 on page 28 shows the actual engine speed per
minute. Coolant temperature gauge
The beginning of the red scale range of the tachometer indicates the maxi-
Fig. 24
mum permitted engine speed of a driven-in and operating warm engine.
Coolant temperature gauge
You should shift into the next highest gear before the red scale of the revolu-
tion counter is reached, or select mode D on the automatic gearbox.
The gear recommendation is important to note in order to maintain the opti-
mum engine speed » page 41.

CAUTION
The pointer of the tachometer must reach the red area for only a short time -
there is a risk of engine damage!  Read and observe on page 28 first.

Display The display » Fig. 24 provides information on the engine coolant temperature.
The fuel gauge only works if the ignition is switched on.
Fig. 23
Cold range
Display types
If the pointer is still in the left area of the scale, this indicates that the engine
has not yet reached its operating temperature. Avoid high speeds, full throttle
and high engine loads. This prevents possible damage to the engine.
The operating range
The engine has reached its operating temperature as soon as the pointer
moves into the middle of the scale A » Fig. 24.
High temperature range
 Read and observe on page 28 first. If the pointer reaches the red area of the scale, the coolant temperature is too
high.
Display types » Fig. 23
 MAXI DOT display. CAUTION
 Segment display ■ Additional headlights and other attached components in front of the air inlet
impair the cooling efficiency of the coolant.
The following information will be displayed. ■ Never cover the radiator - there is a risk of the engine overheating.
▶ Exterior temperature information
▶ Distance travelled » page 30
▶ Time » page 31
▶ Warning lights » page 31
▶ Information system data » page 40

Instruments and warning lights 29

Fuel reserve display - Natural gas The contents of the fuel tank for petrol / diesel is approximately 50 litres.
When this fuel level reaches the reserve area A » Fig. 26, the warning light 
Fig. 25 » page 36 illuminates.
Gas gauge
WARNING
For the vehicle systems to function correctly, and thus for safe driving,
there must be sufficient fuel in the tank. Never drain the fuel tank com-
pletely – risk of accident!

CAUTION
Never drive until the fuel tank is completely empty! The irregular supply of fuel
 Read and observe on page 28 first. can cause misfiring. This can result in considerable damage to parts of the en-
gine and the exhaust system.
The display » Fig. 25 provides information on the natural gas supply in the con-
tainer. Note
■ After filling up, it can occur that during dynamic driving (e.g. numerous
The fuel gauge only works if the ignition is switched on. curves, braking, driving downhill and climbing a steep hill) the fuel gauge indi-
If the natural gas supply in the container reaches the reserve area, the icon ap- cates approx. a fraction less. When stopping or during less dynamic driving, the
pears in the display  together with the following message. fuel gauge displays the correct fuel level again. This is not a fault.
■ The arrow  next to the icon  within the fuel gauge displays the installation
 Please refuel with CNG. Range: ... km
location of the fuel filler on the right side of the vehicle.
An audible signal sounds as a warning.
Counter for distance driven
Fuel reserve display - Petrol / Diesel
Fig. 27
Fig. 26 Display: MAXI DOT display / Seg-
Gasoline / diesel reserve display ment Display

 Read and observe on page 28 first.

 Read and observe on page 28 first.
Display » Fig. 27
The display » Fig. 26 provides information of the petrol / diesel supply in the A Counter for the distance travelled since the last reset (trip)
container.
B Odometer 
The display only works if the ignition is switched on.

30 Using the system

Reset counter for distance travelled (trip)  Anti-lock braking system (ABS) 34
› Press button A » Fig. 28 on page 31.  Rear fog light 34
 Exhaust inspection system 34
Setting the clock  Glow plug system (diesel engine) 34
 Engine performance check (petrol engine) 35
Fig. 28  Safety systems 35
Button in the instrument cluster  Tyre pressure 35
 Brake linings 36
 Fuel reserve 36
  Lane following system (Lane Assist) 36
  Turn signal system 36
 Trailer turn signal lights 36
 Fog lights 36
 Read and observe on page 28 first.  Cruise control system 36
 Brake pedal (automatic transmission) 37
› Switch on the ignition.  Natural gas operation 37
› Press and hold the button A » Fig. 28 until the Time is shown in the display.  Main beam 37
› Release the button A and the system switches to the hour setting function.  Automatic transmission 37
› Press the button A again and set the hours.   Rear seat belt warning light 37
› Wait around 4 seconds - the system switches to the minutes setting.  Generator 37
› Press the button A again and set the minutes.  Coolant 37
› Wait around 4 seconds - the system switches to the initial setting.
 Engine oil pressure too low 38
The time can also be set in the Infotainment » Owner´s Manual Infotainment,  Engine oil level 38
chapter Device settings.  Lamp failure 38
 Diesel particulate filter (diesel engine) 38
Warning lights  Windscreen washer fluid level 39
 High beam assistant 39
 Introduction
  START-STOP system 39
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:  Display of a low temperature 39
 Handbrake 32  Water in the fuel filter (diesel engine) 39
 Brake system 32    Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) 40
 Seat belt warning light 32  Distance warning (Front Assist) 40
 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) 32  Advance warning/emergency brake (Front Assist) 40
  Power steering/steering lock (KESSY system) 33  OFF ROADmode 40
 Traction control (TCS) 33  Service 40
 Traction control system (TCS) off 33 The warning lights in the instrument cluster indicate certain functions or
 Stability Control (ESC) 34 faults. 

Instruments and warning lights 31

Some warning lights can be accompanied by acoustic signals and messages in  Brake system
the display of the instrument cluster.
After switching on the ignition, some warning lights light up briefly as a func-  Read and observe on page 32 first.
tion test.  illuminates – the brake fluid level in the braking system is too low.
If the tested systems are OK, the corresponding warning lights go out a few  Brake fluid: owner's manual!
seconds after switching on the ignition or after starting the engine.
 BRAKE FLUID PLEASE CHECK
Warning lights in the display
Depending on the importance the warning light  (danger) or  (warning) illu-
› Stop the vehicle, switch off the engine, and check the level of the brake fluid
» page 200.
minate along with some of the warning lights in the list with the warning
lights. WARNING
Depending on vehicle equipment, some warning lights may be displayed in col- ■ If warning light  illuminates simultaneously with warning light
our on the display. For example, the coolant warning light may be displayed as » page 34,  Anti-lock braking system (ABS), do not continue your
follows. journey! Seek help from a specialist garage.
■ A fault to the ABS system or the braking system can increase the vehi-
▶ - Segment display/monochromatic (“black and white”) MAXI DOT display cle's braking distance – risk of accident!
▶ - Coloured MAXI DOT display

WARNING  Seat belt warning light

■ Ignoring illuminated warning lights and related messages or instructions
in the display of the instrument cluster may lead to serious personal injury  Read and observe on page 32 first.
or damage to the vehicle.
 illuminates - the driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt.
■ If you have to stop for technical reasons, then park the vehicle at a safe
distance from the traffic, switch off the engine and activate the hazard At a speed of more than approximately 30 km/h the warning light  flashes
warning light system » page 73. Place the warning triangle at the prescri- and an audible warning sounds at a time.
bed distance. If the seat belt is not fastened by the driver or front passenger during the next
■ The engine compartment of your car is a hazardous area. The following
approx. 2 seconds, the warning signal is deactivated and the warning light 
warning instructions must be followed at all times when working in the en- lights up permanently.
gine compartment » page 194, Engine compartment.
 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
 Handbrake
 Read and observe on page 32 first.
 Read and observe on page 32 first.
 illuminates - the ACC delay is not sufficient.
 illuminates – the hand brake is applied.  Apply the brake!
An acoustic signal will sound if you drive the vehicle above 5 km/h while the
handbrake is still on.
› Apply the brake.
For more information about the ACC system » page 150.
 Release the handbrake!
 RELEASE HANDBRAKE

32 Using the system

   Power steering/steering lock (KESSY system) Seek help from a specialist garage.

 Read and observe on page 32 first.  Traction control (TCS)

Fault in the power steering  Read and observe on page 32 first.
 illuminates – this indicates a complete failure of the power steering and the
steering assist has failed (significantly higher steering forces). If your vehicle is equipped with the ESC system, the TCS is part of the ESC sys-
tem » page 136.
 illuminates – this indicates a partial failure of the power steering and the
steering forces can be greater.  flashes - the TCS is now being activated.

Seek help from a specialist garage. TCS fault

 Illumi-  Error: traction control
Steering lock defect (KESSY system)
nates  ASR ERROR
An audible signal sounds as a warning.
Seek help from a specialist garage.
 Steering column lock faulty. Stop!
 flashes If the warning light  comes on after starting the engine, the TCS may be
 STOP VEHICLE STEERING FAULTY
switched off for technical reasons.
Park the vehicle,  stop driving. After switching off the ignition, it is no longer ▶ Switch the ignition off and on again.
possible to lock the steering, to activate the electrical components (e.g. Info-
tainment ), to switch on the ignition again and to start the engine. Seek help If the warning light  does not illuminates after you switch the engine back
from a specialist garage. on, the TCS is fully functional again.

 Steering lock: Workshop! Disconnecting the vehicle battery

 flashes If the vehicle's battery has been disconnected and reconnected, the indicator
 STEERING WORKSHOP
light  comes on after switching on the ignition.
Seek help from a specialist garage.
The warning light should go out after driving a short distance.
Steering column lock not unlocked (System KESSY)
If, after a short drive, the indicator light does not go out, there is a system er-
 Move the steering wheel! ror.
 flashes
 MOVE STEERING WHEEL
Seek help from a specialist garage.
▶ Move the steering wheel slightly back and forth, thereby facilitating unlock-
ing the steering lock. For more information about the TCS system » page 136.

If the steering does also not unlock then, the help of a specialist garage is re-
 Traction control system (TCS) off
quired.
Disconnecting the vehicle battery  Read and observe on page 32 first.
If the vehicle's battery has been disconnected and reconnected, the warning  illuminates – the TCS system is disabled.
light  comes on after switching on the ignition.
 Traction control (ASR) deactivated.
The warning light should go out after driving a short distance.
 ASR OFF 
If, after the motor is restarted and a short drive, the indicator light does not go
out, there is a system error.

Instruments and warning lights 33

 Note Seek help from a specialist garage.
On vehicles without the ESC system, the warning light  does not illuminate WARNING
upon deactivation of the TCS system, but a message is only displayed on the
display of the instrument cluster.
■ If warning light  illuminates simultaneously with warning light
» page 32,  Brake system, do not continue your journey! Seek help
from a specialist garage.
 Stability Control (ESC) ■ A fault to the ABS system or the braking system can increase the vehi-
 Read and observe on page 32 first. cle's braking distance – risk of accident!

 flashes - the ESC is now being activated.

 Rear fog light
ESC fault
 Illumi-  Error: stabilization control (ESC)
 Read and observe on page 32 first.
nates  ESC ERROR  illuminates – the rear fog light is switched on.
Seek help from a specialist garage.
If the warning light  comes on after starting the engine, the ESC system may
 Exhaust inspection system
be switched off for technical reasons.  Read and observe on page 32 first.
▶ Switch the ignition off and on again.
 illuminates – there is a fault in the emission control system. The system
If the indicator light  does not illuminate after you switch the engine back
makes possible operation emergency mode - there may be a noticeable reduc-
on, the ESC is fully functional again.
tion in engine performance.
Disconnecting the vehicle battery Seek help from a specialist garage.
If the vehicle's battery has been disconnected and reconnected, the indicator
light  comes on after switching on the ignition.
 Glow plug system (diesel engine)
The warning light should go out after driving a short distance.
 Read and observe on page 32 first.
If, after a short drive, the indicator light does not go out, there is a system er-
ror.  flashes – there is a fault in the engine management system. The system
Seek help from a specialist garage. makes possible operation emergency mode - there may be a noticeable reduc-
tion in engine performance.
For more information about the ESC system » page 136.
There is a fault in the glow plug system if the warning light  does not come
on or illuminates continuously.
 Anti-lock braking system (ABS)
Seek help from a specialist garage.
 Read and observe on page 32 first.

 illuminates – there is an ABS fault.

 Error: ABS
 ABS ERROR
The vehicle will only be braked by the normal brake system without the ABS.

34 Using the system

  Engine performance check (petrol engine) The seat belt for the driver and front passenger needs to be replaced. Seek
help from a specialist garage.
 Read and observe on page 32 first.
WARNING
 illuminates – there is a fault in the engine management system. The system When a fault in the airbag system occurs, there is a risk of the system not
makes possible operation emergency mode - there may be a noticeable reduc- being triggered in the event of an accident. Therefore, this must be
tion in engine performance. checked immediately by a specialized garage.
Seek help from a specialist garage.
 Tyre pressure
 Safety systems
 Read and observe on page 32 first.
 Read and observe on page 32 first.
Change of tyre pressure values
System fault  illuminates – there was a pressure change in one of the tyres.
 illuminates - there is a fault in the airbag system.
An audible signal sounds as a warning.
 Error: airbag
 AIRBAG ERROR
› Immediately reduce speed and avoid sudden steering and braking manoeu-
vres.
Seek help from a specialist garage. › Stop the vehicle, turn the ignition off and check the tyres and their inflation
pressure » page 205.
The front passenger airbag has been disabled with the key switch
 Illuminates for around 4 seconds after the ignition has been switched on.
› Correct the tyre pressure if necessary or replace the affected wheel
» page 213 or use the repair kit » page 217.
  under the letters    in the middle of the dash panel illumi- › Store the tyre pressure values in the system » page 165.
nates after switching on the ignition » page 19.
System fault
One of the airbags or a belt tensioner has been disabled by the diagnostic  flashes for approximately 1 minute and remains lit – there may be a fault in
tool the tyre pressure monitoring system.
 illuminates for approximately 4 seconds after the ignition is switched on
and then flashes for approximately 12 seconds.
› Stop the vehicle, turn the ignition off and start the engine again.
If the warning light  flashes after starting the engine again, there is a system
 Airbag/ belt tensioner deactivated.
error.
 AIRBAG/ BELT TENSIONER OFF
Seek help from a specialist garage.
ProActive passenger protection
 illuminates and the following message is shown in the information cluster Disconnecting the vehicle battery
display. If the vehicle's battery has been disconnected and reconnected, the indicator
light  comes on after switching on the ignition.
 Proactive passenger protection not available.
The warning light should go out after driving a short distance.
 PROACTIVE PASSENGER PROTECT NOT AVAIL
If, after a short drive, the indicator light does not go out, there is a system er-
or
ror.
 Proactive passenger protection: funct. restricted.
Seek help from a specialist garage. 
 LIMITED PROACTIVE PASSENGER PROTECT

Instruments and warning lights 35

Other incidents More information about the Lane Assist System » page 160.
The illumination of the warning light  can have the following reasons.
▶ The vehicle is loaded on one side. Distribute loads as evenly as possible.   Turn signal system
▶ The wheels of one axle are loaded more heavily (e.g. when towing a trailer or
when driving uphill or downhill).  Read and observe on page 32 first.
▶ Snow chains are mounted.
▶ A wheel has been changed.  flashes – the left turn signal is turned on.
 flashes – the right turn signal is turned on.
CAUTION
If there is a fault in the turn signal system, the warning light flashes at twice
Under certain circumstances (e.g. sporty style of driving, wintry or unpaved
its normal rate. This does not apply when towing a trailer.
roads) the warning light  in the instrument cluster can be delayed or does
not light up at all. Switching off the hazard warning light system is switched on will cause all of
the turn signal lights as well as both warning lights to flash.
 Brake linings
 Trailer turn signal lights
 Read and observe on page 32 first.
 Read and observe on page 32 first.
 illuminates - the brake pads are worn.
 flashes – the trailer lights are switched on.
 Check brake pad!
 BRAKE PADS PLEASE CHECK If a trailer is hitched and the warning light  is not flashing, one of the trailer
turn signal lights has failed.
Seek help from a specialist garage.
An example message in the display of the instrument cluster
 Fuel reserve  Trailer: check left turn signal!
 TRAILER TURN SIG_ CHECK LEFT
 Read and observe on page 32 first.
Check the trailer bulbs.
 illuminates – the fuel level in the fuel tank is at the reserve level (approxi-
mately 6 litres).  Fog lights
 Please refuel. Range: ... km  Read and observe on page 32 first.
 PLEASE REFUEL RANGE … km
 illuminates – the fog lights are switched on.
An audible signal sounds as a warning.
Note  Cruise control system
The text in the display goes out after refuelling and driving a short distance.
 Read and observe on page 32 first.
  Lane following system (Lane Assist)  illuminates - the vehicle speed is limited by the speed regulator system
and/or the automatic distance control.
 Read and observe on page 32 first.

The warning lights   indicates the state of the Lane Assist system.

36 Using the system

  Brake pedal (automatic transmission)   Illumi-  Gearbox faulty. Workshop!
nates  GEARBOX FAULTY WORKSHOP
 Read and observe on page 32 first.   Illumi-  Error: gearbox. Reverse gear not available.
nates  GEARBOX ERROR REV_ GEAR NOT AVAIL
 illuminates – apply the brake.
  Illumi-  Error: gearbox
 Natural gas operation nates  GEARBOX ERROR
Seek help from a specialist garage.
 Read and observe on page 32 first.

 illuminates - the vehicle is running on natural gas.   Rear seat belt warning light
 Read and observe on page 32 first.
 Main beam
 illuminates – a rear seat belt is not fastened.
 Read and observe on page 32 first.
 illuminates – a rear seat belt is fastened.
 illuminates – the main beam or the headlight flasher is switched on.
When the seat belt is fastened/unfastened, the particular light lights up briefly
and indicates the current belt status!
 Automatic transmission
 Read and observe on page 32 first.  Generator
Gearbox overheated  Read and observe on page 32 first.
The warning light  is only shown in the MAXI DOTdisplay.
 illuminates – the battery is not being charged whilst the engine is running.
  Illumi-  Gearbox overheated. Stop! Log book!
Seek help from a specialist garage.
nates  STOP VEHICLE GEARBOX OVERHEAT
  Illumi-  Gearbox overheated. CAUTION
nates  GEARBOX OVERHEATED If in addition to the light  the light  lights up while driving,  stop driving -
▶
risk of engine damage! Switch off the engine and seek assistance from a spe-
do not continue to drive! Stop the vehicle and turn off the engine.
cialist garage.
You can continue your journey as soon as the warning light disappears.
If the warning light does not go out, do not continue driving. Seek help from a  Coolant
specialist garage.
 Read and observe on page 32 first.
Transmission problem
The warning light  is only shown in the MAXI DOTdisplay. Coolant level too low
  Illumi-  Check coolant! Log book!
nates  ENGINE COOLANT PLEASE CHECK
▶ Stopthe vehicle, switch off the engine, and check the coolant level
» page 199, Checking the coolant level. 

Instruments and warning lights 37

If the coolant level is within the specified range and the warning light  illumi- ▶ Stop the vehicle, switch off the engine, and check the engine oil level, top up
nated again after ignition on, then there may be a malfunction of the cooling if necessary.
fan.
The warning light will go out if the bonnet is left open for more than 30 sec-
▶ Switch off the ignition. onds. If no engine oil has been replenished, the warning light will come on
▶ Check the fuse for the radiator fan, replace if necessary. again after driving about 100 km.
If the coolant level and the fan fuse are OK and the warning light  illuminates Engine oil level too high
again after ignition on  do not continue to drive!   Illumi-  Reduce oil level!
Seek help from a specialist garage. nates  OIL LEVEL TOO HIGH
▶ Stop the vehicle, switch off the engine, and check the engine oil level.
Coolant temperature too high
  Illumi-  Engine overheat. Stop! Owner's Manual! In the event of a high oil level, seek assistance from a specialist garage.
nates  ENGINE OVERHEAT STOP
Fault on the engine oil level sensor
▶ Stop the vehicle and turn off the engine.   Illumi-  Oil sensor: workshop!
▶ Continue your journey only after the warning light  has disappeared.
nates  OIL SENSOR WORKSHOP

 Engine oil pressure too low Seek help from a specialist garage.

 Read and observe on page 32 first. CAUTION

If for some reason it is not possible to top up the engine oil under the current
  flashes – the engine oil pressure is too low. circumstances,  do not continue driving! Switch off the engine and seek as-
 Oil pressure: stop! Owner's Manual! sistance from a specialist garage.
 STOP VEHICLE OIL PRESSURE
 Lamp failure
› Stop the vehicle, switch off the engine, and check the engine oil level.
 Read and observe on page 32 first.
Even if the oil level is correct,  do not drive any further if the warning light is
flashing. Also do not leave the engine running at an idling speed.   illuminates – one of the lamps is defective. A message will appear con-
Seek help from a specialist garage. cerning the affected lamp.
An example message in the display of the instrument cluster
CAUTION
 Check right dipped headlight beam!
If for some reason it is not possible to top up the engine oil under the current
circumstances,  do not continue driving! Switch off the engine and seek as-  DIPPED HEADLIGHT CHECK RIGHT
sistance from a specialist garage.
 Diesel particulate filter (diesel engine)
 Engine oil level  Read and observe on page 32 first.
 Read and observe on page 32 first.
The diesel particulate filter separates the soot particles from the exhaust. The
Engine oil level too low soot particles collect in the diesel particulate filter where they are burnt on a
regular basis.
  Illumi-  Oil level: add oil!
nates  ADD OIL   illuminates – the filter is clogged with soot. 

38 Using the system

To clean the filter, and where traffic conditions permit » , drive as follows for › Fill up the windscreen washer fluid.
at least 15 minutes or until the indicator light  goes out.
 Gear 4 or gear 5 engaged (automatic gearbox: Position D/S).  High beam assistant
 Vehicle speed at least 70 km/h.
 Read and observe on page 32 first.
 Engine speed between 1800-2500 rpm.
If the filter is properly cleaned, the warning light  extinguishes.  illuminates – the high beam assistant is activated » page 71, High-beam
assistant (Light Assist).
If the filter is not properly cleaned, the warning light  does not go out and
the warning light  begins to flash.   START-STOP system
 Particulate filter: owner's manual!
 Read and observe on page 32 first.
 PARTICLE FILTER OWNER MANUAL
Seek help from a specialist garage. The warning lights   indicates the state of the START STOP system
» page 124, START-STOPsystem.
WARNING
■ Always adjust the speed and driving style to the actual weather, road, ter-  Display of a low temperature
rain and traffic conditions.
■ The diesel particulate filter reaches very high temperatures - there is a  Read and observe on page 32 first.
fire hazard and serious injury could be caused. Therefore, never stop the  illuminates – the outside temperature is below +4 °C.
vehicle at places where the underside of your vehicle can come into contact
with flammable materials such as dry grass, undergrowth, leaves, spilled WARNING
fuel or such like. Even at temperatures of around +4 °C, black ice may still be on the road
surface! You should therefore not only rely on the outside temperature dis-
CAUTION play for accurate information as to whether there is ice on the road.
■ As long as the warning light  illuminates, one must take into account an
increased fuel consumption and a power reduction of the engine.
 Water in the fuel filter (diesel engine)
■ Using diesel fuel with an increased sulphur content can considerably reduce
the life of the diesel particle filter. A ŠKODA partner will be able to tell you  Read and observe on page 32 first.
which countries use diesel fuel with a high sulphur content.
The fuel filter with water separator, filters out dirt and water from the fuel.
Note
If too much water is present in the separator, the following information ap-
We encourage you to avoid constant short journeys. This will improve the com- pears on the instrument cluster display.
bustion process of the soot particles in the diesel particulate filter.
The warning light  is only shown in the MAXI DOTdisplay.
 Windscreen washer fluid level   Illumi-  Water in fuel filter. Owner's Manual!
 Read and observe on page 32 first. nates  WATER IN FUEL FILTER
Seek help from a specialist garage.
  illuminates – the windscreen washer fluid level is too low.
 Add washer fluid!
 WASHER FLUID PLEASE TOP UP

Instruments and warning lights 39

    Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Information system
 Read and observe on page 32 first.
Driver information system
Conditions of the ACC system
The warning lights    indicate the condition of the ACC system  Introduction
» page 150. This chapter contains information on the following subjects:

 Distance warning (Front Assist) Door, luggage compartment or bonnet warning 40

Auto-check control 40
 Read and observe on page 32 first. Overspeed warning at 120 km/h 41
Gear recommendation 41
 illuminates – the safe distance to the vehicle in front is below the mini-
mum. Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the information system vie the display
of the instrument cluster provides the following information.
Information on the Front Assist system» page 155.
▶ Driving data (multifunction display) » page 41.
▶ Data relating to the Maxi DOT display » page 45.
 Advance warning/emergency brake (Front Assist)
▶ Service interval display » page 49.
 Read and observe on page 32 first. ▶ Selector lever positions for an automatic gearbox » page 129.
▶ Information and alerts in the Assist systems » page 135.
 illuminates – the system has recognized the risk of a collision or automati-
cally triggered an emergency braking manoeuvre. WARNING
Information on the Front Assist system» page 155. Concentrate fully at all times on your driving! As the driver, you are fully re-
sponsible for the operation of your vehicle.
 OFF ROADmode
 Read and observe on page 32 first.
Door, luggage compartment or bonnet warning
 Read and observe on page 40 first.
 illuminates – the conditions for the engagement of OFF ROADmode are met.
 flashes – the hill descent assistant is engaged at the moment. If at least one door is open, or the boot or bonnet is open, the display indicates
the relevant open door or boot/bonnet.
For more information about OFF ROAD mode » page 138, OFF ROAD-mode.
An acoustic signal will also sound if you drive the vehicle above 6 km/h when a
door is open.
 Service
 Read and observe on page 32 first. Auto-check control
 illuminates – note regarding a due service appointment » page 49, Service  Read and observe on page 40 first.
interval display.
Certain functions and conditions of individual vehicle systems are checked
continuously when the ignition is switched on. 

40 Using the system

As long as the faults are not rectified the messages are always shown. After For vehicles with automatic transmission the recommended gear will be
they are displayed for the first time, the warning lights  (danger) or  (warn- shown provided the mode for manual switching (Tiptronic) is selected.
ing) continue to be indicated without information for the driver.
WARNING
Overspeed warning at 120 km/h The driver is always responsible for selecting the correct gear in different
driving situations, such as overtaking.
 Read and observe on page 40 first.

This function only applies to certain countries. Driving data (Multifunction display)
An audible warning signal will sound when the vehicle speed exceeds 120
km/h. The audible warning signal is switched off when the vehicle speed falls  Introduction
below 120 km/h. This chapter contains information on the following subjects:

Gear recommendation Operation 42

Information overview 42
Warning when exceeding the set speed 43
Fig. 29
Information on the selected Memory 44
gear / Gear recommendation The driving data display is only possible with the ignition switched on.
After the ignition is switched on, the function that was last selected before
switching off the ignition is displayed.
For vehicles with a MAXI DOT display, the menu item Driving data must be selec-
ted and confirmed in the main menu » page 44.
The setting of the units and the switching on / off the display of some infor-
 Read and observe on page 40 first. mation is available possible in the Infotainment » Owner´s Manual Infotain-
ment, chapter CAR - Vehicle Settings.
A suitable gear is engaged, and if necessary a recommendation to shift to high
or lower gear is displayed. WARNING
A suitably engaged gear helps to reduce the fuel consumption and assist the Concentrate fully at all times on your driving! As the driver, you are fully re-
service life and reliability of the engine. sponsible for the operation of your vehicle.
Display » Fig. 29
 Optimal gear engaged
 Recommended gear
Recommended gear
Besides showing the engaged gear, the arrow icon  and the recommended
gear are displayed.
For instance, if    appears in this display, this means it is recommended that
you shift from 3rd into 4th gear.

Information system 41
Operation If you drive more efficiently this value can increase.
With G-TEC vehicles, the following details are displayed.
▶ Total range
▶ Range with natural gas
▶ Range with gasoline
Average fuel consumption
The indication is calculated continuously since the last deletion of the memory.
After erasing the memory, no data will appear for the first 100 m driven.
With G-TEC vehicles, the average consumption of fuel currently being used is
displayed.
Fig. 30 Buttons/dial: on the control lever/multifunction steering wheel Current fuel consumption
You can use this information to adapt your driving style to the desired fuel
 Read and observe on page 41 first.
consumption.
The selection as well as the settings of the data values can be operated with When the vehicle is stationary or slowly moving the fuel consumption is dis-
the buttons on the operating lever as well as on the multi-function steering played in l/h (on models for some countries the following appears --,- km/l).
wheel » Fig. 30. With G-TEC-vehicles running on natural gas fuel consumption is displayed
kg/h.
Description of the operation
Button / With G-TEC vehicles, the current consumption of fuel currently being used is
Action Operation displayed.
dial
Briefly press at the top Oil temperature
A Select data / set data values If the engine oil temperature is in the range 80-110 °C, the engine operating
or bottom
temperature is reached.
View information / confirm specifica-
B Press briefly
tion If the oil temperature is lower than 80 °C or above 110 °C, avoid high engine
Turn upwards or down- revs, full throttle and high engine loads.
Select data / set data values
wards If the oil temperature is lower than 50 °C or if a fault in the system for check-
C
View information / confirm specifica- ing the oil temperature is present,  are displayed instead of the oil tempera-
Press briefly
tion ture.
Warning against excessive speeds
Information overview Set the speed limit, for example, for the maximum permissible speed in town
 Read and observe on page 41 first. » page 43.
Traffic sign recognition
Overview of driving data (depending on the vehicle equipment). The following road sign will be displayed.
Range ▶ Speed limits.
The detail provides information about the distance in km, that can be travelled ▶ Overtaking prohibited.
with the current tank and with the same driving style. Further information » page 162, Traffic sign recognition. 

42 Using the system

Current driving speed Warning when exceeding the set speed
The display is identical to the display on the speedometer.
Average speed
 Read and observe on page 41 first.
The indication is calculated continuously since the last deletion of the memory. The system offers the possibility to set a speed limit beyond which an audible
After erasing the memory, no data will appear for the first 300 m driven. alarm will sound and the following warning message appears.

Distance travelled  Speed ... exceeded.

The distance travelled since the memory was last erased is displayed.  SPEED TOO HIGH
The maximum distance indicated is 9999 km. The indicator is automatically set Adjust the speed limit while the vehicle is stationary
back to zero if this period is exceeded. › Select the menu item Warning at at () or  () and confirm.
Driving time
› Set the desired speed limit.
The time travelled since the memory was last erased is displayed.
› Confirm the set value, or wait several seconds; your settings will be saved
automatically.
The maximum distance indicated is 99 hours and 59 minutes. The indicator is
The speed limit can be set in 5 km/h intervals.
automatically set back to zero if this period is exceeded.
Adjusting the speed limit while the vehicle is moving
Convenience consumers
There, the total consumption of all consumer comfort in l / h is displayed.
› Select the menu item Warning at at () or  () and confirm.
› Drive at the desired speed.
Along with the consumption data, a list of the three consumers with the larg- › Confirm the current speed as the speed limit.
est share of fuel consumption (e.g. air conditioning and similar devices) is dis-
The set speed limit can be manually adjusted later if needed.
played.
Deactivate speed limit
Refuelling amount1)
After the consumption of about 10 litres of fuel from the fully refuelled tank,
› Select the menu item Warning at at () or  () and confirm.
an amount of fuel is displayed in l. This amount can now be safely refilled.
› Confirm the stored value of the speed limits.
The speed limit will be disabled.
Natural gas quality
The details of the quality of natural gas are displayed as a percentage of be- The speed limit set mode is stored even after the ignition is switched off and
tween 70% to 100%. on. After a gap between driving exceeding 2 hours, the pre-set speed limit is
deactivated.
The higher the value of natural gas, the lower is the consumption.
Coolant temperature
If the coolant temperature is in the range 80-110 °C, the engine operating tem-
perature is reached.
If the temperature lies below 80 °C or above 110 °C, avoid high engine revs, full
throttle and high engine loads.

1) Only valid for some countries.

Information system 43
Memory Select memory
▶ Select the driving data information desired.
▶ Confirm details again to select the desired memory.
Fig. 31
Memory display: MAXI DOT dis- Resetting
play ()/segment display () ▶ Select the driving data information desired.
▶ Select the desired memory.
▶ Reset the selected memory with a long acknowledgement (holding pressed).

Note
Disconnecting the vehicle battery will delete all memory data.

 Read and observe on page 41 first. MAXI DOT display

Following driving data is stored in three locations.  Introduction

▶ Average fuel consumption. This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
▶ Distance driven.
▶ Average speed. Main menu 45
▶ Driving time. Operation using the operating lever 45
Operation using the multifunction steering wheel 46
Display of the selected memory in the display at position A » Fig. 31 .
Menu itemNavigation 46
Since start (  ) Or “1” (  ) Menu itemAudio 47
The memory collates the driving information from the moment the ignition is Menu itemTelephone 47
switched on until it is switched off. Menu itemAssist systems 48
New data will also flow into the calculation of the current driving information if Menu item Lap timer (Stop watch) 48
the trip is continued within 2 hours after switching off the ignition. Compass point display 49
If the trip is interrupted for more than 2 hours, the memory is automatically Eco-tips 49
erased. The MAXI DOT display (hereinafter referred to as display) is a user interface
Long-term (  ) And “2” (  ) which, depending on the equipment configuration, delivers information about
The memory gathers driving information from any number of individual jour- the Infotainment, the multifunction display, the assistance systems, etc.
neys up to a total of 99 hours and 59 minutes driving or 9999 kilometres driv-
WARNING
en.
Concentrate fully at all times on your driving! As the driver, you are fully re-
The indicator is automatically set back to zero if one of the indicated values is sponsible for the operation of your vehicle.
exceeded.
Since refuel (  ) or “3” (  )
The memory gathers driving information since the last refuelling.
The memory is erased automatically the next time you fill up.

44 Using the system

Main menu Operation using the operating lever
 Read and observe on page 44 first.
Fig. 32
Call up the main menu Buttons: on the operating lever
› Press and hold the button A on the operating lever » Fig. 32 on page 45.
or
› Press and hold the dial G on the multifunction steering wheel » Fig. 33 on
page 46.
Main menu items (depending on vehicle equipment)
■ Driving data » page 41
■ Assist systems » page 48  Read and observe on page 44 first.
■ Navigation » page 46
■ Audio » page 47 Description of the operation by means of the buttons on the operating lever
■ Telephone » page 47; Button Action Operation
■ Vehicle » page 40, Auto-check control
Briefly press at the top
■ Lap timer » page 48, Menu item Lap timer (Stop watch) Switch between menu items / menus
or bottom
A
The menus can be opened using the buttons on the control lever » Fig. 32 on Press top
page 45 or on the multi-function steering wheel » Fig. 33 on page 46. Display main menu
or bottom
Note B Press briefly Confirm menu item / menu
■ If warning messages are displayed, these messages must first be confirmed
to access the main menu.
■ For vehicles with Infotainment, the language of the MAXI DOT display can be
set in the Infotainment » Owner´s Manual Infotainment, chapter Device set-
tings (SETUP key) .
■ For vehicles without infotainment, the language of the MAXI DOT displays
can only be adjusted by a specialist garage.

Information system 45
Operation using the multifunction steering wheel Button /
Action Operation
dial
Take the call / end the call / Menu Tel-
Press briefly ephone display / display call list / call
F
the selected contact
Press and hold button Reject call / Redial last call
Confirm menu item / menu / Repeat
Press briefly the last navigation announcement or
clarify / interrupt traffic report
Previous menu item / trackb) / Show
available list (e.g. list of available
Fig. 33 Buttons/dials: on the multifunction steering wheel G Turn up
channels, list of the last destinations,
call list)
 Read and observe on page 44 first.
Next menu item / track / View availa-
Description of the operation by means of the buttons/dials on the multi- Turn down ble list (e.g. List of available channels,
function steering wheel list the last destinations, call list)
Button / Press briefly Return to a previous level in the menu
Action Operation H
dial Press and hold button Display main menu
Voice control on/off / Sound off /on a) » Infotainment Owner's Manual
b)
Press briefly (applies to vehicles without voice con- Valid for pressing within about 4 s from the beginning of the given track. Pressing after about 4 seconds
from the beginning of the track, starts the playback from the beginning of the track.
trol)
A
Activate the voice control of Note
Press and hold button theSmartLinka) function (if supported Depending on equipment not all functions may be available. The system indi-
by the connected device) cates this through a text message on the display.
Switch sound on/off / Switch track
Press briefly
playback on/off Menu itemNavigation
B
Turn up Increase volume
 Read and observe on page 44 first.
Turn down Decrease volume
To the next radio channel or change Select menu item Navigation
C
Press briefly
to the playback track › Select and confirm Navigation in the main menu.
Press and hold button Fast forward within the track Route guidance takes place
to the previous radio channel or Graphical driving recommendations and other route and destination informa-
Press briefly tion are displayed after selection.
D change to the playback trackb)
Press and hold button Fast reverse within the track No route guidance is carried out
Select menu item Assist systems A compass/vehicle symbol is shown to display the current vehicle position in
E Press briefly relation to the compass after selection. 
» page 48

46 Using the system

Then turn dial G » Fig. 33 on page 46 on the multifunction steering wheel to The system displays a call list.
display the Last destinations menu.
If the call list includes no entries, the following message appears No entries avail-
The menu shows the Home address menu item and a list of recent destinations. able.
When you select one of the menu items, the destination name and the follow- The following symbols are displayed next to each entry in the call list.
ing items are displayed.  Incoming call
■ OK - Start navigation
 Outgoing call
■ Cancel - Return to the Navigation menu – the compass/vehicle symbol will be
 Missed call
displayed
Outgoing call
If the home address is not defined when the menu item Home address is selec-
■  Cancel - Ends the call
ted, the following message appears: Please enter the home address on the infotain-
ment system. Incoming call
■  Answer – Accept incoming call
Menu itemAudio ■  Reject – Reject incoming call
■  Ignore - Mute the ringer (this option is only available if there is no other call)
 Read and observe on page 44 first.
Ongoing conversation or conference call
Select menu item Audio ■ Hang up - End a call
› Select and confirm Audio in the main menu. ■ Hold – Hold a call
The following information can be displayed in the display.
■ Continue – Continue held call
■ Radio
■ Mic. off – Microphone off
■ Currently played station (name/frequency) ■ Mic. on – Microphone on
■ The selected frequency range (e.g. FM) optionally with the number of the ■ Private – Switch the call to the telephone
station button (e.g. FM3), if the station is stored in the memory list
■Hands-free – Toggles the call to the device
■ List of available station (if more than 5 stations can be received) Ongoing and held call
■ TP traffic announcements. ■  Hang up – End an ongoing call
■ Media ■  Call wait. – Switch to a held call
■ Name of the track being played, if necessary, further information regarding ■  Conference – Make a conference call1)
title (e.g. artist, album name), if this information is stored as a so called ID3 ■  Mic. off – Microphone off
tag on the audio source. ■  Mic. on – Microphone on
■  Private – Switch ongoing call to the telephone
Menu itemTelephone ■ Hands-free – Switch ongoing call to the device

 Read and observe on page 44 first. Symbols in the display

 Charge status of the telephone battery1)
Select menu item Telephone
 Signal strength1)
› Select and confirm Telephone in the main menu.  A telephone is connected to the unit
› Turn the dial G » Fig. 33 on page 46.


1) This function is only supported by some mobile phones.

Information system 47
 Missed calls (if there are several missed calls, the number of calls is shown During timing, information about the fastest and the last lap time are also
next to the symbol) shown in the display.
 Switch-off microphone Measure split time
▶ During the timing, select the menu item Split time. The split time data is dis-
Menu itemAssist systems played for about 5 seconds in the display.
 Read and observe on page 44 first. The split time can be measured repeatedly during a round.

Select menu item Assist systems Stop measurement

› Select and confirm Assist systems in the main menu. ▶ During the timing, press the menu item Stop.

or The time measurement is stopped, the following functions are now available.
■ Continue - Continue measurement of the current lap time
› Press the button on the  multi-function steering wheel . ■ New lap - Start measurement of the next lap time.
In the menu item Assist systems, the Front Assist and Lane Departure Warning ■ Abort lap - Cancel the timer (the aborted lap time is not stored)
(Lane Assist) systems can be enabled/disabled. ■ Hang up - End timing (the aborted lap time is stored)

Evaluate recorded times

Menu item Lap timer (Stop watch) ▶ Select the menu item Lap timer - Statistics.

 Read and observe on page 44 first. The following information is displayed.

▶ Fastest: - The fastest lap
Select menu item Lap timer ▶ Slowest: - The slowest lap
› Select and confirm Lap timer in the main menu. ▶ Average: - The average lap time
The Lap timer function offers the possibility of calculating the lap time, for ex- ▶ Overall time: - The total of all the lap times
ample when driving on a race course. The measured time is shown in the dis- Reset measured times
play. ▶ Select the menu item Lap timer - Statistics - Reset.
The calculated times are displayed in minutes, seconds and tenths of seconds.
WARNING
The following functions are available. ■ Concentrate fully at all times on your driving! As the driver, you are fully
■ Start - start the timing manually or continue the interrupted measurement
responsible for the operation of your vehicle.
■ Since start - Start the timer automatically upon start-up
■ Only use the Lap timer when you are in any traffic situation where you have
■ Statistics - Evaluate and reset the measured times
full control over the vehicle.
Time measurement
Manually start the measurement Note
▶ Select the menu item Lap timer - Start. ■ The system allows the measurement of up to 11 lap times.
Start the measurement automatically
■ Individual lap times are no longer measured after 99 hours, 59 minutes and
▶ Select the menu item Lap timer - Since start. Timing will begin automatically 59 seconds. After this time has been reached, a new lap time is automatically
when starting up. measured.
■ The measured times cannot be reset individually.
Start timing of next round ■ If the measured times are not reset, then these are stored even after turning
▶ Select the menu item New lap during timing. off the ignition.

48 Using the system

Compass point display Service interval display

Fig. 34  Introduction
Compass display This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Displaying the distance and days until the next service interval 49
Service messages 50
Resetting the service interval display 50
The service interval display shows the time and mileage to the next service
event.
The information regarding the service intervals can be found in the service
 Read and observe on page 44 first.
schedule.
Applies to vehicles with factory-installed navigation system.
Displaying the distance and days until the next service interval
In the display when the ignition is on, an arrow symbol as well as an abbrevia-
tion for the corresponding direction (in relation to the current direction of trav-
el) are displayed » Fig. 34. Fig. 35
Button in the instrument cluster
Note
The direction indicator can be displayed at the top or bottom of the screen dis-
played in response to further information.

Eco-tips
 Read and observe on page 44 first.

To minimise fuel consumption, fuel economy tips can appear in the display. › Switch on the ignition.
› Press and hold the button A » Fig. 35 until the Service is shown in the display.
Eco tips are indicated next to the letters ECO-TIP. › Release the button A .
For instance, if the air-conditioning is on and a window is open, the following In the display the symbol  appears for 4 seconds and the following message
message appears ECO TIP Air conditioning switched on: close windows. for the kilometre or days to the next service appointment.
Enable/disable » Owner´s Manual Infotainment, chapter CAR - vehicle set-  Oil service … / … Inspection … / …
tings.  OIL SERV_ IN … OR … INSPECT_ IN … OR …
The details regarding the remaining kilometres and days to wait until the next
scheduled service can also be displayed in the Infotainment » Owner´s Manual
Infotainment, chapter CAR - vehicle settings.

Information system 49
Service messages SmartGate
Messages before reaching the scheduled service date  Introduction
Before the next service date has been reached, after switching on the ignition,
the symbol  as well as a message about the mileage or days until the next
Fig. 36
service event appears in the display.
ŠKODA websites
Messages upon reaching scheduled service date
Once the service interval is reached, the icon  appears in the display after the
ignition is switched on, as well as the following message, for example.
 Oil service now!
 OIL SERVICE NOW
or
 Inspection now! This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
 INSPECTION NOW
Connection to SmartGate using Wi-Fi 51
or Connection to SmartGate using Wi-Fi Direct 51
 Oil service and inspection now! SmartGate web interface 52
 OIL SERVICE + INSP_ NOW Password/PIN code change 52
SmartGate is a system that transmits certain driving data (such as fuel con-
Resetting the service interval display sumption, speed or similar) via Wi-Fi and Wi-Fi Direct.
We recommend that the display reset is completed by a specialist garage. The ŠKODA compatible communications device (e.g. phone, tablet, notebook)
offer the possibility to further transmit the received data.
We recommend that you do not reset the service interval display yourself. In-
correctly setting the service interval display could cause problems to the vehi- More information on available applications, a list of compatible communication
cle. devices and on SmartGate can be found on the ŠKODA website » Fig. 36.
Variable service interval http://www.skoda-auto.com
For vehicles with variable service intervals, after resetting the oil change serv-
WARNING
ice display in a specialist garage, the values of the new service interval are dis-
played, which are based on the previous operating conditions of the vehicle. ■ The general binding country-specific regulations for operating communi-
cation devices in the vehicle must be observed.
These values are then continuously matched according to the actual operating ■ Never leave a communication device in the deployment area of an airbag,
conditions of the vehicle. on a seat, on the dash panel or any another area, from which it can be
thrown during a sudden braking manoeuvre, an accident or a collision - risk
of injury!
■ Never connect or disconnect a communication device while driving - risk
of accident! 

50 Using the system

 CAUTION With SmartGate, a maximum of four communication devices can be connected
■ To increase the access security to the transmitted vehicle data, once the simultaneously using Wi-Fi. In these communication devices, up to four ŠKODA
ŠKODA application has been started, you are requested to change the pass- applications can be started simultaneously.
word/PIN code if the default password/PIN code has not yet been changed Disconnection
» page 52, Password/PIN code change. It is not possible to start the ŠKODA The connection can be switched off in one of the following ways.
application without changing it.
■ ŠKODA accepts no responsibility for any problems caused by incompatibility › Switch off the ignition for longer than 5 seconds (for vehicles with a starter
or improper functioning of the communication devices. button, switch off the engine and open the driver's door).
› End the connection in the SmartGate application.
Note › Switch off the Wi-Fi on the connected communication device.
The ŠKODA applications, support communications devices with the Android Automatic connection
operating system version 4.x.x and later and iOS 7.x.x and higher. If the communication device once had a connection with SmartGate, then the
connection is automatically restored under the following conditions.
Connection to SmartGate using Wi-Fi
 The ignition is switched on.
 Read and observe and on page 50 first.  The Wi-Fi on the communication device to be connected is switched on.
 The communication device to be connected stores the password required
Connecting to an Android communication device
for the connection check.
› Switch on the ignition.
› Switch on the Wi-Fi on the communication device to be connected.
› Start the SmartGate application using the communication device to be con- Connection to SmartGate using Wi-Fi Direct
nected.  Read and observe and on page 50 first.
› Then follow the instructions in the manual, which are included in the
SmartGate application. This type of connection is intended for communication devices running the
With SmartGate, a maximum of four communication devices can be connected Android operating system.
simultaneously using Wi-Fi, with as many launched ŠKODA applications as re- Connection set-up
quired. › Switch on the ignition.
Connecting to an iOS communication device › Start the SmartGate application using the communication device to be con-
› Switch on the ignition. nected.
› Switch on the Wi-Fi on the communication device to be connected. › Then follow the instructions in the manual, which are included in the
› Allow the communication device to be connected to search for available Wi- SmartGate application.
Fi networks (see the Owner's Manual for the communication device to be With SmartGate, a maximum of two communication devices can be connected
connected). simultaneously using Wi-Fi Direct, with as many launched ŠKODA applications
› In the menu of the detected networks select “SmartGate_...”1) or “DIRECT as required.
SmartGate_...”1).
If you want to connect to SmartGate in another vehicle, you must first end the
› Enter the password » page 52. existing connection to the SmartGate application and then re-establish the
connection. 

1) The last 6 characters of the VIN vehicle identification number of your vehicle are displayed at position ....

Information system 51
Disconnection Changing the password for the Wi-Fi connection
The connection can be switched off in one of the following ways. › Open the SmartGate web interface.
› Switch off the ignition for longer than 5 seconds (for vehicles with a starter › In the “WPA / WPA2 key:” menu item, enter the new password (8 to 63 al-
phanumeric characters and special characters, small and capital letters).
button, switch off the engine and open the driver's door).
› End the connection in the SmartGate application. › Confirm the password change by tapping on the “Save” interface.
› Switch off the Wi-Fi on the connected communication device. › Restart SmartGate by tapping on the “Reboot” interface.
1)

Changing the PIN code for the Wi-Fi Direct connection

Automatic connection
If the communication device once had a connection with SmartGate, then the › Open the SmartGate web interface.
connection is automatically restored after the ignition is started. › In the “WiFi Direct PIN:” menu item, enter the new PIN code (6 digits).
› Confirm the PIN code change by tapping on the “Save” interface.
SmartGate web interface
› Restart SmartGate by tapping on the “Reboot” interface.
1)

Note
 Read and observe and on page 50 first.
If you have forgotten your password for the connection to SmartGate,
SmartGate parameters can be set in the SmartGate web interface. SmartGate must be reset to factory settings in a specialised workshop.

The following address must be entered via Wi-Fi in the web browser of the
connected communication device.
HTTP://192.168.123.1
The setting changes are only effective after pressing the “Save” button and
then the “Reboot” button.

Password/PIN code change

 Read and observe and on page 50 first.

The password for the Wi-Fi connection preset by the factory is the complete
vehicle identification number (upper case); the PIN code for the Wi-Fi Direct
connection preset by the factory is the last 6 digits of the vehicle identification
number.
After changing the password/PIN, the connection to SmartGate must be re-es-
tablished on the communication device to be connected using the new pass-
word or new PIN code.
If the password/PIN code is still set to the preset factory password/PIN code,
you are requested to change the password/PIN code after starting the ŠKODA
application. Without changing the password/PIN code, you are unable to use
the application.

1) If the “Reboot” interface is not displayed, you must manually restore the web browser display.

52 Using the system

 ▶ The doors, the boot lid and the fuel filler flap are locked.
Unlocking and opening ▶ The interior lamp goes out.
▶ The SafeLock system is switched on.
Unlocking and locking ▶ The warning light in the driver door begins flashing.
▶ The exterior mirrors are folded back into the park position.
 Introduction ▶ The anti-theft alarm system is activated.
This chapter contains information on the following subjects: If the doors or the luggage compartment lid remain open after the vehicle has
Locking/unlocking using the key via the lock cylinder 54 been locked, the turn signal lights do not flash until they have been closed.
Unlocking/locking with the remote control key 54 Protection against unwanted vehicle unlocking
Unlocking / locking - KESSY 55 If the vehicle is unlocked and a door or the boot lid not opened within the next
Locking and unlocking the vehicle with the central locking button 55 45 seconds, the vehicle will lock again automatically and the safe securing sys-
Safe securing system 56 tem or anti-theft alarm system will be switched back on.
Individual settings 56
WARNING
Opening/closing a door 57
Child safety lock 57
■ Never leave the key in the vehicle when you exit the vehicle. Unauthor-
ized persons, such as children, for example, could lock the car, turn on the
Malfunctions 57
ignition or start the engine - there is a danger of injury and accidents!
Your car is equipped with a central locking system. ■ When leaving the vehicle, never leave persons who are not completely in-
dependent, such as children, unattended in the vehicle. These individuals
The central locking system allows you to lock and unlock all doors, the fuel fill-
might not be able to leave the vehicle on their own or to help themselves.
er flap and the boot lid at the same time. The functions of the central locking
Can be fatal at very high or very low temperatures!
system can be individually adjusted » page 56.
After unlocking, depending on vehicle equipment and setting the following is CAUTION
valid for the central locking. ■ Each key contains electronic components; therefore it must be protected
▶ The turn signal lights flash twice as confirmation that the vehicle has been
against moisture and severe shocks.
unlocked. ■ Keep the groove of the keys absolutely clean. Impurities (textile fibres, dust,
▶ An double audible signal sounds additionally on vehicles which are fitted
etc.) have a negative effect on the functionality of the locking cylinder and ig-
with the anti-theft alarm system. nition lock.
▶ The doors, the boot lid and the fuel filler flap are unlocked.
■ If the driver's door has been opened, the vehicle cannot be locked.
▶ The interior lamp illuminates.
▶ The SafeLock system is switched off.
▶ The indicator light in the driver door stops flashing.
▶ The exterior mirrors are set into the driving position.
▶ The anti-theft alarm system is deactivated.

After locking, depending on vehicle equipment and setting the following is

valid for the central locking.
▶ The turn signal lights flash once as confirmation that the vehicle has been
locked.
▶ An audible signal sounds additionally on vehicles which are fitted with the
anti-theft alarm system.

Unlocking and opening 53

Locking/unlocking using the key via the lock cylinder  Depending on equipment fitted:
▶ Boot lid unlock/unlatch (vehicles fitted with manual operation)
▶ Luggage compartment door open/close/movement of the luggage com-
Fig. 37 partment door stop (vehicles with electric operation)
Left side of the vehicle: Turning
A Button for folding the key in/out
the key for unlocking and locking
the vehicle B Warning light for the battery condition
If the red warning light does not flash when you press a button on the key,
the battery is discharged.
Boot lid unlock/unlatch for vehicles fitted with manual operation
By pressing briefly symbol key  the boot lid unlocks.
Press and hold the symbol key  to release the lid (partially opened).
 Read and observe and on page 53 first.
If the lid is unlocked or released with the key symbol  on the key, then the
The key allows you to unlock or lock the vehicle via the lock cylinder in the lid is automatically locked after closing. You can set a lock delay » page 59.
driver's door » .
CAUTION
Unlocking/locking the vehicle with the key » Fig. 37
■ The operation of the remote control may temporarily be affected by signal in-
 Unlocking the vehicle
terference from transmitters close to the car and which operate in the same
 Locking the vehicle frequency range.
■ The operating range of the remote control key is approx. 30 m. But this range
CAUTION
of the remote control can be reduced if the batteries are weak.
To unlock or lock the vehicle with the remote control key via the lock cylinder, ■ The battery must be replaced if the central locking does react to the remote
first remove the cap of the lock cylinder » page 224.
control at less than around 3 metres away » page 223.

Unlocking/locking with the remote control key Note

The remote control will operate only when visual contact with the vehicle.
Fig. 38
Remote control key

 Read and observe and on page 53 first.

Function and description of the key » Fig. 38

 Unlocking the vehicle
 Locking the vehicle

54 Using the system

Unlocking / locking - KESSY If the boot lid is closed after locking the vehicle and the key with which the
vehicle was locked remains in the luggage compartment, the lid is unlocked
(partially opened). The turn-signal lights flash four times as an indication that
the boot lid has been unlocked again. The boot lid remains released(partially
opened).
The following message is shown in the information cluster display.
 Key in vehicle.
 KEY IN VEHICLE

CAUTION
■ Some types of gloves can affect the unlocking or locking device in the door
handle.
Fig. 39 The front door handle
■ There is no automatic locking after leaving the car.

 Read and observe and on page 53 first.

Locking and unlocking the vehicle with the central locking button
The KESSY system (Keyless Entry Start Exit System) enables unlocking and
locking of the vehicle without actively using the remote control key » Fig. 39. Fig. 40
The sensors for unlocking or locking are located in the handle of the front Central locking button
door.
 Unlocking
 Locking
When unlocking or locking the vehicle, the key must be at a maximum distance
of approximately 1.5 m from the front door handle.
Locking
On vehicles fitted with automatic gearbox, the selector lever must be moved  Read and observe and on page 53 first.
into the position P before unlocking.
When the vehicle has not been locked from outside and no door is open, the
The vehicle cannot be locked from the outside if the ignition has not been button  » Fig. 40 can be used to unlock or lock the vehicle.
turned off.
Locking is shown by the illuminated symbol .
After locking the car, it is not possible to unlock within the next 2 seconds by
The central locking system also operates if the ignition is switched off.
touching the door handle. This can be used to check whether the vehicle is
locked. The following applies after locking.
▶ Opening the doors and the boot lid from the outside is not possible.
Protection against inadvertently locking the key in the vehicle ▶ The doors can be unlocked and opened from the inside by a single pull on the
If one of the doors is closed after locking the vehicle and the key with which
opening lever of the respective door. 
the vehicle was locked remains in the passenger compartment, the vehicle is
automatically unlocked. After unlocking the vehicle again, the turn-signal
lights flash four times. If no door is opened within 45 seconds, the vehicle is
automatically locked again.

Unlocking and opening 55

 WARNING Individual settings
Doors locked from the inside make it difficult for rescuers to get into the
vehicle in an emergency – danger to life!  Read and observe and on page 53 first.

The following functions of the central locking system can be set individually in
Safe securing system the Infotainment » Owner´s Manual Infotainment, chapter CAR - Car settings.

 Read and observe and on page 53 first. Opening a single door

The function allows you to unlock only the driver's door and the fuel filler flap
As soon as the vehicle is locked from the outside, the safe lock prevents open- with the radio remote control. KESSY makes possible the release of individual
ing the doors from the inside. doors as well as the fuel filler flap, depending on the area in which the key is
This function is pointed out by the following message on the display of the in- located. The other doors and the boot lid are only unlocked when the unlock-
strument cluster after switching out the ignition. ing is repeated.
 Check SAFELOCK! Owner's Manual! Unlocking a vehicle side door
 CHECK SAFELOCK This function enables you to unlock both doors on the driver's side and the
fuel filler flap with the radio remote control unit. KESSY makes possible the re-
After locking the vehicle, the warning light in the driver's door flashes for lease of both doors on one side as well as the fuel filler flap, depending on the
around 2 seconds in quick succession, afterwards it begins to flash evenly at area in which the key is located. The other doors and the boot lid are only un-
longer intervals. locked when the unlocking is repeated.
Switching off Unlock all doors
The safe lock can be switched off in one of the following ways. This function allows you to unlock all doors, the boot lid and the fuel filler flap.
▶ By locking twice within 2 seconds.
▶ By disabling the button for interior monitoring and anti-towing » page 58. Automatic locking/unlocking
The function allows you to lock all doors and the boot lid from a speed of
The indicator light in the driver door flashes for about 2 seconds fast, goes out
about 15 km/h. The button in the boot lid handle is deactivated.
and starts to flash at longer intervals after about 30 seconds.
Renewed automatic unlocking of all doors as well as the luggage compartment
If the vehicle is locked and the safe securing system is switched off, the door
door when removing the ignition key or by opening any of the doors. In vehi-
can be opened separately from the inside by a single pull on opening lever.
cles with the system KESSY this is when any door is opened.
The SafeLock switches on the next time the vehicle is locked.
The vehicle can also be unlocked by pressing the Central Locking Button  in
WARNING the centre console » page 55.
If the car is locked and the safe securing system activated, no people must Acoustic signals when locking / unlocking
remain in the car as it will then not be possible to either unlock a door or For vehicles with an anti-theft alarm system, the acoustic signals can be ena-
open a window from the inside. The locked doors make it more difficult for bled / disabled in the Infotainment » Owner´s Manual Infotainment, chap-
rescuers to get into the vehicle in an emergency – risk to life! ter CAR - Vehicle Settings.

56 Using the system

Opening/closing a door Child safety lock

Fig. 41 Door handle/door opening lever Fig. 42 Rear door: Child safety system switch on / off

 Read and observe and on page 53 first.  Read and observe and on page 53 first.

Opening from the outside The child safety lock prevents the rear door from being opened from the in-
› Unlock the vehicle. side. The door can only be opened from the outside.
› Pull on the door handle A in the direction of the arrow » Fig. 41. Switching the child safety system on/off » Fig. 42
Opening from the inside  Switching on
› Pull on door opening lever B of the door and push the door away from you.  Switching off
Closing from the inside You can switch the child safety lock on and off using the vehicle key.
› Grasp pull handle C and close the door.
WARNING Malfunctions
■ Make sure that the door has closed correctly as it can open suddenly  Read and observe and on page 53 first.
while driving – risk of death!
■ Only open and close the door when there is no one in the opening/closing Fault with the central locking
range – risk of injury! If the warning light in the driver's door initially flashes quickly for around 2 sec-
■ An opened door can close automatically if there is a strong wind or the onds, and then lights up for 30 seconds without interruption before flashing
vehicle is on an incline – risk of injury! again slowly, you will need to seek the assistance of a specialist garage.
■ Never drive with the doors open - there is a risk of death!
If the central locking system has failed, only the driver's door can be
locked/unlocked using the key. The other doors and the boot lid can be man-
ually locked or unlocked.
▶ Locking/unlocking the driver's door » page 224.
▶ Locking door » page 224.
▶ Unlocking the boot lid » page 224. 

Unlocking and opening 57

Failure of the system KESSY Switching off the alarm
If the following message is displayed in the display of the instrument cluster, The alarm is turned off by pressing the  button on the key or switching on
then help is required from a specialist company. the ignition.
 Keyless access system faulty.
CAUTION
 KEYLESS ACCESS SYSTEM FAULTY
Before leaving the vehicle, it must be checked that all of the windows, doors
Key battery discharged and the sliding/tilting roof are locked in order to ensure the full functionality of
If the voltage of the key battery is too low, the following message appears in the anti-theft alarm system.
the display of the instrument cluster.
 Change the key battery! Note
 KEY BATTERY PLEASE CHANGE The alarm system has its own power source. The working life of the power
supply source is 5 years.
Replace the battery » page 223.
Interior monitor and towing protection
Anti-theft alarm system
Fig. 43
 Introduction Button for interior monitor and
This chapter contains information on the following subjects: towing protection

Interior monitor and towing protection 58

The anti-theft alarm system (hereinafter referred to as alarm system) increa-
ses protection against theft and break-in attempts into the vehicle.
The anti-theft alarm system is activated automatically approximately 30 sec-
onds after the vehicle is locked. This is automatically disabled after release.
 Read and observe on page 58 first.
The alarm system triggers audible and visual signals if an attempt is made to
break into the vehicle (hereafter referred to as alarm). The interior monitor detects movements inside the locked vehicle and then
triggers the alarm.
Triggering the alarm
The alarm is triggered when the following unauthorized actions are carried out The anti-towing detects tilts in the locked vehicle and then triggers the alarm.
on the locked vehicle. Deactivate the interior monitor and the towing protection if there is a possibili-
▶ Opening the bonnet.
ty of the alarm being triggered by movements (e.g. by children or animals)
▶ Opening the boot lid.
within the vehicle interior or if the vehicle has to be transported (e.g. by train
▶ Opening the doors.
or ship) or towed.
▶ Manipulation of the ignition lock.
▶ Towing the vehicle. Deactivating
▶ Movement in the vehicle. › Switch off the ignition.
▶ Sudden and significant voltage drop of the electrical system. › Open the driver door.
▶ Uncoupling the trailer. › Press the symbol key  on the B column of the driver's side » Fig. 43.
If the driver's door of a vehicle is unlocked and opened by the lock cylinder, The illumination of the symbol  in the button changes from red to orange.
then the alarm is triggered. › Lock the vehicle within 30 seconds. 

58 Using the system

By disabling the interior monitoring and the anti-towing the safe lock is Boot lid opening/closing
switched off.
CAUTION
The opened glasses storage compartment reduces the effectiveness of the in-
terior monitor. To ensure the full functionality of the interior monitor, the
glasses storage compartment must always be closed before locking the vehi-
cle.

Luggage compartment lid

 Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects: Fig. 44 Opening / closing tailgate

Boot lid opening/closing 59  Read and observe on page 59 first.

Delayed locking of the boot lid 59
For vehicles without the KESSY after unlocking the vehicle, the boot lid can be
When closing the boot lid does do not press on the rear window. opened with the button in the handle above the number plate.
Ensure that the lock is properly engaged after closing the luggage compart- Opening
ment lid. › Press the button A in the direction of arrow 1 » Fig. 44.
The function of the button in the grip above the licence plate is deactivated › Raise the lid in the direction of the arrow 2 .
when starting off or at a speed of 5 km/hour or more for vehicles with central
Closing
locking. The function is restored after the vehicle stops and the door is
opened.
› Grasp the mount B and lift in the direction of arrow 3 .
WARNING Delayed locking of the boot lid
■ Never drive with the luggage compartment lid fully opened or slightly ajar  Read and observe on page 59 first.
otherwise exhaust gases may get into the interior of the vehicle – risk of
poisoning! If the boot lid is unlocked with the symbol key  on the key, then the door is
■ Make sure that when closing the boot lid, no body parts are crushed - automatically locked after closing.
there is danger of injury!
The period after which the boot lid is locked automatically can be extended by
a specialist garage.

CAUTION
There is a risk of unwanted entry into the vehicle before the boot lid is locked
automatically. We therefore recommend locking the vehicle with the symbol
key  on the key.

Unlocking and opening 59

Electric boot lid Operating description

 Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Operating description 60
Set the top position of the lid 61
Malfunctions 61
The boot lid (hereinafter referred to as lid) can be operated electrically and
manually in the event of an emergency » page 61.
If the lid hits an obstacle when opening or closing, it stops and an audible sig-
nal sounds. When closing the flap is lifted additionally. Fig. 45 Lid operation

WARNING
■ Ensure that the lock is properly engaged after closing the lid. Otherwise,
the lid might open suddenly while the vehicle is moving, even if the lid was
locked – risk of accident!
■ Never drive with the lid open or unlatched, as otherwise exhaust gases
may get into the interior of the vehicle – risk of poisoning!
■ Only open and close the lid when there is no one in the opening/closing
range – risk of injury!
■ Make sure that when closing the lid, no body parts are crushed – risk of
injury!
Fig. 46 Button for the lid operation / button on the key
CAUTION
Do not attempt to close the lid manually during an electrical closing process -  Read and observe and on page 60 first.
there is a risk of damaging the electric lid operation system.
Open flap
CAUTION The lid can be opened by pressing one of the following elements.
■ Before opening or closing the lid, check if there are any objects in the open- ▶ Handle A » Fig. 45.
ing or closing range which could obstruct the movement (e.g. a load on the ▶ Button C » Fig. 46.
roof rack or on the trailer, etc.) – risk of causing damage to the lid! ▶ Symbol button  on the remote control key (for about 1 s).
■ In certain circumstances, if the lid is loaded (e.g by a thick layer of snow), the
opening process of the lid can be interrupted. Remove the snow from the lid to Close the flap
re-enable the electrical operation. The lid can be closed by pressing one of the following elements.
▶ Button B » Fig. 45.
■ If the lid closes automatically (e.g. under load of snow), you will hear an inter-
▶ Handle A » Fig. 45. 
mittent beep.
■ Always close the flap before disconnecting the battery.

60 Using the system

Stop lid movement Malfunctions
The lid movement can be stopped by pressing one of the following operating
elements.  Read and observe and on page 60 first.
▶ Button B » Fig. 45.
▶ Button C » Fig. 46. Examples of operational malfunctions
▶ Symbol button  on the remote control key (for about 1 s). Description of the malfunc-
▶ Handle A » Fig. 45.
Possible solutions
tion
When opening the lid using the symbol key  on the key or the button C The lid cannot be opened Unlocking the lid » page 224
» Fig. 46 an acoustic signal sounds. Removing a possible obstacle (e.g. snow), re-
opening the lid » page 60
Note The lid does not react to an
If you rapidly enter the vehicle during the opening or closing process of the opening signal
Press handle A » Fig. 45 on page 60 and pull
boot lid, the whole vehicle may jerk and as a result the movement of the lid the lid upwards
can be interrupted.
The lid remains in the top
position
Set the top position of the lid Manual closing of the lid
The lid is open and the bat-
 Read and observe and on page 60 first. tery was disconnected

If the space for opening the lid is restricted (e.g. height of garage) or for more Close manually
convenient operation (e.g. according to a person's height), it is possible to ad- Close the door slowly and completely. It must be ensured that when pressing
just the top position of the boot lid. the lid into the lock, pressure is applied to the centre edge of the lid above the
ŠKODA logo.
Adjusting
› Stop the lid in the desired position (electrically or manually). Window operations
› Press and hold the button B » Fig. 45 on page 60 for longer than 3 seconds.
The setting of the lid top position is confirmed by an acoustic signal.  Introduction
Delete This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
› Carefully raise the flap manually to the limit. Mechanical window lefter 62
› Press and hold the button B » Fig. 45 on page 60 for longer than 3 seconds.
Electric window lifters 62
An audible signal is emitted. The original position is deleted and the top lid po- Opening/closing the windows in the front passenger door and in the rear
sition is set. doors 63
Note Force limit 63
The top position which is reached when the lid opens automatically, is always Window convenience operation 64
lower than the maximum top position which can be reached when the lid is Malfunctions 64
opened manually.
The windows can be operated mechanically by means of the handle attached
to the respective door panel. 

Unlocking and opening 61

The windows can be operated electrically from the following locations; all win-  Read and observe and on page 62 first.
dows from the driver's seat and also via the buttons for the windows in the
passenger door or the rear doors. Using the respective window crank only one window can be operated mechan-
ically.
WARNING
Opening
The windows should be closed carefully – risk of injury!
› Lift the crank in the direction of arrow A » Fig. 47.
CAUTION Closing
■ In the event that the windows are frozen, first of all remove the ice › Turn the crank in the direction of the arrow B » Fig. 47.
» page 184, Windows and external mirrors and only then operate the window
lift. Otherwise, the window sealing and the window lift mechanism could be Electric window lifters
damaged.
■ Make sure that the windows are closed whenever you leave the locked vehi- Fig. 48
cle. Buttons for window levers

For the sake of the environment

At high speeds, you should keep the windows closed to prevent unnecessarily
high fuel consumption.

Note
When driving always use the existing heating, air conditioning and ventilation
system for ventilating the interior of the vehicle. If the windows are opened,
dust as well as other dirt can get into the vehicle and in addition the wind  Read and observe and on page 62 first.
noise is more at certain speeds. All windows can be operated from the driver's seat.

Mechanical window lefter Power window buttons » Fig. 48

A Left front door
B Right front door
C Left rear door
D Right rear door:
E Disable/enable the buttons in the rear doors

Opening
› Lightly press the appropriate button down and hold it until the window has
moved into the desired position.
Releasing the button causes the window to halt immediately.
Fig. 47 Window operation: left/right The window can be completely opened automatically by briefly pressing the
button as far as the stop. Renewed pressing of the button causes the window
to stop. 

62 Using the system

Closing Opening/closing the windows in the front passenger door and in
› Pull gently on the top edge of the corresponding button and hold until the the rear doors
window has moved into the desired position.
Releasing the button causes the window to halt immediately. Fig. 49
The window can also be fully closed automatically by pulling the button up to Power window button
the stop. Renewed pulling of the button causes the window to stop immedi-
ately.
Disable/enable the buttons in the rear doors
› Press button E » Fig. 48.
When the buttons in the rear doors are disabled, the warning light  in button
E illuminates.

After switching the ignition off, it is still possible to open or close the windows  Read and observe and on page 62 first.
for approx. 10 minutes.
There is a button in the front passenger door and in the rear doors for that
After the driver's or passenger's door is opened the operation of the window is window.
only possible with the button A » Fig. 48, in which case they have to be press-
ed or pulled for approx. 2 seconds. Opening
› Lightly press the button downwards and hold it until the window has moved
The window lift mechanism is equipped with protection against overheating. into the desired position.
Repeated opening and closing of the window can cause this mechanism to
overheat. If this happens, it will not be possible to operate the window for a Releasing the button causes the window to halt immediately.
short time. You will be able to operate the window again as soon as the over- The window can be completely opened automatically by briefly pressing the
heating protection has cooled down. down button as far as the stop. Renewed pressing of the button causes the
window to stop.
WARNING
■ The system is fitted with a force limiter » page 63. If there is an obsta- Closing
cle, the closing process is stopped and the window goes down by several › Lightly press the button upwards and hold it until the window has moved in-
centimetres. The windows should nevertheless be closed carefully – risk of to the desired position.
injury! Releasing the button causes the window to halt immediately.
■ If the rear seats are accommodating people who are not completely inde-
The window can be completely closed automatically by briefly pressing the up
pendent, e.g. children, it is recommended that the buttons in the rear doors
button as far as the stop. Releasing the button causes the window to halt im-
be disabled with button E for safety reasons.
mediately.
CAUTION
Force limit
■ In the winter, ice accumulating on the surface of the window may cause
there to be more resistance when closing the window. The window will stop  Read and observe and on page 62 first.
and move back several centimetres.
■ Keep the windows clean to ensure the correct functionality of the electric The electrical power window system is fitted with a force limiter.
windows. If there is an obstacle, the closing process is stopped and the window goes
■ Always close the windows before disconnecting the battery. down by several centimetres. 

Unlocking and opening 63

If the obstacle prevents the window from being closed during the next 10 sec- Convenience opening or closing the window using the key in the driver's door
onds, the closing process is interrupted once again and the window goes down locking cylinder is only possible within 45 seconds of locking the vehicle.
by several centimetres.
The movement of the window is stopped immediately when the respective
If you attempt to close the window again within 10 seconds of the window be- button is released.
ing moved down for the second time, even though the obstacle was not yet
been removed, the closing process is only stopped. During this time it is not Malfunctions
possible to automatically close the window. The force limiter is still switched
on.  Read and observe and on page 62 first.
The force limiter is only switched off if you attempt to close the window again If the battery has been disconnected and reconnected, it is possible that the
within the next 10 seconds - the window will now close with full force! automatic window lifter will not operate. The system must be activated.
If you wait longer than 10 seconds, the force limiter is switched on again. Activation sequence
› Switch on the ignition.
Window convenience operation › Pull the top edge of the button and close the window.
 Read and observe and on page 62 first.
› Release the button.
› Pull the relevant button upwards again for approx. 1 second, and keep it
The convenience operation of the windows offers the possibility of opening or pressed down.
closing all the windows at once.
Settings the window convenience operation » Owner´s Manual Infotainment, Panorama sliding/tilting roof
chapter CAR - vehicle settings.
 Introduction
Convenience operation can take place in one of the following ways.
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Opening
Operation 65
› Press and hold the symbol button  on the key.
› Keep the key in the locking cylinder of the driver's door in the unlock position Power limit 65
until all electrically operated windows are open. Convenience operation of sliding / tilting roof 65
› Switch off the ignition, open the driver's door and hold the key A until it Sliding / tilting roof malfunction 66
stops in the open position » Fig. 48 on page 62. Manual operation of sunblind 66
Closing Electrical operation of the sunblind 66
› Press and hold the symbol button  on the key. Malfunction of the sun blind 66
› Keep the key in the locking cylinder of the driver's door in the lock position The panorama sliding/tilting roof (hereinafter referred to as sliding/tilting roof)
until all the electrically operated windows are closed. can only be operated when the ignition is turned on and when the outdoor
› Switch off the ignition, open the driver's door and hold the key A until it temperature is no lower than -20 °C.
stops in the closed position » Fig. 48 on page 62.
› In the KESSY system, hold your finger on the sensor on the outside of the The sliding/tilting roof can still be operated for approx. 10 minutes after
door handle of the front door » Fig. 39 on page 55. switching the ignition off. However, as soon as the driver or front passenger's
door is opened it is no longer possible to operate the sliding/tilting roof.
The prerequisite for ensuring that the convenience operating feature correctly
is the automatic opening/closing of all windows is operational. CAUTION
Always close the sliding/tilting roof before disconnecting the battery.

64 Using the system

Operation CAUTION
During the winter it may be necessary to remove any ice and snow in the vicin-
ity of the sliding/tilting roof before opening it to prevent any damage to the
opening mechanism.

Power limit
 Read and observe on page 64 first.

The sliding/tilting roof is fitted with a force limiter.

If there is an obstacle, the closing process is stopped and the window goes
down by several centimetres.
Fig. 50 Operation of the sliding/tilting roof - Version 1 The closing of the sliding/tilting roof without power limitation is only with the
third attempt at closing. The time interval between the individual closing at-
tempts should not exceed 5 s - the sliding/tilting roof closes with full force!

Convenience operation of sliding / tilting roof

 Read and observe on page 64 first.

The convenience operation makes it possible to open or close the sliding/tilt-

ing roof using the key or the KESSY system above the sensor in the door han-
dle of the front door.
Tilting roof
Fig. 51 Operation of the sliding/tilting roof - Version 2 The sliding/tilting roof can be opened as follows.
› Press and hold the symbol button  on the key.
 Read and observe on page 64 first. › Hold the key in the unlock position in the driver's door lock.
The sun roof can be operated with the rotary switch. Closing
The sliding/tilting roof can be closed as follows.
Operation of the sliding/tilting roof
 Open fully › Press and hold the symbol button  on the key.
A Open partially
› Hold the key in the lock position in the driver's door lock.
 Comfort position
› In the KESSY system, hold your finger on the sensor on the outside of the
door handle of the front door » Fig. 39 on page 55.
1 Opening (switch in position  )
By interrupting the locking process, the closing operation is interrupted.
2 Closing (switch in position  )
WARNING
WARNING
Close the sliding/tilting roof carefully – risk of injury!
When operating the sliding/tilting roof, proceed with caution to avoid caus-
ing crushing injuries – risk of injury!

Unlocking and opening 65

Sliding / tilting roof malfunction Electrical operation of the sunblind
 Read and observe on page 64 first.
Fig. 53
If the battery has been disconnected and reconnected, it is possible that the Operation of the sun blind
sliding/tilting roof will not operate. The sun roof must be activated.
Activation sequence
› Switch on the ignition.
› Set the switch to the position  » Fig. 50 on page 65 or » Fig. 51 on page 65.
› Press the switch on the recess E down and pull forwards.
The sliding/tilting roof opens and closes again after around 10 seconds.
› Release the lever.  Read and observe on page 64 first.

The sliding sun blind (hereinafter referred to as sun blind) can be opened or
Manual operation of sunblind closed using the buttons.
Operation of the sun blind » Fig. 53
Fig. 52
Operation of the sun blind  Opening
 Closing
By briefly pressing the button, the sun blind is fully opened or closed. The
movement of the sun blind can be stopped by briefly pressing any key.
By pressing and holding the key, the sunblind is opened or closed in the de-
sired position. By releasing the key, the opening or closing process is stopped.

WARNING
 Read and observe on page 64 first. When operating the sunshade, proceed with caution to avoid causing
The Sun blind of the sliding/tilting roof is opened manually by pulling up on the crushing injuries – risk of injury!
handle in the direction of the arrow A and closed in the direction of the arrow
B » Fig. 52. Malfunction of the sun blind
WARNING  Read and observe on page 64 first.
When operating the sunshade, proceed with caution to avoid causing
crushing injuries – risk of injury! If the battery has been disconnected and reconnected, it is possible that the
sun blind will not operate correctly. The sun blind must be activated.
Activation sequence
› Switch on the ignition.
› Set the switch to the position » Fig. 53 on page 66 .
› Press the button  and hold down.
The sun screen opens and closes again after around 10 seconds. 

66 Using the system

› Release the button. Lights and visibility
Lights

 Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Operating the lights 68
Daylight running lights (DAY LIGHT) 68
Turn signal and main beam 69
Automatic driving lamp control 70
Xenon headlight 70
High-beam assistant (Light Assist) 71
Front and rear fog light 72
Fog lights with the CORNER function 73
COMING HOME / LEAVING HOME 73
Hazard warning light system 73
Parking lights 74
Driving abroad 74
The lights work only with the ignition on, unless otherwise stated.
The layout of the controls on right-hand drive vehicles differs partially from
that shown in » Fig. 54 on page 68. The symbols that mark the individual po-
sitions of the controls are identical.
Keep the headlights lenses clean » page 185, Headlight glasses.

WARNING
The automatic driving lamp control  only operates as a support and
does not release the driver from his responsibility to check the light and, if
necessary, to switch on the light depending on the light conditions. 

Lights and visibility 67

 Note The positions of the width of illumination correspond approximately to the fol-
■ The headlights may mist up temporarily. When the driving lights are switched lowing car load.
on, the light outlet surfaces are free from mist after a short period, although  Front seats occupied, boot empty
the headlight lenses may still be misted up in the peripheral areas. This mist  All seats occupied, boot empty
has no influence on the life of the lighting system.  All seats occupied, boot loaded
■ If the visibility is poor and the lights are not on (except daytime running light)
 Driver seat occupied, boot loaded
the brightness of the instrument lighting reduces to alert the driver to switch
on the lights in due time. Xenon headlight
■ The brightness of the instrument lighting with the lights on (except daytime The Xenon bulbs adapt automatically to the load and driving state of the vehi-
running lights) can be set in the Infotainment » Owner´s Manual Infotainment, cle when the ignition is switched on and when driving. Vehicles that are equip-
chapter CAR - Vehicle Settings. ped with Xenon headlights do not have a manual headlight range adjustment
control.
Operating the lights
WARNING
Always adjust the headlight beam to meet the following conditions.
Fig. 54 ■ The vehicle does not dazzle other road users, especially oncoming vehi-
Light switch and control dial for
cles.
the headlight beam range regu- ■ The beam range is sufficient for safe driving.
lation

Note
■ The light switch is in position  or  and the ignition is turned off, the low
beam is switched off automatically 1) and the status light is lit. The side light is
switched off when the ignition key is removed, for vehicles with the KESSY
system after switching off the ignition and opening the driver's door.
 Read and observe on page 67 first. ■ If there is a fault in the light switch, the low beam comes on automatically.

Switching lights on and off

Depending on the equipment configuration, the light switch A » Fig. 54 can be Daylight running lights (DAY LIGHT)
turned to one of the following positions.
 Read and observe on page 67 first.
 Switching off lights (except daytime running lights)
 Switching lights on/off automatically » page 70 The daytime running light (hereinafter referred to as "function") lights the
 Switching on the side light or parking light » page 74 front and rear vehicle area (only valid for some countries).
 Switching on the low beam The lights are switched on automatically if the following conditions are met.
Headlight range control   The light switch is in the position  or .
Turning the dial B » Fig. 54 from the position  to  to gradually adjust the  The ignition is switched on.
headlight range control and shorten the light cone.  The function is activated. 

1) Does not apply to the position , as long as the conditions are met for the COMING HOME function
» page 73.

68 Using the system

Activating/deactivating function on vehicles with Infotainment  Read and observe on page 67 first.
The function can be disabled/enabled in the Infotainment » Owner´s Manual
Infotainment, chapter CAR - vehicle settings. Lever positions » Fig. 55
A When the right turn signal light is switched on, the warning light flashes in
Deactivating on vehicles without Infotainment the instrument cluster 
› Switch off the ignition. B When the left turn signal light is switched on, the warning light flashes in
› Pull the indicator / main beam lever towards the steering wheel, push down the instrument cluster 
and hold in this position.
› Switch on the ignition. C Depending on equipment (spring-tensioned position):
▶ Switch on main beam – the warning light illuminates in the instrument
› Hold the lever in this position for min. 3 seconds after switching on the igni-
tion. cluster 
▶ Switch on main beam assistant » page 71
The deactivation of the function is confirmed by an audible signal.
D Depending on equipment (spring-tensioned position):
Activating on vehicles without Infotainment ▶ Switch on main beam or headlight flasher (spring-loaded position)
› Switch off the ignition. ▶ Switch off main beam assistant/switch on headlight flasher (spring-ten-
› Pull the indicator / main beam lever towards the steering wheel, push up and sioned position)
hold in this position.
The main beam can only be switched on when the low beam lights are on.
› Switch on the ignition.
› Hold the lever in this position for min. 3 seconds after switching on the igni- The headlight flasher can be operated even if the ignition is switched off.
tion. The turn signal light switches itself off automatically when driving around a
The activation of the function is confirmed by an audible signal. curve or after making a turn.

WARNING “Convenience turn signal”

Always switch on the low beam when visibility is poor. When the control lever is lightly pressed to the pressure point A or B then
the respective turn-signal lamp flashes three times.
If during the “comfort flashing” the operating lever in the opposite side is
Turn signal and main beam pressed, then the blinking stops.

Fig. 55 The “Lane change flash” can be activated/deactivated in the Infotainment

Operating lever: Turn signal and » Owner´s Manual Infotainment, chapter CAR - vehicle settings.
main beam operation WARNING
Only turn on the main beam or the headlight flasher if other road users will
not be dazzled.

Lights and visibility 69

Automatic driving lamp control Xenon headlight
 Read and observe on page 67 first.
Fig. 56
Light switch: AUTO position The Xenon headlight (hereinafter referred to as system) ensures that the
roads are illuminated independent of the traffic and weather conditions.
The system automatically adjusts the cone of light in front of the vehicle based
on the driving information (such as vehicle speed and loading situation, use of
the windscreen wipers, selected driving profile, vehicle position according to
the data from Infotainment navigation).
The system works as long as the light switch is in position .
 Read and observe on page 67 first. The system operates automatically in the following modes.

The light switch is in position » Fig. 56 then depending on the equipment Out of town mode
the automatic switch on / off the lights corresponding to the light or weather The cone of light in front of the vehicle is similar to the low beam.
conditions (rain) takes place.
City mode
The sensitivity of the sensor for the determination of the ambient light can be The cone of light in front of the vehicle is adjusted so that it illuminates the
adjusted in the infotainment » Owner´s Manual Infotainment, chapter CAR - adjacent pavement, crossings, etc. The mode is active at speeds of 15-50 km/h.
vehicle settings.
Motorway mode
If the light switch is in position , the lettering  illuminates next to the The cone of light in front of the vehicle is adjusted so that the driver can re-
light switch. If the light is switched on automatically, the symbol  next to the spond in time to an obstruction or other hazard in time. The mode is active at
light switch also lights up. speeds above 110 km/h.
Automatic driving light control during rain Rain mode
The daytime running lights are switched on automatically if the following con- The cone of light in front of the vehicle is adjusted so that the driver can re-
ditions are met. duce the glare from oncoming vehicles in rain.
 The function is activated. The mode is active at speeds of 50 – 90 km/h and if the windscreen wipers
 The light switch is in the position . continuously operate for a period of time longer than about 2 minutes. The de-
 The windscreen wipers are on for more than 30 s. activation of the mode is carried out a few minutes after switching off the wip-
The light turns off about 4 minutes after turning off the wipers. er.

Automatic headlight control in rain can be activated or deactivated in the Info- Fog mode
tainment » Owner´s Manual Infotainment, chapter CAR - vehicle settings. The cone of light in front of the vehicle is adjusted so that the driver is not
dazzled by the reflection of the cone of light by fog in front of the vehicle.
CAUTION The mode is active at speeds of 15 – 70 km/h and if the rear fog light is switch-
Poorer visibility is evaluated by a motor mounted below the windscreen in the ed on for a period of time longer than about 10 seconds. The deactivation of
holder of the interior mirror sensor. Do not attach any stickers or similar ob- the mode is carried out a few minutes after switching off the rear fog lights. 
jects in front of the light sensor on the windscreen in order to avoid impairing
the function or its reliability.

70 Using the system

Dynamic cornering lights
The cone of light in front of the vehicle is adjusted to the steering angle so Fig. 58
that the road in the curve is illuminated. This function is active at speeds Operating lever: High beam as-
greater than 10 km/h and in all system modes. sistant activation/deactivation

travel mode
If the travel mode is activated, there is no automatic cone of light adaptation
in front of the vehicle.
The travel mode can be activated/deactivated in the Infotainment » Owner´s
Manual Infotainment, chapter CAR - vehicle settings.
Economy mode  Read and observe on page 67 first.
When the Eco driving mode » page 157 is activated the system is in Economy
The main beam assistant (hereinafter referred to as system) can prevent other
mode and there is no direction dependent light cone adaptation in front of the
road users from being dazzled.
vehicle.
The system automatically switches the high beam on/off in accordance with
WARNING the existing traffic (other vehicles) and environmental conditions (e.g. driving
If there is a system malfunction the headlights are automatically lowered through a lighted village).
to the emergency position, which prevents a possible dazzling of oncoming
The high beam on/off is controlled by a sensor or a camera » Fig. 57.
traffic. This reduces the cone of light in front of the vehicle. Drive carefully
and visit a specialist garage as soon as possible. The system works under the following conditions.
 The light switch is in the position .
High-beam assistant (Light Assist)  The system is activated.
 The system is switched on.
Fig. 57  The vehicle speed is above 60 km/h or above 40 km/h1).
Camera view window for the The headlight switches off automatically when the speed falls below 30 km/h.
main beam assistant
Activation/deactivation
The activation/deactivation can also be displayed in the Infotainment » Owner
´s Manual Infotainment, chapter CAR - vehicle settings.
Switching on
› Place the lever in position A (spring-tensioned position) » Fig. 58.
The instrument cluster illuminates the warning light  of the systems switch-
ed on.
Switching off
› If the headlight is switched on automatically, move the lever into position B
(spring-tensioned position) » Fig. 58. 

1) Only valid for some countries.

Lights and visibility 71

The warning light  goes out. The high beam turns off. Front and rear fog light
› If the headlight is not currently switched on automatically, move the lever in-
to position A (spring-tensioned position) . Fig. 59
The warning light  goes out. The high beam turns on. Light switch – switch on front
and rear fog light
Information message
The messages and information are indicated in the instrument cluster display.
 Fault: Light Assist
 LIGHT ASSIST FAULT
Seek help from a specialist garage.
 Light Assist: clean the windscreen!  Read and observe on page 67 first.
 WINDSCREEN PLEASE CLEAN
Turning fog lights on/off
Check for any obstacles on the windscreen in the viewing area of the sensors
of camera. › Turn the light switch to position ,  or  » Fig. 59.
› Pull the light switch to position 1 ; the indicator lamp  in the light switch
WARNING illuminates.
The system only serves as a support and does not relieve the driver of his It is switched off in reverse order.
or her responsibility to check the headlights and low beam and, if necessa-
ry, to switch on the lights depending on the light conditions. The manual Turning the rear fog lamp on/off
operation may be required for example, in the following situations. › Turn the light switch into position  or  » Fig. 59.
■ When visibility is poor, e.g. fog, heavy rain, thick snowfall. › Pull the light switch to position 2 ; the indicator lamp  in the light switch
■ Passing poorly lit road users, e.g. cyclists or pedestrians. illuminates.
■ When driving around “sharp” bends. It is switched off in reverse order.
■ Driving through poorly-lit locations.
If the vehicle is not fitted with fog lights, the rear fog light is switched on by
■ The camera or sensor viewing range is obstructed by an obstacle.
pulling out the light switch directly to the only possible setting.

CAUTION Note
Do not attach any stickers or similar objects to the windscreen in front of the While driving with an accessory connected to the trailer socket (e.g. trailer,
sensor or camera to avoid impairing the functions of the systems. bike carrier) only the equipment is illuminated by the fog light. The towing de-
vice must be installed at the factory or from the ŠKODA original accessories.

72 Using the system

 Fog lights with the CORNER function CAUTION
■ Poorer visibility is evaluated by a motor mounted below the windscreen in
 Read and observe on page 67 first. the holder of the interior mirror sensor. Do not attach any stickers or similar
objects in front of the light sensor on the windscreen in order to avoid impair-
The function CORNER provides better illumination of the nearby environment
ing the function or its reliability.
when turning, manoeuvring or anything similar. ■ If this option is always enabled, then the battery is heavily loaded.
The function automatically switches on the fog lights on each side of the ve-
hicle, if the following conditions are met. Hazard warning light system
 The turn signal is switched on or the front wheels are turned sharply 1).
 The vehicle speed is below 40 km/h. Fig. 60
 The low beam is switched on. Button for hazard warning light
 The fog lights are not switched on. system

Note
The two fog lights are switched on when you shift into the reverse gear.

COMING HOME / LEAVING HOME

 Read and observe on page 67 first.
 Read and observe on page 67 first.
The function COMING HOME ensures that the vehicle's environment is illumi-
The hazard warning lights make other road users aware of your vehicle.
nated after switching off the ignition and opening the driver's door.
The function switches on all indicators.
The function LEAVING HOME ensures that the vehicle's environment is illumi-
nated after unlocking the vehicle with the radio remote control unit. Switching on/off
The function switches the light on only if there is poorer visibility and the light › Press the button  » Fig. 60.
switch is in the position . When you turn it on the warning light  flashes in the button and at the same
time the warning lights  in the instrument cluster.
Enabling / disabling and setting functions
The functions and setting of the lighting duration can be activated or deactiva- The hazard warning light system can also be operated if the ignition is switch-
ted in the Infotainment system » Owner´s Manual Infotainment, chapter CAR - ed off.
vehicle settings.
If one of the airbags is deployed, the hazard warning light system will switch
on automatically.
The automatic activation of hazard warning lights can take place during a
heavy braking. After starting or accelerating the hazard warning system is au-
tomatically switched off. 

1) If both switch-on conditions are conflicting, for example, if the front wheels are turned to the left and
the right turn signal light is switched on, the turn signal light has the higher priority.

Lights and visibility 73

When the hazard warning system is on and the indicator light is switched on Interior lights
(e.g. when turning), the hazard warning lights are switched off temporarily and
only the turn signal flashes on the relevant side of the vehicle.  Introduction
Parking lights This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Front interior light 74
 Read and observe on page 67 first.
Rear interior lights 75
The side light is provided for lighting of the parked vehicle. Front door warning light 75
Switching on the side light  on one side Entry space lighting 75
› Switch off the ignition. The inner lighting also works if the ignition is switched off.
› Press the control lever to position A or B as far as the stop » Fig. 55 on With the ignition off, the light turns off automatically after about 10 minutes.
page 69.
The parking lights on the right or left side of the vehicle are turned on. Front interior light
Switching on the side light on both sides 
› With the ignition switched on turn the light switch to position .
› Switch off the ignition.
› Lock the vehicle.
After pulling out the ignition key and opening the driver's door, an audible
warning sounds.
After a few seconds or after closing the driver's door, the audible alarm is
turned off, but the parking lights will remain switched on.
CAUTION
■ Turning on the parking light means the battery is heavily loaded. Fig. 61 Operation of the front light: Version 1 / version 2
■ The parking light cannot be turned off automatic due to the low battery
charge level. Positions of the rocker switch A » Fig. 61
■ If the two-sided parking lights are switched on when the ignition is off, then  Switching on
there is no automatic switching off of the parking light.  Automatic operation (centre position)
 Switching off
Driving abroad
There is no icon available for the centre position (automatic operation) in Ver-
 Read and observe on page 67 first. sion 2.

When driving in countries with opposing traffic system (traffic on the Switch for turning the reading lights B on / off » Fig. 61
left/right), your headlights may dazzle oncoming traffic. In order to avoid this,  Reading lamp left
the headlights must be adjusted at a specialist garage.  Reading lamp right 

You can adjust the Xenon headlights yourself by setting the travel mode in In-
fotainment » Owner´s Manual Infotainment, chapter CAR - vehicle settings.

74 Using the system

Automatic operation of the lamp – position  Switch for rear lights (variant 2) » Fig. 62- 
The system is turned on when any of the following is present.  Switching left reading lamp on/off
▶ The vehicle is unlocked.
 Switching right reading lamp on/off
▶ One of the doors is opened.
▶ The ignition key is removed. Positions of the lens of the rear lights (variant 3) » Fig. 63
 Switching on
The system is turned off when any of the following is present.
▶ The vehicle is locked.  Automatic operation (centre position) 1)
▶ The ignition is switched on.  Switching off
▶ About 30 seconds after all the doors have been closed.
The rear lights - variant 1/variant 2 are operated together with the front lights.
▶ When the front interior lighting is switched on, the rear interior lighting also
Rear interior lights turns on automatically.
▶ When the front interior lighting is switched off, the rear interior lighting can
be turned on/off as required.

Front door warning light

Fig. 64
Front door warning light

Fig. 62 Rear interior lights: Version 1 / version 2

Fig. 63
Rear interior lights: Version 3 The warning light » Fig. 64 turns on when the front door is opened.
The warning light turns off when the front door is closed.
There is a reflector installed here on some vehicles instead.

Entry space lighting

The lighting is positioned on the bottom edge of the exterior mirror and can
illuminate the entry area of the front door.
Switch for rear lights (variant 1) » Fig. 62- 
The light turns off after the vehicle is unlocked or the front door opens, de-
 Switching on/off
pending on external conditions and the particular vehicle equipment. 

1) In this position, apply the same rules to the rear interior light as for the front interior light » page 74.

Lights and visibility 75

The lighting switches off around 30 seconds after the front door is closed or Buttons for the heating in the centre console (depending on vehicle equip-
the ignition is switched on. ment) » Fig. 65
 Activate/deactivate the heated rear window
WARNING
 Activate/deactivate the windshield heating
If the entry light is on, do not touch its cover – risk of burns!
When the heater is activated, a lamp illuminates inside or below the button.
The heater automatically switches off after approximately 10 minutes.
Visibility
If the engine is switched off when the heating is on and turned back on again
 Introduction within 10 minutes, the heating is continued.
This chapter contains information on the following subjects: Note
Windscreen and rear window heater 76 ■ If the on-board voltage decreases, the heating switches off automatically
Sun visors in the front 76 » page 204, Automatic load deactivation.
■ If the light within or below the button flashes, the radiator will not work be-
Sun screen 77
cause of the low state of the battery.
WARNING ■ If the Climatronic recognises that the windshield could fog up, the windshield
Make sure that the view outside is not covered by ice, snow, mist or other heating is automatically switched on. This function can be activated/deactiva-
objects. ted in the Infotainment » Owner´s Manual Infotainment, chapter CAR - vehicle
settings.

Windscreen and rear window heater Sun visors in the front

Fig. 65 Buttons for the front and rear window heater: manual air condi- Fig. 66 Fold down visor / flip up visor / make-up mirror and Park Memo
tioning, heating / Climatronic Holder
 Read and observe on page 76 first.  Read and observe on page 76 first.
The heating for quick defrosting and ventilation of the front /and rear window. Operation and description of the sun visor » Fig. 66
The heating can be activated with the ignition on. 1 Fold down the cover
The heating is turned on after the engine has started. 2 Swivel cover towards the door 

76 Using the system

A Make-up mirror with cover (the cover can be pushed in the direction of the The windscreen wipers and the wash system only operate if the ignition is
arrow) switched on and the bonnet and boot are closed.
B Parking ticket holder Winter setting of the windscreen wiper
WARNING If the windscreen wipers are in rest position, they cannot be folded out from
the windscreen. For this reason we recommend adjusting the windscreen wip-
When objects are attached to the sun visor, the visor can not be pivoted to
ers in winter so that they can be folded out from the windscreen easily.
the side windows. This might result in injuries to the occupants if the head
airbag is deployed. ▶ Switch on the windscreen wipers.
▶ Switch off the ignition.
Sun screen The windscreen wipers remain in the position in which they were when
switching off the ignition.
Fig. 67 The service position can also be used as a winter position » page 225.
Sun screen
WARNING
■ Properly maintained windscreen wiper blades are essential for clear visi-
bility and safe driving » page 225.
■ Do not use the windscreen washer system at low temperatures, without
heating the windscreen beforehand. Otherwise the window washer fluid
could freeze on the windscreen and restrict the view to the front.

 Read and observe on page 76 first. CAUTION

■ In cold temperatures and during the winter, check before switching on the
The sun screen is located in a housing on the luggage compartment cover. ignition that the wiper blades are not frozen to the windscreen. If the wind-
Extending screen wipers are switched on when the blades are frozen to the windscreen,
this may damage both the blades and windscreen wiper motor!
› Pull the sun screen on the handle B » Fig. 67and hang it in the holder A . ■ Carefully peel frozen wiper blades off the pane.
Retracting ■ Remove snow and ice from the windscreen wipers before driving.
› Remove the sun blind from the handle B » Fig. 67 out of the bracket and ■ If the windscreen wipers are handled carelessly, there is a risk of damage to
hold it in such a way that it can roll up slowly into the housing without being the windscreen.
damaged. ■ Do not switch on the ignition if the front wiper arms are retracted. The wiper
arms could damage the paint on the bonnet.
■ If there is an obstacle on the windscreen, the wiper will try to push away the
Windscreen wipers and washers
obstacle. The wiper stops automatically after 5 attempts to eliminate the ob-
 Introduction stacle, in order to avoid a damage to the wiper. Remove the obstacle and
switch the wiper on again. 
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Windscreen wipers and washers 78
Headlight cleaning system 78

Lights and visibility 77

 Note Spraying and wiping the windscreen 
■ Each time the ignition switches off for the third time, the position of the After releasing the operating lever, the wipers will make from 2 to 3 wiper
windscreen wipers changes. This counteracts an early fatigue of the wiper rub- strokes.
bers. At a speed of more than 2 km/h, the wiper wipes once again 5 seconds after
■ The windscreen washer nozzles for the windscreen are heated when the en- the last wiper stroke in order to wipe the last drops from the windscreen. This
gine is running and the outside temperature is less than approx. +10 °C. function can be activated/deactivated by a specialist garage.

Windscreen wipers and washers Spraying and wiping the rear window 
After releasing the operating lever, the wipers will make from 2 to 3 wiper
strokes.
The operating lever remains in position 6 .
Activating / deactivating of the automatic windscreen wiping with rain
Automatic windscreen wiping in rain can be activated or deactivated in the In-
fotainment » Owner´s Manual Infotainment, chapter CAR - vehicle settings.
Automatic rear window wiping
If the lever is in position 2 or 3 » Fig. 68, the rear window is wiped every
30 or 10 seconds if the vehicle's speed exceeds 5 km/h.
Fig. 68 Operation of wiper and washer: front / rear If automatic windscreen wiping in rain is activated (the operating lever is in the
position 1 ) the function is only active if the windscreen wipers operate in
 Read and observe and on page 77 first. continuous mode (no break between each wiping process).

Lever positions The automatic rear wiper can be activated/deactivated in the Infotainment
» Owner´s Manual Infotainment, chapter CAR - vehicle settings.
0  Wipers off
1  Depending on equipment fitted: Note
▶ Periodic windscreen wiping ■ If the operating lever is in the position 2 or 3 and the speed of the vehicle
▶ Automatic windscreen wiping in rain
drops below 4 km / h, the wiping speed is reduced. The original wiping speed is
2  Slow windscreen wiping restored step by step when the speed of the vehicle exceeds 8 km/h.
3  Rapid windscreen wiping ■ The rear window is wiped once automatically if the windscreen wipers are on
4  Flick windscreen wiping, service position of the wiper arms (spring-loa- when reverse gear is selected.
ded position)
5  Spraying and wiping the windscreen (sprung position) Headlight cleaning system
6  Wiping the rear window  Read and observe and on page 77 first.
7  Spraying and wiping the rear window (sprung position)
A  Depending on equipment fitted: To clean the headlights, the headlamp is also sprayed after every ten squirts. 

▶ To set the wiper interval for the windscreen

▶ Sensitivity setting of the automatic wiping with rain
By setting the switch in the direction of the arrow wipers sweep more of-
ten.

78 Using the system

The headlight washer system works under the following conditions. Interior mirror dimming
 The ignition is switched on.
 The low beam is switched on.
 The outside temperature is about -12° C to +39° C.
To ensure the correct functioning of the system, even in winter, this needs to
be regularly cleared of snow and ice, e.g. free with a de-icing spray.

Rear mirror

 Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Fig. 69 Interior mirror: manual dimming/auto-dimming/light sensor
Interior mirror dimming 79
Exterior mirrors 80  Read and observe on page 79 first.

WARNING Mirrors with manual dimming » Fig. 69

■ Convex (curved outward) or aspheric exterior mirrors increase the field of 1 Basic position of the mirror
vision. They do, however, make objects appear smaller in the mirror. These 2 Mirror blackout
mirrors are therefore only of limited use for estimating distances to the fol-
Mirror with automatic dimming » Fig. 69
lowing vehicles.
■ Whenever possible use the interior mirror for estimating the distances to A Warning light - lights when dimming is activated
the following vehicles. B Switch for the activation of the automatic mirror dimming
C Light sensor
WARNING D Light sensor on the back of the mirror
The mirrors with automatic dimming contain an electrolyte liquid which can Mirror with automatic dimming
escape if mirror glass is broken. If the automatic dimming is enabled, the mirror dims automatically depending
■ The leaking electrolytic fluid can irritate the skin, eyes and breath appara-
on the light falling on the sensors.
tus.
■ If your eyes or skin come into contact with the electrolytic fluid, immedi- When the interior lights are switched on or the reverse gear is engaged, the
ately wash the affected area for a few minutes long with a lot of water. If mirror always moves back into the basic position (not dimmed).
necessary get medical assistance. Do not attach external devices (e.g. navigation systems) on to the windscreen
or in the vicinity of the interior mirror » .

WARNING
■ The illuminated display of an external navigation device can lead to op-
erational faults to the automatic dimming interior mirror – risk of accident.
■ The automatic dimming mirror only functions smoothly if the light falling
on the sensors is not impaired, e.g. by the rear sun roller blind.

Lights and visibility 79

Exterior mirrors Automatically folding in and folding back both exterior mirrors
The exterior mirrors are automatically collapsed after locking the vehicle in the
park position.
Fig. 70
Exterior mirror operation The exterior mirrors are folded out automatically after unlocking the vehicle in
the driving position.
Automatic folding in / out of both mirror housings can be activated or deactiva-
ted in the Infotainment » Owner´s Manual Infotainment, chapter CAR - vehicle
settings.
Mirror with automatic dimming
The exterior mirror blackout is controlled together with the automatic dimming
interior mirror » page 79.
 Read and observe on page 79 first.
Memory function for mirrors
The rotary knob can be moved into the following positions (depending on ve- Applies to vehicles with electrically adjustable driver's seat.
hicle equipment)
It is possible to save the current setting of the exterior mirror when saving the
 Adjust the left mirror
driver's seat position with » page 84, Memory Function of the electrically ad-
 Adjust the right mirror justable seator » page 84, Memory function of the remote control key.
 Switch off mirror control
Fold in passenger's mirror
 Mirror heater
Applies to vehicles with electrically adjustable driver's seat.
 Fold in both mirrors housings, to fold back move the knob to another posi-
tion The passenger-side mirror can be tilted to the stored position to improve the
view to the curb when reversing.
The mirror heating only works when the engine is running.
Operating conditions.
Adjust the position  The function is activated in Infotainment » Owner´s Manual Infotainment,
The mirror can be adjusted to the desired position by moving the knob in the chapter CAR - vehicle settings.
direction of the arrow » Fig. 70.
 The mirror setting has been previously stored, » page 84, Memory Func-
The movement of the mirror surface is identical to the movement of the rotary tion of the electrically adjustable seator » page 84, Memory function of
knob. the remote control key.
If the electrical mirror setting fails at any time, the mirrors can be adjusted by  The reverse gear is engaged.
hand by pressing on the edge of the mirror surface.  The knob for the mirror control is in the position for the passenger mirror
adjustment.
Synchronous adjustment of the mirror
› The synchronous adjustment of the mirrors is activated in the Infotainment The mirror returns to its initial position after the rotary knob is put into anoth-
» Owner´s Manual Infotainment, chapter CAR - vehicle settings. er position or if the speed is more than 15 km/h.
› Turn the knob for the mirror control to the position for the driver mirror ad- WARNING
justment.
› Adjust the mirror to the desired position. Do not touch the exterior mirror surfaces, if the exterior mirror heating is
switched on - hazard of burning. 

80 Using the system

 CAUTION
Seats and head restraints
■ Never adjust exterior mirrors with the fold-in function  by hand - risk of
damaging the electric mirror actuator! Seats and head restraints
■ When the mirror is swung by external influences (due to impact during ma-
noeuvring, for example), then first fold-in the mirror by turning the knob and  Introduction
wait for a loud clapping noise.
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Manually adjusting seats 82
Adjusting the front seats electronically 82
Head restraints - adjusting height 82
Headrests - removing and installing 83
Memory Function of the electrically adjustable seat 84
Memory function of the remote control key 84
WARNING
■ Only adjust the driver's seat when the vehicle is stationary – risk of acci-
dent!
■ Caution when adjusting the seat! You may suffer injuries or bruises as a
result of adjusting the seat without paying proper attention.
■ The electric front seat adjustment is functional even with the ignition off.
Therefore, when leaving the vehicle, never leave people who are not com-
pletely independent, such as children, unattended in the vehicle - there is a
danger of injury!
■ Do not transport any objects on the front passenger seat except objects
(e.g. child safety seat) provided for this purpose – risk of accident!

Note
■ After a certain time, play can develop within the adjustment mechanism of
the backrest angle.
■ For safety reasons, it is not possible to store the seat position in the electric
seat memory and remote control key memory if the inclination angle of the
seat backrest is more than 102° in relation to the seat cushion.
■ Each time you store the position of the electrically adjustable driver's seat
and exterior mirrors, the existing setting is deleted.

Seats and head restraints 81

 Manually adjusting seats  Read and observe on page 81 first.

The seats can be adjusted by the respective operating element being pressed
Fig. 71 in the direction of area of the arrow.
Control elements on the seat
Control elements on the seat » Fig. 72
A seat adjustment
▶ 1 - Move in the longitudinal direction
▶ 2 - Change in inclination
▶ 3 - Change in height
B Adjusting the seat backrest
▶ 4 - Change in inclination

 Read and observe on page 81 first. C Adjusting lumbar support

▶ 5 - Change curvature
The seats can be adjusted by the respective operating element being pulled in ▶ 6 - The degree of curvature change
the direction of arrows, pressed or rotated.
Note
Control elements on the seat » Fig. 71 If the setting procedure is interrupted, you will need to press the operating el-
A Adjusting the seat in the longitudinal direction (after releasing the control ement again.
lever must lock audibly)
B Adjusting the seat height1) Head restraints - adjusting height
C Adjust the tilt of the backrest (do not lean on the backrest when adjusting)
D Setting the extent of the curvature of the lumbar support Fig. 73
Front headrest: moving up and
Adjusting the front seats electronically down 

Fig. 72 Control elements on the seat

1) Only valid for some countries.

82 Using the system

 Headrests - removing and installing

Fig. 74 Rear headrest: moving up/down

 Read and observe on page 81 first. Fig. 75 Rear headrests: removing/fitting

Adjust front support  Read and observe on page 81 first.

› Press and hold the safety button A » Fig. 73. Only the real head restraints may be removed or installed.
› Move the supports into the required position.
Before removing and fitting the headrests, fold the corresponding seat back-
Adjust rear support
rest forward slightly » page 87.
› Grasp the restraint and move upwards in the direction of 1 » Fig. 74.
› In order to push the supports downward, press the safety button B in the Removing
direction of arrow 2 and hold down. › Pull the head restraint out of the seat backrest as far as the stop.
› Press in the support in the direction of arrow 3 . › Press the locking button A in the direction of arrow 1 » Fig. 75 , while at
the same time using a flat screwdriver with a max. width of 5 mm to press
WARNING
the securing button in opening B in the direction of arrow 2 .
Please note the following points about the headrest settings » page 8, Cor- › Remove the restraint in the direction of arrow 3 .
rect and safe seated position.
Fitting
Note › Push the support in the headrest in the direction of arrow 4 until the lock-
ing button clicks into place.
■ The middle rear head restraint is only adjustable in two positions.
■ In sports seats, the headrests are integrated into the seat backrests and can- WARNING
not be adjusted in height. Please note the following points about the headrest settings » page 8, Cor-
rect and safe seated position.

CAUTION
Store the head restraints that were removed in such a way that they cannot
be damaged or soiled.

Note
In sports seats, the headrests are integrated into the seat backrests and can-
not be removed.

Seats and head restraints 83

Memory Function of the electrically adjustable seat Retrieving the saved setting
Press the required memory button B
Ignition Driver's door
» Fig. 76
Fig. 76
Memory buttons and SET button Open Short
Switched off
Closed Long
Open Long
Activated
Closed Long
Stopping the ongoing adjustment
▶ Press any button on the driver's seat or the button  on the remote control
key.
 Read and observe on page 81 first.
Note
The pre-set buttons on the driver's seat make it possible to save the driver's Each time new seat and exterior mirror settings for forward travel are saved,
seat and exterior mirror positions. the passenger exterior mirror setting for reverse travel must also be saved
again.
Each of the three memory buttons B » Fig. 76 can be assigned a set position.
Storing driver's seat and exterior mirror settings for driving forward Memory function of the remote control key
› Switch on the ignition.
› Adjust the seat and the two mirrors to the desired position.  Read and observe on page 81 first.
› Press the  button (Position A » Fig. 76). The automatic storage of the driver's seat position and exterior mirror posi-
› Within 10 seconds after pressing the  button, press the desired memory tions when locking the vehicle can be turned on in the memory of the remote
button B .
control key (hereafter referred to as automatic storage function).
An acknowledgement sound confirms the storage.
This function can also be enabled or disabled in the Infotainment» Owner´s
Saving front passenger mirror settings for reversing Manual Infotainment, chapter CAR - vehicle settings.
The function of lowering the passenger mirror surface when reversing must be
Enable automatic storage
enabled in Infotainment » Owner´s Manual Infotainment, chapter CAR - Vehi-
cle Settings .
› Unlock the vehicle with the remote control key.
› Press and hold any memory button B » Fig. 76 on page 84.
› Switch on the ignition. › After the seat has assumed the position stored under this button, at the
› Press the required memory button B » Fig. 76. same time press the button  on the remote control key within 10 seconds.
› Turn the knob for the external mirror control to the position for the passen- The successful activation of the automatic storage function for each key is
ger side mirror adjustment » page 80.
confirmed by an acoustic signal.
› Engage reverse gear.
› Adjust the front passenger's mirror to the desired position. Storing driver's seat and exterior mirror settings for driving forward
› Disengage reverse gear. › Enable automatic storage.
The set position of the exterior mirror is stored. When automatic storage is activated, the current positions of the driver's seat
and the external mirrors are saved in the memory of the remote control key
each time the vehicle is locked. 

84 Using the system

When the vehicle is next unlocked using the same key, the driver's seat and Seat heaters
the external mirrors assume the positions stored in the memory of this key.
Saving front passenger mirror settings for reversing
The function of lowering the passenger mirror surface when reversing must be
enabled in Infotainment » Infotainment Owner´s Manual , chapter CAR - Vehi-
cle Settings .
› Unlock the vehicle with the relevant remote control key.
› Switch on the ignition.
› Turn the knob for the external mirror control to the position for the passen-
ger side mirror adjustment » page 80.
› Engage reverse gear.
› Adjust the front passenger's mirror to the desired position. Fig. 77 Buttons for heating the front seats/rear seats
› Disengage reverse gear.
The adjusted position of the exterior mirror is stored in the remote control key The seat backrests and surfaces of the front seats and the outer rear seats
memory. can be heated electrically.

Disable the function of automatic storage The seat heating can only be switched on when the engine is running.
› Unlock the vehicle with the remote control key. Buttons for the seat heating » Fig. 77
› Press the  button (Position A » Fig. 76 on page 84) and hold.  Left seat heating
› Press the button  on the remote control key within 10 seconds.  Right seat heating
The successful deactivation of the automatic storage function for each key is
confirmed by an acoustic signal. Switching on
› Press the button  or  » Fig. 77.
Stopping the ongoing adjustment
Pressing once switches the seat heating on at its maximum level.
› Press any button on the driver's seat or the button  on the remote control
key. With repeated pressing of the switch, the intensity of the heating is reduced
until it is switched off.
Seat features The level of the seat heating is indicated by the number of illuminated warning
lights underneath/in the switch.
 Introduction
If the engine is switched off and then turned on again within 10 mins with the
This chapter contains information on the following subjects: driver seat heating switched, then the driver's seat heating is automatically
turned on again. 
Seat heaters 85
Front armrest setting 86
Rear armrest setting 86
Folding front passenger seat 86
Seat backrests 87
Long cargo channel in the rear seat backrest 88

Seats and head restraints 85

 WARNING › Fold down the rear armrest.
If you have a subdued pain and/or temperature sensitivity, e.g. through Move
medication, paralysis or because of chronic illness (e.g. diabetes), we rec- › Move the cover into the desired position in the direction of the arrow B
ommend not to use the seat heating. There may be difficult to heal burns. If » Fig. 78.
the seat heating is used, we recommend to make regular breaks in your
journey when driving long distances, so that the body can recuperate from Note
the stress of the journey. Please consult your doctor, who can evaluate Push the armrest cover all the way back to the stop before applying the hand-
your specific condition. brake.

CAUTION Rear armrest setting

The following instructions must be observed to avoid damage to the seats.
■ Do not kneel on the seats or otherwise apply concentrated pressure to them. Fig. 79
■ Do not turn on any of the seat heaters if seats are not occupied. Fold down armrest
■ Do not switch on the relevant seat heating if the seats have objects attached
to or placed on them, for example a child seat, a bag, etc.
■ When there are additional protective covers or protective covers mounted on
each of the seats, do not turn the seat heating on.

Note
If the on-board voltage decreases, the seat heating switches off automatically
» page 204, Automatic load deactivation.
The armrest can be folded down to increase comfort.
Front armrest setting Lowering / raising
› Pull on the loop A » Fig. 79 and fold down the armrest forward in the direc-
Fig. 78 tion of the arrow.
Adjust armrest Raising takes place in reverse order.

Folding front passenger seat

Fig. 80
Folding the front passenger seat
forward

The armrest is adjustable for height and length.

Lifting
› Lift the armrest in the direction of arrow A into one of the six locking posi-
tions » Fig. 78.
Folding down
The front passenger seat can be folded forward into a horizontal position. 
› Lift the armrest in the direction of arrow A until it stops » Fig. 78.
86 Using the system
Folding forward Seat backrests
› Place the lever in position 1 » Fig. 80.
› Fold the backrest in the direction of the arrow 2 .
The locking mechanism must audibly snap into place.
Folding backwards
› Place the lever in position 1 » Fig. 80.
› Fold the seat backrest in the opposite direction of the arrow 2.
The locking mechanism must audibly snap into place.
WARNING
■ The front passenger airbag should be switched off when transporting ob-
jects on the seat which was folded forwards » page 19. Fig. 81 Fold the seat backrest forwards from the interior/pull the belt for
■ Adjust the seat backrest only when the vehicle is stationary. the side trim
■ When moving the seat backrest, make sure the seat backrest has been
properly secured – check by pulling on the seat backrest.
■ If the seat backrest is folded, passengers may only be transported on the
outer seat behind the driver.
■ When moving the seat backrest, keep limbs away from between the seat
cushion and seat backrest – risk of injury!
■ Never transport the following items on the seat backrest when folded
forwards.
■ Objects that could restrict the driver's view.
■ Objects which make it impossible for the driver to control the vehicle,
e.g. if they roll under the pedals, or could protrude into the driver's zone.
■ Objects which could lead to injury to passengers due to a change of di-
rection or braking manoeuvre when accelerating sharply. Fig. 82 Fold the backrest forward from the luggage compartment: Var-
iant 1/variant 2

The luggage compartment can be increased by folding back the seat. This can
be done either from the interior or of from the luggage compartment.
The seat backrests can also be folded forward individually on vehicles with
divided rear seats.
Before folding the seat backrests forwards, adapt the position of the front
seats in such a way that they are not damaged by the folded seat backrests.
If the front seats are too far back, we recommend that you have the rear head
restraints removed before the seat backrests are folded forward » page 83.
Folding forward from the interior
› Press the release lever
A in the direction of arrow 1 » Fig. 81. 

Seats and head restraints 87

› Fold the backrest in the direction of the arrow 2. CAUTION
In the undivided seat back, press the release handles A on both sides of the ■ Ensure that the seat belts are not damaged when operating the seat backr-
seat back at the same time. ests. Under no circumstances must the rear seat belts be jammed by the fol-
ded back seat backrests.
Folding forward from the luggage compartment ■ Before folding the seat back forward, check whether there are any objects
There is a lever on the left side of the luggage compartment for unlocking the on the rear seat - there is a danger of damaging these items or the seat back
left rear seat backrest. and the seat.
There is a lever on the right side of the luggage compartment for unlocking
the right and the middle rear seat backrests. Long cargo channel in the rear seat backrest
Before folding the seat backrest forward, check that there are no objects on
the rear seat.
On vehicles with a net partition, the left and then the right and middle rear
seat backrest must first be unlocked. The net partition must be rolled up in the
housing.
› Pull the lever in the direction of the arrow » Fig. 82.
The respective seat rest is unlocked and folded forward if applicable.
Folding backwards
› Pull the rear outer seat beltC to the side panel in the direction of arrow 3
Fig. 83 Open the cover: from the interior/from the luggage compartment
» Fig. 81.
› Subsequently, fold back the backrest in the opposite direction of the arrow After folding-up the rear armrest and cover, an opening in the seat backrest
2 until the release handle A clicks into place - by pulling on the seat back-
becomes visible through which the through-loading bag with skis can be push-
rest.
ed.
› Make sure that the red pin B is hidden.
In the undivided seat back, pull the two outer belts to the side panel. The re- Opening from the interior
lease handles A must be locked audibly on both sides of the seat backrest. › Fold the rear armrest down (not as far as the stop) » Fig. 79 on page 86.
The red pen B should not be visible on any of the two sides of the seat back. › Pull the handle A in the direction of the arrow » Fig. 83 and fold the cover
forwards.
WARNING
Opening from the boot
If rear seats are occupied, make sure that the respective seat backrests
■
are properly engaged.
› Push the unlock button B in the direction of the arrow » Fig. 83 and fold the
cover including the armrest forwards.
■ After folding back the seat back, the seat belts must be ready for use.
■ The seat backrests must be securely locked in position so that no objects Closing
in the luggage compartment can slide into the passenger compartment on › Fold the cover and rear armrest upwards to the stop - the cover must click
sudden braking – risk of injury. into place.
■ When transporting objects in the luggage compartment that has been en-
Ensure that the armrest is always locked into place after closing the cover.
larged by folding the backrest forward, ensure the safety of the passengers
This is apparent as the red field above the unlocking button B » Fig. 83 is not
transported on the other rear seats.
visible from the boot. 

88 Using the system

 WARNING
Transporting and practical equipment
The through-loading channel is only intended for transporting skis that are
placed in a properly secured, through-loading bag. Useful equipment

 Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Car park ticket holder 90
Storage compartment on the driver's side 90
stowage compartments in the doors 90
Storage compartment in the front centre console 91
Cup holders 91
Cigarette lighter 92
Ashtray 92
12-Volt power outlet 93
Waste container 93
Multimedia holder 94
Storage compartment under the front arm rest 95
Glasses compartment 95
Storage compartment on the front passenger side 95
Clothes hook 96
Storage pockets on the backs of the front seats 96
Storage compartment in the rear centre console 97
230-volt socket 97
Removable through-loading bag 98
AUX and USB inputs 99
WARNING
■ Do not place anything on the dash panel. These objects might slide or fall
down when driving (when accelerating, cornering or with an incorrect driv-
ing action) and may distract you from concentrating on the traffic – there is
the risk of an accident.
■ When driving, ensure that no objects from the centre console or from oth-
er storage compartments can get into the driver's footwell. You would not
be able to brake, operate the clutch pedal or accelerate - danger of causing
an accident! 

Transporting and practical equipment 89

 WARNING (Continued)  Read and observe on page 89 first.
■ No objects should be placed in the storage compartments nor in the
Opening
drinks holders; the vehicle occupants could be endangered if there is sud-
den braking or the vehicle collides with something.
› Raise the handle and open out the compartment in the direction of the arrow
» Fig. 85.
■ Ash, cigarettes, cigars and the like. may only be placed in the ashtray!
Closing
Car park ticket holder
› Swivel the lid against the direction of the arrow until it clicks into place.
WARNING
Fig. 84 The storage compartment must always be closed when driving for safety
Parking ticket holder reasons.

stowage compartments in the doors

 Read and observe on page 89 first.

The parking ticket holder » Fig. 84 is designed e.g. for securing car park tickets.
WARNING
The attached note has to always be removed before starting off in order
not to restrict the driver's vision.
Fig. 86 Storage compartments: in the front door/in the rear door

Storage compartment on the driver's side  Read and observe on page 89 first.

Storage compartments » Fig. 86

Fig. 85
A Storage compartment in the front door
Opening the storage compart-
ment B Bottle storage compartment with a capacity of max. 1.5 l in the front door
C Storage compartment in the rear door
D Bottle storage compartment with a capacity of max. 0.5 l in the rear door

WARNING
The storage compartment A » Fig. 86 is to be used exclusively for storing
objects which do not project out because there is the danger of limiting the
operating range of the side airbags.

90 Using the system

Storage compartment in the front centre console Phonebox
When the telephone is inserted into the Phonebox, the telephone signal in-
creases in strength by about 20%. This reduces the level of phone battery dis-
charge and the electromagnetic radiation inside the vehicle.
› Place the telephone in the storage compartment B with its back on the in-
duction panel » Fig. 88.
WARNING
■ The storage compartment is not a substitute for the ashtray and must al-
so not be used for such purposes – risk of fire!
■ For safety reasons, the storage compartment must always be closed
when driving.
Fig. 87 Open the open storage compartment / storage compartment
CAUTION
■ The Phonebox cannot be used as an alternative to connecting the telephone
Fig. 88 with the Infotainment.
Phonebox ■ Protective cases or cases around the telephone placed in the storage com-
partment may interfere with the telephone signal strength.
■ Metallic objects such as coins or keys under the telephone can affect the tel-
ephone signal strength.

Cup holders

 Read and observe on page 89 first.

Storage compartment in the front centre console » Fig. 87

 Open
 Lockable
The storage compartment is provided for storing small items.
The lockable storage compartment contains an induction panel that is connec-
ted to the GSM antenna - the Phonebox » Fig. 88.
Fig. 89 Cup holder: front/rear
Open/close
› Press on the fuel filler flap in the direction of the arrow » Fig. 87 - .  Read and observe on page 89 first.
Closing takes place in reverse order.
Two beverage containers can be placed into the cup holder. 

Transporting and practical equipment 91

Placement of the cup holders » Fig. 89 WARNING
A In the front centre console ■ The cigarette lighter also works if the ignition is switched off. When leav-
B In the rear armrest ing the vehicle, never leave persons who are not completely independent,
such as children, unattended in the vehicle. These could operate the lighter
WARNING and get burned, start a fire or damage the interior.
■ Do not use any cups or beakers which are made of brittle material (e.g. ■ Take care when using the cigarette lighter! Improper usage can case
glass, porcelain). This could lead to injuries in the event of an accident. burns.
■ Never put hot cups in the cup holder. If the vehicle moves, they may spill –
risk of scalding! Note
■ No objects should be placed in the holders that might endanger the vehi-
The cigarette lighter socket can also be used as a 12 volt socket.
cle's occupants if the vehicle brakes suddenly or the vehicle is in collision.
Ashtray
CAUTION
Do not leave open beverage containers in the cup holder during the journey.
There is a risk of spilling e.g. when braking which may cause damage to the
electrical components or seat upholstery.

Cigarette lighter

Fig. 90
Cigarette lighter

Fig. 91 Remove front ashtray / open rear ashtray / remove rear ashtray
insert

 Read and observe on page 89 first.

The ashtray can be used for discarding ash, cigarettes, cigars and the like » .
 Read and observe on page 89 first.
Removing/inserting the front ash tray
Use › When removing, do not hold the ashtray on the cover.
› Press the igniter in as far as the stop » Fig. 90. › Pull out the ashtray in the direction of the arrow » Fig. 91 - .
› Wait until the igniter pops out. Insertion takes place in reverse order.
› Remove the glowing igniter and use immediately.
› Place the cigarette lighter back into the socket. Removing/inserting the rear ashtray insert
› Pull the upper part of the well and open the ashtray in the direction of arrow
1 » Fig. 91 -  .
› Grasp the insert in the area marked with the arrows and remove it in the di-
rection of arrow 2 » Fig. 91 - . 

92 Using the system

The insertion of the insert and closing of the ashtray is carried out in reverse WARNING
order. Instructions for devices connected to the sockets.
■ Safely stow all devices during the journey to prevent them from being
WARNING
thrown around the interior in the event of a sudden braking manoeuvre or
Never place hot or flammable objects in the ashtray – risk of fire!
an accident – risk of death!
■ The devices may warm up during operation – risk of injury or fire! If the
12-Volt power outlet device becomes too hot, switch it off and disconnect it from the power sup-
ply immediately.

WARNING
When using the 12-volt sockets, the following notes are to be observed.
■ The socket also works if the ignition is switched off. When leaving the ve-
hicle, never leave persons who are not completely independent, such as
children, unattended in the vehicle.
■ Improper use of the power sockets and the electrical accessories can
cause fires, burns and other serious injuries.

CAUTION
Fig. 92 Cover of the 12 volt power outlet: in the front centre console/ in
■ The sockets can only be used for the connection of approved electrical ac-
the boot
cessories with a total power consumption of up to 120 watts, otherwise the
 Read and observe on page 89 first. electrical system of the vehicle may be damaged.
■ Connecting appliances when the engine is not running will drain the battery
Overview of the 12-volt socket » Fig. 92 of the vehicle!
■ Switch off the devices connected to the power sockets before you switch
 In the front centre console
the ignition on or off and before starting the engine, to avoid damage from
 In the luggage compartment
voltage fluctuations.
Use
› Remove the socket cover » Fig. 92 - . Waste container
Or
› Open the socket cover » Fig. 92 - .
› Connect the plug for the electrical appliance to the socket.

Fig. 93 Waste container: inserting and moving/opening 

Transporting and practical equipment 93

 Note
We recommend that you use 20x30 cm bags.

Multimedia holder

Fig. 95
Multimedia holder

Fig. 94 Replacing the bags

 Read and observe on page 89 first.

The waste container can be inserted into the slots in the doors.
Insert waste container
 Read and observe on page 89 first.
› Position the waste container at the front edge of the slot. Multimedia holder » Fig. 95
› Push the waste container to the back in the direction of the arrow 1 A Storage compartment for storing two coins
» Fig. 93.
B Storage compartment for storing the vehicle key
› Move the waste container in the direction of the arrows as required 2 .
C Storage compartment for storing a mobile phone
Remove the waste container
Depending on the equipment, the multimedia holder may only be accessible
› Remove the waste container in the opposite direction to the arrow 1 via storage compartment C .
» Fig. 93.
Open/close waste container WARNING
› Remove the cover in the direction of arrow 3 » Fig. 93. Never use the multimedia holder as an ashtray - risk of fire!
Closing takes place in reverse order.
Replace bags
› Remove the waste container from the slot.
› Press the two locking lugs on the frame in the direction of arrow 4 » Fig. 94.
› Pull the bag together with the frame down in the direction of arrow 5 .
› Remove the bag from the frame.
› Pull the new bag through the frame and pull it over the frame in the direction
of arrow 6 .
› Place the bag containing the frame in the direction of arrow 7 into the con-
tainer body, so that the two lugs engage audibly to the frame.
WARNING
Never use the waste container as an ashtray - risk of fire!

94 Using the system

Storage compartment under the front arm rest Closing
› Swivel the lid of the glasses storage box against the direction of the arrow
» Fig. 97 until it audibly clicks into place.
Fig. 96
Opening the storage compart- WARNING
ment The compartment must only be opened when removing or inserting
glasses, and otherwise must be kept closed – risk of injury.

CAUTION
■ Do not put any heat-sensitive objects in the glasses storage box - with high
temperatures there is risk of damage.
■ The box must be closed before leaving and locking the vehicle – risk of im-
 Read and observe on page 89 first. pairment to the functions of the anti-theft alarm system.
Opening
Storage compartment on the front passenger side
› Pull the armrest on the handle A in the direction of the arrow » Fig. 96.
Closing
› Raise the armrest in the direction of the arrow » Fig. 96 until it stops.
› Fold the armrest in the opposite direction of the arrow.
WARNING
For safety reasons, the storage compartment should not be opened to an
end stop while driving.

Glasses compartment
Fig. 98 Tray open / operating air supply
Fig. 97
Opening the glasses storage box  Read and observe on page 89 first.

A pen and credit card holder is provided in the stowage compartment.

The storage compartment is equipped with an inner light that illuminates
when opening and closing the storage compartment.
Opening
› Pull the cover handle in the direction of the arrow 1 » Fig. 98 and fold down
the cover.
 Read and observe on page 89 first.
Closing
Opening › Swing the flap up opposite to the arrow direction 2 » Fig. 98 until it clicks
› Press on the lid of the glasses storage box in area A » Fig. 97. into place. 
The cover folds in the arrow direction.

Transporting and practical equipment 95

Air supply operation WARNING
The air supply can be operated by turning the rotary switch in the direction of ■ Never leave any heavy or sharp-edged objects in the pockets of the items
arrow A as far as the stop » Fig. 98. of clothing hung up.
 Opening ■ To hang the clothes do not use hangers - there is a risk of limiting the ef-
 Closing fectiveness of head airbags.
■ Ensure that any clothes hanging from the hooks do not impair your vision
Opening the air supply when the air conditioning system is switched on allows
to the rear.
cooled air to flow into the storage compartment.
Opening the air inlet when the air conditioning system is on causes fresh or in-
terior air to flow into the storage compartment. Storage pockets on the backs of the front seats

WARNING Fig. 100

The storage compartment must always be closed when driving for safety Map pockets
reasons.

Note
If not using the air supply in the storage compartment we recommend that you
leave the air supply closed.

Clothes hook
 Read and observe on page 89 first.
Fig. 99 The storage pockets » Fig. 100 are intended for the storage of maps, maga-
Clothes hooks zines, etc.
WARNING
Never put heavy items in the map pockets – risk of injury!

CAUTION
Never put large objects in the map pockets, e.g. bottles or objects with sharp
edges - risk of damaging the pockets and seat coverings.
 Read and observe on page 89 first.

The clothes hooks are located on the middle door pillars of the vehicle and on
the handle of the headliner above each of the rear doors » Fig. 99.
The maximum permissible load of each of the hooks is 2 kg.

96 Using the system

Storage compartment in the rear centre console The socket only works if the ignition is switched on.
Use
Fig. 101 › Open the cover in the direction of the arrow » Fig. 102.
Opening the storage compart- › Connect the plug for the electrical appliance to the socket.
ment When plugging in the connector the child safety lock is unlocked and the out-
let is activated.
Warning light
Display indicator light Meaning
Illuminates green The power socket is activated.
Flashes red The power socket is temporarily deac-
 Read and observe on page 89 first.
tivated.
Open/close The socket may be automatically deactivated for the following reasons
› Pull the handle on the upper section of the recess and open out the com- ▶ Excessive current.
partment in the direction of the arrow » Fig. 101. ▶ Low battery charge state.
▶ High socket temperature.
Closing takes place in reverse order.
If disabling reasons no longer exist, the socket is automatically activated. Then
WARNING
re-activate connected devices which are switched on » .
Never use the storage compartment as an ashtray - risk of fire!
WARNING
230-volt socket ■ Improper use can lead to serious injury or fire. When leaving the vehicle,
never leave persons who are not completely independent, such as children,
unattended in the vehicle.
Fig. 102 ■ Do not pour liquids into the power socket – risk of death! If fluid does
Open the cover of the 230 volt manage to get into the power socket, completely dry out the socket before
power outlet reuse.
■ Safely stow away all connected devices during the journey to prevent
them from being thrown around the interior in the event of a sudden brak-
ing manoeuvre or an accident – risk of death!
■ The connected devices may warm up during operation – risk of injury or
fire! If the device becomes too hot, switch it off and disconnect it from the
power supply immediately.
 Read and observe on page 89 first. ■ The child lock on the power socket is unlocked when using adapters and
extension cables which carry volts – risk of injury!
The 230-volt socket (hereinafter referred to as a socket) is provided for the ■ Do no insert any conductive objects into the contacts of the power sock-
connection of approved electrical accessories with a two-pin 230-volt plug and et, e.g. knitting needs – risk of death! 
a total power consumption of up to 150 watts.
The socket is located in the rear centre console » Fig. 102.

Transporting and practical equipment 97

 CAUTION › Fold the rear armrest and the cover in the seat backrest downwards
■ The power socket can only be used for connecting approved electrical acces- » page 88.
sories with a two-pin 230V plug, with a total power uptake of up to 150 watt. › Place the empty, through-loading bag in the opening in such a way that the
■ Place the connector on the electrical device into the power socket as far as it end of the bag with the zip is in the boot.
can go to create a connection between the contacts. › Push the skis into the through-loading bag from the boot » .
■ If the connector of the electrical device is not inserted fully into the power › Close the through-loading bag.
socket, the child safety lock might release, and the power socket be activated. Securing the through-loading bag and skis
The electrical device is still not supplied with power.
■ The socket is temporarily disabled at engine start-up and the indicator light
› Tighten the strap A on the free end around the skis in front of the bindings
» Fig. 103.
flashes red. After starting the engine, the power socket is re-activated auto- › Fold the seat backrest a little forward.
matically.
■ Do not connect any lamps with neon filaments to the power socket - risk of
› Guide the securing strap B through the opening in the seat backrest around
the upper part of the seat backrest.
damaging the lamp.
■ A larger current surge may arise in some power supplies (e.g. for notebooks)
› Then push the seat backrest back into the upright position until the unlock-
ing button clicks into place - check by pulling on the seat backrest.
when connecting them to the power socket- this will automatically deactivate
the power socket. In this case, disconnect the power supply from the consum-
› Insert the securing strap B into the lock C until it clicks into place.
er and connect the power supply to the power socket first, followed by the WARNING
consumer. ■ After placing skis into the through-loading bag, you must secure the bag
■ The connected appliances may behave differently to when connected to the with the securing strap B » Fig. 103.
mains. ■ The strap A must hold the skis tight.
■ Make sure that the strap A holds all skis in front of the binding (see also
Removable through-loading bag the text on the through-loading bag).
■ The total weight of the skis which are transported must not exceed
24 kg.

CAUTION
■ Never fold and stow the through-loading bag when it is wet - risk of damag-
ing the through-loading bag.
■ The through-loading bag is designed for the transportation of up to four
pairs of skis.
■ Place the skis with the tips facing to the front and the sticks with the tips
facing to the rear. into the through-loading bag.

Fig. 103 Tighten ribbon / secure through-loading bag

 Read and observe on page 89 first.

The removable through-loading bag (hereinafter referred to as a through-load-

ing bag) is used exclusively for transporting skis.
Stowing the through-loading bag and skis
› Open the boot lid.
98 Using the system
AUX and USB inputs Install/remove

Fig. 104
Installation locations of the AUX
and USB inputs

 Read and observe on page 89 first. Fig. 105 Position adapter/install holder

The AUX input is above the storage compartment in the front centre console
and is identified with the  mark » Fig. 104.
The MDI input is above the storage compartment in the front centre console
and is identified by the symbol .
Additional information» Owner´s Manual Infotainment.

Multimedia holder

 Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects: Fig. 106 Remove holder/remove adapter

Install/remove 99
 Read and observe on page 99 first.
Handle holder 100
External devices (e.g. tablet, smartphone, etc.) measuring min. 122 mm and Fitting
max. 195 mm can be secured in the support. › Attach the opened adapter to the guide rods of the headrest » Fig. 105.
› Clip in the adapter in the direction of arrow 1 » .
The maximum permissible load of the holder is 750 g. › Clip the holder in the direction of arrow 2 into the adapter.
CAUTION Removing
Never exceed the maximum permissible load of the holder - there is a risk of › Pull on the locking strap A in the direction of arrow 3 » Fig. 106.
damage or functional impairment. › Remove the holder from the bracket in the direction of arrow 4 .
› Press the adapter and remove from the guide rods of the headrest in the di-
rection of arrow 5 .
WARNING
Carefully clip in the adapter - there is a risk of injuring your finger.

Transporting and practical equipment 99

Handle holder Multifunction pocket 102
Folding double hooks 103
Foldable hook 103
Floor covering 103
Floor covering on both sides 103
Luggage net 104
Luggage compartment cover 104
Roll-up cover 105
Storage compartment with cargo element 106
Storage compartments under the floor covering 106
Multi-function pocket 107
Fig. 107 Tilt and rotate holder Class N1 vehicles 107
When transporting cargo the following the instructions must be adhered to
Fig. 108 ▶ When transporting heavy objects, the driving characteristics change due to
Adjust holder size the shift in centre-of-gravity. The speed and style of driving must be adjus-
ted accordingly.
▶ The cargo is stowed in the luggage compartment. To prevent this from mov-
ing it should be secured with suitable lashing straps to the lashing eyes or
secured with fixing nets.
▶ Distribute loads as evenly as possible.
▶ Place heavy objects as far forward as possible.
▶ The items carried in the luggage compartment must be stored in such a way
that no objects are able to slip forward if any sudden driving or braking ma-
 Read and observe on page 99 first. noeuvres are undertaken – risk of injury!
▶ Tyre pressure is to match the load.
Tilt and rotate holder ▶ When transporting loads in the luggage compartment that has been en-
The holder may be tilted 30° in the direction of arrow 1 and rotated through larged by folding the rear seats forward, ensure the safety of the passengers
360° in the direction of arrow 2 » Fig. 107. transported on the other rear seats .
Adjust holder size In the event of an accident, even small and light objects gain so much kinetic
› Pull out the securing tab A in the direction of arrow 3 and move part B in energy that they can cause severe injuries.
direction of arrow 4 to the desired position » Fig. 108.
The magnitude of the kinetic energy is dependent on the speed at which the
vehicle is travelling and the weight of the object.
Luggage compartment and transport of cargo
Example: In the event of a frontal collision at a speed of 50 km/h, an object
 Introduction with a weight of 4.5 kg produces an energy, which corresponds to 20 times its
own weight. This means that it results in a weight of approx. 90 kg “ ”.
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Luggage compartment light
Fastening elements 101 The warning light turns on when tailgate is opened. 
Fixing nets 102

100 Using the system

The warning light turns off when the tailgate is closed.
If the boot lid is open and the ignition switched off, the light will extinguish
automatically after around 10 minutes.

WARNING
■ Never exceed the maximum permissible load of the respective fasteners,
nets, hooks etc. as heavy objects are not e sufficiently secured - there is a
risk of injury!
■ If the cargo is tied down with unsuitable or damaged lashing straps, inju-
ries can occur in the event of braking manoeuvres or accidents.
■ Loose cargo can be thrown forward during a sudden manoeuvre or in case Fig. 110 Fastening elements: Variant 3/variant 4
of an accident and can injure the occupants or other road users.
■ Loose cargo could hit a deployed airbag and injure occupants – danger of  Read and observe and on page 101 first.
death!
The fasteners are located on both sides of the luggage compartment.
CAUTION The maximum permissible static load of the individual lashing eyes C and E
■ Never exceed the maximum permissible load of the respective fasteners, is 350 kg.
nets, hooks etc. - these could be damaged. The maximum permissible load of the individual lashing eyes is D is 150 kg.
■ Make sure that transported objects with sharp edges do not damage the
threads of the following devices. Overview of the fastening elements » Fig. 109 and » Fig. 110
■ Rear window heater. A Fasteners for securing fastening nets and multifunction pocket
■ Rear window with an integrated antenna. B Lashing eyes only for fastening fixing nets
■ Integrated antenna in the rear side windows. C Lashing eyes for fastening of cargo and fastening nets (in variant 1, the
rear and centre eye is additionally provided for securing the multifunction-
Fastening elements al bag)
D Lashing eyes for fastening cargo and fastening nets
E Lashing eyes for fastening cargo and fastening nets
The lashing eyelet B is located behind the folding rear seat backrest .

Fig. 109 Fastening elements: Variant 1/variant 2 (G-TEC)

Transporting and practical equipment 101

Fixing nets CAUTION
■ Do not place any sharp objects in the nets – risk of damaging the net.
■ For vehicles with lashing eyes D » Fig. 109 on page 101, only the following
nets can be attached.
■ Horizontal pocket behind the seats.
■ Floor net, which can be attached to the rear fastening elements
A » Fig. 109 on page 101 in the rear area.

Multifunction pocket

Fig. 113
Securing the multifunction pock-
Fig. 111 Fastening examples for nets et

Fig. 112
Fastening example for vertical
pockets

 Read and observe and on page 101 first.

The pocket » Fig. 113 can be secured to the fastening elements A and the rear
and centre lashing eyes C » Fig. 109 on page 101.
The maximum permissible load for the bag attached to the fastening element
 Read and observe and on page 101 first. is 3 kg.
Fastening examples for nets » Fig. 111 CAUTION
A Horizontal pocket In vehicles with a variable loading floor, it is not possible to attach the bag to
B Floor net the fastening elements.
C Vertical pocket
The maximum permissible load of each of the nets is 1.5 kg.
If the vehicle is equipped with the variable loading floor and this is in the upper
position, then the lashing eyes E » Fig. 110 on page 101 can be used for attach-
ing the nets.

102 Using the system

Folding double hooks Fold down hooks
› Press on the lower portion of the hook A and then fold it in direction of the
arrow » Fig. 115.
Fig. 114
Folding double hooks
Floor covering

 Read and observe and on page 101 first.

The folding double hook » Fig. 114 is used to fasten small items of luggage, e.g.
bags.
The folding double hook can be located on either of the two sides of the lug- Fig. 116 Fixing the floor covering: Version 1 / version 2
gage compartment, according to the model.
 Read and observe and on page 101 first.
An item of luggage with a maximum weight of 5 kg can be attached to each
side of the double hook. Fastening options for the flooring » Fig. 116
 With the loop on a hook on the luggage compartment cover
Foldable hook  With the hook on the frame of the luggage compartment lid

Fig. 115 CAUTION

Fold down hooks The floor covering can be fixed with Version 2 only if the variable loading floor
is folded in the upper position » Fig. 128 on page 108.

Floor covering on both sides

 Read and observe and on page 101 first.

You can fit a double-sided floor covering in the luggage compartment.

One side of the double-sided floor covering is made of fabric, the other side is
 Read and observe and on page 101 first.
washable (easy to maintain).
Foldable hooks for hanging small items of luggage, such as bags, etc., are pro- The washable side is used to transport wet or dirty items.
vided on both sides of the luggage compartment.
CAUTION
The maximum permissible load of the hook is 7 kg.
The double sided floor covering can only be used in vehicles without the varia-
ble loading floor » page 107 - There is a risk of damage to the variable loading
floor. 

Transporting and practical equipment 103

 Note
Fig. 119
For easier turning of the covering, use the loop attached. Luggage compartment cover
stowed behind the rear seats
Luggage net

Fig. 117
Luggage net

 Read and observe and on page 101 first.

If the support straps A » Fig. 118 are attached to the boot lid, then opening
the lid will raise the boot lid cover (hereafter referred to as cover).
If you want to carry bulky goods, the cover can be removed from the vehicle,
 Read and observe and on page 101 first.
and may be stowed behind the rear seat backrests » Fig. 119.
The net at the bottom of the luggage compartment cover » Fig. 117 is provided Removing
for transporting light and soft items. › On both sides of the boot lid unhook the straps A in direction of arrow 1
The maximum permissible load of the net is 1.5 kg. » Fig. 118.
› Hold the raised cover.
CAUTION › Press on the two sides to the underside of the cover in the region of the
Do not place any sharp objects into the net – risk of net damage. mounts C .
› Remove the cover in the direction of the arrow 2 .
Luggage compartment cover Installing
› Place the cover on the contact surfaces of the side trim panel.
› Place the fixtures B on the cover above the brackets C on the side trim
» Fig. 118.
› Press on the two sides to the upper side of the cover in the region of the
mounts C .
The fixtures B must completely lock into place in the mounts C on both sides
of the luggage compartment.
› On both sides of the boot lid hook the straps A in the opposite direction of
arrow 1 .

Fig. 118 Remove the luggage compartment cover WARNING

No objects should be placed on the cover. This could endanger the vehicle
occupants during sudden braking or vehicle impact. 

104 Using the system

 CAUTION  Read and observe and on page 101 first.
■When closing the boot lid, jamming and damage to the cover or the side trim
Extending
panel can occur if handled incorrectly. The following guidelines must be ob-
served. › Grasp the cover on the handle A and pull it out in the direction of the arrow
1 until it clicks » Fig. 120.
■ The recesses in the cover B » Fig. 118 must lock in the holders in the side
trim panel C . Retracting
■ The items which are transported must not exceed the height of the cover. › Push the cover in the area of handle A in the direction of the arrow 2
■ The cover must not be jammed in the surrounding seal of the luggage com- » Fig. 120.
partment lid when it is in the raised position.
■ There must be no object in the gap between the cover in the raise position
The cover rolls up automatically.
and the rear backrest. Removing/inserting
The fully rolled luggage compartment cover can be removed.
Roll-up cover › Press on the side of the cross bar in the direction of arrow 3 and remove
the cover in the arrow direction 4 » Fig. 120.
Insertion takes place in reverse order.
Stowage
If the vehicle is equipped with the variable loading floor, then the removable
roll-up luggage compartment cover can be stowed in the recesses of the lug-
gage compartment side trim.
› Fold the variable loading floor into the upper position » page 108.
› Remove the side covers of the luggage compartment in the direction of the
arrow 1 » Fig. 121.
Fig. 120 Roll-up cover: pull out/roll/remove › Remove the roll-up luggage compartment cover » Fig. 120.
› Insert the front part of the roll-up luggage compartment cover under a por-
tion of the side trim D » Fig. 121 on the left.
› Fold the rear part of the roll-up luggage compartment cover in the direction
of arrow 2 » .
› Replace the side trims of the luggage compartment in the opposite direction
of the arrow 1 .
› Fold out the variable loading floor to the upper position » page 108.
WARNING
No objects should be placed on the foldable boot cover. This could endan-
ger the vehicle occupants during sudden braking or vehicle impact.

Fig. 121 Remove the side panels of the luggage compartment/stow the CAUTION
roll-up luggage compartment cover If you want to stow the roll-up luggage compartment cover and the roof rack
at the same time, then it is necessary that the rear part of the roll-up luggage
compartment is covering the rear roof rack.

Transporting and practical equipment 105

Storage compartment with cargo element Secure load
› Remove the cargo element (part of the storage compartment cover) in the di-
rection of the arrow » Fig. 123- .
Fig. 122 › Attach the Cargo element with Velcro to the rear seats on the floor of the
Remove storage compartment luggage compartment » Fig. 123 -  or attach to the fabric side of the dou-
ble-sided floor covering.
CAUTION
When using the storage compartment, take care not to damage it or the lug-
gage compartment lining.

Storage compartments under the floor covering

Fig. 123 Removing cargo element/example on how to mount the load by Fig. 124 Lift floor covering/storage compartments under the floor cover-
means of the cargo element ing

 Read and observe and on page 101 first.  Read and observe and on page 101 first.

The storage compartment with cargo element may be located on either of the The storage compartments B » Fig. 124 are located under the floor covering
two sides of the luggage compartment, depending on the equipment variant. of the luggage compartment in vehicles without a spare wheel.
The space behind the storage compartment is designed for storing small ob- Every storage compartment B is designed for storing small objects of up to 15
jects with a maximum total weight of 2.5 kg. kg. in weight in total.
The cargo element is designed for attaching objects with a maximum total Transport of cargo
weight of 8 kg. › Dividing the luggage compartment with variable loading floor » page 109.
Storage compartment cover removal/fitting
› Remove the fog floor covering in the direction of the arrow » Fig. 124.
› Remove the storage compartment cover in the direction of the arrow › Fix the hook A to the top edge of the variable loading floor.
» Fig. 122. It is possible also to store objects with larger heights in the storage compart-
ments B , thereby using the maximum height of the luggage compartment. 
Insertion takes place in reverse order.

106 Using the system

 CAUTION › Place the rear bar onto the two hooks that are folded forward in the direc-
■The following instructions must be observed to avoid damage to the storage tion of the arrow 3 all the way to the stop.
compartments. Pushing in
■ Do not stored any sharp objects in the storage compartments.
› Remove the rear bar from the hook in the direction of the arrow 4 » Fig. 125.
■ Do not place any point-pressure in the storage compartment.
› Push in the pocket in the direction of the arrow 5 .
■ Carefully place the items in the storage compartments.
› Place the rear bar against the front bar and press them together at both
ends B .
Multi-function pocket › The front hooks on both sides of the luggage compartment fold back oppo-
site to the direction of arrow 1 .
Removing/inserting
 The roll-up cargo cover must be removed.
› Remove the pocket from the fittings in the direction of the arrow 6
» Fig. 125.
Insertion takes place in reverse order.
› When inserting, push the end of the bar marked   into the right receptacle
and the end of the bar marked   into the left receptacle. The arrows should
be pointing forward.

Class N1 vehicles
 Read and observe and on page 101 first.

In class N1 vehicles that are not fitted with a protective grille, a lashing set that
complies with the EN 12195 standard (1-4) must be used for fastening the load.
Proper functioning of the electrical installation is essential for safe vehicle op-
eration. It is important to ensure that the electrical installation is not damaged
during the adjustment process or when the storage area is being loaded and
Fig. 125 Multifunction pocket: pull out/insert/push in/remove unloaded.
 Read and observe and on page 101 first.
Variable loading floor in the luggage compartment (Estate)
The multifunction pocket (hereinafter referred to as pocket) is provided for
storing clothing and light objects with no sharp edges.  Introduction
The maximum permissible load of the multifunction box is 3 kg. This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Removal and fitting Positions of the variable loading floor 108
› Fold down the front hooks on both sides of the luggage compartment in the Fold up variable loading floor 108
direction of arrow 1 » Fig. 125. Dividing the luggage compartment 109 
› Grasp the rear bar A with both hands and withdraw the pocket in arrow di-
rection 2 .

Transporting and practical equipment 107

The maximum permissible load of the variable loading floor is 75 kg. For the After an audible click, the variable loading floor can be stowed in the upper po-
transport of heavy loads, adjust the variable loading floor in the lower position sition by pushing it forward.
» Fig. 127 on page 108.
The space available below the variable loading floor can be used for stowing
objects such as the removed roll-up luggage compartment cover » page 105,
Positions of the variable loading floor the roof cross bars » page 111 etc.
Set into the lower position
› Check that there are no objects in the space under the variable loading floor.
› Grasp the rear of the variable loading floor by the handle A » Fig. 127.
› Lift the variable loading floor about 10 cm in the direction of the arrow 2
and pull it back in the direction of the arrow 3 .
The variable loading floor moves automatically to the lower position where it
can be stored by pressing it forward.

Fold up variable loading floor

Fig. 126 Set variable loading floor to the upper position / variable loading
floor in the upper position

Fig. 128 Fold up variable loading floor / folded variable cargo floor in the
upper position

Fig. 127 Set variable loading floor to the lower position / variable loading The variable loading floor can be folded up in both the lower and the upper po-
floor in the lower position sition.
› Grasp the rear of the variable loading floor by the handle A » Fig. 128 and lift
The variable loading floor can be set to the upper or lower position. in the direction of the arrow 1 .
Set to the upper position
› Fold up the variable loading floor by moving it in the direction of the arrow
2.
› Grasp the rear of the variable loading floor by the handle A » Fig. 126.
› Lift the variable loading floor about 20 cm, pull it to yourself and raise it in
the direction of the arrow 1 to the level of the roll-up luggage compartment
cover until it clicks.

108 Using the system

Dividing the luggage compartment Using the net partition

Fig. 129
Dividing the boot with variable
loading floor

The luggage compartment can be divided with the variable loading floor in the Fig. 130 Open part of the roll-up luggage compartment cover / release
lower and upper position. lever
› Raise the rear of the variable loading floor by the handle A » Fig. 129.
› Push the rear edge of the variable loading floor into the grooves B in the
direction of the arrow.
The variable loading floor is secured against movements in the grooves B .

Net partition

 Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Using the net partition 109
Removing and refitting the net partition housing 110
The net partition can either be extracted from behind the rear seats or behind
the front seats. Fig. 131 Net partition behind the front seats in the pulled-out state
This chapter describes the procedure for extracting and rolling up the net par-
tition behind the rear seats. Removing the net partition behind the rear seats
Installing and removing the net partition from behind the front seats is carried › Fold out part of the roll-up luggage compartment cover A in the direction of
out in a similar way as behind the rear seats. Before pulling out the net parti- the arrow » Fig. 130.
tion, the rear seat backs are to be folded forwards. After rolling up the net par- › Pull out the net partition at the upper crossbar C from the housing D
tition into the housing, the rear seat backs are folded back » page 87. » Fig. 131.
› Hook the crossbar into one of the receptacles E .
› On the other side, press on the crossbar and hook it into the appropriate re-
ceptacle E . 

Transporting and practical equipment 109

If the crossbar is hooked into the receptacle E to the left for example, then Fitting
press on the crossbar in the direction of the arrow 1 and insert into the re- › Insert the recesses on the net partition housing into the mounts on the rear
ceptacle E to the right. seat backrests.
› Make sure that the crossbar is firmly seated in the fittings E . › Push the net partition housing in the opposite direction of the arrow 1
» Fig. 132 as far as the stop.
› Fold back part of the roll-up luggage compartment cover A in the opposite › Fold the rear seats backs into their original position » page 87.
direction of the arrow » Fig. 130.
Using the net partition behind the rear seats Roof rack
› Fold out part of the roll-up luggage compartment cover A in the direction of
the arrow » Fig. 130.  Introduction
› Press on the crossbar and remove it from the receptacles E , first on one
side, then on the other side » Fig. 131. This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
› Hold the crossbar C in such a way that the net partition can slowly roll up fixing points for base support 111
into the housing D without being damaged.
Stowing the roof rack 111
› Fold back part of the roll-up luggage compartment cover A in the opposite Roof load 112
direction of the arrow » Fig. 130.
CAUTION WARNING
If the net partition blocks when pulling it out of the housing, push the release When transporting cargo the following the instructions must be adhered
lever B in the direction of the arrow » Fig. 130. to.
■ The transported items on the roof rack must always be securely attached
– risk of accident!
Removing and refitting the net partition housing ■ Always secure the load with appropriate and undamaged lashing straps
or tensioning straps.
Fig. 132 ■ Distribute the load evenly over the roof rack system.
Removing the net partition ■ When transporting heavy objects or objects which take up a large area on
housing the roof rack system, the handling of the car may change as a result of the
displacement of the centre of gravity. The style of driving and speed must
therefore be adapted to the current circumstances.
■ Avoid abrupt and sudden driving/braking manoeuvres.
■ The permissible roof load, permissible axle loads and gross permissible
weight of the vehicle must not be exceeded under any circumstances – risk
of accident!
Removing
› Fold the rear seat backrests forward » page 87. CAUTION
› Open the rear right door » page 57. ■ On models fitted with a sliding/tilting roof, ensure that the sliding/tilting roof
› Push the net partition housing A in the direction of the arrow 1 and re- does not strike any items of luggage transported on the roof when tilting.
move it from the mounts on the right seat backrests in the direction of the ■ Ensure that the luggage compartment lid does not hit the roof load when
arrow 2 » Fig. 132. opened. 

110 Using the system

■ The height of the vehicle changes after mounting a roof luggage rack system Stowing the roof rack
including the load that is being transported. Compare the vehicle height with
available clearances, such as underpasses and garage doors.
■ Ensure the roof aerial is not impaired by the load being transported.

Note
We recommend that you use a roof rack from ŠKODA Original Accessories.

fixing points for base support

Fig. 134 Remove the side panels of the luggage compartment/stow the
roof rack

 Read and observe and on page 110 first.

With vehicles have the variable loading floor, then the roof racks can be stow-
ed in the recesses of the luggage compartment side trim.

Fig. 133 Attachment points

› Fold the variable loading floor into the upper position » page 108.
› Remove the side covers of the luggage compartment in the direction of the
arrow 1 » Fig. 134.
 Read and observe and on page 110 first.
› Remove the key from the roof rack » .
The mounting points are located on both sides of the vehicle. The removed key can be stowed in recess C .
Arrangement of the mounting points » Fig. 133 › Insert the front roof rack A into the front recesses of the side trim.
A Front attachment points › Insert the rear roof rack B into the rear recesses of the side trim.
B Rear attachment points › Replace the side trims of the luggage compartment in the opposite direction
of the arrow 1 .
The mounting and dismounting of the basic carrier is carried out according to
the instructions provided.
› Fold out the variable loading floor to the upper position » page 108.
CAUTION
■ Before stowing the roof rack, pull out the key from the carrier, otherwise it
could be damaged.
■ If you want to stow the roof rack and the roll-up luggage compartment cover
at the same time, then it is necessary that the rear part of the roll-up luggage
compartment is covering the rear roof rack.

Transporting and practical equipment 111

Roof load Heating and ventilation
 Read and observe and on page 110 first.
Heating, manual air conditioning system, Climatronic
Do not exceed the permissible roof load of 75 kg, this includes the carrier sys-
tem.  Introduction
The full permissible roof load cannot be used if a roof rack system with a lower This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
load carrying capacity is used. The maximum capacity of the carrier system Heating and manual air conditioning 113
should never be exceeded.
Climatronic (automatic air conditioning) 114
Climatronic - automatic operation 115
Air distribution control 115
Air outlet vents 116
The heating and air conditioning ventilate and heat the vehicle interior. The air
conditioning system also cools and dehumidifies the vehicle interior.
The heating effect is dependent upon the coolant temperature, thus full heat
output only occurs when the engine has reached its operating temperature.
The cooling system operates only if the following conditions are met.
 The cooling system is switched on.
 The engine is running.
 The outside temperature is above approx. +2 °C.
 The blower is switched on.
If the cooling system is switched on, the temperature and air humidity drops in
the vehicle. The cooling system prevents the windows from misting up during
the cold season of the year.
It is possible to briefly activate recirculated air mode to enhance the cooling
effect » page 115.
Health protection
To reduce health risks (e.g. common colds), the following instructions for the
use of the cooling system are to be observed.
▶ The difference between the indoor temperature and the outdoor air temper-
ature should not be greater than about 5 ° C.
▶ The cooling system is to be turned off about 10 minutes before the end of
the journey.
▶ Once a year, disinfection of the manual air conditioner or the Climatronic is to
be carried out by a specialist company. 

112 Using the system

 WARNING
■ For your own safety and that of other road users, ensure that all the win-
dows are free of ice, snow and misting. The blower should always be on to
prevent the windows from misting up.
■ Under certain circumstances, air at a temperature of about 5 °C can flow
out of the vents when the cooling system is switched on.

CAUTION
■ The air inlet in front of the windscreen must be free of e.g. ice, snow or
leaves to ensure that the heating and cooling system operates properly.
■ After switching on the cooling Condensation from the evaporator of the air Fig. 136 Controls of the manual air conditioning
conditioning may drip down and form a puddle below the vehicle. This is not a
leak!  Read and observe and on page 113 first.
■ If the coolant temperature is too high, the cooling system is switched off to
ensure that the engine cools down. Individual functions can be set or switched on by turning the dial or pressing
the corresponding key. When the function is switched on, the warning light il-
luminates below the button.
Heating and manual air conditioning
Functions of the individual controls » Fig. 135 and » Fig. 136
A Setting temperature
▶  Lower the temperature
▶  Increase the temperature
B Set the blower speed (Level 0: Fan off, Level 6: highest speed)
C Set the direction of the air outlet » page 116
▶  Air flow to the windows
▶  Air flow to the upper body
▶  Air flow into the footwell and to the body (warmer air directed to the
footwell than to the body)
▶  Air flow in the footwell
Fig. 135 Heating Controls ▶  Air flow to the windows and the footwell
D Depending on equipment fitted:
▶  Auxiliary heating and ventilation on / switch off » page 118
▶  Switching the windscreen heater on/off » page 76
 Control the seat heater on the front left seat » page 85
 Switch the cooling system on/off
 Switch the rear window heater on/off » page 76
 Switch recirculation on/off » page 115
 Control the seat heater on the front right seat » page 85 

Heating and ventilation 113

Information on the cooling system Some functions can also be operated in the infotainment » Owner´s Manual
The cooling system operates only if the following conditions are met Infotainment, chapter Adjustment of the heating and cooling system.
» page 112.
Functions of the individual controls » Fig. 137
The warning light below the button  » Fig. 136 illuminates after activation, A Adjust the temperature for the left side (or for both sides)1)
even if not all of the conditions for the function of the cooling system have ▶  Lower the temperature
been met. The lighting up of the indicator light in the button signals the opera- ▶  Increase the temperature
tional readiness of the cooling system. B Interior temperature sensor
When the air distribution control is turned to position  the cooling system is C Adjust fan speed (the setting is indicated by the number of illuminated
activated. control lamps shown in the knob)
▶ Turn to the left: Reduce speed up to turning off the Climatronic
Note ▶ Turn to the right: Increase speed
During operation of the manual air conditioning, an increase in engine idle D Adjust the temperature for the right side (or for both sides)2)
speed may occur under certain circumstances in order to ensure sufficient ▶  Lower the temperature
heating comfort. ▶  Increase the temperature
E Display the temperature setting for the left side
Climatronic (automatic air conditioning)
F Display the temperature setting for the right side
G Depending on equipment fitted:
▶  Auxiliary heating and ventilation on / switch off » page 118
▶  Switching Climatronic system off »
 Control the seat heater on the front left seat » page 85
 Air flow to the windows
 Air flow to the upper body
 Air flow in the footwell
 Switch recirculation on/off » page 115
 Control the seat heater on the front right seat » page 85
Fig. 137 Controls the Climatronic  Intensive de-icing or ventilation of the windscreen, switching on/off
 Switch the rear window heater on/off » page 76
 Read and observe and on page 113 first.
 Switching the windscreen heater on/off » page 76
The Climatronic in automatic mode ensures the best-possible setting of the  Climatronic set in the Infotainment » Owner´s Manual Infotainment
temperature of the out-flowing air, the blower stage and air distribution.  Synchronize the temperature inside the entire vehicle according to the
Individual functions can be set or switched on by turning the dial or pressing temperature setting on the driver's side
the corresponding key. When the function is switched on, a warning light  Switching automatic mode on » page 115
lights up within or below the button.  Switch the cooling system on/off 

1) Applies to left-hand drive vehicles.

2) Applies to right-hand drive vehicles.

114 Using the system

Setting temperature Setting the individual operating modes » Owner´s Manual Infotainment, chap-
The temperature can be adjusted on the Climatronic control unit or in the Info- ter Setting the heating and the cooling system.
tainment » Owner´s Manual Infotainment, chapter Setting the heating and the
After the automatic mode is switched on, Climatronic works in the last selec-
cooling system.
ted mode.
The temperature can be set between +16 °C and +29.5 °C. The temperature is
The currently selected mode is displayed in the Infotainment display.
regulated automatically within this range.
Illuminates in the temperature display  then the Climatronic works with max- Note
imum cooling (temperature setting below +16 °C). Climatronic is set to the medium setting at the factory.
Illuminates in the temperature display  then the Climatronic works with maxi-
mum heating (temperature setting above +29.5 °C). Air distribution control
There is no automatic temperature control in the two end positions.  Read and observe and on page 113 first.

WARNING The recirculation mode prevents contaminated outside air getting into the In-
■ Do not switch off the Climatronic system for longer than necessary. terior of the vehicle.
■ Switch on the Climatronic system as soon as the windows mist up. In recirculated air mode air is sucked out of the interior of the vehicle and then
fed back into the interior.
CAUTION
Switching on/off
Do not cover the interior temperature sensor B » Fig. 137 as this could impair
the functioning of the Climatronic.
› Press the  button.
When the recirculation mode is activated, the warning light below the button
Note lights up.
■ During operation of the Climatronic, an increase in engine idle speed can oc-
Heating and manual air conditioning system
cur under certain circumstances in order to ensure adequate heating comfort. If the air distribution control is set to position  when the recirculation modes
■ When  is switched on, the air flow to the windows  is switched on. The
is switched on, the recirculated-air mode is switched off. Recirculated air mode
air flow to the windows will remain switched on after turning  off. can be switched on again from this setting by repeatedly pressing the symbol
■ Holding the button  will turn on  automatically.
button .

Climatronic - automatic operation When the  is switched on and the temperature regulator is turned to the
left, the recirculated-air mode is switched on.
 Read and observe and on page 113 first.
Climatronic
The automatic mode is used in order to maintain a constant temperature and Climatronic may have an air quality sensor for the detection of the pollutant
to demist the windows in the interior of the car. concentration in the sucked-in air.
Automatic mode can be switched off by pressing one of the buttons for the air If a considerable increase in concentration of pollutants is recognised by the
distribution or by increasing/decreasing the blower speed. The temperature air quality sensor, the recirculated air mode will be switched on automatically.
regulation is continued. When the pollutant concentration decreases to the normal level, the recircula-
Operating modes ted air mode is automatically switched off. 

Automatic mode works in three modes - moderate, medium, and intensive.

Heating and ventilation 115

This automatic on/off switching of the recirculated-air mode can be activated Air outlet vents
or deactivated in the Infotainment » Owner´s Manual Infotainment, chap-
ter Setting the heating and the cooling system.
If the button  is pressed when the recirculation modes is switched on, the
recirculated-air mode is switched off.
Depending on the moisture conditions in the vehicle interior the air recircula-
tion may also shut-down automatically.
WARNING
The recirculation system cannot be switched on for a longer period of time,
because there is no supply of fresh air from the outside. “Stale air” may re-
sult in fatigue in the driver and occupants, reduce attention levels and also
cause the windows to mist up. The risk of having an accident increases.
Switch off recirculated air mode as soon as the windows start to mist up.

CAUTION Fig. 138 Air vents at the front

We recommend not smoking in the vehicle when the recirculating air operation
is switched on. The smoke sucked from inside the vehicle is deposited on the
evaporator of the air conditioner. This produces a permanent odour when the
air conditioning system is operating which can only be eliminated through con-
siderable effort and expense (replacement of compressor).

Note
The automatic activation/deactivation of the air recirculation with Climatronic
only works if the outside temperature is higher than approx. 2 °C.

Fig. 139 Air vents at the rear

 Read and observe and on page 113 first.

The direction of airflow can be adjusted using the air outlet vents 3, 4
» Fig. 138 and 6 » Fig. 139 - the outlets can be opened and closed individually.
Changing the direction of air flow
› To change the height of the air flow, swivel the horizontal fins with the mov-
able adjuster A » Fig. 138 or » Fig. 139 upward or downward.
› To change the lateral direction of the air flow, turn the vertical fins with the
movable adjuster A » Fig. 138 or » Fig. 139 to the left or right. 

116 Using the system

Opening Aux. heating
› Turn regulator B » Fig. 138 or » Fig. 139upwards. The auxiliary heating can be used when both when stationary, when the en-
gine is switched off, to preheat the vehicle and also while driving (e.g. during
Closing
the heating phase of the engine).
› Turn regulator B » Fig. 138 or » Fig. 139downwards.
The auxiliary heating warms up the coolant by combusting fuel from the vehi-
Depending on the setting of the air distribution on the front panel of the heat- cle tank. This heats the air flowing into the passenger compartment (if the
er, the manual air conditioning or the Climatronic, the following air vents are blower is turned on).
active.
The auxiliary heating also warms up the engine.
Set the direction of the air Active air outlet nozzles » Fig. 138 and
outlet » Fig. 139 Auxiliary ventilation
The auxiliary ventilation enables fresh air to flow into the vehicle interior by
switching off the engine, whereby the interior temperature is effectively de-
 1. 2. 4
creased (e.g. with the vehicle parked in the sun).

 1. 2. 4. 5. 7
WARNING
■ The auxiliary heating (auxiliary heating and ventilation) (hereinafter refer-
 3. 4. 6
red to as aux. heating) must never be operated in closed rooms (e.g. garag-
es) – risk of poisoning!
 4. 5. 7 ■ The auxiliary heating must not be allowed to run during refuelling – risk
of fire.
 3. 4. 5. 6. 7 ■ The exhaust pipe of the auxiliary heating is located on the underside of
the vehicle. If you want to use the heater, do not park the car in places
CAUTION where the exhaust fumes can come into contact with flammable materials
To ensure that the heating, the manual air conditioning and the Climatronic such as dry grass, undergrowth, leaves, spilled fuel etc. - risk of fire.
systems work properly, do not block up the air outlet vents with any objects.
CAUTION
Auxiliary heating (auxiliary heating and ventilation) ■ The exhaust pipe of the auxiliary heating, which is located on the underside
of the vehicle, must not be clogged and the exhaust flow must not be blocked.
■ If the auxiliary heating is running, the vehicle battery discharges.
 Introduction
■ The air inlet in front of the windscreen must be free (e.g. of ice, snow or
This chapter contains information on the following subjects: leaves) to ensure that the auxiliary heating operates properly. 

Switching on/off 118

Radio remote control 119
Functional requirements of the auxiliary heating (auxiliary heating and ventila-
tion)
 The charge state of the vehicle battery is sufficient.
 The fuel supply is adequate (the warning light  is not illuminated in the
instrument cluster).

Heating and ventilation 117

 Note Switching off
▶ Manually with the symbol key  on the front panel of the Climatronic or the
■ The auxiliary heating only switches the blower on, if it has achieved a coolant
temperature of approx. 50 °C. manual air conditioning » Fig. 140.
■ At low outside temperatures, this can result in a formation of water vapour in ▶ Manually with the symbol key  on the radio remote control.
▶ Via an automatically programmed and activated pre-set time in the Infotain-
the area of the engine compartment. This is quite normal and is not an operat-
ing problem. ment.
■ So that warm air can flow into the vehicle interior after switching on the aux. ▶ Automatically when the warning light  in the instrument cluster illumi-

heating, you must maintain the comfort temperature normally selected by you, nates.
▶ Automatically according to the ambient conditions » .
leave the fan switched on and leave the air outlet vents in open. It is recom-
mended to put the air flow in the position  or . After switching the system off, the auxiliary heating will continue running a lit-
tle while longer in order to burn the remaining fuel in the auxiliary heater.
Switching on/off
After switching off, coolant pump still runs for a short period.
Programming the auxiliary heating in the Infotainment
For vehicles with Climatronic: on the front panel of the Climatronic, press but-
ton  → .
For vehicles with manual air conditioning: on the Infotainment, press button
 → .

When automatic switching on is activated, the indicator light in the symbol key
 lights up » Fig. 140 for about 10 seconds after the ignition is turned off.

CAUTION
Fig. 140 Button for direct power on / off of the auxiliary heating (heating The automatic switching on and off the heating for rapid heating of the vehicle
and ventilation) on the front panel of the Climatronic / manual air condi- interior can be disabled in the Infotainment » Owner´s Manual Infotainment,
tioning chapter Setting the heating and the cooling system.

 Read and observe and on page 117 first.

The auxiliary heating (heating and ventilation) (hereinafter referred to as a

heater) can be switched on and off as follows.
Switching on
▶ Manually with the symbol key  on the front panel of the Climatronic or the
manual air conditioning » Fig. 140.
▶ Manually with the symbol key  on the radio remote control.
▶ Via an automatically programmed and activated pre-set time in the Infotain-
ment.
▶ Automatically according to the ambient conditions » .

118 Using the system

Radio remote control Display warning light A » Fig. 141 Meaning
The auxiliary heating is blocked, e. g
Fig. 141 Quickly flashes green for around 2 because the tank is nearly empty or
Radio remote control seconds. there is a fault in the auxiliary heat-
ing.
The switch off signal was not re-
Flashes red for around 2 seconds.
ceived.
The battery is weak, however the
Lights up orange for around 2 sec-
switching on or off signal was re-
onds, then green or red.
ceived.
The battery is weak, however the
 Read and observe and on page 117 first. Lights up orange for around 2 sec-
switching on or off signal was not re-
onds, then flashes green or red.
ceived.
Using the radio remote control, the aux. heating and ventilation (hereinafter
referred to as heater) can be switched on or off. The battery is discharged, however
Flashes orange for around 5 seconds. the switching on or off signal was not
Function and description of the radio remote control » Fig. 141 received.
A Warning light
Replace the battery » page 223.
B Aerial
 Switch on the auxiliary heating CAUTION
 Switch off the auxiliary heating ■ The radio remote control comprises electronic components and must there-
fore be protected against water, severe impacts and direct sunlight.
To switch the auxiliary heating on or off, hold the remote control vertically, ■ When the battery is fully charged, the range of the remote control is a few
with the aerial B » Fig. 141 pointing upwards. The antenna must not be cov-
hundred metres. Obstacles between the radio remote control and the vehicle,
ered with the fingers or the palm of the hand during this process.
bad weather conditions and a weaker battery can clearly reduce the range.
The auxiliary heating can only be switched on/off safely using the radio re-
mote control, if the distance between the radio remote control and the vehicle
is at least 2 m.
After pressing the button, the warning light in the remote control gives the
user different kinds of feedback.
Display warning light A » Fig. 141 Meaning
The auxiliary heating has been
Lights up green for around 2 seconds.
switched on.
The auxiliary heating has been
Lights up red for around 2 seconds.
switched off.
Slowly flashes green for around 2 sec- The ignition signal was not received.
onds.

Heating and ventilation 119

 CAUTION
Driving
■ Only start the engine when the engine and the vehicle are stationary - there
is a danger of starter and engine damage!
Starting-off and Driving ■ Do not push-start the engine – there is a risk of damaging the engine and
the catalytic converter. The battery from another vehicle can be used as a
Starting and stopping the engine using the key
jump-start aid » page 219.
 Introduction Note
This chapter contains information on the following subjects: Do not warm up the engine while the vehicle is stationary. If possible, start
your journey as soon as the engine has started. Through this, the engine rea-
Electronic immobilizer 120
ches its operating temperature faster.
Steering lock locking / unlocking 120
Turning ignition on/off and starting the engine 121 Electronic immobilizer
Stopping the engine 121
 Read and observe and on page 120 first.
With the key in the ignition, the ignition can be switched on and off and the
engine can be started / stopped. The electronic immobiliser (hereinafter referred to as immobiliser) makes the
attempted theft or unauthorised use of your vehicle more difficult.
WARNING
■ While driving with the engine stopped, the ignition must always be An electronic chip is integrated in the head of the key. The immobiliser is deac-
switched on » page 121, Turning ignition on/off and starting the engine. tivated with the aid of this chip when the key is inserted in the ignition lock.
■ With the ignition off, the steering may lock » page 120 - danger of an As soon as the ignition key is removed from the ignition lock, the immobiliser is
accident! automatically activated.
■ Do not withdraw the ignition key from the ignition lock until the vehicle
has come to a stop » page 128, Parking. Otherwise, the steering may lock - Operational problems
danger of an accident! If a component in the immobiliser key fails, it is not possible to start the en-
■ Never leave the key in the vehicle when you exit the vehicle. Unauthor- gine. A corresponding message appears in the display of the instrument clus-
ized persons such as children could lock the car, turn on the ignition or start ter to explain the immobiliser is active.
the engine -risk of injury, accidents and damage! To start, use the other vehicle key or seek help from a specialist garage.
■ Never leave the vehicle unattended with the engine running - there is
risk of accident, damage or theft! Steering lock locking / unlocking
■ Never switch off the engine before the vehicle is stationary – risk of acci-
dent!  Read and observe and on page 120 first.

The steering lock (steering lock) deters any attempted theft of your vehicle.
WARNING
■ Never (e.g. in garages) run the engine in a closed place - there is the dan- Locking
ger of poisoning and death! › Withdraw the ignition key.
■ Do not leave any items (e.g. cloths or tools) in the engine compartment. › Turn the steering wheel to the left or right until the steering lock clicks into
This presents a fire hazard and the risk of engine damage. place.
■ Never cover the engine with additional insulation material (e.g. with a
Unlocking
blanket) – risk of fire!
› Insert the key into the ignition lock. 

120 Driving
› Switch on the ignition » page 121. If the engine does not start within 10 seconds, turn the key to position 1 . Re-
peat the start-up process after approx. half a minute.
The steering column lock is unlocked.
For vehicles with diesel engines, the glow plug warning light  goes on dur-
If the ignition switch can not be turned on, then turn the steering wheel back
ing starting. The engine starts after the warning light goes out.
and forth slightly and thereby unlock the steering lock.
Note
Turning ignition on/off and starting the engine ■ The engine running noises may louder at first be louder for a short time after
starting the cold engine. This is quite normal and is not an operating problem.
Fig. 142 ■ You should not switch on any major electrical components during the heat-
Positions of the vehicle key in the ignition lock ing period otherwise the vehicle battery will be drained unnecessarily.

Stopping the engine

 Read and observe and on page 120 first.

› Stop the vehicle » page 128, Parking.

› Turn key to position 1 » Fig. 142 on page 121.
The engine and the ignition are switched off simultaneously.
 Read and observe and on page 120 first.
For vehicles with automatic transmission, the ignition key can only be removed
Positions of the vehicle key in the ignition lock » Fig. 142 if the selector lever is in position P .
1 Ignition switched off, engine switched off
CAUTION
2 Ignition switched on
Do not switch the engine off immediately at the end of your journey after the
3 Starting engine
engine has been operated over a prolonged period at high loads but leave it to
Switching ignition on/off run at an idling speed for about 1 minute. This prevents any possible accumula-
› Turn key to position2. tion of heat when the engine is switched off.
The ignition is switched on. Note
› Turn key to position 1 . After switching off the ignition, the radiator fan may intermittently continue to
operate for approx. 10 minutes.
The ignition is switched off.
Procedure for starting the engine
› Firmly apply the handbrake.
› For vehicles with manual transmission, shift gear stick to neutral, depress
the clutch pedal and hold it there until the engine starts.
› On vehicles with automatic transmission, place the selector lever in position
P or N and depress the brake pedal until the engine starts.
› Turn the key into position 3 as far as it will go - the engine's starting proce-
dure will commence (do not touch the accelerator).
› Release the key, the engine will start automatically.
After letting go, the vehicle key will return to position 2 .

Starting-off and Driving 121

Starting and stopping the engine at the push of the button CAUTION
■ The system can recognize the valid key, even if it has been accidentally left
 Introduction on the vehicle roof - there is danger of loss or damage to the key!
■ Only start the engine when the engine and the vehicle are stationary - there

Fig. 143 is a danger of starter and engine damage!

■ Do not push-start the engine – there is a risk of damaging the engine and
Starter button (  )
the catalytic converter. The battery from another vehicle can be used as a
jump-start aid » page 219.

Note
■ Do not warm up the engine while the vehicle is stationary. If possible, start
your journey as soon as the engine has started. Through this, the engine rea-
ches its operating temperature faster.
■ The system is protected against inadvertently switching off the engine while
This chapter contains information on the following subjects: driving, this means that the engine can only be switched off in an emergency
Steering column lock locking / unlocking 122 » page 123.
Switching ignition on / off 123
Starting the engine 123 Steering column lock locking / unlocking
Switching off the engine 123  Read and observe and on page 122 first.
Problems starting the engine 124
The steering lock (steering lock) deters any attempted theft of your vehicle.
The ignition can be switched on and off and the engine can be started/stop-
ped with the starter button » Fig. 143. Locking
The key must be in the vehicle in order to unlock the steering wheel, switch on
› Switch off the engine.
the ignition, start the engine and drive.
› Open the driver door.
The steering lock is locked automatically.
WARNING
If the driver's door is opened and the ignition is switched off afterwards, the
■ Never leave the key in the vehicle when you exit the vehicle. Unauthor-
steering is only locked after the vehicle has been locked.
ized persons such as children could lock the car, turn on the ignition or start
the engine -risk of injury, accidents and damage! Unlocking
■ Never leave the vehicle unattended with the engine running - there is a › Open the driver's door and get into the vehicle.
risk of theft etc! › Close the driver's door.
■ Never switch off the engine before the vehicle is stationary – risk of acci-
The steering is locked automatically.
dent!
Under certain circumstances (e.g. after switching off the ignition and opening
WARNING the driver's door), the steering is enabled only when the ignition is switched on
or the engine is started. 
Never (e.g. in garages) run the engine in a closed place - there is the danger
of poisoning and death!

122 Driving
 WARNING Note
Never let the vehicle roll with locked steering lock - there is a risk of acci- ■ The engine running noises may louder at first be louder for a short time after
dent! starting the cold engine. This is quite normal and is not an operating problem.
■ You should not switch on any major electrical components during the heat-
ing period otherwise the vehicle battery will be drained unnecessarily.
Switching ignition on / off
 Read and observe and on page 122 first. Switching off the engine

› Press the button » Fig. 143 on page 122 briefly.  Read and observe and on page 122 first.

The ignition is switched on or off. Switching off

On vehicles fitted with a manual gearbox, the clutch pedal must not be de- › Stop the vehicle » page 128, Parking.
pressed while switching the ignition on or off, otherwise the system would try › Press the button » Fig. 143 on page 122 briefly.
to start. The engine and the ignition are switched off simultaneously.
On vehicles fitted with a automatic gearbox, the brake pedal must not be de- Emergency shut-down
pressed while switching the ignition on or off, otherwise the system would try If necessary and in exceptional cases, the engine may even be turned off while
to start. driving.
If the driver's door is opened while the ignition is on, an audible signal sounds › Press the starter button » Fig. 143 on page 122 for longer than 1 second or
and the following message appears in the instrument cluster display. twice within 1 second.
 Ignition switched on. After the emergency stop of the engine, the steering lock will remain un-
 IGNITION STILL ON locked.
When leaving the vehicle always switch off the ignition. CAUTION
Do not switch the engine off immediately at the end of your journey after the
Starting the engine engine has been operated over a prolonged period at high loads but leave it to
 Read and observe and on page 122 first. run at an idling speed for about 1 minute. This prevents any possible accumula-
tion of heat when the engine is switched off.
Procedure for starting the engine
› Firmly apply the handbrake. Note
› For vehicles with manual transmission, shift gear stick to neutral, depress After switching off the ignition, the radiator fan may intermittently continue to
the clutch pedal and hold it there until the engine starts. operate for approx. 10 minutes.
› On vehicles with automatic transmission, place the selector lever in position
P or N and depress the brake pedal until the engine starts.
› Press the starter button » Fig. 143 on page 122 briefly – the engine starts au-
tomatically.
In vehicles with diesel engines after pressing the button, the glow plug warn-
ing light  lights up. The engine starts after the warning light goes out.

Starting-off and Driving 123

Problems starting the engine Note
■ When attempting to start, the key bit must be pointed towards the button
Fig. 144 » Fig. 144.
■ If the engine fails to start after pressing the button with the key, seek spe-
Starting the engine - press the
button with the key cialist help.

START-STOPsystem

 Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:

 Read and observe and on page 122 first. Operation 125

Manually deactivating/activating the system 126
The key in the vehicle cannot be verified Information messages 126
If the key in the vehicle cannot be verified, then engine cannot be started by
pressing a button. The START STOP system (hereinafter referred to as the system) reduces CO2
emissions and harmful emissions, and saves fuel.
One of the following message is shown in the information cluster display.
If the system determine that the engine is not needed when the vehicle stops
 Key not detected. Owner's Manual!
or is at a standstill (e.g. at the traffic lights), it turns off the engine and starts it
 Key not found. again when moving off.
 NO KEY
The system function depends on many factors. Some of them are down to the
The reasons for this may be: driver, the others are systemic and can neither be influenced nor identified.
▶ The battery in the key is almost out of charge.
▶ The key is malfunctioning Therefore the system may react differently in situations which seem identi-
▶ There is interference in the signal between the system and the key (strong cal from the driver's perspective.
electromagnetic field). The system is automatically activated every time the ignition is switched on
(even where this has previously been manually deactivated with the button ).
Try to start the engine by pressing the button with the key » Fig. 144.
System fault Note
If the following message appears on the display of the instrument cluster, If the engine has stopped due to the system, the ignition remains on.
there is a system malfunction.
 Keyless access system faulty.
 KEYLESS ACCESS SYSTEM FAULTY
Try to start the engine by pressing the button with the key » Fig. 144.

CAUTION
The key can only be verified if it is in the vehicle. It is therefore not always nec-
essary to know where the key is.

124 Driving
Operation Reasons for the engine running
It may be essential for the engine to keep running when the vehicle comes to
a halt, for the following reasons.
Fig. 145 ▶ The engine temperature for the proper function of the system has not yet
Display been reached.
▶ The charge state of the vehicle battery is too low.
▶ The current consumption is too high.
▶ High air-conditioning or heating capacity (high fan speed, big difference be-
tween the desired and actual interior temperature).
When the engine is shut-down automatically and the system detects that the
engine is required such as when the brake pedal is pressed repeatedly then
the system automatically starts the engine.
Vehicles with manual transmission
The engine is automatically switched off as soon as the vehicle comes to a Infotainment display
halt, the shift lever is moved into neutral and the clutch pedal is released. Information about the current status of the system can be displayed in the In-
fotainment display » Owner´s Manual Infotainment, chapter CAR - vehicle set-
The engine is automatically started as soon as the clutch pedal is depressed.
tings.
Vehicles with automatic transmission
The engine is automatically switched off as soon as the vehicle comes to a halt Note
and the brake pedal is operated. ■ If the vehicle remains outdoors for a long time in minus temperatures or in
direct sunlight, it can take several hours until the internal temperature of the
The engine is automatically started as soon as the brake pedal is released.
vehicle battery reaches a suitable temperature for proper operation of the
Conditions for the system function START STOP system.
The following conditions must be met for the system to function correctly. ■ If the driver's seat belt is removed for more than approx. 30 seconds or the

 The driver's door is closed. driver's door is opened during stop mode, the engine will have to be started
manually.
 The driver has fastened the seat belt.
■ No automatic engine shut-down takes place when a vehicle with automatic
 The bonnet is closed. transmission is moving at low speed (e.g. during a traffic jam) and remains sta-
 The driving speed was higher than 4 km.h after the last stop. tionary after pressing the brake pedal lightly. Automatic engine shut-down
System status takes place if you press the brake pedal down with more force.
■ For vehicles with automatic transmission there is no automatic engine shut-
The system status is shown in the display when the vehicle comes to a halt
» Fig. 145. down when the system detects a manoeuvring action due to a large steering
angle.
 The engine is automatically switched off; when the vehicle moves off, the
ignition process will be automatically initiated.
 The engine is not automatically switched off.

Starting-off and Driving 125

Manually deactivating/activating the system Brakes and parking

Fig. 146  Introduction

Button for the START-STOP sys- This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
tem
Information on braking 126
Handbrake 127
Parking 128
WARNING
■ Greater physical effort for braking is required when the engine is switch-
ed off – risk of accident!
Deactivating/activating ■ During the braking procedure on a vehicle with manual transmission,
› Press the symbol button  » Fig. 146. when the vehicle is in gear and at low revs, press the clutch pedal. Other-
When system is deactivated, the warning light in the button illuminates. wise, the functionality of the brake system may be impaired – risk of acci-
dent!
If the system is turned off, it will be automatically reactivated after turning the
■ When leaving the vehicle never leave persons leave unattended in the
ignition off and on.
vehicle who could release the brake. The vehicle might then move off – risk
Note of accident!
■ Observe the recommendations on the new brake pads » page 132.
■ If the system is deactivated when the engine is turned off automatically,
then the automatic start process takes place.
■ Selecting the driving mode Eco when the system is deactivated will automat- CAUTION
ically activate the system » page 157, Selection of the driving mode (Driving Never let the brakes slip with light pressure on the pedal if braking is not nec-
Mode Selection). essary. This causes the brakes to overheat and can also result in a longer brak-
ing distance and excessive wear.
Information messages
Information on braking
The information messages are shown in the instrument cluster display.
 Start the engine manually!  Read and observe and on page 126 first.
 START MANUALLY
Wear-and-tear
If for example the driver's seat belt is stored, the engine must be started man- The wear of the brake pads is dependent on the operating conditions and driv-
ually. ing style.
On vehicles with the starter button, the ignition is turned off by the first press The brake pads wear more quickly if a lot of journeys are completed in towns
of the starter button; the start process is only initiated when the button is and over short distances or if a very sporty style of driving is adopted.
pressed for the second time.
If operated under severe conditions, the thickness of the brake pads must be
 Error: start-stop system checked by a specialist garage between service appointments as well. 
 START STOP ERROR
A system error is present. Seek help from a specialist garage.

126 Driving
Wet roads or road salt WARNING
The performance of the brakes can be delayed as the brake discs and brake Only apply the brakes for the purpose of drying and cleaning the brake
pads may be moist or have a coating of ice or layer of salt on them in winter. discs if the traffic conditions permit this. Do not place any other road users
The brakes are cleaned and dried by applying the brakes several times » . in jeopardy.
Corrosion
Corrosion on the brake discs and dirt on the bake pads occur if the vehicle has Handbrake
been parked for a long period and if you do not make much use of the braking
system. The brakes are cleaned by applying the brakes several times » .
Fig. 147
Long or steep slopes Handbrake
Before travelling a long distance with a steep gradient, reduce speed and shift
into the next lowest gear. As a result, the braking effect of the engine will be
used, reducing the load on the brakes. Any additional braking should be com-
pleted intermittently, not continuously.
Emergency brake display
If the brakes are applied in full and the vehicle systems evaluate the situation
as dangerous for the traffic following behind, the brake light flashes automati-
cally.  Read and observe and on page 126 first.
After the speed was reduced below around 10 km/h or the vehicle was stop- The hand brake is used when stopping and parking for securing the vehicle
ped, the brake light stops flashing and the hazard warning light system against unwanted movement.
switches on. The hazard warning light system is switched off automatically af-
ter accelerating or driving off again. Apply
› Pull the handbrake lever firmly upwards.
Faults in the brake surface
If it is found that the braking distance has suddenly become longer and that Release
the brake pedal can be depressed further, the brake system may be faulty. › Pull the handbrake lever up slightly and at the same time push in the lock
button » Fig. 147 .
Visit a specialist garage immediately and adjust your style of driving appropri- › Move the lever right down while pressing the lock button.
ately, as you will not know the exact extent of the damage.
The handbrake warning light  lights up when the handbrake is applied, pro-
Low brake fluid level vided the ignition is on.
An insufficient level of brake fluid may result in problems in the brake system.
The level of the brake fluid is monitored electronically » page 32,  Brake sys- A warning signal sounds if the vehicle is inadvertently driven off with the
tem. handbrake applied.

Brake booster The following message is shown in the information cluster display.
The brake booster increases the pressure generated with the brake pedal. The  Release the handbrake!
brake booster only operates when the engine is running.  RELEASE HANDBRAKE
The handbrake warning is activated if the vehicle is driven at a speed of more
than around 5 km/h for more than 3 seconds. 

Starting-off and Driving 127

 WARNING Manual gear changing
Please note that the handbrake must be fully released. A handbrake which
is only partially released can result in the rear brakes overheating. This can Fig. 148
have a negative effect on the operation of the brake system – risk of acci- Gearshift pattern of 5-gear or 6-
dent! gear manual gearbox

Parking
 Read and observe and on page 126 first.

When stopping and parking, look for a place with a suitable surface » .
Only carry out the activities while parking in the specified order. The shift pattern for the individual gear positions is shown on the gear lever
› Bring the vehicle to a stop and depress the brake pedal. » Fig. 148.
› Firmly apply the handbrake. The gearshift indicator must be observed when changing gear » page 41.
› On vehicles with automatic transmission place the selector lever in the P po-
sition. Always depress the clutch pedal all the way down. This prevents uneven wear
› Switch off the engine. on the clutch.
› For vehicles with Manual transmission, select 1st gear or Reverse gear R. Reverse gear is engaged
› Release the brake pedal. › Stop the vehicle.
WARNING › The clutch pedal is fully depressed.
The parts of the exhaust system can become very hot. Therefore, never
› Move the shift lever to the idle position switch and press down.
stop the vehicle at places where the underside of your vehicle can come in-
› Move the shift lever fully to the left and then forward into R position
» Fig. 148.
to contact with flammable materials such as dry grass, undergrowth,
leaves, spilled fuel or such like. - Risk of fire and serious injury can occur! The reversing lights will come on once reverse gear is engaged, provided the
ignition is on.

Manual shifting of gears and pedals WARNING

Never engage reverse gear when driving – risk of accident!
 Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects: CAUTION
■ If not in the process of changing gear, do not leave your hand on the gear-
Manual gear changing 128
shift lever while driving. The pressure from the hand can cause the gearshift
Pedals 128 mechanism to wear excessively.
■ When stopping on a slope, never try to hold the vehicle using the clutch and
the accelerator pedal – this may lead to damage to the clutch.

Pedals
The operation of the pedals must not be hindered under any circumstances! 

128 Driving
In the driver's footwell, only a footmat, which is attached to the two corre- CAUTION
sponding attachment points may be used. ■ If the selector lever is moved to mode N while driving, the accelerator pedal
Only use factory-supplied footmats or footmats from the range of ŠKODAOrigi- must be released and you will need to wait until the engine has reached its
nal Accessories, which are fitted to two attachment points. idling speed before moving the selector lever to a forward driving mode again.
■ When the outdoor temperature is below -10 ° C, the selector lever when
WARNING starting must always be in P mode.
No objects may be placed in the driver's footwell – risk due to obstruction ■ When stopping on a slope, never try to hold the vehicle using the accelerator
or limitation of pedal operation. pedal – this may lead to gear damage.

Note
Automatic gearbox After the ignition is switched off, the ignition key can only be withdrawn if the
selector lever is in the position P.
 Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Modes and use of selector lever

Modes and use of selector lever 129 Fig. 149

Selector lever lock 130 Selector lever/display
Manual shifting of gears (Tiptronic) 130
Starting-off and driving 131
The automatic transmission performs automatic gear changes.
The modes of the automatic transmission can be adjusted by the driver by
means of the selector lever.

WARNING
■ No throttle when it is set before starting the mode for moving forward
 Read and observe and on page 129 first.
with the selector lever - there is a risk of accident! When the ignition is switched on, the gearbox mode and the currently selected
■ Never move the selector lever to mode R or P when driving – risk of an gear are indicated in the display » Fig. 149.
accident!
■ If the vehicle is in the mode selected D, S, R or Tiptronic and the engine The following modes can be selected with the selector lever » Fig. 149.
stops when at idle speed, then the brake pedal must be pressed. Even P – Parking mode
when the engine is idling, the power transmission is never completely in- The driven wheels are locked mechanically in this mode.
terrupted – the vehicle creeps.
■ When leaving the vehicle, the selector lever is always to put in the P The parking mode must only be selected when the vehicle is stationary.
mode. Otherwise, the vehicle could be set in motion - risk of accident! R – Reverse gear
Reverse gear can only be engaged when the vehicle is stationary and the en-
gine is at idling speed.
N – Neutral
The power transmission to the drive wheels is interrupted in this mode. 

Starting-off and Driving 129

 D / S - mode for driving forward (Normal program) / mode for driving The selector lever is not locked when quickly moving across the position N
forward (Sport program) (e.g. from R to D/S). This, for example, helps to rock out a vehicle that is stuck,
The system switches from one mode to the other by moving the selector lever e.g. in a bank of snow. The selector lever lock will engage if the lever is in posi-
into the spring-loaded position  » Fig. 149. tion N for more than approx. 2 seconds without the brake pedal being de-
pressed.
In mode D or S, the forward gears are shifted automatically depending on the
engine load, the operation of the accelerator pedal, the vehicle speed, and the Releasing selector lever from mode P or N (selector lever lock)
selected driving mode . › Press the brake pedal and the lock button at the same time in the direction
In mode S , the forward gears are shifted automatically up and down at high- of 1 » Fig. 150 .
er engine speeds than in mode D. Just depress the brake pedal, if you would like to change from the mode N to
If the Sport driving mode is selected with the engine running » page 157, Se- D/S.
lection of the driving mode (Driving Mode Selection) , the transmission is auto- Defective selector lever lock
matically set in the S mode. If the selector lever lock is defective or its power supply is interrupted (e.g. dis-
E – Economical driving mode charged vehicle battery, faulty fuse), the selector lever can no longer be moved
If the driving mode Eco or Individual (engine - Eco) » page 157 is selected and out of position P in the normal manner and the vehicle can no longer be driven.
the selection lever is in the setting D/S, the transmission is automatically set The selector lever must be unlocked specially » page 225.
to mode E. This mode cannot be selected with the selector lever.
Note
In mode E , the forward gears are shifted automatically up and down at lower If you want to move the selector lever from mode P to mode D/S or vice versa,
engine speeds than in mode D. move the selector lever quickly. This prevents that you accidentally select
mode R or N.
Selector lever lock
Manual shifting of gears (Tiptronic)
Fig. 150
Shift lock button Fig. 151
Selector lever/multi-function
steering wheel

 Read and observe and on page 129 first.

 Read and observe and on page 129 first.
The selector lever is locked in mode P and N to prevent that the forward driv-
ing is selected accidentally, thereby setting the vehicle in motion. Tiptronic mode makes it possible to manually shift gears with the selector lev-
The selector lever is locked only when the vehicle is stationary and at speeds er or multifunction steering wheel. This mode can be selected both while stop-
up to 5 km/h. ping and while driving.

The selector lever lock is indicated by the illumination of the warning light . The currently selected gear is indicated in the display » Fig. 149 on page 129 . 

130 Driving
The gearshift indicator must be observed when changing gear » page 41. › Move the selector lever into the desired position » page 129 and then release
the lock button.
Switching to manual shifting
› Push the gear selector from position D/S towards the right, or left in a right- › Release the brake pedal and accelerate.
hand drive vehicle. Stopping (while the car is moving)
When switching to the manual shifting while driving, the current gear is main- › Depress the brake pedal and bring the vehicle to a stop.
tained. › Keep holding the brake pedal until driving is resumed.
The selector lever position N does not have to be selected when stopping for a
Shifting up gears
short time, such as at a cross roads.
› Push the selector lever forwards + » Fig. 151.
› Pull the paddle + » Fig. 151 briefly towards the steering wheel. Kickdown
The kickdown function allows you to achieve the maximum acceleration of
Shifting down gears
your vehicle while driving.
› Push the selector lever backwards - » Fig. 151 .
› Pull the paddle - » Fig. 151 briefly towards the steering wheel. When the accelerator pedal is fully depressed, the kickdown function is activa-
ted in any forward driving mode.
Temporarily switching to manual shifting in position D/S
› Pull one of the - / + paddles » Fig. 151 briefly towards the steering wheel . The gearbox shifts down one or more gears depending on the vehicle speed
and engine speed, and the vehicle accelerates.
If you do not pull one of the rocker switches - / + for more than 1 Minute, man-
ual shifting of gears is deactivated. The temporary switch to manual gear shift- The gearbox does not shift up into the highest gear until the engine has
ing can also be deactivated by pulling the + paddle towards the steering reached its maximum revolutions for this gear range.
wheel for more than 1 second. Driving in neutral position in mode E (free-wheel)
Note › Move the selector lever into the position D/S.
■ It may be beneficial, for example, when travelling downhill, to use manual › Select the driving mode Eco or Individual (Drive - Eco) » page 157, Selection
of the driving mode (Driving Mode Selection).
shifting of gears. Shifting to a lower gear reduces the load on the brakes and
hence the wear of the brakes » page 126. › Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal (the speed is higher than 20
■ When accelerating, the gearbox automatically shifts up into the higher gear
km/h).
just before the maximum permissible engine speed is reached. The vehicle moves without the braking effect of the engine.
■ If a lower gear is selected, the gearbox does not shift down until there is no
The gear is selected again automatically, when you briefly depress the acceler-
risk of the engine overrevving. ator brake pedal or pull the left rocker switch - towards the steering wheel
» page 130, Manual shifting of gears (Tiptronic).
Starting-off and driving
This function is not available when towing a trailer or when another accessory
 Read and observe and on page 129 first. is connected to the trailer socket.

Starting off Launch control1)

› Start the engine. The launch control function allows the vehicle in mode S or Tiptronic to reach
› Firmly depress and hold the brake pedal. its maximum acceleration when starting off.
› Press the lock button in the direction of 1 » Fig. 150 on page 130 and hold. › Disable the TCS » page 135, Braking and stabilisation systems. 

1) This function is only valid for some engines.

Starting-off and Driving 131

› START STOP deactivate » page 126, Manually deactivating/activating the New brake pads
system. New brake pads have to first “grind in” because these do not initially have the
› Fully depress and hold the brake pedal with your left foot. best possible braking effect.
› Fully depress the accelerator pedal with your right foot. Drive especially carefully for the first 200 km or so.
› Release the brake pedal.
The vehicle starts off with maximum acceleration. Tips for economical driving
› Reactivate the TCS and START-STOP when the desired speed has been To achieve the lowest possible fuel consumption, the following instructions
reached. must be observed.
WARNING Looking ahead when driving
Rapid acceleration, particularly on slippery roads, can lead to loss of control Avoid unnecessary acceleration and braking.
of the vehicle – risk of accident!
Switch in an energy saving and timely manner
Observe the recommended gear » page 41.
Running-in and economical driving Avoid full throttle and high speeds
Fuel consumption can be reduced by half if only three-quarters of the possible
 Introduction top speed of your vehicle is used.
This chapter contains information on the following subjects: Reducing idling
Running-in 132 If the vehicle is fitted with the START STOP system there is an automatic re-
Tips for economical driving 132 duction of the idling. If the engine is stopped on vehicles without START-STOP
DriveGreen function 133 system, such as when waiting in a traffic jam, the fuel economy is already
greater after 30 - 40 s than the fuel quantity which is required for engine re-
The fuel consumption, degree of pollution and vehicle wear depend on driving start.
style, road condition, weather conditions and the like.
Avoid short distances
When driving a short distance of less than about 4 km, the engine cannot
Running-in
reach its operating temperature. As long as the engine has not reached oper-
Driving in the engine ating temperature, the fuel consumption is significantly higher than with the
The engine has to be run in during the first 1500 kilometres. During this period, engine hot.
the driving style decides on the quality of the driving-in process.
Pay attention to the correct tyre inflation pressure being maintained
During the first 1 000 km we recommend not driving faster than 3/4 of the Further information » page 205.
maximum permissible engine speed, not to drive at full throttle and to dis-
Avoid unnecessary ballast
pense with the trailer.
Per 100 kg of weight, consumption increases by about 0.3 l/100 km. At a speed
In the area of 1,000 to 1,500 kilometres the engine load can be increased up of 100 - 120 km/h, a vehicle fitted with a roof rack cross member without a load
to the maximum permitted engine speed. will use about 10 % more fuel than normal due to the increased aerodynamic
drag.
New tyres
New tyres have to be “run in” since they do not offer optimal grip at first. Saving electricity
Drive especially carefully for the first 500 km or so. Only turn on electrical consumers (e.g. seat, window and mirror heating and
the like) for as long as necessary. 

132 Driving
In Infotainment, the display is shown of up to three consumers which are cur- C Graphical review summary
rently showing the highest degree of fuel consumption » Owner´s Manual In- The evaluation of the driving economy during the last 3 minutes or 1.5 minutes
fotainment, chapter CAR - vehicle settings. (depending on type of Infotainment) is shown like a beam in 5-second incre-
ments. The current status is shown on the left and moves gradually to the
Use the cooling system economically
right. The higher the green bars, the more economic the driving style is.
The air conditioning system compressor uses power from the engine when in
cooling mode, which will affect the fuel consumption. D Scoring
In the function key, the evaluation of driving efficiency is shown from the start
It recommended to open the windows or the doors of a vehicle for which the
in the range from 0 to 100 points. The higher the indicated value, the more
interior has been strongly heated through the effect of direct sunlight in order
economic the driving style is.
to allow the heated air to escape.
When you press the function key, a detailed assessment showing the driving
The cooling system should not be on if the windows are open.
efficiency during the last 30 minutes is shown.
DriveGreen function If the trip from the start, takes less than 30 minutes, then the assessment
takes in information from the previous trip (the bars are shown in dark green).
Fig. 152 E Average fuel consumption
Shown in the infotainment dis- In the function key, the average fuel consumption from the start is displayed.
play
When you press the function key a detailed overview of the average fuel con-
sumption during the last 30 minutes is shown.
If the trip from the start, takes less than 30 minutes, then the average fuel
consumption takes in information from the previous trip (the bars are shown in
dark green).
F Symbols in the display
The DriveGreen function (hereinafter referred to as DriveGreen) evaluates the The display may show the following four symbols, which give information on
driving efficiency based on the information respecting the driving style. Useful the current driving style.
tips for reducing fuel consumption are also offered.  Ecological trip
DriveGreen can be displayed on the Infotainment as follows.  The current speed has a negative effect on fuel consumption.
› Press the button  in the Infotainment and then in the display the function  The driving is not liquid, drive with anticipation.
keys one after the other , DriveGreen.  Recommended gear.
A driving liquid display Tips for reducing fuel consumption
With the driving is liquid the display is near the green dot. When accelerating When tapping the “Page” the display shows useful tips on how to reduce fuel
or braking, the indicator moves down or up. consumption. These tips can to be helpful to drive more economically.
B “Green leaf” Note
The leaf margin shown in green shows with a few seconds, the current drive ■ Resetting the single-trip memory “from start” also resets the average con-
efficiency. When driving economically there are several green layers on the sumption E and the driving assessment D .
edge of the leaf. When driving less economically, no green colour appears and ■ With some Infotainment types changing the units for the fuel consumption
the leaf can disappear completely. indicator causes the resetting of the average fuel consumption values E .

Starting-off and Driving 133

Avoiding damage to your vehicle Driving through water

 Introduction Fig. 153

This chapter contains information on the following subjects: Maximum permissible water lev-
el when driving through water
Driving Tips 134
Driving through water 134
This section of the manual contains important information on preventing dam-
age to the vehicle while driving.

Driving Tips
The following must be observed to avoid damage to the vehicle when driving
Only drive on such roads and in such terrain, which match the vehicle parame- through bodies of water (e.g. flooded roads).
ters » page 236, Technical data as well as your driving skills.
› Therefore determine the depth of the water before driving through bodies of
The driver is always responsible for deciding whether the vehicle can handle water.
travelling in the given terrain.
The water level must not reach above the web of the lower beam » Fig. 153.
When travelling off paved roads, we recommend activating the OFF ROAD
mode » page 138. › Do not drive any faster than at a walking speed.
At a higher speed, a water wave can form in front of the vehicle which can
WARNING cause water to penetrate into the air induction system of the engine or into
■ Always adjust your driving to the current terrain and weather conditions. other parts of the vehicle.
Excessive speed or incorrect driving manoeuvres can cause damage to the
vehicle and lead to serious injuries. › Never stop in the water, do not reverse and do not switch the engine off.
■ Combustible objects such as dry leaves or twigs caught under the base of CAUTION
the vehicle could ignite on hot vehicle parts - risk of fire! ■ If water penetrates into the intake system of the engine, there is a risk of se-
rious damage to the engine parts!
CAUTION ■ When driving through water, some vehicle parts such as the chassis, the
■ Pay attention to the ground clearance of the vehicle! When driving over ob- electrics or the transmission can be severely damaged.
jects which are larger than the ground clearance, the vehicle can get damaged. ■ Oncoming vehicles can generate water waves which can exceed the permis-
■ Any objects that get trapped under the vehicle floor must be removed as sible water level for your vehicle.
soon as possible. These objects can damage the fuel lines, the brake system, ■ Potholes, mud or rocks can be hidden under the water, making it difficult or
seals and other parts of the vehicle. impossible to drive through the body of water.
■ Drive slowly in unknown terrain and watch out for unexpected obstacles, ■ Do not drive through salt water, as the salt can cause corrosion. An vehicle
such as potholes, rocks, stumps, etc. coming into contact with salt water is to be thoroughly rinsed with fresh wa-
■ Check up on confusing sections of unpaved roads before travelling on them ter.
and consider whether such travelling is possible without risk.

134 Driving
Assist systems
 Read and observe on page 135 first.

The radar sensor » Fig. 154 (From here on referred to as sensor) is used to as-
General information sess the traffic situation in front of the vehicle.

 Introduction The sensor can distinguish objects by radiating and receiving electromagnetic
waves.
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
The sensor is a component of the ACC » page 150 and Front Assist
Radar sensor 135 » page 155 systems.
WARNING The sensor function may be impaired in the events of one of the following.
▶ The sensor is soiled by mud, snow and the like.
The following general information regarding the use of assistance systems
▶ The area in front and around the sensor is obscured by labels, auxiliary lights
must be observed.
■ The assistance systems only serve to support and do not relieve the driv- and similar.
▶ When visibility is poor, (e.g. fog, heavy rain, thick snowfall).
er of the responsibility for driving the vehicle.
■ The increased safety provision, as well as the increased occupant protec- If the sensor is covered or dirty, the corresponding message appears in the in-
tion provided by the assistance systems must not tempt you to take risks - strument cluster display for the ACC system » page 155 or Front Assist system
risk of accident! » page 157.
■ Adjust the speed and driving style to the current visibility, weather, road
and traffic conditions. WARNING
■ The assistance systems have physical and system-related limitations. For ■ If you suspect that the sensor is damaged, deactivate the ACC system
this reason, the driver may experience some undesired or delayed system » page 150 and Front Assist system » page 155. Have the sensor checked
responses in certain situations. You should therefore always be alert and by a specialist garage.
ready to intervene! ■ The sensor can become misaligned by collisions or by damage to the front
■ Only activate, deactivate or set the assistance systems so that you have of the vehicle, the wheel arch or the underside of the vehicle. This can lead
the vehicle fully under control in every traffic situation - risk of accident! to impaired function of the sensor - risk of accidents! Have the sensor
checked by a specialist garage.
■ The area in front and around the sensor should not be obscured by labels,
Radar sensor
auxiliary lights and similar. This can lead to impaired function of the sensor
- risk of accidents!
Fig. 154
Mounting location of the radar CAUTION
sensor
Remove the snow with a brush and the ice with a solvent-free de-icer.

Braking and stabilisation systems

 Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Stability Control (ESC) 136
Anti-lock braking system (ABS) 136 

Assist systems 135

Traction control (TCS) 136 Upon activation, in the instrument cluster the indicator light  comes on and
Electronic differential lock (EDL and XDS) 137 the display shows the following message.
Driver Steering Recommendation (DSR) 137  ESC sport: directional stabil. restricted.
Brake Assist (HBA) 137  ESC SPORT
Hill Start Assist (HHC) 137 Upon deactivation, in the instrument cluster the control indicator  turns off
Multi collision brake (MCB) 138 and the display shows the following message.
Trailer stabilization system (TSA) 138  Stabilisation control (ESC) activated.
This chapter describes the functions of the brake and stabilization systems.  ESC ON
The error display is in Chapter » page 31, Warning lights.
The brake and stabilization systems are automatically activated each time the Anti-lock braking system (ABS)
ignition is switched on, unless otherwise indicated.  Read and observe on page 136 first.
WARNING ABS prevents the wheels locking when braking. Thus helping the driver to
The general information relating to the use of assistance systems must be maintain control of the vehicle.
observed » page 135, in section Introduction.
The intervention of the ABS is noticeable from the pulsating movements of
the brake pedal which is accompanied by noises.
Stability Control (ESC) When the ABS system is active, do not brake periodically or reduce the pres-
 Read and observe on page 136 first. sure on the brake pedal.

The ESC improves vehicle stability in dynamic driving situations, such as when Traction control (TCS)
the vehicle starts to skid.
The ESC monitors whether the desired direction of the current vehicle motion
is occurring. In case of any deviation (e.g. oversteer), the ESC automatically
brakes individual wheels to maintain the desired direction.
During an intervention of the system, the warning light  flashes in the instru-
ment cluster.
Enable/disable ESC Sport
The activation of the ESC sports allows a sportier driving style. With a slight
over or under steering of the vehicle take no ESC interventions take place and
the TCS is restricted so that the spinning of the wheels of the driven axle can
occur. Fig. 155 System button: Vehicle with ESC / vehicle without ESC

The activation or deactivation of the ESC sports can be done in one of two  Read and observe on page 136 first.
ways.
▶ By pressing the Symbol key  for the activation and briefly pressing the but- TCS prevents the spinning of the wheels of the driven axle. TCS reduces the
ton for the deactivation » Fig. 155 on page 136. drive power transmitted to the wheels in the case of slipping wheels. Thus, for
▶ Infotainment » Owner´s Manual Infotainment, chapter CAR - vehicle set- example, driving on road surfaces with low grip is made easier. 
tings.

136 Driving
During a TCS intervention, the indicator light  flashes in the instrument clus- EDL switches off automatically to avoid excessive heat generation on the
ter. brake of the wheel being braked. Once the brakes have cooled down, there is
an automatic re-activation of EDL.
Activating/deactivating TCS
The activation or deactivation of TCS can be done, depending on equipment, in XDS
one of the following ways. XDS is an extension to the electronic differential lock. XDS does not respond to
▶ Infotainment » Owner´s Manual Infotainment, chapter CAR - vehicle set- traction, but to the load relief of the inner front wheel of the driving axle dur-
tings. ing fast cornering.
▶ By briefly pressing the symbol key  » Fig. 155.
The automatic brake intervention on the brake of the wheel with reduced load
▶ By briefly pressing the symbol key  » Fig. 155.
prevents the wheel from spinning. Thus, the traction is improved and the vehi-
Upon deactivation, in the instrument cluster the indicator light  lights up and cle can continue to follow the desired track.
the display shows the following message.
 Traction control (ASR) deactivated. Driver Steering Recommendation (DSR)
 ASR OFF
 Read and observe on page 136 first.
Upon activation, in the instrument cluster the indicator turns  and the display
shows the following message. The DSR indicates to the driver in critical situations a steering recommenda-
 Traction control (ASR) activated. tion in order to stabilise the vehicle. The DSR is activated, for example, on the
right and left vehicle side when braking sharply on different road surfaces.
 ASR ON
The TCS should normally always be enabled. The system should be deactivated Brake Assist (HBA)
only in the following situations, for example.
▶ When driving with snow chains.  Read and observe on page 136 first.
▶ When driving in deep snow or on a very loose surface.
▶ When it is necessary to “rock” a car free when it has become stuck. HBA increases the braking effect and helps to shorten the braking distance.
The HBA is activated by the very quick operation of the brake pedal. To ach-
Note ieve the shortest possible braking distance, the brake pedal must be applied
On vehicles without the ESC system, the warning light  does not illuminate firmly until the vehicle has come to a complete standstill.
upon deactivation of the TCS system, but a message is only displayed on the
display of the instrument cluster. The HBA is automatically switched off when the brake pedal is released.

Electronic differential lock (EDL and XDS) Hill Start Assist (HHC)

 Read and observe on page 136 first.  Read and observe on page 136 first.

EDL HHC allows you, when driving on slopes, to move your foot from the brake
EDL prevents the turning of the respective wheel of the driven axle. EDL pedal to the accelerator pedal without having to use the handbrake.
brakes the spinning wheel, if necessary, and transmits the driving force to the The system holds the brake pressure produced by the activation of the brake
other driving wheel. Driving becomes easier on road surfaces with different pedal for approx. 2 seconds after the brake pedal is released.
traction under each wheel of the driven axle.
The HHC is active from a 5% slope if the driver's door is closed. HHC is always
active on slopes when in forward or reverse start off.

Assist systems 137

Multi collision brake (MCB) OFF ROAD-mode
 Read and observe on page 136 first.  Introduction
The MCB helps to decrease speed after a collision through automatic braking This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
interventions and to stabilize the vehicle. This reduces the risk of a subse-
quent crash due to uncontrolled vehicle movement. Operation 139
Hill Descent Assistant 139
The automatic brake interventions can take place only if the following condi- ESC OFF ROAD 140
tions are met.
TCSOFF ROAD 140
 A head-on or side collision occurred.
EDS OFF ROAD 140
 The impact speed was higher than approx. 10 km/h. ABS OFF ROAD 140
 The brakes, the ESC and other required electrical systems remain function-
al after impact. The OFF ROAD mode includes several features that help to overcome difficult
 The accelerator pedal is not actuated. navigable routes when travelling on non-paved roads.
But even with OFF ROAD mode activated, your vehicle is never a true SUV.
Trailer stabilization system (TSA)
WARNING
 Read and observe on page 136 first. ■ The general information relating to the use of assistance systems must
be observed » page 135, in section Introduction.
The TSA helps the combination stable in situations where the trailer sways ■ A lack of fuel can cause irregular engine running or cause the engine to
and then the whole trailer combination. shut down. This would lead the OFF ROAD mode to lose its effectiveness -
TSA brakes the individual wheels of the towing vehicle in order to damp the risk of accident!
rocking motion of the entire vehicle combination.
The following conditions are required for the correct TSA function. CAUTION
 The trailer was shipped from the factory or purchased from the ŠKODA ■ The OFF ROAD mode is not designed for the use on common roads.
genuine accessories. ■ All four wheels must be fitted with the same tyres approved by the manufac-
turer to ensure theOFF ROAD mode operates correctly.
 The trailer is electrically connected to the towing vehicle by means of the
trailer socket.
 The parking aid is activated.
 The speed is higher than approx. 60 km/h.
Further information » page 167, Hitch and trailer.

138 Driving
Operation Note
If the engine stalls while driving and is started again within 30 seconds, then
OFF ROAD mode will be automatically activated.

Hill Descent Assistant

 Read and observe and on page 138 first.

The hill descent assistant (hereinafter referred to as assist system), with its
automatic braking action on all wheels, ensures a constant speed is main-
tained on a steep slope when driving forwards and reversing.
During an intervention of the assistant, the warning light  flashes in the in-
Fig. 156 Button for selecting the driving mode / function key in Infotain- strument cluster.
ment display
The assistant is automatically engaged under the following conditions.
 Read and observe and on page 138 first.  The engine is running.
 For vehicles with Manual transmission the shift lever is in the neutral po-
We recommend that you activate the OFF ROAD mode for every trip on non- sition and or the 1st, 2nd, 3rd gear, or reverse gear is engaged.
paved roads.
 On vehicles with an automatic transmission, the selector lever is in the R,
Activation N, D/S position or in the Tiptronic position.
› Press the symbol button  » Fig. 156.  The downhill gradient is at least 10 % (when driving over sleepers, the lim-
In the Infotainment display a running mode menu » Fig. 156 appears. it can briefly drop to 8 %).
 Neither the accelerator nor the brake pedal is operated.
› Press the function key Off-road in the Infotainment display.
Driving speed
Deactivation Initiate the downhill decent at a reasonable speed up to 30 km / h the hill de-
› Press the symbol button  » Fig. 156. scent assist maintains this speed when driving downhill constant.
› In the Infotainment display select a driving mode other than Off-road.
The assistant can maintain constant speed of about 2 - 30 km / h.
So that an engagement of the OFF ROAD mode can take place, the following
conditions must be met. If a forwards or reverse gear is engaged for vehicles with Manual transmis-
sion, the speed must be high enough to avoid stalling the engine.
 The OFF ROAD mode is enabled.
 The vehicle is moving at a speed of less than 30 km/h. By pressing the accelerator or brake pedal, the speed can be increased or re-
 The warning light  illuminates in the instrument cluster. duced. This is true even if the shift lever is in the neutral position and the se-
lector lever in the N position. The engagement of the assistant is resumed af-
The following functions are integrated in the OFF ROAD mode. ter the pedal is released.
▶ Downhill Drive Support » page 139.
▶ ESC OFF ROAD » page 140. WARNING
▶ TCS OFF ROAD » page 140. For the correct operation of the assistant the road surface must be suffi-
▶ EDL OFF ROAD » page 140. ciently adherent. The assistant cannot properly fulfil its function on slushy
▶ ABS OFF ROAD » page 140. soil due to physical reasons (e.g. ice or mud). - there is a risk of an accident! 

Assist systems 139

 Note Parking aid (ParkPilot)
During an active intervention of the assistant, the brake lights do not light up.
 Introduction
ESC OFF ROAD
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
 Read and observe and on page 138 first. Function 141
The ESC OFF ROAD makes driving on a dirt roads easier, as no ESC interven- Display in the Infotainment display 142
tions occur when the vehicle is over or under steered. Activation / deactivation 142
Automatic system activation when moving forward 143
TCSOFF ROAD The parking aid (hereinafter referred to as system) draws attention via acous-
 Read and observe and on page 138 first. tic signals or the Infotainment display when manoeuvring around obstacles in
the vicinity of the vehicle.
The TCS OFF ROAD makes starting and driving on an unpaved surface easier as
it partially allows wheel-spin. WARNING
■ The general information relating to the use of assistance systems must
Note be observed » page 135, in section Introduction.
When disabled, the TCS » page 136 OFF ROAD mode works without the sup- ■ Moving persons or objects may not be recognized by the system sensors.
port of the TCS OFF ROAD. ■ Under certain circumstances, surfaces of certain objects and types of
clothing cannot reflect the system signals. For this reason, such people or
EDS OFF ROAD objects may not be recognised by the system sensors.
■ External noise sources may affect the signals of the system sensors. Un-
 Read and observe and on page 138 first. der adverse conditions, this may cause objects or people not to be recog-
nised by the system.
The EDS supports OFF ROAD vehicle traction when driving on a surface with ■ You should satisfy yourself before reversing that there is no small obsta-
different grip under the drive wheels or when driving over bumps. cle, such as a rock, thin post, trailer drawbar etc., in front or behind your ve-
A spinning wheel or wheels are braked earlier and with more force than with hicle. Such obstacles may not be recognised by the system sensors.
the intervention of the standard EDS system.
CAUTION
ABS OFF ROAD ■ Keep the system sensors » Fig. 157 on page 141 clean, and free from snow
and ice, and do not cover with any objects of any kind, otherwise the system
 Read and observe and on page 138 first. functioning may be limited.
■ Under adverse weather conditions (heavy rain, water vapour, very low or
The ABS OFF ROAD supports the driver when braking on an unpaved surface
such as gravel, snow, etc. high temperatures, etc.), the system function may be limited - “incorrect recog-
nition of obstacle”.
The system generated by a controlled locking of the wheels braked wheel be- ■ Accessories additionally installed on the vehicle rear, such as bicycle carriers,
fore a “wedge” of piled material, which shortens the braking distance. can impair the system function.
The system is only available, if the front wheels are in the straight-ahead posi-
Note
tion.
The display of obstacles in the Infotainment black and white display is descri-
The system operates at speeds of up to 50 km/h. bed in the » Owner´s Manual Infotainment, chapter CAR - vehicle settings.

140 Driving
Function Approximate range of sensors (in cm)
Area » Fig. 158 Version 1 Version 2 Version 3
(4 sensors) (8 sensors) (12 sensors)
A - 120 120
B - 60 90
C 160 160 160
D 60 60 90
E - - 90
Audible signals
The interval between the acoustic signals becomes shorter as the clearance is
Fig. 157 Installation position of the sensors on the left side of the vehicle: reduced. A continuous tone sounds from a distance of approx. 30 cm - danger
front/rear area. From this moment on do not continue driving!
The acoustic signals can be set in the Infotainment» Owner´s Manual , chap-
Fig. 158 ter CAR - Vehicle Settings .
Sampled areas and range of the
Towing a trailer
sensors
When towing, or when another accessory is connected to the trailer socket on-
ly the areas A and B » Fig. 158 are active in the system.

Note
■ If not all fields around vehicles with Version 3 are shown after the system is
activated, the vehicle will need to be moved a few metres forwards or back-
wards.
■ The signal tones for front obstacle recognition are factory-set to be higher
 Read and observe and on page 140 first.
than for rear obstacle recognition.
The system uses ultrasound waves to calculate the distance between the
bumper and an obstacle. Depending on the vehicle equipment, the ultrasonic
sensors are located in the back or in the front bumper » Fig. 157.
Depending on the equipment, the following system versions can exist
» Fig. 158.
▶ Version 1: warns of obstacles in the areas C , D .
▶ Version 2: warns of obstacles in the regions A , B , C , D .
▶ Version 3: warns of obstacles in the regions A , B , C , D , E .

Assist systems 141

Display in the Infotainment display Activation / deactivation

Fig. 159 Fig. 160

Display System key (option 2, 3)

 Read and observe and on page 140 first.  Read and observe and on page 140 first.

Function keys and obstacle warning » Fig. 159 Activation

A Road display. The activation of the system is initiated when the reverse gear is engaged, or
vehicles with the Variant 2 and 3 , also by pressing the symbol key 
   Depending on the Infotainment type: Switching off park assistant dis- » Fig. 160.
play.
   Switching audible parking signals on/off. This is confirmed by a short acoustic signal (the symbol  in the button lights
up).
 Change to rear-view camera display .
 Message: Look! Safe to move? Deactivation
On vehicles with Version 1, the system can be deactivated by moving out of re-
 Colour of an object detected in the collision area (the distance to the
verse gear.
obstacle is less than 30 cm).  Stop driving in the direction of an ob-
stacle! For vehicles with Version 2 and 3, the system is automatically deactivated by
 Colour of an object detected in the manoeuvring area (the distance to pressing the symbol key  or at a speed above 15 km/h (the  symbol in the
the obstacle is more than 30 cm). button goes out).
 Colour of an object detected in the outside the manoeuvring area (the Fault display
distance to the obstacle is more than 30 cm). If a warning signal sounds for about 3 seconds after activating the system and
 System failure (there is no indication of obstacles). there is no obstacle close to your car, this indicates a system fault. The fault is
also indicated by the symbol  flashing in the button. Seek help from a spe-
Road display cialist garage.
The roadway display varies depending on the steering angle A » Fig. 159 and
displays the roadway on which the vehicle would take with the current steer- Note
ing wheel position. The system can only be activated with the symbol key  at a speed of below
The road ahead is displayed when a forward gear or Neutral is engaged or the approx. 15 km / hr.
selector lever is in mode D/S or position N is set.
The road behind the vehicle is displayed when reverse gear is engaged or the
selector lever is in mode R.

142 Driving
Automatic system activation when moving forward WARNING
■ The general information relating to the use of assistance systems must
Fig. 161 be observed » page 135, in section Introduction.
■ Make sure that the camera lens is not dirty or covered, otherwise the sys-
Infotainment display: Display
with automatic activation tem function can be significantly impaired. For information on cleaning
» page 185, Camera lens

CAUTION
■ The camera lens distorts and enlarges the field of view of the difference in
eye sight. The display is therefore only of limited use for estimating distances
to following vehicles.
■ Some items, such as thin columns, chain link fences or lattice may not be
 Read and observe and on page 140 first.
represented adequately in terms of display resolution.
The automatic system activation occurs when moving forward at a speed be- ■ It is only a two-dimensional display. Therefore, protruding objects or roadway
low 10 km / h when the vehicle approaches an obstacle. depressions, for example, may not be recognised due to lack of space depth.
■ In a crash or damage the vehicle's rear camera can possibly deviate from the
After activation, the following is shown in the left pane of the Infotainment correct position. If this is the case, have the sensor checked by a specialist ga-
display » Fig. 161. rage.
Acoustic signals are sounded as of a distance from the obstacle of around
50 cm. Operation
The automatic display can be enabled or disabled in the Infotainment » Owner
´s Manual Infotainment, chapter CAR - vehicle settings.

Rear View Camera

 Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Operation 143
Guidelines and function keys 144
The rear view camera (hereinafter referred to as system) helps the driver when Fig. 162 Position of the camera / Monitored area
parking and manoeuvring by displaying the area behind the vehicle in the Info-
tainment display (hereinafter referred to as display).
 Read and observe and on page 143 first.

The camera for capturing the area behind the vehicle is in the grip of the boot
lid » Fig. 162.
Supervised area » Fig. 162
A Detection range of the camera.
B Area outside the detection range of the camera. 

Assist systems 143

The area behind the vehicle is displayed when the following conditions are Function buttons » Fig. 163
met.  Turns off the display of the area behind the vehicle.
 The ignition is switched on.  Display settings - brightness, contrast, colour.
 Reverse gear is engaged.1)    Switching audible parking signals on/off.
 The luggage compartment lid is completely closed.    Enabling and reduced park assistance display.
 The vehicle is not travelling at more than about 10 km/h.  Change to park assistance display.
Note CAUTION
■ The display can be interrupted by pressing the symbol key  » Fig. 158 on The objects shown in the display can be closer or even further away than they
page 141. appear. This is especially the case in the following situations.
■ After disengaging the reverse gear, automatic display of the parking aid is ■ Protruding objects, such as a hitch, the rear of a truck and the like.
carried out (variant 2, 3) » page 141. ■ When driving from a horizontal surface into a slope or a depression.
■ When driving from a slope or a depression onto a horizontal surface.
Guidelines and function keys
Note
The orientation lines are immobile, and therefore the spacing of the bars be-
hind the vehicle will vary, depending on the vehicle load state and the road in-
clination.

Park Assist

 Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Functioning 145
Fig. 163 Infotainment display: Orientation lines / function keys
Parking space search 146
 Read and observe and on page 143 first. Parking 146
Departing from a parallel parking space 147
Orientation lines are shown along with the monitored area behind the vehicle Automatic brake assist 147
in the display. Information messages 147
Distance of the orientation lines behind the vehicle » Fig. 163 Park Assist (hereinafter referred to as system) helps drivers park in suitable
A The distance is about 40 cm (safety distance limit). parallel and perpendicular parking places or also to manoeuvre out of parallel
B The distance is approximately 100 cm. parking spaces.
C The distance is approximately 200 cm. The system takes over the steering movements when parking or leaving a
The distance between the side lines corresponds approximately to the vehicle parking space. The driver operates the pedals and the shift lever or gear selec-
width including mirrors. tor. 

1) The area behind the vehicle can be displayed for a few seconds more after disengaging the reverse gear.

144 Driving
The state in which the steering wheel is operated by the system, is referred to Functioning
as parking operation.
The Park Assist is an extension of the parking aid » page 140 and operates on  Read and observe and on page 145 first.
the basis of data collected by the ultrasonic sensors. The system support is provided in the following manner.
For this reason, the chapter on the parking aid is to be read carefully and the ▶ While the parking space search is going on, a measurement and evaluation of
safety notes are to be observed. the parking space size is completed.
▶ Suitable parking spaces are shown in the display of the instrument cluster
WARNING (hereinafter only in the display).
■ The general information relating to the use of assistance systems must ▶ The display shows instructions and information before the start and during
be observed » page 135, in section Introduction. the parking.
■ During the parking process, the system automatically performs rapid ▶ The road way is calculated that the vehicle uses during the parking.
steering movements. While it is doing so, do not place your hands between ▶ The front wheels are automatically rotated during the parking.
the steering wheel – risk of injury!
■ During a parking manoeuvre on loose or slippery surfaces (gravel, snow,
Conditions for the system function
The system can look for a parking space only if the following basic conditions
ice, etc.) you may stray from the calculated road. Therefore, do not use the
are met.
system in such situations.
 The system is activated.
CAUTION  The vehicle speed is less than 40 km / h (parallel parking).
The correct evaluation of the parking space and the parking procedure de-  The vehicle speed is less than 20 km / h (transverse parking).
pends on the circumference of the wheels on the vehicle.  The distance to a number of parked vehicles is approximately 0.5 - 1.5 m.
■ The system only works correctly if the vehicle is fitted with the wheel size  The TCS is activated » page 135, Braking and stabilisation systems.
approved by the manufacturer.
The system can only carry out the parking if the following basic conditions are
■ Abstain from using the system when the vehicle is fitted with snow chains or
met.
a temporary spare wheel.
■ If wheels other than those approved by the manufacturer are mounted, the  The vehicle is travelling less than about 7 km/h.
resulting position of the vehicle in the parking space can differ slightly. This  The parking procedure takes less than 6 minutes.
can be avoided by readjusting the system at a specialist garage.  There is no driver intervention in the automatic steering operation.

CAUTION Activation/deactivation
The system can be enabled or disabled by pressing the symbol key  » Fig. 164
If other vehicles are parked behind the kerb or on it, the system can also guide
on page 146 - .
your vehicle beyond the kerb or onto it. Ensure that the wheels or the wheel
rims of your vehicle are not damaged and if necessary intervene in time. When the system is activated, the symbol  illuminates.

Note
■We recommend performing the parking at a safe speed to about 5 km / h.
■The driver can stop the parking process at any time by pressing the symbol
key  » Fig. 164 on page 146 or by a driver steering intervention.

Assist systems 145

Parking space search Parking

Fig. 164 System button / display Fig. 165 Display

 Read and observe and on page 145 first.  Read and observe and on page 145 first.

The system is able to find a parking space in a number of parallel and trans- The system supports the driver when reverse parking in the parking space
verse parked vehicles on the passenger's or driver's side. found in a number of traverse and parallel parked vehicles.
Search for a parking space parallel to the roadway Display » Fig. 165
› Slowly drive past a row of parallel parked vehicles.  Parking place recognised with the information to drive on.
› Press the symbol buttononce  » Fig. 164 - .  Parking space recognised with the information to reverse.
The display shows the following » Fig. 164 - .  Note to drive on to the parking space.
 Note to reverse to the parking space.
Search for a parking space traverse to the roadway
› Slowly drive past a row of traverse parked vehicles. Parking manoeuvre
› Press the symbol buttontwice  » Fig. 164 - . If the system finds a parking space, then this parking space is displayed
The display shows the following » Fig. 164 - . » Fig. 165 - .

Change sides for the parking › Continue driving forwards until the display appears » Fig. 165 - .
The system will automatically search for a parking space on the passenger › Stop and ensure that the vehicle does not continue to move forward until
the parking procedure starts.
side.
› Select reverse gear or move the selector lever into position R.
Activate the turn signal on the driver's side if you wish to look fro a parking › As soon as the following message is shown in the display: Steering int. active.
space on this side of the road. The display changes and the system searches Check area around veh.!, let go of the steering wheel. The steering will be taken
for a parking space on the driver's side. over by the system.
Note
› Observe the direct vicinity of the vehicle and reverse carefully.
If the symbol  (km / h) is shown in the display while you are looking for a If necessary, the parking procedure can be continued with further steps.
parking space, the vehicle speed should be reduced below 40 km/h (parallel › If the arrow in the display is flashing to the front » Fig. 165 , engage
parking) or below 20 km/h (transverse parking). 1st gear or move the selector lever into the position D.
The display shows the  icon (brake pedal). 

146 Driving
› Depress the brake pedal and wait until the steering wheel automatically ro- Automatic brake assist
tates into the required position, the symbol  goes out.
› Carefully drive forwards.  Read and observe and on page 145 first.
› If the backwards arrow is flashing in the display » Fig. 165 - , select reverse
gear again or move the selector lever into position R . Automatic brake assist when speeding
If a velocity of 7 km / h is exceeded during the parking manoeuvre for the first
The display shows the  icon (brake pedal). time, the speed will be automatically reduced by the system to less than 7 km /
› Depress the brake pedal and wait until the steering wheel automatically ro- h. This prevents the parking manoeuvre from aborting.
tates into the required position, the symbol  goes out.
Automatic emergency braking
› Carefully move backwards. If the system detects a risk of collision during parking, automatic emergency
You can repeat these steps several times in succession. braking takes place to prevent a collision.
As soon as the parking procedure is completed, an audible signal sounds and The parking is terminated by the emergency braking.
the following message appears in the display: Park Assist stopped. Take over steer-
ing! CAUTION
The automatic emergency braking is not triggered by the system when the
Departing from a parallel parking space parking process stops due to the speed of 7 km/h being exceeded!

 Read and observe and on page 145 first. Information messages

The system supports the driver when leaving a parking space of a parallel  Read and observe and on page 145 first.
parking space.
The information messages are shown in the instrument cluster display.
Leaving a parking space process
 Park Assist stopped. Speed too high.
› Press the symbol buttononce  » Fig. 164 on page 146 .
If a speed of 50 km / h is exceeded while searching for a parking space, the
The following message is displayed: Park Assist: indicate and engage reverse!
system with the key symbol is  must be reactivated.
› Activate the turn signal for side of the vehicle where the parking space is out  Speed too high. Take over steering!
of which you wish to manoeuvre.
› Select reverse gear or move the selector lever into position R. The parking is terminated if the speed exceeds 7 km / hr.
The further procedure is analogous to that for reverse parking.  Park Assist stopped. Driver steer. intervent.
› Follow the system instructions shown in the display. The parking procedure is terminated due to a driver steering intervention.
As soon as the parking procedure is completed, an audible signal sounds and  Park Assist stopped. ASR deactivated.
the following message appears in the information display: Please take over steer-
The parking procedure cannot be carried out because the TCS system is deac-
ing and drive on.
tivated » page 135, Braking and stabilisation systems. Activate the TCS.
 ASR deactivated. Take over steering!
The parking procedure was ended because TCS was deactivated during the
parking procedure.
 Trailer: Park Assist stopped. 

Assist systems 147

The parking process cannot be performed with a trailer or when another ac- WARNING
cessory is connected to the trailer socket. ■ The general information relating to the use of assistance systems must
 Time limit exceeded. Take over steering! be observed » page 135, in section Introduction.
■ After pressing the clutch pedal, no interrupted control occurs! For exam-
The parking procedure was ended because the time limit of 6 minutes was ple, if a different gear is engaged and the clutch pedal is released, control is
passed. continued.
 Park Assist currently not available.
The system cannot be activated because a fault exists on the vehicle. Seek Functioning
help from a specialist garage.
 Park Assist stopped. Currently not available.
The parking procedure was ended because a fault exists on the vehicle. Seek
help from a specialist garage.
 Park Assist faulty. Workshop!
The parking procedure is not possible because a fault exists in the system.
Seek help from a specialist garage.
 ASR intervention. Take over steering!
The parking procedure is terminated by a TCS intervention. Fig. 166 MAXI DOT display (monochrome): Examples of status displays
 Aut. parking space exit not possible. Space too small. the CCS 

The manoeuvring procedure using the system is not possible. The parking gap
is too small.
 Braking intervention. Speed too high.
The speed was too high during the parking and was automatically reduced.

Cruise Control System

 Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Functioning 148
Operating Description 149
The Cruise Control System (CCS) maintains a set speed without you having to
actuate the accelerator pedal.
The state where the CCS maintains the speed is referred to hereinafter as the
control.

148 Driving
 Operating Description

Fig. 168
Cruise control system controls

Fig. 167 Segment display: Examples of status displays the CCS

 Read and observe on page 148 first.  Read and observe on page 148 first.

CCS status displays » Fig. 166, » Fig. 167 Overview of the control elements of the CCS » Fig. 168
 Speed is set, control is inactive (in the colour display the digits of speed A  Deactivate CCS (delete set speed)
limits is shown in grey).  Interrupt control (sprung position)
 Control active (in the colour display the digits of the speed limits are high-  Activate CCS (control deactivated)
lighted).
B  Take control againa) / Increase speed
 No speed set.
C  Launch control / reduce speed
 System fault - seek assistance from a specialist garage immediately.
a) If no speed is set, the current speed is used.
Basic requirements for start of control
At the start of the control process, the CCS regulates the vehicle to the current
 The CCS is activated.
speed, and this speed is shown on the instrument cluster display. The warning
 On vehicles with manual transmission, second gear or higher is engaged. light  illuminates in the instrument cluster.
 On vehicles with an automatic transmission, the selector lever is in the
D/S position or in the Tiptronic position. Automatic control interruption
 The current speed is higher than approx. 20 km/h. Automatic control interruption occurs if any of the following conditions are
met.
This is only possible within the range which is permitted by the power output ▶ The brake pedal is operated.
and braking power of the engine. ▶ When one of the brake assist systems (e.g. ESC) intervenes.
▶ Through an airbag deployment.
WARNING
If the engine power or engine braking effect is insufficient to maintain the WARNING
set speed, the driver must take control of vehicle operation. ■ Always deactivate the cruise control system after use to prevent uninten-
tional switching on of the system.
■ Control may only be resumed if the set speed is not too high for the cur-
rent traffic conditions. 

Assist systems 149

 Note WARNING
During control, speed can be increased by pressing the accelerator pedal. Re- For safety reasons, do not use the ACC under the following conditions.
leasing the accelerator pedal will cause the speed to drop again to the set ■ When driving in turning lanes, motorway exits or construction sites, to
speed. avoid an unwanted acceleration to the stored speed.
■ When visibility is poor, (e.g. fog, heavy rain, thick snowfall).
■ When road conditions are poor (e.g. ice, slippery road, gravel, dirt road).
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
■ When driving around “sharp” bends.
■ When riding on a steep gradient / high slope.
 Introduction
■ When driving through places where metal objects (such as metal build-
This chapter contains information on the following subjects: ings, railroad tracks, etc.) can be found.
■ When driving through very divided and enclosed spaces (such as large-ca-
Operation 150
pacity garages, car ferries, tunnels and the like.).
Automatic stop-start 151
Operation Overview 152
Note
Start control 152
■ The ACC is designed primarily for use on motorways.
Stop/resume control 152
■ The ACC reduces the speed by automatically releasing the accelerator or by
Set/change the desired speed 153
means of a braking procedure as appropriate. If the brakes are used for an au-
Set the clearance level 153 tomatic speed reduction at any moments, then the brake light illuminates.
Special driving conditions 154 ■ In case of failure of more than one brake light on the vehicle or on the con-
Information messages 155 nected trailer, the ACC becomes unavailable.
■ The control automatically cancels the engagement of the brake supportive
The automatic distance control (hereinafter referred to as ACC) maintains the
assistance systems (e.g. ESC) or when the maximum permitted engine speed is
set speed or the distance to the vehicle ahead without the accelerator or
exceeded.
brake pedal being pressed.
The front of the vehicle and the distance to the vehicle ahead is monitored by Operation
a radar sensor » page 135.
The state in which the ACC maintains the speed or the proximity is described
as control from here on.

WARNING
■ The general information relating to the use of assistance systems must
be observed » page 135, in section Introduction.
■ The driver must always be ready to take over steering of the vehicle him-
self (accelerate or brake).
■ The ACC does not react when approaching a stationary obstacle, such as
traffic jams, vehicle breakdowns or vehicles waiting at a traffic light.
■ The ACC does not respond to crossing or oncoming objects. Fig. 169 Display in the instrument cluster: Examples of ACC displays 
■ If the ACC does not decelerate fast enough, immediately apply the vehi-
cle's foot brake.

150 Driving
 Note to reduce speed
If the delay of the ACC is insufficient in relation to the vehicle in front, in the
instrument cluster, the warning light  lights up and the display shows the
following message.
 Apply the brake!

Note
Some ACC notifications in the display of the instrument cluster may be hidden
by notifications for other functions. An ACC notification automatically appears
for a brief moment when there is a change in status of the ACC.
Fig. 170 Instrument cluster display: Examples of ACC status displays
Automatic stop-start
 Read and observe on page 150 first.
 Read and observe on page 150 first.
The ACC allows a speed of 30 - 160 km/h to be set or a distance to the preced-
Vehicles with an automatic transmission can decelerate to a standstill and
ing vehicle to be very short of very long to be set.
start moving again using the ACC.
The ACC adjusts the set speed with respect to the detected vehicle ahead,
thus maintaining the selected proximity. Decelerate to a standstill
If a vehicle ahead decelerates to a standstill, the ACC will also decelerate your
The ACC can detect a vehicle that is up to approx. 120 m ahead using the radar vehicle to a standstill.
sensor.
Starting to drive again after a holding period
ACC display » Fig. 169 As soon as the vehicle ahead starts moving again after a holding period, your
1 Vehicle detected (control active). vehicle will also move and the speed will continue to be regulated. Control is
2 Line showing the displacement of the distance when setting » page 153, automatically disconnected in case of longer holding periods.
Set the clearance level.
Depress the brake pedal.
3 Set distance to the vehicle ahead.
4 Vehicle detected (control deactivated).
ACC status displays » Fig. 170
 Regulation is inactive (in the colour display the digits of speed limits is
shown in grey).
 Regulation active - no vehicle detected (in the colour display the digits of
the speed limits are highlighted).
 Control deactivated - no speed stored.
 Regulation active - vehicle detected (in the colour display the digits of the
speed limits are highlighted).

Assist systems 151

Operation Overview  On vehicles with a manual transmission, the second gear or higher must
be engaged.
 On vehicles with an automatic transmission, the selector lever must be in
the D/S position or in the Tiptronic position.
 On vehicles with a manual transmission, the current speed must be higher
than approx. 25 km/h.
 On vehicles with a automatic transmission, the current speed must be
higher than approx. 2 km/h.
The control be started with the key  or by adjusting the lever  » Fig. 171
on page 152 into the sprung position.
Button 
Fig. 171 Operating lever › Press  press.
 Read and observe on page 150 first. The ACC will adopt the current speed and execute control.
Lever position 
Overview of ACC functions operated with the lever » Fig. 171 › Set the lever into the sprung position  set.
1  Activate ACC (control deactivated)
The ACC will adopt the current speed and execute control. Should the speed
2  Start control (resume) / increase speed by 1 km/h at a time be stored already, the ACC adopts this speed and executes control.
(sprung position)
3  Interrupt control (sprung position) The warning light  illuminates in the instrument cluster when the regulation
is switched on.
4  Deactivate ACC
5   Increase speed by 10 km/h at a time Note
6   Decrease speed by 10 km/h at a time ■ If control is started at a speed of less than 30 km/h on vehicles with an auto-
A    Set proximity level
matic transmission, the speed of 30 km/h is stored. The speed increases auto-
matically to 30 km/h or is regulated with respect to the speed of the vehicle
B  Start control (adopt current speed) / Reduce speed by 1 km/h at ahead.
a time ■ When TCS is disabled, it will be activated automatically upon starting control.
■ If the TCS is deactivated during control, control is stopped automatically.
Note
If the lever is set » Fig. 171 from the position  directly into the sprung posi-
tion,  the current speed is stored and the control process is started.
Stop/resume control
 Read and observe on page 150 first.
Start control
Stop control
 Read and observe on page 150 first. › Set the lever into the sprung position  » Fig. 171 on page 152 set.
Basic requirements for start of control Or
 ACC is enabled. › Apply the brake.
 TCS is enabled » page 135, Braking and stabilisation systems.
Control stops, the speed remains stored. 

152 Driving
Resume control Note
› Start control » page 152. ■ If during control the speed is increased by pressing the accelerator, control is
WARNING temporarily stopped. Upon releasing the accelerator, control is automatically
resumed.
Control may only be resumed if the stored speed is not too high for the cur- ■ If during control the speed is reduced by applying the brake, control is stop-
rent traffic conditions. ped. Control needs to be restarted in order to resume » page 152.
■ If the vehicle is controlled by a lower speed than the stored speed, then 
Note the current speed is stored the first time the key is pressed. Press the key
Regulation is also stopped when the clutch is held down for longer than 30 s. again  and the speed is reduced in increments of 1 km/h.

Set/change the desired speed Set the clearance level

 Read and observe on page 150 first.  Read and observe on page 150 first.

The desired speed can be set or changed using the control lever » Fig. 171 on The proximity to the vehicle ahead can be set with the lever » Fig. 171 on
page 152. page 152 or in the Infotainment » Owner´s Manual Infotainment, chapter CAR -
The set speed is stored upon releasing the lever or the button on the button vehicle settings.
on the lever. Setting by means of the lever
Setting/changing the speed by 10 km/h at a time () - requirements › Set the switch  Adjust in the spring-tensioned position  or -
» Fig. 171 on page 152.
 ACC is enabled.
The display of the instrument cluster shows line 2 » Fig. 169 on page 150,
Increasing the speed by 1 km/h at a time () - requirements
which indicates the proximity.
 ACC is enabled.
 Vehicle control is taking place. › Using the switch  Adjust the line 2 to the desired distance level on
the lever.
Decreasing the speed by 1 km/h at a time () - requirements
 ACC is enabled. Note
 Vehicle control is taking place. ■ If the proximity is changed in infotainment, the change will only come into
effect after a subsequent activation of the ACC.
Changing the speed by adopting the current speed () - requirements ■ The proximity is dependent on the speed. The higher the speed, the greater
 ACC is enabled. the proximity to the vehicle ahead.
 The vehicle is moving at a speed other than that which is stored. ■ On wet roads, a longer time interval to the vehicle ahead should always be
selected than on dry roads.

Assist systems 153

Special driving conditions Narrow vehicles or vehicles travelling side by side
Narrow vehicles or vehicles travelling side by side are not detected by the ra-
dar sensor until they are within the sensor's range » Fig. 172 - .
If necessary, slow down the car by applying the brake.
Other vehicles changing lanes
Vehicles that change onto the lane with a small proximity » Fig. 173 - do not
have to be detected by the radar sensor in time. The result may be a delayed
ACC response.
If necessary, slow down the car by applying the brake.
Stationary vehicles
The ACC does not detect stationary objects! When a vehicle detected by the
Fig. 172 Special conditions: Cornering / narrow vehicles or vehicles travel-
ACC turns or sheers off and there is a stationary vehicle in front of this vehicle,
ling side by side
» Fig. 173 - the ACC does not respond to the stationary vehicle.
In such cases, take over the steering and stop the vehicle by applying the foot
brake.
When overtaking
When your vehicle is being controlled (the speed is lower than that which is
stored) and the indicator is activated, the ACC interprets this situation as
meaning that the driver intends to overtake. The ACC automatically acceler-
ates the vehicle, thereby reducing the proximity to a vehicle ahead.
If the vehicle changes to the fast lane and no vehicle is detected ahead, the
ACC accelerates until the set speed is reached and then keeps it constant.
Fig. 173 Special conditions: Lane changes of other vehicles / stationary Acceleration can be cancelled at any time by touch on the brake pedal or
vehicles pressing the button  on the lever » Fig. 171 on page 152.
Vehicles with special load or special body parts
 Read and observe on page 150 first. Other vehicles with a load or with body parts protruding from the sides, back
or top of the vehicle contour may not be detected by the ACC.
The following and similar situations require special attention of the driver.
Control should therefore be disabled whenever you are driving behind or over-
When cornering taking such a vehicle.
When driving around long bends the ACC may respond to a vehicle in the adja-
cent lane » Fig. 172 - . Your own vehicle is regulated with respect to this vehi- Towing a trailer
cle and will no longer respond to the vehicle ahead. When towing, or in when another accessory is connected to the trailer socket
the ACC control is set with a lower rate. The manner of driving should there-
In such cases, control should be disabled by accelerating, applying the brake or
fore be adapted to this limitation.
pressing the button on the operating lever .  » Fig. 171 on page 152.

154 Driving
Information messages The Front Assist (hereinafter referred to as system) warns you of the danger of
a collision with a vehicle or another obstacle in front of the vehicle, and tries to
 Read and observe on page 150 first. avoid a collision or mitigate its consequences by automatically applying the
brakes where necessary.
The information messages are shown in the instrument cluster display.
The area in front of the vehicle is monitored by a radar sensor » page 135.
 ACC: no sensor view! 
The sensor is soiled or covered. WARNING
■ The general information relating to the use of assistance systems must
Stop the vehicle, switch off the engine and clean the sensor or remove the
be observed » page 135, in section Introduction.
item causing the lack of visibility » Fig. 154 on page 135.
■ The system does not respond to crossing or oncoming objects.
If the message appears again after starting the engine, the position of the lev-
er should be  » Fig. 171 on page 152 adjusted. CAUTION
 ACC not available.  In case of failure of more than one brake light on the vehicle or on the electri-
cally connected trailer, the system becomes unavailable.
The ACC is not available for an unknown reason.
Stop the vehicle, switch off the engine and then start it again. If the ACC is still Operation
not available, push the lever into position  . Seek help from a specialist ga-
rage.  Read and observe and on page 155 first.
 Error: ACC  The system support is provided in the following manner.
There is an ACC system error. ▶ Alerts you about a dangerous proximity to the vehicle ahead.
▶ Warns you of an impending collision.
Push the lever into position .  press. Seek help from a specialist garage. ▶ Prepares the brakes for emergency braking prior to a detected danger.
 Speed limit ▶ Assists with a brake action triggered by the driver.
▶ If the driver fails to respond to a detected danger, automatic braking is per-
Increase the speed accordingly and start control» page 152.
formed.
The system can work only if the following basic conditions are met.
Front Assist
 The system is activated.
 Introduction  TCS is enabled » page 135, Braking and stabilisation systems.
 The vehicle is travelling forwards at a speed of more than approx. 5 km/h.
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Operation 155 Note
Distance warning (dangerous distance) 156 The system can be impaired or may not be available, for example when driving
Warning and automatic braking 156 in “sharp ”curves or with an ESC engagement » page 136.
Disable/enable 156
Information messages 157

Assist systems 155

Distance warning (dangerous distance) With automatic braking the symbol appears » Fig. 175 in the display.
Advance warning
Fig. 174 If the system detects a risk of collision, the symbol » Fig. 175 appears in the
Symbols in the instrument cluster: Note (dangerous display and you will hear an acoustic signal.
proximity) At the same time, the braking system is prepared for possible emergency brak-
ing.
The pre-warning display can occur in the following situations.
▶ If there is a risk of collision with a moving obstacle at a driving speed range
of approx. 30 km/h to approx. 210 km/h.
▶ If there is a risk of collision with a stationary obstacle at a driving speed
range of approx. 30 km/h to approx. 85 km/h.
 Read and observe and on page 155 first.
When the advance warning is issued, the brake pedal must be pressed or the
If a safe interval to the vehicle ahead falls below a minimum the display of the moving obstacle avoided!
instrument cluster shows the symbol  » Fig. 174.
Acute alert
Immediately increase the proximity if the current traffic situation allows you If the driver does not react to the advance warning, the system briefly applies
to do so! the brake automatically via an active brake intervention to draw attention to
The proximity at which the warning is displayed depends on the current speed. the potential danger of a collision again.

The warning may occur when driving between about 60 km/h and 210 km/h. Automatic Braking
If the driver fails to respond to the acute warning, the system starts to apply
Warning and automatic braking the brakes automatically with increasing stopping power in several stages.
Brake Support
Fig. 175 If the driver does not brake sufficiently in the event of an impending collision,
Symbols in the instrument cluster: Warning or emer- the system automatically increases the braking force.
gency braking at low speed The brake support only occurs as long as the brake pedal is being firmly press-
ed down.

Note
■ If an automatic brake intervention is triggered by the system, the pressure in
the brake system increases and the brake pedal cannot be operated with the
normal pedal stroke.
 Read and observe and on page 155 first. ■ The automatic braking interventions can be cancelled by pressing the accel-
erator pedal or by means of a steering intervention.
Emergency braking at low speed
In a driving speed range of approx. 5 km/h to approx. 30 km/h, the automatic Disable/enable
braking action is not preceded by a warning. In the event of an immediate risk
of impact, automatic braking is carried out with the breaking force increasing  Read and observe and on page 155 first.
in stages.
The function is automatically activated each time the ignition is switched on. 

156 Driving
The system should only be disabled in exceptional cases » . Selection of the driving mode (Driving Mode Selection)
The system can be activated or deactivated in one of two ways.
▶ In the instrument cluster display » page 48, Menu itemAssist systems.  Introduction
▶ Infotainment » Owner´s Manual Infotainment, chapter CAR - vehicle set-
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
tings.
Normal 157
The following functions can be activated or deactivated separately in infotain-
ment. Sport mode 157
▶ Distance warning Eco mode 158
▶ Advance warning Individual mode 158
Off-road mode 158
f the distance-warning function was deactivated before switching off the igni-
tion, it remains deactivated after switching on the ignition. Mode selection and Infotainment display 159
Individual mode settings 159
WARNING
By selecting the driving mode, the driving behaviour can be adapted to the de-
In the following situations, Front Assist should be switched off for safety sired mode of operation.
reasons.
■ When the vehicle is being towed away. The following modes of operation are available Normal, Sport, Eco, Individual and
■ When the vehicle is on a rolling test bench. Off-road.
■ If an unfounded warning was issued or a system action carried out. The mode Off-road is only available on the vehicles Octavia SCOUT.
■ When on a truck, car ferry or similar.
WARNING
The general information relating to the use of assistance systems must be
Information messages
observed » page 135, in section Introduction.
 Read and observe and on page 155 first.

The information messages are shown in the instrument cluster display. Normal
 Front Assist: no sensor view.  Read and observe on page 157 first.
The sensor is soiled or covered.
This mode is suitable for a conventional driving.
Stop the vehicle, switch off the engine and clean the sensor or remove the ob-
stacle causing the lack of visibility » page 135, Radar sensor. Sport mode
If after engine start the message persists, then the help of a professional or-
ganisation is required.
 Read and observe on page 157 first.

 Front Assist not available. This mode is suitable for a sporty driving.
The system is not available for an unknown reason. Selecting this mode primarily affects the function of the following systems.
Stop the vehicle, switch off the engine and then start it again. Steering
The power steering is reduced slightly, i.e., the driver needs to exert more
If after engine start the message persists, then the help of a professional or-
force for steering . 
ganisation is required.

Assist systems 157

Engine / drive Air conditioning (Climatronic)
The vehicle acceleration is more dynamic than in Normal mode. The air conditioning is controlled so as to save energy. For this reason, for ex-
ample, it may take longer to reach the desired interior temperature in mode
Front axle differential lock
Normal.
The driving force distribution between the front wheels is adapted to the spor-
ty driving style. Note
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) ■ The mode Eco is not available when towing a trailer or when another acces-
The acceleration is quicker than in Normal mode with distance control sory is connected to the trailer socket. If the vehicle is in drive mode Eco and a
» page 150. trailer is hitched up or another accessory is connected, the vehicle is automati-
cally set to the driving mode Normal.
Xenon headlight ■ The maximum vehicle acceleration (kick down function) is possible also in
The headlamps adapt to the driving style more dynamically than in mode Nor- driving mode Eco.
mal » page 70.
ProActive passenger protection Individual mode
The first level of protection is deactivated » page 160.
 Read and observe on page 157 first.
Engine noise
The engine noise is noticeable in the interior more intensely than in Normal In the mode Individual each system can be set independently » page 159, Individ-
mode. ual mode settings.

Eco mode Off-road mode

 Read and observe on page 157 first.  Read and observe on page 157 first.

This mode is suitable for a relaxed style of driving and helps to save fuel. The mode Off-road is suitable for driving outside paved roads.

Selecting this mode primarily affects the function of the following systems. Further information » page 138, OFF ROAD-mode.

Engine / drive Note

Vehicle acceleration is more relaxed than in Normal mode. The mode Off-road is deactivated after switching off and switching on the igni-
The recommended gear is controlled such to achieve the lowest possible fuel tion and the mode Normal is set automatically.
consumption » page 41.
When the START-STOP system was deactivated manually » page 124, it is au-
tomatically activated.
The automatic gearbox is set automatically to mode E » page 129.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
Acceleration occurs more relaxed than in Normal » page 150mode with distance
control.
Xenon headlight
The system is in economic mode » page 70. The headlamps are in basic setting
and do not adapt to the direction of travel.

158 Driving
Mode selection and Infotainment display Note
■ The currently selected running mode is displayed in the Infotainment in the
status bar of the main menu of the symbol .
■ If the driving mode menu is not operated within a few seconds, the Infotain-
ment switches to the last selected menu or switches off.

Individual mode settings

 Read and observe on page 157 first.

In mode Individual the vehicle systems can be set as follows.

■ Steering: - Sets the power steering characteristics
Fig. 176 Button for selecting the driving mode: Version 1 / version 2 Normal - Normal
■
Sport - Sports
■
■ Engine:/Drive: - Sets the engine characteristic (vehicles with manual transmis-
Fig. 177 sion) / drive characteristic (vehicles with automatic transmission)
Shown in the infotainment dis- ■ Normal - Normal
play ■ Sport - Sports
■ Eco - Economical
■ Front differential lock: - Sets the characteristics of the front axle differential lock
■ Normal - Normal
■ Sport - Sports
■ ACC: - Sets the vehicle acceleration when adaptive cruise control is activated
■ Normal - Normal
■ Sport - Sports
 Read and observe on page 157 first. ■ Eco - Economical
■ Dynamic cornering light: - Sets the characteristics of the Xenon headlight
Procedure for the selection of the driving mode ■ Normal - Normal
› Press the symbol button  or  » Fig. 176. ■ Sport - Sports
In the Infotainment display a running mode menu » Fig. 177 appears. ■ Eco - Economical
■ Air conditioning: - Sets the Climatronic characteristics
The mode is changed by repeatedly pressing the symbol key  and  or by
■ Normal - Normal
pressing the corresponding function key in the Infotainment display.
■ Eco - Economical
If a driving mode other than Normal is selected, then the symbol lights up on ■ Engine sound: - Sets the engine noise in the vehicle
the button  or . ■ Normal - Normal
■ Sport - Sports
Function buttons on the display » Fig. 177
■ Eco - Economical
A Sets the mode Individual and information on the setting of the currently se- ■ Reset mode - Setting for all menu items in the Individual mode to Normal
lected mode. ■ Cancel - Keep the current settings
B Cancel the menu to select driving mode. ■ Reset - Set all menu items to Normal
C Modes (for the selected mode the button is shown in green).

Assist systems 159

Proactive passenger protection (Crew Protect Assist) The first protection level can be deactivated in one of the following ways.
▶ The system deactivation in the Infotainment » Owner´s Manual Infotain-
 Introduction ment, chapter CAR - vehicle settings.
▶ Deactivation of TCS » page 136.
This chapter contains information on the following subjects: ▶ Selecting the driving mode Sport » page 157.

Function 160 Provided that the driving mode Sport is not selected, the system is activated
over the two levels of protection after switching the ignition off and on again.
Proactive passenger protection (hereafter known as system) increases pas-
senger protection in the front seats in situations that could lead to vehicle im- The second level of protection
pact or overturning. The system intervenes only if the situation is evaluated as critical, such as in
panic braking at high speeds.
WARNING
This level of protection cannot be deactivated.
The general information relating to the use of assistance systems must be
observed » page 135, in section Introduction. Note
If the front passenger front airbag is deactivated » page 19 the belt tensioning
Note function for the front passenger seat is switched off.
The system component service life is monitored electronically. Further infor-
mation » page 35,  Safety systems.
Lane Departure Warning (Lane Assist)
Function  Introduction
 Read and observe on page 160 first.
Fig. 178
In critical driving situations (e.g. during emergency braking or a sudden change Camera viewing window for Lane
in direction), the following steps can be taken separately or combined in order Assist
to reduce the risk of serious injury.
▶ The front passenger's and driver's seatbelts, if worn, are automatically ten-
sioned closely over the body.
▶ The windows in the side doors (if open) are automatically closed up to a gap
of about 5 cm from the edge.
▶ The sliding/tilting roof is closed.

Once the critical driving situation has passed, the tension on the seatbelts will This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
be released again.
Operation 161
The system operates at two levels of protection. Activation / deactivation 162
The first level of protection Information messages 162
The system already intervenes in situations that may occur during dynamic The lane departure warning (hereinafter known as system) helps to keep the
driving. As a result, this primarily helps to keep the driver and the passenger in vehicle between the boundary lines of a lane.
the correct seated position.
The system detects the boundary lines of a lane using the camera » Fig. 178. 

160 Driving
When the vehicle approaches a detected line between lanes, the system Operation
makes a light movement of the steering wheel in the opposite direction to the
boundary line. This corrective steering intervention can be manually overrid-
den at any time.

WARNING
■ The general information relating to the use of assistance systems must
be observed » page 135, in section Introduction.
■ Lane Assist can help you keep the vehicle within the lane. However, it
does not steer the vehicle for you. The driver retains full responsibility for
steering at all times.
■ Some objects on the road may be incorrectly detected as lines. As a re-
sult, an incorrect steering intervention may take place.
Fig. 179 Monochromatic display of the instrument cluster: Examples of
system indications
WARNING
The detection capability of the camera may be limited by various external
influences. In such cases, the assistant may not detect the line between
two lanes at all or not properly. The detection capability of the camera may
be restricted in the following situations, for example.
■ When visibility is poor, (e.g. fog, heavy rain, thick snowfall).
■ When driving around “sharp” bends.
■ The camera is blinded by the sun.
■ The camera is blinded by the oncoming traffic.
■ The viewing range of the camera is impeded by a vehicle travelling ahead.
■ The camera viewing range is obstructed by an obstacle.

Fig. 180 Colour display of the instrument cluster: Examples of system in-
CAUTION
dications
Do not attach any stickers or similar objects to the windscreen to avoid impair-
ing the functions of the systems.
 Read and observe and on page 161 first.
Note
System displays» Fig. 179 and » Fig. 180
■ The system is designed for driving on motorways and roads with adequate
 The system is activated, but not ready to intervene.
longitudinal markings.
■ The system can detect both continuous and broken lines.  The system is active and ready to intervene.
 The system intervenes when approaching the right-hand boundary lane.
 Adaptive lane assist ensues (boundary lines on both sides of the vehicle
detected).
The system can intervene when the following basic conditions are present.
 The system is activated.
 The vehicle speed is no more than about 65 km/h. 

Assist systems 161

 The boundary lines are clearly visible (appropriate longitudinal markings). After switching off and switching on the ignition, the system setting is re-
 The boundary line of at least one side of the lane is detected. tained.
 The driver's hands are on the steering wheel.
 The lane is more than 2.5 m in width. Information messages
If the turn signal is switched on prior to driving over the boundary line (e.g.  Read and observe and on page 161 first.
when making a turn), no steering intervention takes place when the vehicle
approaches the boundary line. The system regards the situation as an inten- The information messages are shown in the instrument cluster display.
ded lane change.  Lane Assist currently not available. No sensor view.

Warning lights in the instrument cluster The windscreen is dirty, iced over or misted up in the camera viewing range.
Clean the windscreen or remove the obstacles.
Warning light Meaning
 Lane Assist currently not available.
 The system is active, but not ready to intervene. The system has limited functionality due to a temporary error. Try to re-acti-
The system is active and ready to intervene or is currently vate the machine.
 intervening.  Error: Lane Assist
Adaptive lane assist A system error has occurred. Seek help from a specialist garage.
Adaptive lane assist helps to keep the vehicle in the position between the  Lane Assist: take over steering!
boundary lines selected by the driver, by means of steering intervention.
The system has detected that there are no hands on the steering wheel. In
If the system detects only one boundary line, it will help to maintain the selec- this case the Assist system is not ready to intervene. Place your hands on the
ted proximity from said boundary line. steering wheel.
If the proximity to the detected boundary line is changed, the system quickly
adapts and maintains the newly-selected position. Traffic sign recognition
WARNING
 Introduction
The system function may be restricted if, for example there is danger due
to ruts on a downhill road or in a crosswind. This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Function 163
Activation / deactivation Additional display 164
Information messages 164
 Read and observe and on page 161 first.
The road sign recognition system (hereinafter referred to as system) shows
The activation or deactivation of the system can be carried out in one of two certain road signs on the instrument cluster display. 
ways.
▶ In the instrument cluster display » page 48, Menu itemAssist systems.
▶ Infotainment » Owner´s Manual Infotainment, chapter CAR - vehicle set-
tings.
Adaptive tracking can also be enabled or disabled In Infotainment.

162 Driving
 WARNING
■ The general information relating to the use of assistance systems must
be observed » page 135, in section Introduction.
■ Vertical traffic signs must always take precedence over the traffic signs
shown in the display. The driver is always responsible for correctly assess-
ing the traffic situation.
■ Traffic signs may not be recognised at all by the system, or may be recog-
nised incorrectly. As a result, the traffic signs may not be displayed at all, or
the wrong one may appear.
■ On the system side, only a traffic sign display is undertaken, neither a
warning when limit is exceeded or driving speed adjustment is undertaken! Fig. 182 Display in the instrument cluster: Display examples
■ Speed specifications on the displayed road signs refer to the country-spe-
cific speed units. For example, the display  on the display can therefore  Read and observe on page 163 first.
refer to km/h or mph depending on the country.
Description of indications and displayed traffic signs
Note Display » Fig. 182
The system is only available in some countries.  Display of detected traffic signs in the menu item Driving data → Road sign
 Additional display (monochromatic display)
Function  Additional display (colour display)
The system can display in the display the following recognized traffic sign.
Fig. 181 ▶ Speed limits.
Camera viewing range for traffic ▶ Overtaking prohibited.
sign recognition
Additional signs, such as 'when wet' or signs which only apply for a limited
time can also be displayed.
The system works on the basis of the data captured by the camera and is only
able to show traffic signs which are in the camera's “viewing range” » Fig. 181.
Data from the camera is supplemented by information from the Infotainment
Navigation. This is the reason why traffic signs with maximum speeds can also
be shown on sections of roads which do not have any traffic signs.
Mode when towing a trailer
For vehicles with a factory-fitted towing device the display for the trailer oper-
ation applicable road signs can be enabled or disabled in the Infotainment dis-
play » Owner´s Manual Infotainment, chapter CAR - vehicle Settings.
The system may not be available or may only be available to a limited extent
in the following situations.
▶ Poor visibility conditions, e.g. fog, heavy rain, thick snowfall.
▶ The camera is blinded by the sun.
▶ The camera is blinded by the oncoming traffic. 

Assist systems 163

▶ The camera “viewing range” is obstructed by an obstacle. Infotainment Navigation is not currently providing any data. Check whether
▶ Travelling at high speed. the maps are up-to-date or the whether the vehicle is currently in a location
▶ The traffic signs are fully or partially obscured (e.g. by trees,
snow, dirt or for which no navigation data are available.
other vehicles).
▶ The traffic signs are not standard (round with a red border).
Fatigue detection
▶ The traffic signs are damaged or bent.
▶ The traffic signs are attached to flashing neon signs.
▶ The traffic signs were changed (the navigation data are out of date).
 Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Additional display Function 164
 Read and observe on page 163 first. Information messages 165
The fatigue detection system (hereinafter referred to as system) recommends
If the menu item Road sign is currently not shown » Fig. 182 on page 163 - , the
the driver takes a break from driving when driver fatigue can be detected due
road sign with the speed limit will appear in the upper display area of the in-
to the driver's steering behaviour.
strument cluster » Fig. 182 on page 163 - , .
If several traffic signs are detected simultaneously, the next traffic sign will al- WARNING
so in some cases be displayed in the colour display - . All detected traffic ■ The general information relating to the use of assistance systems must
signs can be displayed in the menu item Road sign - . be observed » page 135, in section Introduction.
■ For the driving ability is always the driver's responsibility. Never drive if
The additional display can be enabled or disabled in the Infotainment» Owner
you feel tired.
´s Manual Infotainment, chapter CAR - vehicle settings.
■ The system may not detect all cases where a break is needed.
■ Therefore, take regular, sufficient breaks during long trips.
Information messages ■ There will be no system warning during the so-called micro-sleep.

 Read and observe on page 163 first.

Note
The information messages are shown in the instrument cluster display. ■ In some situations, the system may evaluate the driving incorrectly and thus
 No road signs available. mistakenly recommend a break (e.g. sporty driving, adverse weather condi-
No maximum speeds were recognised (e.g. on German motorways where there tions or poor road conditions).
■ The system is designed primarily for use on motorways.
is no speed limit).
 Error: Road sign recognition
Function
A system error has occurred. Seek help from a specialist garage.
 Read and observe on page 164 first.
 Road sign recognition: clean the windscreen!
From the start of the journey, the system evaluates steering behaviour. If,
The windscreen is dirty, iced over or misted up in the camera viewing range.
while driving, there have been changes in the steering behaviours that are
Clean the windscreen or remove the obstacles.
evaluated by the system as indicating possible fatigue, a break recommenda-
 Dynamic Road Sign Display currently restricted. tion is issued.
The system evaluates steering behaviour and recommends a break at speeds
of 65-200 km / h. 

164 Driving
The system detects a break from driving when one of the following condi- WARNING
tions is met. ■ The general information relating to the use of assistance systems must
▶ The vehicle is stopped and the ignition is turned off.
be observed » page 135, in section Introduction.
▶ The vehicle is stopped, the seat belt is taken off and the driver's door is
■ Having the correct tyre inflation pressure is always the driver's responsi-
opened. bility. Tyre inflation pressure must be checked regularly » page 205.
▶ The vehicle is stopped for more than 15 minutes.
■ The system cannot warn in case of very rapid tyre inflation pressure loss,
If none of these conditions are met or if the driving style is not changed, the e.g. in case of sudden tyre damage.
system recommends a driving break again after 15 minutes.
The system can be activated or deactivated in the Infotainment » Owner´s Saving tyre pressure values
Manual Infotainment, chapter CAR - vehicle settings.
 Read and observe on page 165 first.
Information messages The tyre pressure values are always stored in the system if one of the follow-
 Read and observe on page 164 first. ing events occurs.
▶ Change of tyre inflation pressure.
The icon appears and the following message for a few seconds in the display ▶ Change one or more wheels.
of the instrument cluster  and the following message. ▶ Change in position of a wheel on the vehicle.
▶ The warning light  lights up in the instrument cluster.
 Driver alert. Take a break!
 DRIVER ALERT TAKE A BREAK Depending on the vehicle equipment, the tyre pressure values are stored ei-
ther in Infotainment or by pressing a button.
An audible signal is also emitted.
WARNING
Tyre pressure monitoring Before storing the pressure values, the tyres must be inflated to the speci-
fied inflation pressure » page 205. If incorrect pressure values are saved,
 Introduction the system may also not issue a warning even if the tyre inflation pressure
is too low.l
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Saving tyre pressure values 165 CAUTION
Saving tyre pressure values and infotainment display 166 The tyre pressure values must be saved every 10,000 km or once annually in
Saving tyre pressure values by pressing a button 166 order to ensure correct system functioning.
The tyre pressure monitoring function (hereinafter referred to as the system)
monitors the tyre pressure while driving.
If the tyre inflation pressure changes, the warning light  lights up in the in-
strument cluster and an audible signal is heard.
Information on the procedure for the notification of a change in tyre inflation
pressure » page 35.
The system can only function properly if the tyres have the prescribed inflation
pressure and these pressure values are stored in the system.

Assist systems 165

Saving tyre pressure values and infotainment display  Read and observe on page 165 first.

› Inflate all tyres to the prescribed pressure.

Fig. 183 › Switch on the ignition.
Button for storing the pressure › Press and hold  » Fig. 184 the symbol key.
values/example of the display:
The warning light  lights up in the instrument cluster.
the system indicates a pressure
change in the front-right tyre An acoustic signal sounds and the warning light goes out - this indicates that
the tyre pressure values have been saved.
› Release the symbol key  .

 Read and observe on page 165 first.

› Inflate all tyres to the prescribed pressure.

› Switch on the ignition.
› Infotainment switches on.
› Press the button  in the Infotainment and then in the display the function
keys one after the other , Vehicle status.
› Using the function keys,   select the menu item Tyre Pressure Loss Indica-
tor.
› Press the function key  SET » Fig. 183 button.
Follow the instructions that appear on the display.
A message in the display provides information about the storage of the tyre
pressure values.
Note
When warning light  lights up in the instrument cluster, the affected tyre can
be displayed in Infotainment » Fig. 183.

Saving tyre pressure values by pressing a button

Fig. 184
Button for storing the pressure
values

166 Driving
 Note
Hitch and trailer
■ Operation and maintenance of the tow hitch » page 186.
■ The towing vehicle by means of the detachable ball rod » page 222.
Hitch
■ If the towing device is removed completely, it must be replaced with the
 Introduction original reinforcement of the rear bumper which is part of the mount for the
towing eye.
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Description 167 Description
Adjusting the ready position 168
Correctly adjusted ready position 168
Assembling the bar ball – Step 1 169
Assembling the bar ball – Step 2 169
Check proper fitting 170
Removing the bar ball – Step 1 170
Removing the bar ball – Step 2 171
Mount accessories 171
The maximum trailer drawbar load is 75 kg.
For vehicles with all-wheel drive, the maximum trailer nose weight is 80 kg. Fig. 185 Support for the hitch equipment / ball bar / key (Version 1 and 2)
With G-TEC-vehicles, the maximum trailer drawbar load is 56 kg .
 Read and observe and on page 167 first.
The draw bar load information on the type plate of the towing device is merely
a test value for the towing device. The vehicle-specific information is detailed The ball rod can be removed and is located in the spare wheel well or in a com-
in the vehicle documents. partment for the spare wheel in the luggage compartment.
The hitch comes with two key versions. The handling of the hitch is identical
WARNING
for the two key versions. The difference is only in the key version.
■ Before each time you make a journey when using the ball rod, check that
it is seated correctly and is secured in the mounting recess. Support for the towing device and tow bar » Fig. 185
■ Do not use the ball rod if it is not correctly inserted into the mounting re- 1 13-pin power socket
cess and secured. 2 Safety eye
■ Do not use the towing hitch if it is damaged or if there are parts missing. 3 Mounting recess
■ Do not perform any modifications or changes to the towing device.
4 Cap
■ Keep the mounting recess of the towing device clean at all times. Such
5 Dust cap
dirt prevents the ball rod from being attached securely!
6 Ball rod
CAUTION 7 Operating lever
■ Take care when using the ball rod - there is a risk of paint damage to the 8 Lock cap
bumper. 9 Trigger pin
■ When the ball rod is removed always place the cover onto the mounting re- 10 Lock
cess - there is a danger of soiling the mounting recess. 11 Locking ball 

Hitch and trailer 167

12 Key – Version 1 › Turn keyA in the direction of arrow 1 so that the red marking is pointing
13 Key – Version 2 upwards » Fig. 186.

Note Gear 1 Step - applies to the key version 2

If you lose the key, please get in touch with a specialist garage. › Remove the cap from the lock
› Insert key B into the lock so that the eye of the key is pointing downwards.
Adjusting the ready position
› Turn the key in the direction of arrow B 2 so that the conclusions release
shows up » Fig. 186.
Gear 2 Step - applies to both key versions
› Grip the tow bar below the protective cap.
› Push release pin C in the direction of arrow 3 to the stop, and simultane-
ously push operating lever D in the direction of arrow 4 to the stop
» Fig. 187.
Operating lever D remains locked in this position.

Correctly adjusted ready position

Fig. 186 Gear 1 Step: Key Version 1 / key Version 2

Fig. 187
Step 2: Both key versions

Fig. 188 Ready position: Key Version 1 / key Version 2 / position of the
lever and the release bolt with two key versions

 Read and observe and on page 167 first.  Read and observe and on page 167 first.

The ball rod must be set to the ready position prior to installation » page 168, Correctly adjusted standby position » Fig. 188
Correctly adjusted ready position.  Applies to key version 1 - the red marking on key A is pointing upwards.
If it is not in the ready position, then it must be set to the ready position as  Applies to key version 2 - the eye of the key B is pointing upwards.
follows.  Operating lever C is locked in the lower position.
 The trigger pin D can be moved.
Gear 1 Step - applies to the key version 1
› Remove the cap from the lock The ball bar is thus set ready for installation. 
› Insert key A into the lock so that the green marking is pointing upwards.

168 Driving
 CAUTION Assembling the bar ball – Step 2
In the ready position, the key cannot be removed nor turned into a different
position.

Assembling the bar ball – Step 1

Fig. 190 Lock lock: Key Version 1 / key Version 2

Fig. 191
Fig. 189 Insert ball rod / trigger bolt in the extended state Place cap on the lock

 Read and observe and on page 167 first.

Insert ball rod - applies to both key versions

› Remove the cover for the mounting recess 4 » Fig. 185 on page 167 in a
downwards direction.
› Adjust the ball rod to the ready position » page 168.
› Grip the tow bar from underneath » Fig. 189 and insert into the mounting re-
cess in arrow direction 1 until you hear it click into place » .  Read and observe and on page 167 first.
The lever A automatically turns upwards in the direction of arrow 2 and the To begin with, follow the first step for the ball rod assembly » page 169.
release pin B pops out (both its red and green parts are visible) » .
Applies to the key version 1
If lever A does not turn automatically, or if the release pin B does not pop › Turn key A in the direction of arrow 1 so that the green marking is pointing
out, remove the ball rod from the mounting recess by turning lever A down- upwards » Fig. 190.
wards as far as it can go. Clean the contact surfaces on the ball rod and the › Remove the key in the direction of the arrow 2 .
mounting recess.
Applies to key version 2
WARNING › Turn the key B in the direction of arrow 3 so that the conclusions release
■ Keep your hands outside the lever's range of motion when attaching the points down » Fig. 190.
ball rod – risk of finger injuries! › Remove the key in the direction of the arrow 4 .
■ Never attempt to pull the operating lever violently upwards to turn the
key. Doing so would mean the ball rod is not attached correctly! Applies to both key versions
› Fit and press cap C onto the lock in the direction of arrow 5 » Fig. 191.
› Check that the ball rod is securely attached » page 170, Check proper fitting. 

Hitch and trailer 169

 CAUTION Removing the bar ball – Step 1
After removing the key, always replace the cover on the lock – there is a risk of
the lock getting dirty. Fig. 193
Remove the cap from the lock
Check proper fitting

Fig. 192
Correctly connected tow bar

 Read and observe and on page 167 first.

Before each use of the ball rod, check that it is attached properly.
Correctly secured ball head » Fig. 192
 The ball rod does not come off the mounting recess even after strong
“shaking”.
 Operating lever A is as far up as possible. Fig. 194 Unlock lock: Key version 1 / key version 2
 The release pin B is completely exposed (both its red and green parts are
visible).  Read and observe and on page 167 first.
 The key is removed.
 The cap B is on the hand-wheel. Applies to both key versions
› Remove the cover A from the lock in the direction of the arrow 1 » Fig. 193.
WARNING
Applies to key version 1
Do not use the towing device unless the ball rod was properly locked!
› Insert key B into the lock in the direction of arrow 2 so that the green
marking is pointing upwards.
› Turn key B in the direction of arrow 3 so that the red marking is pointing
upwards » Fig. 194.
Applies to key version 2
› Insert key C into the lock in the direction of arrow 4 so that the eye of the
key is pointing downwards.
› Turn key C in the direction of arrow 5 so that the eye of the key is pointing
upwards » Fig. 194. 

170 Driving
 WARNING The ball rod is released in this position and falls freely into the hand. If it does
Never remove the tow bar while the trailer is still coupled. not fall freely into the hand, use your other hand to push it upwards.
At the same time, the ball rod latches into the ready position and is therefore
Note ready to be re-fitted » .
We recommend putting the protective cover onto the ball head before remov- › Place the cap 4 » Fig. 185 on page 167 onto the mounting recess.
ing the tow bar.
WARNING
Removing the bar ball – Step 2 Never allow the ball rod to remain unsecured in the boot. This could cause
damage to the boot upon sudden braking, and could put the safety of the
Fig. 195 occupants at risk.
Release ball bar
CAUTION
■ If lever B is held firmly and not pushed downwards to the stop, it will move
back up after the ball rod is removed and will not latch into the ready position.
The ball rod will then need to be brought into this position before the next
time it is fitted » page 168, Adjusting the ready position.
■ Store the ball rod in the box in the ready position and with the key facing up-
wards - otherwise there is a risk of damage to the key!
■ Do not use excessive force when handling the operating lever (e.g. do not
 Read and observe and on page 167 first.
climb on it)!
To begin with, follow the first step for the ball rod assembly » page 170.
Note
Release ball head - applies to both key versions Remove any dirt from the ball rod before stowing it away in the box with the
› Grasp the ball rod from below » Fig. 195. vehicle tool kit.
› Push release pin A in the direction of arrow 1 to the stop, and simultane-
ously push operating lever B in the direction of arrow 2 to the stop .

Mount accessories
 Read and observe and on page 167 first.
Fig. 196
Depiction of the maximum per- An accessory (e.g. bicycle carrier) can be mounted on the ball head of the tow-
missible protrusion of the ball ing hitch.
head of the towing hitch and of
the permissible total weight of If this accessory is used, the maximum permissible protrusion of the ball head
the accessory including the load, of the towing hitch and the permissible total weight of the accessory including
depending on the load centre of the load must be observed.
gravity The maximum permissible protrusion of the ball head of the towing hitch is
70 cm » Fig. 196. 

Hitch and trailer 171

The total permitted weight of the accessory including load changes with in-
creasing distance of the load centre of gravity from the ball head of the towing
hitch.

Distance of the load Permissible total weight of the accessory, including load
centre of gravity from
the ball head » Fig. 196 Vehicles with front-wheel drive Vehicles with four-wheel drive G-TEC vehicles

0 cm A 75 kg 75 kg 56 kg
30 cm B 75 kg 75 kg 56 kg
60 cm C 35 kg 35 kg 28 kg
70 cm D 0 kg 0 kg 0 kg

WARNING Attaching and detaching trailers

■ Never exceed the permissible gross weight of the accessory including
load - there is a risk of damaging the towing device. Fig. 197
■ Never exceed the permissible protrusion of the ball head including towing
Swivel out the 13-pin power
device - there is a risk of damaging the towing device. socket, safety eyelet

Note
We recommend that you use accessories from ŠKODA Original Accessories.

Trailer

 Introduction Connect and disconnect

This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
› Fit the ball rod.
› Grip the 13-pin socket at point A and swing out in the direction of the arrow
Attaching and detaching trailers 172 » Fig. 197.
Loading a trailer 173 › Lift off protective cap 5 » Fig. 185 on page 167 .
Trailer load 173 › Place the trailer onto the ball head.
Trailer operation 176 › Plug the trailer cable into 13-pin socket A » Fig. 197.
Anti-theft alarm system 177 If the trailer that is to be towed has a 7-pin connector, you can use a suitable
adapter from ŠKODA Original Accessories.
The trailer can be hitched to the ball head of the towing device.
› Hook the breakaway cable of the trailer to the security eyelet B.
The breakaway cable of the trailer must sag in all trailer positions relative to
the vehicle (sharp curves, reversing and the like).
Uncoupling takes place in reverse order. 

172 Driving
Exterior mirrors WARNING (Continued)
You should have additional exterior mirrors fitted if you are not able to see the ■ After attaching the trailer and connecting the power socket, check that
traffic behind the trailer with the standard rear-view mirrors. the rear lights on the trailer are working correctly.
■ Never use the safety eye to tow a vehicle!
Headlights
The front of the vehicle may lift up when a trailer is being towed and the head-
lights may dazzle other road users. CAUTION
Adjust the headlights using the headlight beam control » page 68, Operating Improperly connected trailer electrical installations may cause malfunction of
the lights1). the entire vehicle electronics.

Power to the trailer power grid Note

For the electrical connection between the vehicle and trailer, the trailer's pow- ■ The total power consumption of all the connected consumers on the trailer
er supply is provided by the vehicle. must not exceed 350 watts.
■ Coat the ball head of the towing device with a suitable grease whenever
The power supply works with ignition on or off.
necessary.
With the ignition off, the battery of the towing vehicle is discharged by activa-
ted consumers. Loading a trailer
At low charge state of the vehicle battery power to the trailer is interrupted.
Distribution of the cargo
WARNING Distribute the cargo in the trailer in such a way that heavy items are located as
■ Improperly connected trailer electrical installations may cause accidents
close to the trailer axle as possible. Secure the items from slipping.
or serious injury due to electric shock. The distribution of the weight is very poor if your vehicle is unladen and the
■ Work on the electrical system must only be carried out by specialist ga- trailer is laden. Drive at a particularly low speed if you cannot avoid driving
rages. with this combination.
■ Never directly connect the trailer's electrical system with the electrical
Tyre pressure
connections for the tail lights or other current sources.
Correct the tyre inflation pressure on the vehicle for a “full load” » page 205.

WARNING
Sliding cargo can significantly adversely affect stability and driving safety -
risk of accident!

Trailer load
The permissible trailer load must not be exceeded under any circumstances. 

1) Applies to vehicles with xenon headlights.

Hitch and trailer 173

Permissible trailer load - Octavia
Permissible trailer load, braked (kg)
Engine Transmission Permissible trailer load, unbraked (kg)
Gradients of up to 12% Gradients of up to 8%a)
1.2 l/63 kW TSI MG 1100 1300 610
MG 1300 1500 610
1.2 l/81 kW TSI
DSG 1300 1500 620
1.4 l/81 kW TSI G-TEC MG 1400 1700 690
MG 1500 1800 620
1.4 l/110 kW TSI
DSG 1500 1800 630
MG 1100 1300 600
1.6 l/81 kW MPI
AG 1100 1300 620
MG 1600 1800 650
1.8 l/132 kW TSI DSG 1600 1800 660
DSG 4x4 1600 1800 710
1.6 l/66 kW TDI CR MG 1400 1700 640
MG5 1500 1800 650
MG6 1000 1300 640
1.6 l/81 kW TDI CR
MG 4x4 1700 2000 700
DSG 1500 1800 650
MG 1600 1800 660
2.0 l/105 kW TDI CR
DSG 1600 1800 670
MG 1600 1800 660
2.0 l/110 kW TDI CR MG 4x4 2000 2000 710
DSG 1600 1800 670
2.0 l/135 kW TDI CR DSG 4x4 1800 2000 730
a) Only valid for some countries.

Permissible trailer load - Octavia RS

Permissible trailer load, braked (kg)
Engine Transmission Permissible trailer load, unbraked (kg)
Gradients of up to 12 % Gradients of up to 8%a)
MG 1600 1800 710
2.0 l/162 kW TSI
DSG 1600 1800 720 

174 Driving
 Permissible trailer load, braked (kg)
Engine Transmission Permissible trailer load, unbraked (kg)
Gradients of up to 12 % Gradients of up to 8%a)
MG 1600 1800 720
2.0 l/169 kW TSI
DSG 1600 1800 730
MG 1600 1800 720
2.0 l/135 kW TDI CR DSG 1600 1800 730
DSG 4x4 1800 2000 750
a) Only valid for some countries.

Permissible trailer load - Octavia Combi

Permissible trailer load, braked (kg)
Engine Transmission Permissible trailer load, unbraked (kg)
Gradients of up to 12 % Gradients of up to 8%a)
1.2 l/63 kW TSI MG 1100 1300 620
MG 1300 1500 620
1.2 l/81 kW TSI
DSG 1300 1500 630
1.4 l/81 kW TSI G-TEC MG 1400 1700 700
MG 1500 1800 630
1.4 l/110 kW TSI
DSG 1500 1800 640
MG 1100 1300 610
1.6 l/81 kW MPI
AG 1100 1300 620
MG 1600 1800 660
1.8 l/132 kW TSI DSG 1600 1800 670
DSG 4x4 1600 1800 720
1.6 l/66 kW TDI CR MG 1400 1700 650
MG5 1500 1800 660
MG6 1000 1300 640
1.6 l/81 kW TDI CR
MG 4x4 1700 2000 710
DSG 1500 1800 660
MG 1600 1800 670
2.0 l/105 kW TDI CR
DSG 1600 1800 680 

Hitch and trailer 175

 Permissible trailer load, braked (kg)
Engine Transmission Permissible trailer load, unbraked (kg)
Gradients of up to 12 % Gradients of up to 8%a)
MG 1600 1800 670
2.0 l/110 kW TDI CR MG 4x4 2000 2000 720
DSG 1600 1800 680
2.0 l/135 kW TDI CR DSG 4x4 1800 2000 730
a) Only valid for some countries.

Permissible trailer load - Octavia Combi RS

Permissible trailer load, braked (kg)
Engine Transmission Permissible trailer load, unbraked (kg)
Gradients of up to 12 % Gradients of up to 8%a)
MG 1600 1800 720
2.0 l/162 kW TSI
DSG 1600 1800 730
MG 1600 1800 730
2.0 l/169 kW TSI
DSG 1600 1800 740
MG 1600 1800 730
2.0 l/135 kW TDI CR DSG 1600 1800 740
DSG 4x4 1800 2000 750
a) Only valid for some countries.

Permissible trailer load - Octavia Combi Scout

Permissible trailer load, braked (kg)
Engine Transmission Permissible trailer load, unbraked (kg)
Gradients of up to 12 % Gradients of up to 8%a)
1.8 l/132 kW TSI DSG 4x4 1600 1800 750
2.0 l/110 kW TDI CR MG 4x4 2000 2000 750
2.0 l/135 kW TDI CR DSG 4x4 1800 2000 750
a) Only valid for some countries.

WARNING Trailer operation

The maximum permissible axle and drawbar load and the permissible
weight of the trailer must not be exceeded - risk of accident! Driving speed
For safety reasons, do not drive faster than 80 km/h when hitching a trailer.
Immediately reduce your speed as soon as even the slightest swaying of the
trailer is detected. Never attempt to stop the trailer from “swaying” by acceler-
ating. 

176 Driving
Brakes
Apply the brakes in good time! If the trailer is fitted with a trailer brake, apply
the brakes gently at first, then brake firmly. This will avoid brake jolts resulting
from the trailer wheels locking.
On downhill sections shift down a gear in good time to also use the engine as
a brake.

WARNING
Always drive particularly carefully with the trailer.

CAUTION
If you tow a trailer frequently, you should also have your vehicle inspected be-
tween service intervals.

Anti-theft alarm system

If the vehicle is locked, the alarm is activated when the electrical connection to
the trailer is interrupted.
Always switch off the anti-theft alarm system before a trailer is coupled or un-
coupled » page 58.
Conditions for including a trailer in the anti-theft alarm system.
 The vehicle is factory-fitted with an anti-theft alarm system and a towing
device.
 The trailer is electrically connected to the towing vehicle by means of the
trailer socket.
 The electrical system of the vehicle and trailer is functional.
 The vehicle is locked and the anti-theft alarm system is activated.

CAUTION
For technical reasons, trailers with rear LED lights cannot be connected to the
anti-theft alarm system.

Hitch and trailer 177

 For the sake of the environment
General Maintenance
Technical documents regarding changes carried out on the vehicle must be
kept by the vehicle user, in order to be handed over to the recyclers later. This
Care and maintenance ensures that vehicle recycling is in accordance with environmental regulations.
Service work, adjustments and technical alterations Note
■ We recommend only having these modifications, repairs and technical
 Introduction
changes performed by a specialist garage.
This chapter contains information on the following subjects: ■ Any damage caused by technical alterations made without the approval of
the manufacturer is excluded from the warranty » Service schedule.
Vehicle operation in different weather conditions 178 ■ The ŠKODA Partner accepts no liability for products that have not been ap-
Statutory checks 178 proved by ŠKODA AUTO a.s. even though these may be products with an op-
ŠKODA Service Partners 179 erational approval or that have been approved by a government testing insti-
ŠKODA Original parts 179 tute.
ŠKODA Original accessories 179 ■ We advise you only to use ŠKODA Original Accessories and ŠKODA Original
Spoiler 180 Parts which have been expressly approved for use on your vehicle. Reliability,
Component protection 180 safety and suitability for your vehicle are guaranteed with these.
■ ŠKODA Original Accessories and ŠKODA Original Parts can be purchased from
Airbags 180
ŠKODA Partners, who will also perform the professional assembly of the pur-
Acceptance and recycling of used vehicles 181
chased parts.
The instructions and guidelines from ŠKODA AUTO a.s. must be observed when
carrying out any modifications, repairs or technical alterations to your vehicle. Vehicle operation in different weather conditions
Adhering to these instructions and guidelines helps ensure road safety and  Read and observe on page 178 first.
helps keep your vehicle in a good technical condition. After carrying out modifi-
cations, repairs or technical alterations, the vehicle will comply with German If you would like to operate your vehicle in countries other than those with its
road transport regulations (StVO). intended weather conditions, please contact a ŠKODA Partner.
Always consult a ŠKODA Partner » page 179before buying accessories or He or she will advise you if certain precautions need to be taken to ensure the
parts, or before carrying out any modifications, repairs or technical alterations full functioning of the vehicle or to prevent damage.
to your vehicle.
This relates to the coolant, the battery replacement etc.
WARNING
■ Work on your vehicle, which have been carried out unprofessionally, can Statutory checks
cause operational faults – risk of accident!
■ Interference on the electronic components and their software can lead to
 Read and observe on page 178 first.
operational faults. This interference can also impair not directly affected Many countries have legislation requiring the operational reliability and road-
systems because of the networking of the electronic components. The op- worthiness and/or exhaust gas properties of a vehicle to be tested at specific
erational safety of the vehicle may be at significant risk and can lead to in- intervals. These tests can be carried out by workshops or testing stations that
creased wear of parts. have been legally authorized for this purpose. 

178 General Maintenance

The ŠKODA Service Partners are up-to-date on the legally required tests and ŠKODA AUTO a.s. is able to vouch for the safety, suitability and long service life
will prepare the vehicle for the tests as part of a service operation if required, of these products. We therefore recommend that you only use ŠKODA Genuine
or will be responsible for carrying out these tests. The specialist garages can Parts.
carry out the specified tests directly if required by the customer if they are au-
ŠKODA AUTO a.s. supplies the market with a complete range of ŠKODA Genu-
thorised to do so. This saves you time and money.
ine Parts - not only while the model is still in production but for at least 15
Even if you want to take your vehicle to an officially approved test centre for years after the end of series production for wear parts and at least 10 years
prior checking in preparation of a legally required test, we recommend that you after the end of series production for all other vehicle parts.
consult the service consultant of your ŠKODA Service Partner beforehand.
ŠKODA Service Partners are liable for any defects of ŠKODA Genuine Parts for
Based on their appraisal, the service consultant will tell you which areas you a period of 2 years after sale in accordance with the materials defect liability,
should focus on in order to ensure that your vehicle will pass the technical test unless agreed otherwise in the purchase agreement. You should keep the ap-
without any problems. This allows you to avoid additional expenses resulting proved warranty certificate and the invoices for these components for this pe-
from a possible subsequent test. riod of time, so that the commencement of the term can be verified.
Body repairs
ŠKODA Service Partners ŠKODA vehicles are designed such that if any damage occurs to the body, it is
 Read and observe on page 178 first. only necessary to replace those parts that are actually damaged.
However, before you decide to have damaged body parts replaced, you should
ŠKODA Service Partners feature modern, specially developed tools and equip- first of all contact your specialist garage to determine whether or not the parts
ment. Here, trained specialists have access to a comprehensive range of can also be repaired. Repairs to body parts are usually cheaper.
ŠKODA Original Parts and ŠKODA Original Accessories for carrying out modifi-
cations, repairs and technical alterations.
ŠKODA Original accessories
All ŠKODA service partners operate according to the most recent guidelines
and instructions from ŠKODA AUTO a.s. All service and repair work is therefore  Read and observe on page 178 first.
carried out on time and at the appropriate quality. Adhering to these instruc-
If you wish to fit accessories to your vehicle, you should remember the follow-
tions and guidelines helps ensure road safety and helps keep your vehicle in a
ing:
good technical condition.
We recommend that you use ŠKODA Genuine Accessories in your vehicle.
ŠKODA Service Partners are therefore properly prepared to service your vehicle
ŠKODA AUTO a.s. has selected these accessories to ensure that they are relia-
and to provide quality work. We therefore advise you to have all modifications,
ble, safe and suitable for your particular vehicle. Although we constantly moni-
repairs and technical alterations to your vehicle carried out by a ŠKODA Service
tor the market, we are not able to assess or vouch for other products even
Partner.
though in some instances such parts may have operational approval or may
have been approved by a nationally recognised testing laboratory.
ŠKODA Original parts
All accessory products are subjected to a challenging process in the areas of
 Read and observe on page 178 first. technical development (technical testing) and quality inspection (customer
testing), and the product only becomes a ŠKODA Genuine Accessory if all tests
We recommend the use of ŠKODA Genuine Parts for your vehicle, as these are passed.
parts are approved by ŠKODA AUTO a.s.. They correspond precisely to the
ŠKODA AUTO a.s. regulations with regard to design, dimensional accuracy and Our ŠKODA Genuine Accessories service also includes expert advice and pro-
material, and are identical to the components used in series production. fessional fitting if required by the customer. 

Care and maintenance 179

ŠKODA Service Partners are liable for any defects of ŠKODA Genuine Accesso- Component protection
ries for a period of 2 years after installation or delivery in accordance with the
materials defect liability, unless agreed otherwise in the purchase agreement  Read and observe on page 178 first.
or any other agreements. You should keep the approved warranty certificate
and the invoices for these accessories for this period of time, so that the com- Some electronic vehicle components (such as the instrument cluster) are fac-
mencement of the term can be verified. tory-equipped with component protection.
ŠKODA Service Partners also stock a range of suitable car care products and all Component protection has been developed as a protection mechanism for the
parts that are subject to natural wear-and-tear, such as tyres, batteries, bulbs following situations.
and wiper blades. ▶ Impairment of factory- or garage-fitted electronic components after installa-
tion in another vehicle (for example, after a theft).
Note ▶ Impairment of electronic components used outside the vehicle.
The accessories authorized by the company ŠKODA AUTO a.s. will be offered ▶ The possibility of a legitimate installation or change of electronic compo-
by the ŠKODA Partners in all countries where the company ŠKODA AUTO a.s. nents for repairs at a specialist garage.
has a sales and after-sales service network. This will usually be in the form of a The activated component protection can be realized by functional limitations
printed catalogue of ŠKODA Genuine Accessories, in the form of separate prin- of the specific electronic component. Seek help from a specialist garage.
ted brochures or in the form of ŠKODA Genuine Accessories on the ŠKODA
Partner websites.
Airbags
Spoiler  Read and observe on page 178 first.

 Read and observe on page 178 first. WARNING

If your new vehicle is fitted with a spoiler on the front bumper in combination
■ Modifications, repairs and technical alterations that have been carried out
with the spoiler on the luggage compartment lid, the following instructions unprofessionally can cause damage and operational faults, and can also se-
must be adhered to. riously impair the effectiveness of the airbag system – risk of accident and
▶ For safety reasons, the vehicle must only be fitted with a spoiler on the front fatal injury!
■ A change to the vehicle's wheel suspension, including the use of non-ap-
bumper in combination with the associated spoiler on the luggage compart-
ment lid. proved wheels and tire combinations, can alter the functioning of the air-
▶ This kind of spoiler cannot be left on the front bumper either on its own, in bag system - risk of accident and fatal injury!
combination with another spoiler not on the luggage compartment lid or in
combination with an unsuitable spoiler on the luggage compartment lid. WARNING
▶ We recommend that you consult the ŠKODA Service Partner for any repairs Information on the use of the airbag system
to or replacement, addition or removal of spoilers. ■ Never install any airbag parts into the vehicle that have been removed
from old cars or have been recycled.
WARNING ■ Never install damaged airbag parts in the vehicle. The airbags may then
■ If work on your vehicle's spoilers is not carried out properly, this can lead not be triggered properly or not at all in the event of an accident. 
to operational faults - risk of accident and serious injuries.
■ If a front spoiler, full wheel trim, etc. is mounted retrospectively, it must
be ensured that the air supply to the front wheel brakes is not reduced.
The front brakes may overheat which can have a negative impact on the
functioning of the braking system – risk of accident!

180 General Maintenance

 WARNING Washing vehicle
■ No modifications of any kind must be made to parts of the airbag system.
■ Any work on the airbag system including the installation and removal of  Introduction
system components due to other repair work (e.g. removal of the steering
wheel) must only be carried out by a specialist garage. This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
■ Never make any changes to the front bumper or the bodywork. Washing by hand 181
■ It is prohibited to manipulate individual parts of the airbag system, as this Automatic car wash systems 182
might result in the airbag being deployed. Washing with a high-pressure cleaner 182
■ The protective function of the airbag system is sufficient for only one ac-
cident. The airbag system must then be replaced if the airbag has been de- The best way to protect your vehicle against harmful environmental influences
ployed. is frequent washing.
The longer insect residues, bird droppings, road salt and other aggressive de-
WARNING posits remain on the paintwork of your vehicle, the more detrimental their de-
The airbag system operates using pressure sensors located in the front structive effect can be. High temperatures, such as those caused by intensive
doors. For this reason, no adjustments may be carried out to the doors or sun's rays, accentuate this caustic effect.
door panels (e.g. installation of additional loudspeakers). Resulting damage It is essential to also thoroughly clean the underside of the vehicle at the end
can have a negative impact on the function of the airbag system. Any work of the winter.
on the front doors and their door panels must be carried out by a specialist
garage. The following guidelines must be observed. WARNING
■ Never drive with inner door panels removed.
When washing your vehicle in the winter: Water and ice in the braking sys-
■ Never drive if parts of the inner door panel have been removed and the
tem can affect the braking efficiency – risk of accident!
resulting openings have not been properly sealed.
■ Never drive if the loudspeakers in the doors have been removed, unless
CAUTION
the loudspeaker openings have been properly sealed.
■ Always make sure that the openings are covered or filled if additional The temperature of the water used for cleaning must not exceed 60 °C – risk
loudspeakers or other equipment parts have been installed in the inner of damaging the vehicle.
door panels.
For the sake of the environment
Only wash the vehicle at washing bays intended for this purpose.
Acceptance and recycling of used vehicles
Washing by hand
 Read and observe on page 178 first.
 Read and observe and on page 181 first.
ŠKODA meets the requirements of the brand and its products with regard to
protecting the environment and the preserving resources. All new ŠKODA ve- Soak the dirt with plenty of water and rinse as well as possible.
hicles are 95% recyclable.
Clean the vehicle with a soft sponge, a washing glove or a washing brush.
Note Work from the top to the bottom – starting with the roof.
You can find more detailed information about the trade-in and recycling of old For stubborn dirt, agents specifically intended for this purpose are to be used.
cars from a specialist garage.
Wash out the sponge or washing glove thoroughly at short intervals. 

Care and maintenance 181

Clean wheels, door sills and similar parts last. Use a second sponge for such Maintain a sufficiently large distance to the parking aid sensors and soft mate-
areas. rials such as rubber hoses or insulation material.
Give the vehicle a good rinse after washing it and dry it off using a chamois CAUTION
leather. ■ The films should not be washed with any high-pressure cleaners - there is a
WARNING risk of damage » page 183.
■ Do not aim the water jet directly at the lock cylinders or the door or opening
Protect your hands and arms from sharp-edged metal parts when cleaning
joints when washing the vehicle in the winter – there is a risk of freezing.
the underfloor or the inside of the wheel housings or the wheel trims – risk
■ The sensors of the parking aid can be sprayed only for a short time and there
of cuts!
must be a minimum distance of 10 cm - there is a risk of damage.

CAUTION
■ Only apply slight pressure when cleaning the vehicle's paintwork.
Cleaning vehicle exterior
■ Do not wash your vehicle in bright sunlight – risk of paint damage.
 Introduction
Automatic car wash systems This chapter contains information on the following subjects:

 Read and observe and on page 181 first. Vehicle paint work 183
Films 183
The usual precautionary measures must be taken before washing the vehicle Plastic parts 184
in an automatic car wash system (e.g. closing the windows and the sliding/tilt- Rubber seals 184
ing roof etc.). Chrome and anodized parts 184
If your vehicle is fitted with any particular attached parts, such as a spoiler, Windows and external mirrors 184
roof rack system, two-way radio aerial etc., it is best to consult the operator of Headlight glasses 185
the car wash system beforehand. Camera lens 185
After an automatic wash with wax treatment, the lips of the wipers should be Door closing cylinder 185
cleaned with cleaning agents specially designed for the purpose, and then de- Cavity protection 185
greased. Jack 185
Wheels 185
CAUTION
Towing hitch and mounting recess 186
Before driving through a car wash fold in the exterior mirrors - there is a risk of
damage. Under-body protection 186
Wiper blades 186
Washing with a high-pressure cleaner We recommend using vehicle care products from ŠKODA Original Accessories.
These are available from ŠKODA Partners. The usage instructions on the pack-
 Read and observe and on page 181 first.
age must be observed. 

When washing the vehicle with a high-pressure cleaner, the instructions for
use of the equipment must be observed. This applies in particular to the pres-
sure used and to the spraying distance.

182 General Maintenance

 WARNING CAUTION
■ Vehicle care products may be harmful to your health if not used according ■ Paint damage is to be repaired immediately.
to the instructions. ■ Never apply wax to the windows.
■ Always keep the vehicle care products safe from people who are not com- ■ Mat painted or plastic parts must not be treated with polishing products or
pletely independent, e.g. children - there is a danger of poisoning! hard waxes.
■ Protect your hands and arms from sharp-edged metal parts when clean- ■ Do not polish the paintwork in a dusty environment - risk of paint scratches.
ing the underfloor, the inside of the wheel housings or the wheel trims – ■ Do not apply any paint care products to door seals or window guides.
risk of cuts! ■ If possible, do not apply any paint care products to parts of the bodywork
that come into contact with door seals or window guides.
CAUTION
■ Do not use any insect sponges, rough kitchen sponges or similar cleaning Films
products – risk of damaging the paintwork surface.
■ Cleaner that contain solvents can damage the material being cleaned.
 Read and observe and on page 183 first.

Cleaning
Note
Films (e.g. roof, decorative, protective films, etc.) must be cleaned more care-
Due to the special tools and knowledge required, and to avoid any potential fully than the vehicle paint.
problems with the cleaning and care of your vehicle's exterior, we recommend
that the cleaning and care of your vehicle be carried out by a ŠKODA Service The films may not be washed with a high-pressure cleaner.
Partner. Only wash the films with a soft cloth, mild soap solution and clean, warm wa-
ter.
Vehicle paint work
Service life
 Read and observe and on page 183 first. Environmental influences (e.g. sunlight, humidity, air pollution, rockfall) affect
the life of the films.
Preserving the vehicle paintwork
Sunlight may also affect the strength of the film colour.
Thorough wax treatment is an effective way of protecting the paintwork from
harmful environmental influences. Films will age and become brittle – this is entirely normal; this is not a fault.
The vehicle must be treated with a high-quality hard wax polish at the latest, CAUTION
when no more drops form on the clean paintwork.
■ Never use aggressive cleaning agents or chemical solvents for the glued sur-
A new layer of a high-quality hard wax polish can be applied to the clean body- faces with films - there is a danger of film damage.
work after it has dried thoroughly. ■ Never use dirty cloths or chemical solvents for the glued surfaces with films -

Even if you use a wax preserver regularly we still recommend that you treat there is a danger of damaging the film.
■ In the winter months, do not use an ice scraper to remove ice and snow from
the paintwork of the vehicle at least twice a year with hard wax.
the areas with films. Do not use any other objects to remove frozen layers of
Polishing snow or ice – risk of film damage.
Polishing is necessary if the vehicle's paintwork has become unattractive and ■ Do not polish the films - risk of damage!
if it is no longer possible to achieve a gloss with wax preservatives. ■ When transporting a load on the roof rack (e.g. roof box or similar), there is

If the polish does not contain any preserving elements, the paint must be trea- an increased risk of film damage (e.g. of chipping from the secured load).
ted with a preservative afterwards.

Care and maintenance 183

Plastic parts Windows and external mirrors
 Read and observe and on page 183 first.
Fig. 198
Clean plastic parts with a damp cloth. Fuel filler flap: Remove ice scra-
per
If this method does not completely clean the plastic parts, use cleaning prod-
ucts specially designed for this purpose.

CAUTION
Do not use paint care products on plastic parts.

Rubber seals
 Read and observe and on page 183 first.
 Read and observe and on page 183 first.
Removing snow and ice
All door seals and window guides are factory-treated with a colourless matt Use a plastic ice scraper for removing snow and ice from the windows and mir-
varnish layer to prevent the freezing of painted body parts and to protect rors.
against driving noise.
The ice scraper can be found on the inside of the fuel filler flap.
CAUTION › Open the fuel filler flap.
■ Do not treat the door seals and window guides with any products. › Slide out the ice scraper in the direction of the arrow » Fig. 198.
■ Applying additional treatments to the seals can corrode the protective coat-
ing, and driving noise may occur. Cleaning windows
Regularly clean windows from the inside with clean water.
Chrome and anodized parts Dry the glass surfaces with a clean chamois leather or a cloth intended for this
purpose.
 Read and observe and on page 183 first.
CAUTION
First clean the chrome parts and anodized parts with a damp cloth and then Instructions for removing snow and ice
polish them with a soft, dry cloth. ■ The ice scraper should not be moved forward and backward but in one direc-
If this method does not completely clean the parts, use cleaning products spe- tion to avoid any damage to the surface of the glass.
cially designed for this purpose. ■ Snow or ice that is contaminated with coarse dirt such as fine gravel, sand or
salt must not be removed from the windows and mirrors – there is a risk of
CAUTION damage to the surface of the windows and mirrors.
■ Do not polish the chrome parts and anodized parts in a dusty environment - ■ Do not remove snow or ice from glass parts using warm or hot water – risk of
risk of surface scratches. cracks forming in the glass.
■ Never use aggressive cleaning agents or chemical solvents for these parts - ■ Make sure that when removing snow and ice from the windows, the labels
there is risk of damage. attached to the vehicle by the factory are not damaged. 

184 General Maintenance

 CAUTION Door closing cylinder
Information for cleaning windows
■ Do not clean the inside of the windows with sharp-edged objects or corro-  Read and observe and on page 183 first.
sive and acidic cleaning agents – there is a risk of damaging the heating ele-
Specific products must be used for de-icing door lock cylinders.
ments or window aerial.
■ When drying the windows after washing the vehicle, do not use window
CAUTION
leathers that have been used to polish the bodywork. Residues of preserva-
Make sure that as little water as possible gets into the locking cylinder when
tives in the window leather can dirty the window and reduce visibility.
washing the vehicle - there is a risk of freezing the lock cylinder!

Headlight glasses
Cavity protection
 Read and observe and on page 183 first.
 Read and observe and on page 183 first.
Clean plastic front headlight lenses using clean, warm water and soap.
All the cavities of your vehicle which are at risk from corrosion are protected
CAUTION for life by a layer of protective wax applied in the factory.
■ The headlights are never to be wiped dry - there is a risk of damaging the Wax protection does not require to be inspected or re-treated.
protective lacquer and the headlight glass subsequently developing cracks.
If any small amount of wax flow out of the cavities at high temperatures, these
■ Do not use sharp objects to clean the glasses - there is a risk of damaging
must be removed with a plastic scraper and the stains cleaned using a petrole-
the protective lacquer and the headlight glasses subsequently developing
um cleaner.
cracks.
■ Do not use any aggressive cleaning or chemical solvent products to clean the WARNING
headlights – risk of damaging the headlight lenses. Safety regulations should be observed when using petroleum cleaner to re-
move wax – risk of fire!
Camera lens
 Read and observe and on page 183 first. Jack
Moisten the lens of the rear view camera first with clean water and then dry  Read and observe and on page 183 first.
with a dry cloth.
The jack is maintenance-free.
Remove the snow from the lens with a brush and the ice from the lens with
de-icing agents specifically developed for these purposes. If necessary, the moving parts of the jack should be lubricated with a suitable
lubricant.
CAUTION
■ Remove snow or ice on the lens with warm or hot water - there is a risk of Wheels
damaging the lens.
■ Never use cleaners containing abrasive effect to clean the lens.  Read and observe and on page 183 first.
■ Never use pressurized water or steam jet to clean the lens.
Wheel rims
Also thoroughly wash the wheel rims when washing the vehicle on a regular
basis. 

Care and maintenance 185

Regularly remove salt and brake abrasion, otherwise the rim material will be We recommend having the protective coating underneath the vehicle and the
corroded. chassis checked — preferably before the beginning of winter and at the end of
winter.
Light alloy wheels
After washing thoroughly and treat the wheel rims with a protective product WARNING
for light alloy wheels. Never use additional underbody protection or anti-corrosion agents for ex-
For the treatment of wheel rims do not use products which may cause damage haust pipes, catalytic converters, diesel particle filters or heat shields.
to the paint on the rims. When the engine reaches its operating temperature, these substances
might ignite - risk of fire!
CAUTION
■ Damage to the paint layer on the wheel rims must be touched up immediate-
ly. Wiper blades
■ Severe layers of dirt on the wheels can also result in wheel imbalance. This
 Read and observe and on page 183 first.
may show itself in the form of a wheel vibration which is transmitted to the
steering wheel which, in certain circumstances, can cause premature wear of Clean the wiper blades regularly with a glass cleaner. The wiper blades should
the steering. This means it is necessary to remove the dirt. be cleaned with a sponge or cloth if they are heavily soiled by insect residues,
for example.
Towing hitch and mounting recess The wiper blades can become soiled with wax residues after washing in auto-
 Read and observe and on page 183 first. matic vehicle wash systems for example.

Seal the mounting recess with the cap to prevent any ingress of dirt. Interior care
In the event of dirt, clean the interior surfaces of the mounting recess and
treat with a suitable preservative.  Introduction
Always check the ball head before attaching a trailer. Apply suitable grease This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
where necessary.
Natural leather 187
Include the protective cap when stowing away the ball rod to protect the boot Artificial leather, materials and Alcantara® 187
from getting contaminated. Seat covers 188
Safety belts 188
CAUTION
Apply grease to the inner part of the mounting recess. Make sure you do not We recommend using vehicle care products from ŠKODA Original Accessories.
remove any grease. These are available from ŠKODA Partners. The usage instructions on the pack-
age must be observed. 

Under-body protection
 Read and observe and on page 183 first.

The underside of your vehicle is already permanently protected by the factory

against chemical and mechanical influences.
It is not possible to guarantee that the protective coating will not suffer any
damage as the vehicle is driven.

186 General Maintenance

 WARNING Clean severely soiled areas with a cloth soaked in a mild soap solution (2 ta-
■ Vehicle care products may be harmful to your health if not used according blespoons of neutral soap to 1 litre of water).
to the instructions. To remove stains, use a cleaning agent specially designed for this purpose.
■ Always keep the vehicle care products safe from people who are not com-
pletely independent, e.g. children - there is a danger of poisoning! Treat the leather periodically with a suitable leather protector and use a skin
■ Air fresheners and scents can be hazardous to heath when the tempera- care cream with light blocker and impregnation after each cleaning.
ture inside the vehicle is high. CAUTION
■ Ensure that no part of the leather is soaked through during cleaning and that
CAUTION no water gets into the seams. Otherwise, the leather could become brittle or
■ Be sure to check clothing for colour-fastness to avoid any damage or visible cracked.
stains on the material (leather), panels and textiles. ■ Avoid leaving the vehicle for lengthy periods in bright sunlight to avoid the
■ Remove fresh stains such as those from ball-point pens, ink, lipstick, shoe leather from bleaching. If the vehicle is parked in the open for lengthy periods,
polish, etc., from the material (leather), panels and textiles as quickly as possi- protect the leather from direct sunlight by covering it.
ble. ■ The use of an additional mechanical steering wheel lock may damage the
■ Do not attach scents or air fresheners to the dash panel – there is a risk of leather surface of the steering wheel.
damage to the dash panel. ■ Some clothing materials, e.g. dark denim, do not have sufficient colour fast-
■ Do not attach any stickers to the filaments or glass antenna - there is risk of ness. This can cause damage or clearly visible discolouration to seat covers,
damage. even when used correctly. This applies particularly to light-coloured seat cov-
■ Do not clean the roof panelling with a brush – risk of damage to the surface ers. This does not relate to a fault in the seat cover, but rather to poor colour
of the panelling. fastness of the clothing textiles.
■ Cleaner that contain solvents can damage the material being cleaned. ■ Sharp-edged objects on items of clothing such as zip fasteners, rivets, sharp-
■ Apply only a small amount of the cleaning and care product. edged belts etc may leave permanent scratches or signs of rubbing on the sur-
face or damage these. Such damage cannot be subsequently recognised as a
Note justified complaint.
Due to the special tools and knowledge required, and to avoid any potential
problems with the cleaning and care of the interior of your vehicle, we recom- Note
mend that cleaning and care of the interior of your vehicle be carried out by a During the use of the vehicle, minor visible changes can occur on the leather
ŠKODA service partner. parts of the covers (e. g wrinkles or creases as a result of the stress of the cov-
ers).
Natural leather
Artificial leather, materials and Alcantara®
 Read and observe and on page 187 first.
 Read and observe and on page 187 first.
The leather needs, depending on the strain placed on it, regular cleaning and
maintenance. Artificial leather
Dust and dirt in pores and creases cause abrasions on the surface and lead to Clean artificial leather with a damp cloth.
premature embrittlement of the leather surface. Therefore, they must be re- If this method does not completely clean the artificial leather, use a mild soap
moved regularly at short intervals with a cloth or vacuum cleaner. solution or cleaning products specially designed for this purpose. 

Clean soiled leather surfaces with a water-dampened cotton or woollen cloth

and then dry with a clean, dry cloth » .

Care and maintenance 187

Fabric Indented points arising on the fabrics by everyday use, can be removed by
Clean upholstery cover materials and cloth trims on doors, luggage compart- brushing against the direction of hair with a damp brush.
ment cover, etc. using specific cleaning agents, e.g., dry foam.
Always clean all parts of the covers, so that there are no visible edges. Then
Use a soft sponge, brush, or commercially available microfibre cloth. allow the seat to dry completely.
Use a cloth and a cleaning agent specifically designed for this purpose to clean CAUTION
the roof trim. ■ Do not clean the covers of electrically heated seats either with water or with
Remove any lumps on the cover fabric and any fabric residue using a brush. other liquids - there is a risk of damaging the seat heating system.
■ Regularly remove dust from the seat covers using a vacuum cleaner.
Remove stubborn hair using a “cleaning glove”.
■ Electrically heated seats must not be dried after cleaning by switching on the
Alcantara® heater.
Dust and dirt in pores, creases and seams may chafe and damage the surface. ■ Do not sit on wet seats - risk of seat deformation.
Therefore, they must be removed regularly at short intervals with a cloth or ■ Always clean the seats from “seam to seam”.
vacuum cleaner.
Minor changes in colour caused by use are normal. Safety belts

CAUTION  Read and observe and on page 187 first.

■ For Alcantara® seat covers, do not use any solvents, floor wax, shoe cream, Wash dirty seat belts with mild soapy water.
stain remover, leather cleaners or similar agents.
■ Avoid leaving the vehicle in bright sunlight for long periods of time in order Remove coarse dirt with a soft brush.
to stop the artificial leather, materials or Alcantara® from bleaching. During ex-
WARNING
tended periods of standing outdoors, protect artificial leather, fabrics or Alcan-
tara® by covering. ■ The seat belts must not be removed for cleaning.
■ Some clothing materials, e.g. dark denim, do not have sufficient colour fast-
■ Never clean the seat belts chemically as chemical cleaning products could
ness. This can cause damage or clearly visible discolouration to seat covers, destroy the fabric.
■ The seat belts must not be allowed to come into contact with corrosive
even when used correctly. This applies particularly to light-coloured seat cov-
ers. This does not relate to a fault in the seat cover, but rather to poor colour liquids (e.g. acids).
■ The seat belts must be fully dried before being rolled up.
fastness of the clothing textiles.

Seat covers
 Read and observe and on page 187 first.

Electrically heated seats

Use a specific cleaning agent such as dry foam or similar to clean the covers.
» .
Seats without seat heating
Thoroughly vacuum the seat covers with a vacuum cleaner before cleaning.
Clean the seat covers with a damp cloth or cleaning products specially de-
signed for this purpose.

188 General Maintenance

Inspecting and replenishing Petrol and diesel refuelling

Fuel

 Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Petrol and diesel refuelling 189
Lead-free petrol 190
Diesel fuel 191
Refuelling with CNG (compressed natural gas) 192
CNG 193
Fig. 199 Open fuel filler flap/unscrew tank cap/place the tank cap on the
The correct fuels for your vehicle are specified on the inside of the fuel filler fuel filler flap
flap » Fig. 199 on page 189.

WARNING Fig. 200

■ The operating instructions of the refuelling system must always be fol- Fuel filler tube on vehicles with
lowed. diesel engines
■ Do not smoke when refuelling and do not use a mobile phone.
■ The fuel and fuel vapours are explosive - risk to life!

CAUTION
■ Never drive until the fuel tank is completely empty! The irregular supply of
fuel can cause misfiring, which can result in damage to parts of the engine and
the exhaust system.  Read and observe and on page 189 first.
■ Immediately remove any fuel that has spilled onto the vehicle's paintwork –
risk of paint damage. Refuelling can be done if the following conditions are met.
■ If the vehicle was not purchased in the country where it was intended to be  The vehicle is unlocked.
operated, you should check whether the fuel specified by the manufacturer is  The engine and the ignition are switched off.
offered in the country where the vehicle will be operated. You should also per-
 The auxiliary heating and ventilation is switched off » page 118.
haps check whether the manufacturer has recommended a different fuel for
operation of the vehicle in the corresponding country. If no prescribed fuel is › Press on the fuel filler flap in the direction of arrow 1 » Fig. 199.
available, then you must check whether it is permitted by the manufacturer to › Open the flap in the direction of arrow 2 .
operate the vehicle with another fuel type. › Unscrew the tank cap in the direction of arrow 3 .
› Remove the tank cap and place in the recess on top of the fuel filler flap in
the direction of arrow 4 .
› Insert the pump nozzle into the fuel filler neck as far as it will go, and refuel.
The fuel tank is full just as soon as the pump nozzle switches off for the first
time » . 

Inspecting and replenishing 189

› Remove the pump nozzle from the fuel filler tube and put it back in the Lead-free petrol
pump.
› Place the filler cap onto the fuel filler neck and turn it in the opposite direc- The correct fuel grades for your vehicle are specified on the inside of the fuel
tion to arrow 3 until it securely engages. filler flap.
› Close the fuel filler flap until it clicks into place.  Read and observe and on page 189 first.
Check that the fuel filler flap is closed properly.
The vehicle can only be operated with unleaded petrol that meets the EN 2281)
Incorrect refuelling guard on vehicles with diesel engines standard.
The fuel filler tube on vehicles with diesel engines has been fitted with a in-
correct refuelling guard » Fig. 200. This guard means it is only possible to re- All petrol engines can be operated using petrol that contains at most 10% bio-
fuel with the diesel pump nozzle. ethanol (E10).

If the diesel pump nozzle does not sit directly in the fuel filler tube, move it to Unleaded petrol 95/91 or 92 or 93 RON/ROZ
and fro with slight pressure to insert it correctly. We recommend using unleaded fuel with an octane rating of 95 RON. Unlea-
ded petrol with the octane ratings 91, 92 or 93 RON can also be used, but may
WARNING result in a slight loss in performance and slightly increased fuel consumption.
Instructions for filling the reserve canister Unleaded petrol min. 95 RON / ROZ
■ Never fill the reserve can inside the vehicle.
Use unleaded fuel with the octane rating 95 RON or higher.
■ Never place the reserve can on the vehicle.
■ Always place the reserve can on the floor. In an emergency petrol with the octane ratings 91, 92 and/or 93 RON can also
■ We do not recommend carrying any fuel canisters in your vehicle for safe- be used, but may result in a slight loss in performance and slightly increased
ty reasons. in the event of an accident this can get damaged and fuel may fuel consumption. Continue driving at medium engine speeds and minimum
escape – risk of fire! engine load » .
Refuel using petrol of the prescribed octane number as soon as possible.
CAUTION
Unleaded petrol 98/(95) RON / ROZ
■ The fuel tank is full just as soon as the pump nozzle switches off for the first
We recommend using unleaded fuel with an octane rating of 98 RON or higher.
time, provided the nozzle has been operated properly. Not continue refuelling.
Unleaded petrol 95 RON can also be used but this results in a slight loss in per-
■ Be careful when filling diesel fuel from the spare canister and then do this
formance and slightly increased fuel consumption.
slowly and cautiously – danger of contaminating the body.
■ The diameter of the diesel pump nozzle can be identical to that of the petrol In an emergency petrol with the octane ratings 91, 92 and/or 93 RON can also
pump nozzle in some countries. When driving in these countries, the incorrect be used, but may result in a slight loss in performance and slightly increased
fuelling protection should be removed by a specialist company. fuel consumption. Continue driving at medium engine speeds and minimum
engine load » .
Note
Refuel using petrol of the prescribed octane number as soon as possible. 
The fuel tank has a capacity of about 50 litres, including a reserve of approx.
6 litres.

1) In Germany also DIN 51626-1 or E10 for unleaded petrol with octane number 91 or 95 or DIN 51626-2 or E5
for unleaded petrol with octane number 95 and 98.

190 General Maintenance

Fuel additives Note
Unleaded petrol in accordance with the EN 228 standard1) meets all the condi- ■ Unleaded petrol that has a higher octane number than that required by the
tions for a smooth-running engine. We therefore recommend that no fuel ad- engine can be used without limitations.
ditives are used. This can result in considerable damage to parts of the engine ■ The use of petrol with an octane rating higher than 95 RON in does not re-
or the exhaust system. sult in either a noticeable increase in power nor lower fuel consumption in ve-
hicles for which unleaded petrol 95/min 92 or 93 RON is specified.
CAUTION
■ On vehicles using prescribed unleaded petrol of min. 95 RON, the use of pet-
■ Even one filling of the tank with petrol that does not meet the standards can rol with a higher octane number than 95 RON can increase the power and re-
lead to serious damage to parts of the exhaust system! duce fuel consumption.
■ If a fuel other than unleaded fuel which complies to the above mentioned
standards (e.g. leaded petrol) is put in the tank by mistake, do not start the en-
Diesel fuel
gine or switch on the ignition. Extensive damage to engine parts can occur.
The correct fuel grades for your vehicle are specified on the inside of the fuel
CAUTION filler flap.
■ If petrol with a lower octane number than the one prescribed is used do not
drive with a high engine speed. A high engine load can severely damage en-  Read and observe and on page 189 first.
gine components.
The vehicle can only be operated with diesel fuel that meets the EN 5902)
■ Even in the event of an emergency, petrol of a lower octane number than 91
standard.
RON must not be used, otherwise the engine can be severely damaged.
All diesel engines can be operated using diesel fuel with at most 7% biodiesel
CAUTION (B7)3).
In no case may fuel additives with metal components be used, especially not
On the Indian market, your vehicle will only be able to run on diesel fuel com-
with manganese or iron content. There is a risk of causing severe damage to
pliant with standard IS 1460/Bharat IV. If diesel fuel which complies with this
parts of the engine or exhaust system.
standard is not available, you can refuel with diesel fuel according to standard
CAUTION IS 1460/Bharat III in case of emergency.
Do not use fuels with metal components, such as LRP (lead replacement Operation in winter – Winter-grade diesel fuel
petrol). There is a risk of causing severe damage to parts of the engine or ex- In the cold season, only use “winter-grade diesel fuel” which will still operate
haust system. properly even at a temperature of -20 °C.
It is often the case in countries with different climatic conditions that diesel
fuels available have a different temperature characteristic. The ŠKODA Part-
ners and filling stations in the relevant country will be able to provide you with
information regarding the diesel fuels available. 

1) In Germany also DIN 51626-1 or E10 for unleaded petrol with octane number 91 or 95 or DIN 51626-2 or E5
for unleaded petrol with octane number 95 and 98.
2) In Germany also DIN 51628, in Austria ÖNORM C 1590, in Russia GOST R 52368-2005 / EN 590:2004.
3) In Germany according to the DIN 52638 standard, in Austria ÖNORM C 1590, in France EN 590.

Inspecting and replenishing 191

Preheating fuel  Read and observe and on page 189 first.
The vehicle is fitted with a fuel filter preheating system. This secures opera-
tion of a vehicle using diesel fuel down to an environmental temperature of Natural gas refuelling can be carried out if the following conditions are met.
-24 °C.  The vehicle is unlocked.
 The engine and the ignition are switched off.
Diesel fuel additives
The diesel fuel in accordance with the prescribed standards meets all the con-  The auxiliary heating and ventilation is switched off » page 118.
ditions for a smooth running engine. We therefore recommend that no diesel The gas filler tube for refuelling with natural gas is located behind the fuel fill-
fuel additives are used. This can result in considerable damage to parts of the er flap next to the petrol filler tube.
engine or the exhaust system.
The filling couplings of the natural gas refuelling systems may differ in han-
CAUTION dling. When refuelling with natural gas at unfamiliar refuelling systems, you
■ Just filling the tank once with diesel fuel that does not comply with the should seek help from trained fuel station staff. If unsure, have the refuelling
standard, can cause severe damage to parts of the engine, the fuel and ex- done by trained fuel station staff.
haust system. Open fuel filler flap
■ If a different fuel other than diesel fuel, which complies to the above men-
› Open the fuel filler flap.
tioned standards (e.g. petrol) is used, do not start the engine or switch on the › Remove cap A » Fig. 201 from gas filler tube B in direction of the arrow.
ignition! Extensive damage to engine parts can occur.
■ Water which has collected in the fuel filter can cause engine faults.
› Plug the filling coupling of the refuelling system on the gas filler tube B .
The fuel tank is full when the compressor of the refuelling system automati-
CAUTION cally switches off. To stop the refuelling operation prematurely, press the
■ The vehicle cannot be operated with bio fuel RME, therefore this fuel must “Stop ” button of the refuelling system.
not be filled in the tank and used for driving the vehicle. The use of biofuel Closing the filler cap
RME can cause considerable damage to parts of the engine or fuel system. › Check that sealing ring C » Fig. 201 has remained inserted in the gas filler
■ Do not mix any fuel additives, so-called “flow improvers” (petrol and similar
tube.
agents) into the diesel. This can result in considerable damage to parts of the
engine or the exhaust system. If sealing ring C has slipped onto the filling coupling, reinsert it into the gas
filler tube.
Refuelling with CNG (compressed natural gas) › Plug the cap A onto the gas filler tube.
› Close the bonnet.
The natural gas refuelling systems have an overfill protection relating to the
outdoor temperature. At very high outside temperatures, it may happen that
the gas tank may not be fully refuelled.
The natural gas system of your vehicle is suitable both for “slow fuelling” (fuel-
ling from small compressors) and for “quick fuelling” (fuelling from natural gas
stations with large compressors).
If the vehicle is parked for a longer period of time immediately after refuelling,
the situation may arise in which the pointer of the fuel tank gauge does not
indicate exactly the same level as was the case immediately after refuelling 
Fig. 201 Natural gas filler tubes

192 General Maintenance

when the engine is restarted. This is not due to any system leakages but a Natural gas quality and consumption
drop in pressure in the natural gas fuel tank due to technical reasons after a Depending on the natural gas supplier, the natural gas quality (heating value)
cooling phase directly after refuelling. may vary. The engine system adjusts automatically to the natural gas quality.
The maximum lifetime of the gas tank is 20 years. Automatically switching over from natural gas mode to petrol mode
The capacity of the natural gas fuel tank is approximately 15 kg. The vehicle automatically switches from natural gas to petrol, for example, if
one of the following cases occurs.
The capacity of the gasoline fuel tank is about 50 litres, of which about 6 ▶ With an empty gas tank or not enough pressure in the tank.
lighters are in reserve. ▶ After refuelling with natural gas.
▶ At very low surrounding temperatures.
WARNING
■ When refuelling, never get into the vehicle. If you have to get into your Use all the petrol in the fuel tank at lease once every six months until the
vehicle in exceptional cases, touch a metal surface before you touch the warning light  illuminates and then refill with petrol. This is to ensure that
filling coupling again. This will avoid electrostatic discharges, which may the fuel system functions correctly and to preserve the quality of the fuel.
generate sparks. Sparks can cause a fire during refuelling. Gas leak
■ Natural gas is highly explosive and highly flammable.
If a gas leak is suspected (noticeable odour), proceed as follows.
▶ Stop the vehicle.
Note ▶ Switch off the ignition.
During the filling process sounds are heard which are harmless. If you are un- ▶ Put out any cigarettes, remove any spark-producing or incendiary items from
sure which service station staff to use, ask the petrol station staff. the vehicle and immediately switch the engine off.
▶ Open the doors and the boot lid to ventilate the vehicle sufficiently.
▶ Do not continue to drive if the odour persists.
CNG
▶ If it is not possible to leave an enclosed area with a vehicle with a gas leak
(e.g. in a tunnel, underpass, garage, ferry, etc.), call the emergency services
immediately.
Seek help from a specialist garage to correct the gas system fault.
In a traffic accident
If a gas leak is suspected in a traffic accident, proceed as follows.
▶ Switch off the ignition.
▶ Put out any cigarettes, remove any spark-producing or incendiary items from
the vehicle and immediately switch the engine off.
▶ Have all the occupants get out.
▶ Prevent people walking past/standing in the immediate vicinity of the acci-
Fig. 202 Position of the CNG label(s).
dent vehicle. We recommend standing at least 10 metres from the vehicle.
 Read and observe and on page 189 first. ▶ Inform the emergency services that it is a natural gas vehicle.

A G-TEC-vehicle may be operated with CNG and petrol. Regular gas system checks
Regular gas system checks must be carried out in a specialist workshop on
In some countries, national legislation requires that vehicles with CNG opera- natural gas-powered vehicles. The vehicle owner is responsible for ensuring
tion be identified by one of the labels » Fig. 202. tests are conducted properly. 

Position of the CNG label » Fig. 202.

Inspecting and replenishing 193

Every 2 years WARNING (Continued)
▶ Check the filler cap. ■ On vehicles with automatic transmission, shift the selector lever into the
▶ Check the condition of fuel filler tubes and the sealing ring in the fuel filler P position.
tubes, and clean the sealing ring if necessary. ■ Allow the engine to cool.
▶ Check the gas system for leaks.
■ Never open the bonnet if you can see steam or coolant flowing out of the
Every 4 years engine compartment – risk of scalding! Wait until the steam or coolant has
▶ Inspectthe gas tank. stopped escaping.
Every 20 years
▶ Replace the gas tank. WARNING
Information for working in the engine compartment
WARNING ■ Keep all people, especially children, away from the engine compartment.
■ Do not underestimate the smell of gas in the car or when refuelling - risk ■ Never touch the radiator fan. The fan might suddenly start running!
of fire, explosion and injury. ■ Do not touch any hot engine parts – risk of burns!
■ The natural gas tanks in the vehicle must not be exposed to unwanted
heat sources. WARNING
Information for working in the engine compartment with the engine run-
ning
Engine compartment ■ Pay particular attention to moving engine parts, e.g. V-ribbed belt, gener-
ator, radiator fan - danger to life!
 Introduction ■ Never touch the electric wiring on the ignition system.
This chapter contains information on the following subjects: ■ Avoid short circuits in the electrical system, particularly on the vehicle's
battery.
Opening and closing the bonnet 195 ■ Always make sure that no jewellery, loose clothing or long hair can get
Engine compartment overview 196 caught in rotating engine parts – risk of death! Always remove any jewel-
Radiator fan 196 lery, tie back long hair and wear tight fitting clothing before completing any
Windscreen washer system 196 work.
WARNING
WARNING
When working in the engine compartment, injuries, scolding, accident or
fire hazards may arise. For this reason, it is essential to comply with the Information for working on the fuel system or the electrical system
■ Always disconnect the vehicle battery from the electrical system.
warning instructions stated below and with the general applicable rules of
■ Do not smoke.
safety. The engine compartment of your car is a hazardous area!
■ Never work near open flames.
■ Always have a functioning fire extinguisher nearby.
WARNING
Instructions before beginning work in the engine compartment WARNING
■ Turn off the engine and remove the ignition key.
■ Firmly apply the handbrake.
■ Read the information and warning instructions on the fluid containers.
■ For vehicles with manual transmission the lever into the neutral position.
■ Keep the working fluids in sealed original containers and safe from peo-
ple who are not completely independent, e.g. children. 

194 General Maintenance

 WARNING (Continued) Before opening the bonnet, ensure that the arms of the windscreen wipers
■ Never spill operating fluids over the hot engine - risk of fire. are correctly in place against the windscreen, otherwise the paintwork on the
■ If you wish to work under the vehicle, you must secure the vehicle from flap could be damaged.
rolling away and support it with suitable supporting blocks: the car jack is › Push the release lever in the direction of arrow 2.
not sufficient for this – risk of injury!
The bonnet is then unlocked.
CAUTION › Grasp the bonnet catch and lift in the direction of arrow 3 .
Always top up using the correct specification of fluids. This may result in major › Remove the lid prop in the direction of arrow 4 from the holder.
operating problems and also vehicle damage! › Secure the open flap inserting the end of the post into the opening in the di-
rection of arrow 5 .
For the sake of the environment
Close the flap
In view of the requirements for the environmentally friendly disposal of fluids › Lift the bonnet.
and the special tools and knowledge required for such work, we recommend › Decouple the bonnet support and press into the holder designed to hold it.
that fluids be changed by a specialist garage. › Let the bonnet drop into the lock carrier lock from a height of around 20 cm –
do not push it in!
Note
■Please consult a specialist garage for any questions relating to fluids. WARNING
■Fluids with the proper specifications can be purchased from the ŠKODA Origi- ■ Check whether the bonnet has been closed properly. Also make sure that
nal Accessories or from the ŠKODA Genuine Parts ranges. a vehicle with an opened bonnet does not appear in the instrument cluster
display » page 40.
Opening and closing the bonnet ■ If you notice that the lock is not properly engaged while driving, stop the
vehicle immediately and close the bonnet – risk of accident!
■ Make sure that when closing the bonnet, no body parts are crushed -
there is danger of injury!

Fig. 203 Open the bonnet

 Read and observe and on page 194 first.

Open flap
› Open the front door.
› Pull the release lever underneath the dash panel in the direction of the ar-
row 1 » Fig. 203.

Inspecting and replenishing 195

 Engine compartment overview WARNING
After switching off the ignition, the fan can intermittently continue to oper-
ate for approx. 10 minutes.

Windscreen washer system

Fig. 205
Windscreen washer fluid reser-
voir

Fig. 204 Principle sketch: Engine compartment

 Read and observe and on page 194 first.
 Read and observe and on page 194 first.
The windscreen washer fluid reservoir A is located in the engine compart-
Layout of the engine compartment » Fig. 204 ment » Fig. 205.
A Coolant expansion reservoir 199 The cleaning fluid is provided for the cleaning of the front and rear window as
B Engine oil dipstick 198 well as the headlight.
C Engine oil filler opening 198 The capacity of the reservoir is about 3 litres or about 4.7 litres on vehicles that
D Brake fluid reservoir 200 have a headlight cleaning system1).
E Battery (below a cover) 201
Clear water is not sufficient to intensively clean the windscreen and head-
F Windscreen washer fluid reservoir 196 lights. We recommend using clean washing water together with the screen
Note cleaner from the range of ŠKODA Original Accessories (in winter additionally
with antifreeze) which is capable of removing stubborn dirt.
The location of the inspection points in the engine compartment of petrol and
diesel engines is practically identical. In Winter, the washing water should always be mixed with antifreeze even if
the vehicle has heated windscreen washer nozzles.
Radiator fan Under exceptional circumstances, methylated spirits can also be used if no
screen cleaner with antifreeze is available. The concentration of methylated
 Read and observe and on page 194 first.
spirits must not be more than 15 %. The freeze protection at this concentration
The radiator fan is powered by an electric motor. Operation is controlled ac- is sufficient only to -5 °C. 

cording to the temperature of the coolant.

1) In some countries, 4.7 ltr. applies for both variants.

196 General Maintenance

 CAUTION Note
■ Under no circumstances must radiator antifreeze or other additives be added ■ Before a long drive we recommend that you purchase and carry with you en-
to the windscreen washer fluid. gine oil which complies with the specification for your vehicle.
■ If the vehicle is fitted with a headlight cleaning system, only cleaning prod- ■ We recommend that you use oils from ŠKODA Original Accessories.
ucts which do not attack the polycarbonate coating of the headlights must be ■ If your skin has come into contact with oil, it must be washed thoroughly.
added to the windscreen washer fluid.
■ Do not remove the filter from the windscreen washer fluid reservoir when re- Specification
plenishing it with liquid otherwise the liquid transportation system can be con-
taminated, which can cause the windscreen washer system to malfunction.  Read and observe and on page 197 first.

Vehicles with variable service intervals

Engine oil
Petrol engines Specification
 Introduction 1.2 l/63, 81 kW TSI
This chapter contains information on the following subjects: 1.4 l/110 kW TSI
VW 504 00
1.8 l/132 kW TSI
Specification 197
2.0 l/162, 169 kW TSI
Checking the oil level 198
Replenishing 198 Diesel enginesa) Specification
The engine has been factory-filled with a high-grade oil that can be use 1.6 l/66, 81 kW TDI
throughout the year - except in extreme climate zones. VW 507 00
2.0 l/105, 110, 135 kW TDI
The engine oils are undergoing continuous further development. Thus the in- a) Engine oil VW 505 01 can optionally be used in diesel engines without a DPF.
formation stated in this Owner's Manual is only correct at the time of publica-
tion. Vehicles with fixed service intervals

ŠKODA Service Partners are informed about the latest changes by the manu- Petrol engines Specification
facturer. We therefore recommend that the oil change be completed by a 1.2 l/63, 81 kW TSI
ŠKODA Service Partner. 1.4 l/81 kW TSI G-TEC
The specifications (VW standards) stated in the following can be indicated sep- 1.4 l/110 kW TSI
arately or together with other specifications on the bottle. VW 502 00
1.6 l./81 kW MPI
The engine oil should be changed after specified service intervals » page 49. 1.8 l/132 kW TSI
WARNING 2.0 l/162, 169 kW TSI
The engine compartment of your car is a hazardous area. The following Diesel enginesa) Specification
warning instructions must be followed at all times when working in the en-
1.6 l/66, 81 kW TDI
gine compartment » page 194. VW 507 00
2.0 l/105, 110, 135 kW TDI
CAUTION a) Engine oil VW 505 01 can optionally be used in diesel engines without a DPF. 

Do not pour any additives into the engine oil – risk of serious damage to the
engine parts.

Inspecting and replenishing 197

 CAUTION The engine consumes a little oil. The oil consumption may be as much as 0.5
■In an emergency, another engine oil to be refilled. To prevent damage to the l/1000 km depending on your style of driving and the conditions under which
engine, a maximum of 0.5 litres only of the following engine oils may be used: you operate your vehicle. Consumption may be slightly higher than this during
■ For petrol engine models: ACEA A3/ACEA B4 or API SN, (API SM); the first 5 000 km.
■ For diesel engine models: ACEA C3 or API CJ-4. The oil level must be checked at regular intervals.
In case of low oil level, the instrument cluster display shows a warning light 
Checking the oil level
as well as the relevant notification » page 38. Check the oil level using the dip-
stick as soon as possible. Add oil accordingly.

CAUTION
■ The oil level must never be above the range A » Fig. 206 - risk of damage to
the motor as well as the exhaust system.
■ If for some reason it is not possible to top up the engine oil under the current
circumstances,  do not continue driving! Switch off the engine and seek as-
sistance from a specialist garage.
■ If the oil level is above level A ,  do not continue to drive! Switch off the
engine and seek assistance from a specialist garage.
Fig. 206 Principle sketch: Dipstick
Replenishing
 Read and observe and on page 197 first.
 Read and observe and on page 197 first.
The dipstick indicates the engine oil level .
› Unscrew the cap of the engine oil filler opening » Fig. 204 on page 196.
Dipstick » Fig. 206 › Replenish the oil in portions of 0.5 litres in accordance with the correct speci-
A The oil level must be within this range. fications » page 197.
The oil can be checked and topped up, if the following conditions are satisfied. › Check the oil level » page 198.
 The vehicle is on a horizontal surface.
› Screw the lid of the engine oil filler closed carefully.
› Pull the dipstick out as far as the stop.
 The engine operating temperature is reached.
 The engine is turned off.
Coolant
 The bonnet is open.
Checking the level  Introduction
› Wait a few minutes until the engine oil flows back into the oil trough. This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
› Pull out the dipstick.
› Wipe the dipstick with a clean cloth and insert it again to the stop. Checking the coolant level 199
› Pull the dipstick out again and check the oil level. Replenishing 200
› Re-insert the dipstick. The coolant provides cooling for the motor.
It consists of water and coolant additive with additives that protect the cooling
system against corrosion and prevents furring. 

198 General Maintenance

The coolant additive percentage in the coolant must be at least 40%. ■ Any faults resulting from corrosion may cause a loss of coolant and can con-
sequently result in major engine damage.
The coolant additive may be increased to a maximum of 60%.
■ Do not fill the coolant above the mark A » Fig. 207 on page 199.
The correct mixing ratio of water and coolant additive is to be checked if nec- ■ If an error occurs, leading to the engine overheating, the help of a professio-
essary by a specialist garage or is to be restored if necessary. nal garage is to be sought - there is a risk of serious engine damage occurring.
■ Additional headlights and other attached components in front of the air inlet
The description of the coolant is shown in the coolant expansion reservoir
» Fig. 207 on page 199. impair the cooling efficiency of the coolant.
■ Never cover the radiator - there is a risk of the engine overheating.
WARNING
Note
The engine compartment of your car is a hazardous area. The following
warning instructions must be followed at all times when working in the en- On vehicles that are fitted with an auxiliary heater (auxiliary heating and venti-
gine compartment » page 194. lation), the coolant capacity is approx. 1 l larger.
■ The coolant is harmful to health.
■ Avoid contact with the coolant. Checking the coolant level
■ Coolant vapours are harmful to health.
■ Never open the end cover of the coolant expansion reservoir while the Fig. 207
engine is still warm. The cooling system is pressurized! Coolant expansion reservoir
■ When opening the end cover of the coolant expansion reservoir, cover it
with a cloth to protect your face, hands and arms from hot steam or hot
coolant.
■ If any coolant splashes into your eyes, immediately rinse out your eyes
with clear water and contact a doctor as soon as possible.
■ Always keep the coolant in the original container, safe from people who
are not completely independent, especially children - there is a danger of
poisoning!
■ If coolant is swallowed, consult a doctor immediately.
 Read and observe and on page 199 first.
■ Never spill operating fluids over the hot engine - risk of fire. The coolant expansion bottle is located in the engine compartment.
Coolant expansion reservoir » Fig. 207
CAUTION
A Mark for the maximum permissible coolant level
■ If for some reason it is not possible to top up the coolant under the current
circumstances,  do not continue driving! Switch off the engine and seek as- B Mark for the lowest permissible coolant level
sistance from a specialist garage. The coolant level should be kept between the marks A and B .
■ If the expansion tank is empty, do not top up with coolant. The system could
The coolant can be checked and topped up, if the following conditions are sat-
aerate - risk of engine damage,  do not continue driving! Switch off the en-
isfied.
gine and seek assistance from a specialist garage.
■ The amount of coolant additive in the coolant must never be allowed to be  The vehicle is on a horizontal surface.
less than 40 %.  The engine is turned off.
■ Over 60 % of coolant additive in the coolant reduces the antifreeze protec-  The engine is not heated.
tion and coolant effectiveness.  The bonnet is open. 
■ A coolant additive that does not comply with the correct specification can
significantly reduce the corrosion protection of the cooling system.

Inspecting and replenishing 199

Checking the level WARNING
› Check the coolant level in the coolant expansion tank » Fig. 207. ■ The engine compartment of your car is a hazardous area. The following
If the engine is warm, the test result may be inaccurate. The level can also be warning instructions must be followed at all times when working in the en-
above the mark A » Fig. 207. gine compartment » page 194.
■ Do not use used brake fluid - the function of the brake system may be im-
In the event of an insufficient coolant level, a warning light  is displayed in paired – risk of accident!
the instrument cluster, as well as the relevant notification » page 37. We still
recommend inspecting the coolant level directly at the reservoir from time to
CAUTION
time.
■ Do not continue your journey if the fluid level has dropped below the “MIN”
Loss of coolant marking » Fig. 208 on page 200,  do not continue driving - there is a risk of
A loss of coolant is first and foremost an indication of a leak in the cooling sys- an accident! Seek help from a specialist garage.
tem. Do not merely top up the coolant. Have the cooling system checked by a ■ Brake fluid damages the paintwork of the vehicle.
specialist garage.
Note
Replenishing ■ The brake fluid is changed as part of a prescribed inspection services.
■ We recommend using brake fluids from the ŠKODA Original Accessories
 Read and observe and on page 199 first. range.
The coolant expansion tank must always contain a small amount of coolant
» page 199, in section Introduction.
Checking the brake fluid level

› Place a cloth over the cap of the coolant expansion reservoir and unscrew Fig. 208
the cap carefully. Brake fluid reservoir
› Replenish the coolant.
› Turn the cap until it clicks into place.
Do not use an alternative additive if the specified coolant is not available. In
this case, use just water and have the correct mixing ratio of water and cool-
ant additive restored by a specialist garage as soon as possible.
Only refill with new coolant.

 Read and observe and on page 200 first.

Brake fluid
The fluid can be checked if the following conditions are met.
 Introduction  The vehicle is on a horizontal surface.
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:  The engine is turned off.
Checking the brake fluid level 200  The bonnet is open.
Specification 201 Checking the level
The brake fluid reservoir is located in the engine compartment » Fig. 208 on › Check the level of brake fluid in the reservoir » Fig. 208.
page 200. The level must be between the “MIN” and “MAX” markings. 

200 General Maintenance

A slight drop in the fluid level results when driving due to normal wear-and- Warning symbols on the vehicle battery
tear and automatic adjustment of the brake pads. Symbol Meaning
There may be an indication of a leak in the brake system, however, if the fluid
level drops significantly within a short time or if it drops below the “MIN” mark-  Always wear eye protection!
ing. Battery acid is severely caustic. Always wear gloves and eye pro-
Too low brake fluid level is indicated by the warning light  being shown on  tection!
the display of the instrument cluster as well as the corresponding message Keep fire, sparks, open flames and lit cigarettes well clear of the
» page 32.  vehicle battery!
When charging the vehicle battery, a highly explosive gas mixture
Specification  is produced!
 Read and observe and on page 200 first.
 Keep children away from the vehicle battery!
To ensure the optimal functioning of the braking system, only use a brake fluid
meeting the standard VW 501 14 (this standard meets the requirements of WARNING
FMVSS 116 DOT4). There is a risk of injuries, poisoning, chemical burns, explosions or fire
when carrying out any work on the battery and on the electrical system.
Note The general applicable safety rules and the following warnings must be ob-
We recommend using brake fluids from the ŠKODA Original Accessories range. served without exception.
■ Keep the vehicle battery away from people who are not completely inde-

Vehicle battery pendent, especially children.

■ Do not tilt the battery otherwise battery electrolyte may flow out of the

 Introduction battery vent openings.

■ Protect your eyes by safety glasses or a face shield – risk of blindness!
This chapter contains information on the following subjects: ■ Always wear protective gloves, eye and skin protection when handling
the vehicle battery.
Opening the cover 202
■ The battery acid is strongly corrosive and must, therefore, be handled
Checking the battery electrolyte level 202 with the greatest of care.
Charging 203 ■ Corrosive fumes in the air irritate the air passages and lead to conjunctivi-

Replacing 203 tis and inflammation of the air passages in the lungs.
■ Battery acid corrodes dental enamel and creates deep wounds after con-
Disconnecting and reconnecting 203
tact with the skin which take a long time to heal.
Automatic load deactivation 204 ■ If any battery electrolyte comes into contact with your eyes, rinse the rel-
evant eye immediately with clear water for several minutes - consult a doc-
The vehicle battery represents a power source for the motor to start and for
tor immediately!
the supply of electrical consumers in the car.
■ Splashes of acid on your skin or clothes should be neutralised as soon as
possible using soap suds and then rinsed with plenty of water.
■ If you swallow battery acid, seek immediate medical assistance! 

Inspecting and replenishing 201

 WARNING  Read and observe and on page 201 first.
■ The use of open flames and light should be avoided.
The battery is located in the engine compartment. For some equipment var-
■ Smoking and radio triggering activities should be avoided.
iants, it is located underneath a polyester cover » Fig. 209.
■ Never use a damaged vehicle battery – risk of explosion!
■ Never charge a frozen or thawed vehicle battery – risk of explosion and › Fold out the cover on the battery in the direction of the arrow.
caustic burns! The battery cover is installed in reverse order.
■ Replace a frozen vehicle battery.
■ Never jump-start vehicle batteries with an electrolyte level that is too low
– risk of explosion and caustic burns.
Checking the battery electrolyte level

CAUTION Fig. 210

Vehicle battery: Electrolyte level
■ Improper handling of the vehicle battery may cause damage.
indicator
■ Ensure that battery acid does not come into contact with the bodywork – risk
of damage to the paintwork.
■ If the vehicle has not been driven for more than 3 to 4 weeks, the battery will
discharge. Prevent the battery from discharging by disconnecting the battery's
negative terminal  or continuously charging the battery with a very low
charging current.
■ Do not place the battery in direct daylight in order to protect the vehicle bat-
tery housing from the effects of ultra-violet light.  Read and observe and on page 201 first.
■ If the vehicle is frequently used for making short trips, the vehicle battery
will not have time to charge up sufficiently and may discharge. On vehicles with a vehicle battery fitted with a colour indicator, the electrolyte
level can be determined by looking at the change in colour of this display.
Note Air bubbles can influence the colour of the indicator. For this reason carefully
■ We recommend having all work on the vehicle battery carried out by a spe- knock on the indicator before carrying out the check.
cialist garage.
■ You should replace batteries older than 5 years. Check
Black colour – electrolyte level is correct.
Opening the cover Colourless or light yellow colour – electrolyte level too low, the battery must
be replaced.
Fig. 209 For technical reasons, on vehicles with the description “AGM”, the electrolyte
Polyester cover of vehicle bat- level cannot be checked.
tery
Vehicles with the START STOP system are fitted with a battery control unit for
checking the energy level for recurring engine starts.
We recommend that you have the acid level checked regularly by a specialist
garage, especially in the following cases.
▶ High external temperatures.
▶ Longer day trips.
▶ After each charge. 

202 General Maintenance

Winter time The vent plugs of the vehicle battery should not be opened for charging.
The vehicle battery only has a proportion of the starting power in lower tem-
peratures. A discharged vehicle battery may already freeze at temperatures WARNING
just below 0 °C. ■ When you charge a battery, hydrogen is released, and a highly explosive
gas mixture is also produced. An explosion can be caused through sparkling
We therefore recommend that you have the battery checked and, if necessary,
over during unclamping or loosening of the cable plug while the ignition is
recharged by a specialist garage before the start of the winter.
on.
Note ■ Creating a bridge between the poles on the battery (e.g. with metal ob-

The battery acid level is also checked regularly by a specialist garage as part of jects - cables) creates a short circuit - risk of damage to the battery, explo-
the inspection service. sion and burning of the battery, jets of acid spurting out.
■ Avoid creating sparks when working with cables and electrical devices.
Strong sparking represents a risk of injury.
Charging ■ Before carrying out any work on the electrical system, switch off the en-
 Read and observe and on page 201 first. gine, the ignition and all electrical components and disconnect the negative
terminal  .
A properly charged vehicle battery is essential for reliably starting the engine. ■ “Quick-charging” the vehicle battery is dangerous and requires a special
charger and specialist knowledge.
A charging operation can be performed if the following conditions are satis-
■ We therefore recommend that vehicle batteries be “rapidly charged” by a
fied.
specialist garage.
 The engine is turned off.
 The ignition is switched off.
CAUTION
 All consumers are turned off.
On vehicles with the START/STOP system or additional heating (auxiliary heat-
 The bonnet is open. ing), do not connect the pole terminal of the charger directly to the negative
“Fast charging” with high currents terminal of the vehicle battery, but rather only to the engine earth » page 219,
› Disconnect both battery cables (first of all “negative”, then “positive”). Jump-starting using the battery from another vehicle.
› Attach the terminal clamps of the charger to the battery terminals (red =
“positive”, black = “negative”). Replacing
› Plug the mains cable of the charger into the power socket and switch on the  Read and observe and on page 201 first.
device.
› After charging has been successful: Switch off the charger and remove the The new vehicle battery must have the same capacity, voltage, current and
mains cable from the power socket. size as the original battery. Suitable vehicle battery types can be purchased
› Only then disconnect the charger's terminal clamps. from a specialist garage.
› Reconnect the cables to the battery (first of all “positive”, then “negative”).
We recommend you have the battery replaced by a specialist garage.
Charging with low voltages
It is not necessary to disconnect the cables from the battery if you recharge Disconnecting and reconnecting
the vehicle battery, for example from a mini-charger.
Refer to the instructions of the charger manufacturer.
 Read and observe and on page 201 first.

A charging current of 0.1 multiple of the total vehicle battery capacity (or low- Disconnecting
er) must be used until full charging is achieved. › Switch off the ignition. 

Inspecting and replenishing 203

› Firstly disconnect the battery's negative terminal , followed by the positive CAUTION
terminal . ■ Despite such intervention by the vehicle electric system management, the
Connecting vehicle battery may be drained. For example, when the ignition is switched on
› Firstly connect the battery's positive terminal , followed by the negative a long time with the engine turned off or the side or parking lights are turned
on during longer parking.
terminal .
■ Consumers which are supplied via a 12 V socket can cause the vehicle battery
After disconnecting and re-connecting the vehicle battery, the following func- to discharge when the ignition is switched off.
tions or devices are partially or completely inoperative.
Note
Function / device Operating measure
Driving comfort is not disrupted by any shutting off of consumers. Often the
Electrical power windows » page 64 driver is not aware of it having taken place.
Panorama sliding/tilting roof » page 66
Sun screen » page 66
Time settings » page 31

CAUTION
■ Disconnect the vehicle battery only with the ignition turned off - there is a
risk of damaging the electrical system of the vehicle.
■ Under no circumstances must the battery cables be connected incorrectly –
risk of a cable fire.

Note
■ After disconnecting and re-connecting the vehicle battery, we recommend
having the vehicle checked by a specialist to ensure that the full functionality
of all electrical systems is guaranteed.
■ The data of the multi-function display will be reset.

Automatic load deactivation

 Read and observe and on page 201 first.

The vehicle's electrical system automatically prevents the battery from dis-
charging when the battery is being heavily used. This manifests itself by the
following.
▶ The idling speed is raised to allow the generator to deliver more electricity to
the electrical system.
▶ Where appropriate large convenience consumers, e.g. seat heaters, rear win-
dow heaters, have their power limited or in case of emergency shut off com-
pletely.

204 General Maintenance

 Always store wheels or tyres in a cool, dry and, where possible, dark place.
Wheels Tyres which are not fixed to a wheel trim should be stored upright.
Tyres and wheel rims Tyre age
Tyres age losing their original characteristics, even if they are not used. The
 Introduction service life of the tyres is 6 years. Therefore, we recommend not using tyres
that are more than 6 years old.
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Wheel bolts
Notes on using wheels 205
Wheels and wheel bolts are matched to each other in terms of design. We rec-
Tyre pressure 205
ommend that you use wheel rims and wheel bolts from ŠKODA Original Acces-
Tyre wear 206 sories.
Tyre wear indicator and wheel replacement 207
Tyre damage 207 WARNING
Unidirectional tyres 207 Never use tyres if you do not know anything about the condition and age.
Spare wheel 207
Spare wheel 208 Tyre pressure
Tyre label 208
Only use those tyres or wheel rims which have been approved by ŠKODA for
your model of vehicle.

WARNING
For safety reasons, do no replace tyres individually.

Note
■ We recommend that any work on the wheels or tyres be carried out by a spe-
cialist garage.
■ We recommend that you use wheel rims, tyres, full wheel trims and snow Fig. 211 Label with a table of tyre sizes and tyre pressure value / inflate
chains from ŠKODA Original Accessories. tyres

Notes on using wheels  Read and observe on page 205 first.

 Read and observe on page 205 first. The prescribed tyre inflation is on the sticker with pictograms A » Fig. 211 (for
some countries, the pictograms are replaced with a text).
During the first 500 km, new tyres do not offer optimum grip and appropriate
care should therefore be taken when driving. Tyre pressure is always to match the load.
B Inflation pressure for half load
Always fit the tyres with the deeper tread depth to the front wheels.
C Inflation pressure for environmentally-friendly operation
Tyre storage As a result of pressure level adaption to this value, the fuel consumption
Mark them previously used tyres so that you are able to fit them on again to and pollutant emissions may fall slightly.
run in the same direction. D Inflation pressure for full load 

Wheels 205
 E Tyre diameter in inches Tyre wear
These details are intended only as information for the specified tyre pres-
sure and does not list approved tyre sizes for your vehicle.  Read and observe on page 205 first.
The approved tyre sizes for your vehicle are listed in the vehicle's technical
documentation (COC document) and this also states the declaration of The tyre wear depends on the tyre pressure, the driving style and other condi-
conformity. tions.
The approved tyre diameter for your vehicle is also provided with the vehi- Attention to the following notes may affect tyre wear.
cle data » page 236.
F Tyre pressure value on the front axle Driving style
Fast cornering, sharp acceleration and braking increase the wear of your tyres.
G Tyre pressure value on the rear axle
Wheel balance
Checking the tyre pressures
The wheels of a new vehicle are balanced. When driving, there are a wide
Check the tyre pressure, including that of the emergency or spare wheel, at
range of influences which may result in an imbalance. This may become appa-
least once a month and also before setting off on a long journey.
rent by a “vibration” in the steering. If this is the case, have the wheels
Always check the inflation pressure when the tyres are cold. Do not reduce the checked by a specialist garage.
higher pressure on warm tyres.
Have the wheels rebalanced after replacing or repairing the tyres.
In vehicles with tyre pressure monitoring, tyre pressure values must be saved
each time the pressures are changed » page 165. Setting the vehicle geometry
Incorrect wheel alignment at the front or rear leads to excess wear on the
WARNING tyres and impairs driving safety. In the event of prominent tyre wear, we rec-
■ Having the correct tyre inflation pressure is always the driver's responsi- ommend that you have the setting of the vehicle geometry checked at a spe-
bility. cialist garage.
■ Too low or too high inflation pressure impairs handling.
WARNING
■ If the inflation pressure is too low, the tyre must perform a greater rolling
resistance. At higher speeds the tyre will warm up as a result of this. This
■ An incorrect wheel alignment at the front or rear impairs handling.
can result in tread separation and a tyre blow-out.
■ Unusual vibrations or pulling of the vehicle to one side could be a sign of
■ In the event of very fast pressure loss, e.g. in the event of sudden tyre
tyre damage. If there is any doubt that a wheel is damaged, immediately re-
damage, an attempt should be made to bring the vehicle carefully to a stop duce your speed and stop! If no external tyre damage is evident, drive slow-
without sudden steering movements and without any hard braking. ly and carefully to the nearest specialist garage to have the vehicle
checked.
For the sake of the environment
Tyres which are insufficiently inflated increase your fuel consumption.

Note
The declaration of conformity (COC document) can be obtained from a ŠKODA1)
partner.

1) Only valid for some countries and some models.

206 General Maintenance

Tyre wear indicator and wheel replacement Tyre damage
 Read and observe on page 205 first.

We recommend checking your tyres and wheel rims for damage (punctures,
cuts, splits and bulges, etc.) on a regular basis.
Remove any foreign objects in the tyre tread immediately (e.g. small stones).
Foreign bodies which have penetrated into the tyre (e.g. screws or nails)
should not be removed and seek help from a specialist garage.

WARNING
Never drive with damaged tyres – risk of accident.
Fig. 212 Principle sketch: Replace tire tread with wear indicators / wheels
CAUTION
 Read and observe on page 205 first.
The tyres must be protected from contact with substances such as oil, grease
Wear indicators and fuel, which could damage them. If the tyres come into contact with these
There is a 1.6-mm-high wear indicator » Fig. 212 -  in the base of the tread of substances, then we recommend having them checked out in a specialist ga-
the tyres. In some countries, different tyre wear rates may apply. rage.
Markings on the walls of the tyres through the letters “TWI”, triangular sym-
bols or other symbols identify the position of the wear indicators. Unidirectional tyres

Replacing the wheels  Read and observe on page 205 first.

For uniform wear on all tyres, we recommend that you replace the wheels ev-
The direction of rotation of the tyres is marked by arrows on the wall of the
ery 10,000 km as shown in the diagram » Fig. 212- . You will then obtain ap-
tyre.
proximately the same life for all the tyres.
The indicated direction of rotation must be adhered to in order to obtain the
After changing the wheel, the tyre pressure must be adjusted.
best benefits from the characteristics of these tyres.
In vehicles with tyre pressure monitoring, save tyre pressure values
These characteristics are mainly.
» page 165. ▶ Increased driving stability.
▶ Reduced risk of aquaplaning.
WARNING
▶ Reduced tyre noise and reduced tyre wear.
■ You must have your tyres replaced with new ones at the latest when the
wear indicators have been worn down.
■ Worn tyres do not provide the necessary adhesion to the road surface Spare wheel
particularly at high speeds on wet roads. One could experience “aquaplan-  Read and observe on page 205 first.
ing” (uncontrolled movements of the vehicle – “swimming” on a wet road
surface). The size of the spare wheel is identical to that of the vehicle factory installed
wheels.
After changing the spare wheel, the tyre pressure must be adjusted. 

Wheels 207
In vehicles with tyre pressure monitoring, save tyre pressure values WARNING (Continued)
» page 165. ■ Never use the emergency spare wheel if it is damaged.
■ Observe instructions on the warning sign of the emergency wheel.
WARNING
■ If, you get a puncture and a spare tyre has to be mounted with opposite
direction of rotation, then drive carefully. The tyre no longer retains its opti- Tyre label
mal characteristics in this situation.
■ If the dimensions or design of the spare wheel differ from the tyres fitted  Read and observe on page 205 first.
to the vehicle (e.g. winter tyres or low-profile tyres), it must only be used Only fit radial tyres of the same type, size (rolling circumference) and the same
briefly in the event of a puncture and if an appropriately cautious style of tread pattern on one axle on all 4 wheels.
driving is adopted.
■ Never use the temporary spare wheel if it is damaged. When fitting new tyres, the tyres must be replaced axle by axle.
Explanation of tyre markings
Spare wheel For example, 195/65 R 15 91 T means:

 Read and observe on page 205 first. 195 Tyre width in mm

65 Height/width ratio in %
A yellow warning label is always displayed on the rim of the temporary spare
R Code letter for the type of tyre – Radial
wheel.
15 Diameter of wheel in inches
Please note the following if you intend to use the temporary spare wheel.
▶ The warning label must not be covered after installing the wheel.
91 Load index
▶ Be specially attentive when driving. T Speed symbol
▶ The emergency spare is inflated to the maximum inflation pressure for the
The date of manufacture is stated on the tyre wall (possibly on the inside).
vehicle » page 205.
▶ The tyre inflation pressure of the spare wheel R 18 is 4.2 bar. For example, DOT ... 10 15... means, for example, that the tyre was manufac-
▶ Only use this emergency spare wheel to reach the nearest specialist garage, tured in the 10th week of 2015.
as it is not intended for permanent use. Load index
If you need to use a spare wheel, make sure to fit a standard wheel of the ap- The load index indicates the maximum permissible load for each individual
propriate dimensions and design as soon as possible. tyre.
In vehicles with tyre pressure monitoring, save tyre pressure values Load index
88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95
» page 165.
Load
WARNING 560 580 600 615 630 650 670 690
(In kg)
■ Never drive with more than one temporary spare wheel mounted!
■ Only use the temporary spare wheel when absolutely necessary. Speed symbol
■ Avoid accelerating at full throttle, sharp braking and fast cornering. The maximum speed symbol indicates the maximum permissible vehicle speed
■ The snow chains cannot be used on the temporary spare wheel. with fitted tyres in each category. 
■ If the dimensions or design of the temporary spare wheel differ from the
tyres fitted, never drive faster than 80 km/h (or 50 mph).

208 General Maintenance

 Speed On vehicles with the infotainment system with key the speed limit can be
S T U H V W Y set for winter tyres » Owner´s Manual Infotainment, chapter CAR - Adjust ve-
symbol
hicle systems.
Maximum
speed 180 190 200 210 240 270 300 For other vehicles, there is the possibility to set the speed limit for winter tyres
(in km/h) at a specialist garage.

WARNING Snow chains

■ Never exceed the maximum permissible load bearing capacity of moun-
ted tyres. When driving on wintry roads, snow chains improve not only traction, but also
■ Never exceed the maximum permissible speed for the mounted tyres. the braking performance.
Snow chains must only be mounted on the front wheels.
Winter operation It is only permissible to fit snow chains with the following wheel/tyre combina-
tions.
 Introduction Octavia
This chapter contains information on the following subjects: Rim size Impression depth D Tyre size
Winter tyres 209 6J x 15a) 43 mm 195/65 R15
Snow chains 209 6J x 15a) 47 mm 195/65 R15
Do not use alloy rims with bevelled or polished surfaces during the winter. The 6J x 16b) 48 mm 205/55 R16
rim surface does not have sufficient corrosion protection and could be perma- 6J x 16b) 50 mm 205/55 R16
nently damaged (e.g. through grit).
6J x 17b) 45 mm 205/50 R17
6J x 17b) 48 mm 205/50 R17
Winter tyres
a) Only fit snow chains with links and locks not larger than 13 mm.
The handling of your vehicle will be significantly improved when driving on b) Only fit snow chains with links and locks not larger than 12 mm.
wintry roads if you fit winter tyres (labelled M+S).
Octavia Scout
To ensure the best possible handling, winter tyres must be fitted to all four
wheels. The minimum tread depth is 4 mm. Rim size Impression depth D Tyre size
6J x 16a) 50 mm 205/55 R16
Fit the summer tyres on again in good time as they provide better handling
properties, a shorter braking distance, less tyre noise, and reduced tyre wear 6J x 17a) 45 mm 205/50 R17
on roads which are free of snow and ice as well as at temperatures above 7 °C. 6J x 16a) 48 mm 205/55 R16
Speed symbol 6J x 16b) 48 mm 205/60 R16
Winter tyres (marked with M+S and a peak/snowflake symbol ) of a lower 6J x 17a) 48 mm 205/50 R17
speed category can be used provided that the permissible maximum speed of 6J x 17b) 48 mm 205/55 R17
these tyres is not exceeded even if the possible maximum speed of the vehicle
a) Only fit snow chains with links and locks not larger than 12 mm.
is higher. b) 
Only fit snow chains with links and locks not larger than 9 mm.

Wheels 209
Octavia RS
Rim size Impression depth D Tyre size
6J x 17a) 45 mm 205/50 R17
6J x 17a) 48 mm 205/50 R17
a) Only fit snow chains with links and locks not larger than 12 mm.

Remove the full wheel trims before fitting the snow chains » page 213.

CAUTION
The chains must be removed when driving on snow-free roads. They would
otherwise cause loss of performance and damage the tyres.

210 General Maintenance

 Warning triangle – version 1
Do-it-yourself The warning triangle can be attached to the rear wall trim panel with rubber
straps » Fig. 213 - . Natural gas vehicles have the warning triangle located
Emergency equipment, and self-help under the floor mat in the luggage compartment.

Emergency equipment Warning triangle – version 2

The warning triangle can be secured with straps in the right storage compart-
 Introduction ment in the luggage compartment » Fig. 213 - .

This chapter contains information on the following subjects: Pay attention to the expiration date of the first-aid kit.
First aid kit and warning triangle 211 WARNING
reflective vest 211 The first-aid kit and warning triangle must always be secured safely so that
Fire extinguisher 212 they do not come loose when making an emergency braking or in a vehicle
Vehicle tool kit 212 collision which could cause injuries to occupants.

First aid kit and warning triangle Note

We recommend using a first-aid box from ŠKODA Original Accessories available
from a ŠKODA Partner.

reflective vest

Fig. 214
Storage compartment for the re-
flective vest

Fig. 213 Placement of the first aid kit and warning triangle - version 1 /
version 2

The following information applies to the first-aid kit and warning triangle from
the ŠKODA Original Accessories. The reflective vest can be stored in brackets under the front seats » Fig. 214.
The storage compartments may possibly be too small for a different first-aid
kit or warning triangle.
First-aid box
The first aid kit can be attached by a strap in the right-hand storage compart-
ment in the luggage compartment » Fig. 213.

Emergency equipment, and self-help 211

Fire extinguisher Vehicle tool kit

Fig. 215
Fire extinguisher

The fire extinguisher is attached by two straps in a holder underneath the driv-
er's seat.
Removing/attaching
Fig. 216 Vehicle tool kit
› Loosen the two straps by pulling the buckles in the direction of the arrow
» Fig. 215.
The tool kit is housed in a box in the spare or emergency wheel compartment
› Remove the fire extinguisher. or in this storage space.
› To fit in place, insert the fire extinguisher back into the bracket and secure
with straps. Depending on the equipment variant, the vehicle tool kit may not contain all
of the following components.
Please read the instructions which are attached to the fire extinguisher.
1 Screwdriver
Pay attention to the expiration date of the fire extinguisher. If the fire extin- 2 Key for removing and installing the tail light
guisher is used after the expiration date, its proper function is not assured.
3 Adapter for anti-theft wheel bolts
WARNING 4 Towing eye
The fire extinguisher must always be secured safely so that they do not 5 Clamps for removing the wheel trims
come loose when making an emergency braking or in a vehicle collision 6 Jack with sign
which could cause injuries to occupants. 7 Crank for the jack
8 Wheel wrench
Note 9 Extraction pliers for wheel bolt caps
The fire extinguisher is part of the scope of delivery in certain countries only. 10 Breakdown kit

WARNING
The factory-supplied lifting jack is only intended for your model of vehicle.
Under no circumstances attempt to lift heavier vehicles or other loads. 

212 Do-it-yourself
 CAUTION › For vehicles with manual transmission select 1st gear.
■ Screw the jack back into the starting position before storing in the box with › On vehicles with automatic transmission, place the selector lever in the P
the vehicle tool kit. position.
■ Ensure that the vehicle tool kit is safely secured in the luggage compart- › The parking brake switch.
ment. › Uncouple any trailers.
■ Ensure that the box is always secured with the strap.
Removing/stowing the wheel
Note
The declaration of conformity is included with the jack or the log folder. Fig. 217
Take out the wheel
Changing a wheel

 Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Preparation 213
Removing/stowing the wheel 213
Full wheel trim 213 The wheel is located in a well under the floor covering in the boot and is fixed
Wheel bolts 214 in place with special bolt B » Fig. 217.
Anti-theft wheel bolts 214 Take out the wheel
Loosening/tightening wheel bolts 215 › Open the boot lid.
Raising the vehicle 215 › Raise the floor covering in the boot » page 103.
Remove the wheel / fix 216 › Loosen the retaining belt and take out the box with the tool kit.
Follow-up tasks 216 › Remove locking A in the direction of arrow 1 » Fig. 217.
For your own safety and the safety of your passengers, the following instruc-
› Unscrew nut B in the direction of arrow 2 .
tions must be observed before carrying out a wheel change on the road.
› Remove the wheel.
 Switch on the hazard warning light. Store wheel away
 Place the warning triangle at the prescribed distance. › Place the wheel into the wheel well with the wheel rim pointing downward.
 Park the vehicle as far away as possible from flowing traffic.
› Pull the fixing band through the opposite holes in the wheel rim.
› Screw in nut B in the opposite direction to arrow 2 » Fig. 217.
 Choose a location with a flat, solid surface. › Insert locking A in the opposite direction to which arrow 1 is pointing.
 Have all the occupants get out. The passengers should not stand on the › Replace the box with the tool kit into the emergency or spare wheel and se-
road (instead they should remain behind a crash barrier, for instance) while cure it with the tape.
the wheel is being changed. › Fold back the floor covering in the boot » page 107.
› Shut the boot lid.
Preparation
Full wheel trim
Before changing the wheel, the following work must be carried out.
Before removing the wheel bolts, remove the full wheel trim.
› Switch off the engine. 

Emergency equipment, and self-help 213

Extracting Extracting
› Hook the clamp found in the vehicle tool kit » page 212 into the reinforced › Push the extraction pliers » page 212 sufficiently far onto the cap until the
edge of the wheel trim. inner catches of the pliers are positioned at the collar of the cap.
› Push the wheel wrench through the clamp, support on the tyre and pull off › Remove the cap in the direction of the arrow » Fig. 218.
the wheel trim.
Fitting
Installing › Push the cap onto the wheel bolt up to the stop.
› Press the wheel trim onto the wheel rim at the designated valve opening.
› Then press the trim into the wheel rim until its entire circumference locks Anti-theft wheel bolts
correctly in place.
Notes on wheel trims supplied at the factory or from ŠKODAOriginal Accesso- Fig. 219
ries. Principle sketch: Anti-theft
▶ When using an anti-theft wheel bolt, make sure that this has been fitted ac- wheel bolt with adapter
cording to the position marked on the back of the wheel cover position.
▶ On the back of the wheel cover, the position for the anti-theft wheel bolt is
marked by means of a symbol. If the wheel cover is set outside the position
marked for the anti-theft wheel bolt, there is a risk of damaging the wheel
cover.
If wheel trims are fitted, an adequate flow of air must be assured in order to
cool the brake system. The anti-theft wheel bolts protect the wheels from theft. These can only be
loosened or tightened with the use of adapter B » Fig. 219.
CAUTION
Use the pressure of your hand only, do not strike the full wheel trim. The cover
› Remove the full wheel trim or the caps of the wheel bolts.
could be damaged.
› Insert adapter B » Fig. 219 with the toothed side all the way into the inner
teeth in the head of the anti-theft wheel bolts A .
Note › Push the wheel wrench onto the adapter B up to the stop.
We recommend that you use hub caps from ŠKODA Original Accessories.
› Loosen or tighten the wheel bolt » page 215.
› Remove the adapter.
› Replace the wheel trim and the caps.
Wheel bolts
The adapter for the anti-theft wheel bolts must always be kept in the vehicle
in preparation for a possible wheel change. The adapter is stowed in the tool
Fig. 218
kit.
Remove the cap
With wheel trims supplied at the factory or from ŠKODA Original Accessories,
the position of the anti-theft wheel bolt is marked on the back of the wheel
trim.
When using an anti-theft wheel bolt, make sure that this has been fitted ac-
cording to the position marked on the back of the wheel cover position. 

Before removing the wheel bolts, remove the caps.

214 Do-it-yourself
 Note Raising the vehicle
■ Note down the code number located on both the adapter and also on the
end of each anti-theft wheel bolt. This number can be used to purchase a re-
placement adapter from ŠKODA Genuine Parts if required.
■ The anti-theft wheel bolt set and adapter can be purchased from a ŠKODA
Partner.

Loosening/tightening wheel bolts

Fig. 220
Changing a wheel: Loosening the
wheel bolts
Fig. 221 Jacking points for the jack Version 1 / version 2

Before removing the wheel bolts, remove the wheel bolt caps.
Release
› Push the wheel wrench onto the wheel bolt to the stop.
Use the appropriate adapter for undoing the anti-theft wheel bolts » page 214.
› Grasp the end of the wrench and turn the bolt about one turn in the direction Fig. 222 Schematic diagram: Positioning the jack
of the arrow » Fig. 220.
Tightening The jack from the vehicle tool kit must be used in order to raise the vehicle.
› Push the wheel wrench onto the wheel bolt to the stop. Position the car jack at the jacking point closest to the flat tyre .
Use the appropriate adapter for tightening the anti-theft wheel bolts
Jacking points – version 1
» page 214.
The jacking points are located on the metal bar of the lower beam.
› Grasp the end of the wrench and turn the bolt against the direction of the Their positions are indicated by embossed markings A » Fig. 221 in the side of
arrow » Fig. 220, until it is tight.
the lower beam.
After tightening the wheel bolts, replace the caps.
Jacking points – version 2
WARNING The mounting points are located on the metal bar of the lower beam in the re-
If it proves difficult to undo the bolts, carefully apply pressure to the end of cess at the bottom of the plastic lower-beam casing B » Fig. 221.
the wrench with your foot. Keep hold of the vehicle when doing so, and Their positions are indicated by embossed markings B in the side of the lower
make sure you keep your footing. beam. 

Emergency equipment, and self-help 215

Raising the vehicle › Tighten the wheel bolts opposite each other using the wheel wrench (alter-
› Insert the crank 7 into the mount on the jack 6 » page 212. nating crosswise). Tighten the anti-theft wheel bolt last.
› Support the base plate of the jack with its entire surface resting on level › Replace the wheel trim and the caps.
ground and ensure that the lever is positioned vertically to the jacking point
When fitting unidirectional tyres, ensure that the direction of rotation is cor-
» Fig. 222.
rect » page 207.
› Use the crank to raise the jack until its claw encloses the bar » Fig. 222.
› Continue to raise the jack until the wheel is just lifted off the ground. All bolts must be clean and must turn easily.
WARNING If it is established when changing a wheel that the wheel bolts are corroded
■ If the wheel has to be changed on a slope, first of all block the opposite and difficult to move, then these must be replaced.
wheel with a stone or similar object to prevent the vehicle from unexpect- Under no circumstances grease or oil the wheel bolts!
edly rolling away.
■ Secure the base plate of the lifting jack with suitable means to prevent WARNING
possible moving. A soft and slippery ground under the base plate may move Undo the wheel bolts only a little (about one turn) as long as the vehicle
the lifting jack, causing the vehicle to fall down. It is therefore always nec- has not yet been jacked up. Otherwise the wheel could become loose and
essary to place the lifting jack on a solid surface or use a wide and stable fall off.
base. Use a non-slip base (e.g. a rubber foot mat) if the surface is smooth,
such as cobbled stones, tiled floor, etc.
■ Only attach the lifting jack to the attachment points provided for this pur- Follow-up tasks
pose. After changing the wheel, the following work must be carried out.
■ Always raise the vehicle with the doors closed.
■ Never position any body parts, such as arms or legs under the vehicle, › Stow the replaced wheel in the wheel well and secure it with a special screw.
while the vehicle is raised with a lifting jack. › Stow the tool kit in the space provided and secure using the band.
■ When the vehicle is raised, never start the engine. › Check the tyre pressure on the installed wheel as soon as possible.
› Have the tightening torque of the wheel bolts checked with a torque wrench
as soon as possible.
CAUTION
It is important to ensure that the jack is correctly attached to the bar of the After changing the wheel, the tyre pressure must be adjusted. In vehicles with
lower beam, as otherwise there is a risk of damage to the vehicle. tyre pressure monitoring, save tyre pressure values » page 165.
Replace the damaged wheel or consult a specialist garage about repair op-
Remove the wheel / fix tions.
When changing a wheel, the following instructions must be followed. The prescribed tightening torque of the wheel bolts is 120 Nm.
› Remove the full wheel trim or the caps of the wheel bolts. WARNING
› First of all slacken the anti-theft wheel bolt and then the other wheel bolts. ■ If the wheel bolts are tightened to a too low tightening torque, the rim
› Jack up the vehicle until the wheel that needs changing is clear of the can come loose when the car is moving. A tightening torque which is too
ground.
high can damage the bolts and threads and this can result in permanent
› Unscrew the wheel bolts and place them on a clean surface (cloth, paper, deformation of the contact surfaces on the rim.
etc.). ■ Drive cautiously and only at a moderate speed until the tightening torque
› Remove the wheel carefully. has been checked.
› Attach the wheel and slightly screw on the wheel bolts.
› Lower the vehicle.
216 Do-it-yourself
Puncture repair kit Components of the puncture repair kit

 Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Components of the puncture repair kit 217
General information 218
Preparations for using the breakdown kit 218
Sealing and inflating the tyre 218
Notes for driving with a repaired tyre 219
Use the breakdown kit to reliably repair tyre damage caused by foreign bodies
or a puncture with diameters up to approx. 4 mm.
Performing a repair with the breakdown kit not at all intended to replace a
permanent repair on the tyre. Its purpose is to get you to the nearest specialist
garage. Fig. 223 Principle sketch: Components of the breakdown kit
The wheel must not be removed during repair.  Read and observe on page 217 first.
Do not remove foreign bodies, which have penetrated the wheel profile from
the tyre (e.g. screws or nails). Kit components » Fig. 223
1 Sticker with speed designation “max. 80 km/h”/“max. 50 mph”
Immediately replace the tyre that was repaired using the breakdown kit, or
2 Valve remover
consult a specialist garage about repair options.
3 Inflation hose with plug
WARNING 4 Air compressor
■ The sealant is hazardous to heath. Remove immediately if it comes into 5 Button for releasing the tyre pressure
contact with the skin. 6 12 volt cable connector
■ Observe the manufacturer's usage instructions for the breakdown kit.
7 Tyre inflation hose
8 Tyre inflation pressure indicator
Note
9 ON and OFF switch
A new bottle of sealant can be purchased from ŠKODA Original Parts.
10 Tyre inflator bottle with sealing agent
11 Replacement valve core

The valve remover 2 has a slot at its lower end which fits into the valve core.
The kit is located in a box under the floor covering in the luggage compart-
ment. This contains a sealant and an air compressor.

Note
The declaration of conformity is included with the air compressor or the log
folder.

Emergency equipment, and self-help 217

General information Sealing and inflating the tyre
 Read and observe on page 217 first.  Read and observe on page 217 first.

For your own safety and the safety of your passengers, the following instruc- Sealing
tions must be observed before carrying out a wheel repair on the road. › Forcefully shake the tyre inflater bottle 10 » Fig. 223 on page 217 back and
 Switch on the hazard warning light. forth several times.
 Place the warning triangle at the prescribed distance. › Firmly screw the inflation hose 3 onto the tyre inflater bottle 10 . The film on
the cap is pierced automatically.
 Park the vehicle as far away as possible from flowing traffic.
 Choose a location with a flat, solid surface.
› Remove the plug from the inflation hose 3 and plug the open end fully onto
the tyre valve.
 Have all the occupants get out. The passengers should not stand on the › Hold the bottle 10 with the bottom facing upwards and fill all of the sealing
road (instead they should remain behind a crash barrier, for instance) while agent from the tyre inflator bottle into the tyre.
the wheel is being changed. › Remove the filler plug from the tyre valve.
The breakdown kit must not be used under the following circumstances. › Screw the valve core back into the tyre valve using the valve remover 2 .
▶ The rim is damaged. Inflating
▶ The outside temperature is below -20 ° C.
› Screw the air compressor tyre inflation hose 7 » Fig. 223 on page 217 firmly
▶ The cut or puncture is larger than 4 mm. onto the tyre valve.
▶ The tyre wall is damaged.
› For vehicles with manual transmission the lever into the neutral position.
▶ The expiration date has passed (see inflation bottle).
› On vehicles with automatic transmission, place the selector lever in the P
position.
Preparations for using the breakdown kit › Start the engine and run it in idle.
 Read and observe on page 217 first.
› Plug the connector 6 into 12 volt socket » page 93.
› Switch on the air compressor with the ON and OFF switch 9 .
The following preparatory work must be carried out before using the puncture › Allow the air compressor to run until a pressure of 2.0 - 2.5 bar is achieved.
Maximum run time of 8 minutes » .
repair kit.
› Switch off the air compressor.
› Switch off the engine. › If you cannot reach an air pressure of 2.0 - 2.5 bar, unscrew the tyre inflation
› For vehicles with manual transmission select 1st gear. hose 7 from the tyre valve.
› On vehicles with automatic transmission, place the selector lever in the P › Drive the vehicle 10 metres forwards or backwards to allow the sealing agent
position. to “distribute” in the tyre.
› Firmly apply the handbrake. › Firmly screw the tyre inflation hose 7 back onto the tyre valve and repeat
› Check that you can carry out the repairs with the breakdown kit » page 217. the inflation process.
› Uncouple any trailers. › Switch off the air compressor.
› Remove the breakdown kit from the boot. › Remove the tyre inflation hose 7 from the tyre valve.
› Stick the sticker 1 » Fig. 223 on page 217 on the dashboard in the driver's Once a tyre inflation pressure of 2.0 - 2.5 bar is achieved, you can continue the
field of view.
journey. 
› Unscrew the valve cap.
› Use the valve remover 2 to unscrew the valve core and place it on a clean
surface (rag, paper, etc.).

218 Do-it-yourself
 WARNING The battery of another vehicle can be used to jump-start your vehicle if the en-
■ If the tyre cannot be inflated to at least. 2.0 bar, the damage is too great. gine will not start because the battery is flat.
The sealing agent cannot be used to seal the tyre.  Do not drive the vehi-
WARNING
cle. Seek help from a specialist garage.
■ The tyre inflation hose and air compressor may get hot as the tyre is be- ■ Pay attention to the warning instructions relating to working in the en-
ing inflated – risk of burning. gine compartment » page 194.
■ A discharged vehicle battery may already freeze at temperatures just be-
low 0 °C. If the battery is frozen, do not carry out a jump start with the bat-
CAUTION
tery of another vehicle – risk of explosion!
Switch off the air compressor after running 8 minutes at the latest – risk of ■ Keep any sources of ignition (naked flame, smouldering cigarettes, etc.)
overheating! Allow the air compressor to cool a few minutes before switching away from the battery – risk of explosion!
it on again. ■ Never jump-start vehicle batteries with an electrolyte level that is too low
– risk of explosion and caustic burns.
Notes for driving with a repaired tyre ■ The vent screws of the battery cells must be tightened firmly.

 Read and observe on page 217 first.

Note
The inflation pressure of the repaired tyre must be checked after driving for 10 We recommend you buy jump-start cables from a car battery specialist.
minutes.
If the tyre inflation pressure is 1.3 bar or less Jump-starting using the battery from another vehicle
›  Do not drive the vehicle! You cannot properly seal with tyre with the
breakdown kit. Fig. 224
Jump-starting: A – flat battery, B
If the tyre inflation pressure is 1.3 bar or more – battery providing current 
› Set the tyre pressure back to the correct value.
› Continue driving carefully to the nearest specialist garage at a maximum
speed of 80 km/h (50 mph).
WARNING
■ A tyre filled with sealant has the same driving characteristics as a stand-
ard tyre.
■ Do not drive faster than 80 km/h (50 mph).
■ Avoid accelerating at full throttle, sharp braking and fast cornering.

Jump-starting

 Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Jump-starting using the battery from another vehicle 219

Emergency equipment, and self-help 219

 Negative cable – colour coding in the majority of cases is black.
Fig. 225
Engine earth: START-STOP sys- WARNING
tem ■ Do not clamp the jump-start cable to the negative terminal of the dis-
charged battery. There is the risk of detonating gas seeping out the battery
being ignited by the strong spark which results from the engine being star-
ted.
■ The non-insulated parts of the terminal clamps must never touch each
other – risk of short circuit!
■ The jump-start cable connected to the positive terminal of the battery

 Read and observe on page 219 first. must not come into contact with electrically conducting parts of the vehicle
– risk of short circuit!
The starting process using the battery of another vehicle requires the use of ■ Route the jump-start cables so that they cannot be caught by any rotat-
jumper cables. ing parts in the engine compartment.

The jump-start cables must be attached in the following sequence.

› Attach clamp 1 to the positive terminal of the discharged battery A Towing the vehicle
» Fig. 224 .
› Attach clamp 2 to the positive terminal of the battery supplying power B .  Introduction
› Attach clamp 3 to the negative terminal of the battery supplying power B .
› Attach the clamp 4 to a solid metal part which is connected firmly to the en-
gine block or to the engine block itself.
On vehicles with the START-STOP system» Fig. 225, connect the jump-start
cable to the engine's earthing point.
Starting engine
› Start the engine on the vehicle providing the power and allow it to idle.
› Start the engine of the vehicle with the discharged battery.
› If the engine does not start, terminate the attempt to start the engine after
10 seconds and wait for 30 seconds before repeating the process.
› Remove the jump-start cables exactly in the reverse sequence as for attach- Fig. 226 Braided tow ropes/spiral tow rope
ing.
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Both batteries must have a rated voltage of 12 V. The capacity (Ah) of the bat-
Front towing eye 221
tery supplying the power must not be significantly less than the capacity of
the discharged battery in your vehicle. Rear towing eye 222
Vehicles with a tow hitch 222
Jump-start cables
Only use jump-start cables which have an adequately large cross-section and A braided tow rope must be used for towing » Fig. 226- .
insulated terminal clamps. Observe the instructions of the jumper lead manu- When towing, the following guidelines must be observed.
facturer.
Vehicles with manual transmission may be towed in with a tow bar or a tow
Positive cable – colour coding in the majority of cases is red. rope or with the front or rear wheels raised. 

220 Do-it-yourself
Vehicles with automatic transmission may be towed in with a tow bar or a tow WARNING
rope or with the front wheels raised. If the vehicle is raised at rear, the auto- ■ When towing, exercise increased caution.
matic gearbox is damaged! If possible, the vehicle should be towed with the ■ Spiral tow ropes must not be used for towing » Fig. 226- , the towing
engine running or at least with the ignition on. eye may unscrew out of the vehicle - risk of accident.
■ The tow rope should not be twisted - risk of accident.
Driver of the tow vehicle
› Engage the clutch gently when starting off or depress the accelerator partic-
ularly gently if the vehicle is fitted with an automatic gearbox. CAUTION
› Only then approach correctly when the rope is taut. ■ Do not start engine by towing - there is a risk of damaging the engine parts.
The maximum towing speed is 50 km/h. The battery from another vehicle can be used as a jump-start aid » page 219,
Jump-starting.
Driver of the towed vehicle ■ There is always a risk of excessive stresses and damage resulting at the
› Switch on the ignition so that the steering wheel is not locked and so that points to which you attach the tow rope or tow bar when you attempt to tow a
the turn signal lights, windscreen wipers and windscreen washer system can vehicle which is not standing on a paved road.
be used.
› Take the vehicle out of gear or move the selector lever into position N if the Note
vehicle is fitted with an automatic gearbox. We recommend using a tow rope from ŠKODA Original Accessories available
from a ŠKODA Partner.
Please note that the brake servo unit and power steering only operate if the
engine is running. If the engine is not running, significantly more physical force
is required to depress the brake pedal and steer the vehicle. Front towing eye
If using a tow rope, ensure that it is always kept taught.
General information for the towing process
Both drivers should be familiar with the problems which might possibly occur
while a vehicle is being towed. Unskilled drivers should not attempt to tow in
another vehicle or to be towed in.
The vehicle must be transported on a special breakdown vehicle or trailer if it
is not possible to tow in the vehicle in the way described or if the towing dis-
tance is greater than 50 km.
If the gearbox no longer contains any oil, your vehicle must only be towed with
the front axle raised clear of the ground or on a breakdown vehicle or trailer. Fig. 227 Removing the cap / installing the towing eye
To protect both vehicles when tow-starting or towing, the tow rope should be  Read and observe and on page 221 first.
elastic. Thus one should only use plastic fibre rope or a rope made out of a
similarly elastic material. Removing/installing the cap
Attach the tow rope or the tow bar to the towing eyes » page 221 or › Press on the cap in the direction of the arrow 1 » Fig. 227.
» page 222 to the detachable ball head of the towing equipment » page 167. › Remove the cap in the direction of arrow 2 .
› After unscrewing the towing eye, insert the cap in the area of arrow 1 and
then press the opposite side of the cap.
The cap must engage firmly. 

Emergency equipment, and self-help 221

Removing/installing the towing eye  Read and observe and on page 221 first.
› Manually screw the towing eye as far as it will go in the direction of the ar-
row 3 » Fig. 227 » . Removing/installing the cap
For tightening purposes, we recommend, for example, using the wheel
› Press on the cap in the direction of the arrow 1 » Fig. 228 or » Fig. 229.
wrench, towing eye from another vehicle or a similar object that can be pushed
› Remove the cap in the direction of arrow 2 .
through the eye.
› After unscrewing the towing eye, insert the cap in the area of arrow 1 .
› Press the opposite side of the cap.
› Unscrew the towing eye against the direction of the arrow 3. The cap must engage firmly.
WARNING Removing/installing the towing eye
The towing eye must always be screwed in fully and firmly tightened, oth- › Manually screw the towing eye in as far as it will go in the direction of the
erwise the towing eye can tear when towing in or tow-starting. arrow 3 » Fig. 228 or » Fig. 229 to the stop » .
For tightening purposes, we recommend, for example, using the wheel
Rear towing eye wrench, towing eye from another vehicle or a similar object that can be pushed
through the eye.
› Unscrew the towing eye against the direction of the arrow 3.

WARNING
The towing eye must always be screwed in fully and firmly tightened, oth-
erwise the towing eye can tear when towing in or tow-starting.

Vehicles with a tow hitch

 Read and observe and on page 221 first.
Fig. 228 Expansion of the cap / installation of towing eye - Version 1 On vehicles with a factory-fitted towing device, there is no mount for the
screw-in towing eye behind the cap.
Use the built-in detachable ball rod for towing » page 167, Hitch.
Towing the vehicle using the towing device is a viable alternative solution to
using the towing eye.

CAUTION
The detachable ball rod and/or the vehicle can be damaged if an unsuitable
tow bar is used.

Note
The detachable ball rod must always be in the vehicle so that it can be used for
Fig. 229 Expansion of the cap / installation of towing eye - Version 2 towing, if necessary.

222 Do-it-yourself
Remote control › Insert the new battery.
› Insert the battery cover A and press it down until it clicks audibly into place.
 Introduction
Synchronising the remote control
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
 Read and observe on page 223 first.
Replacing the battery in the remote control key 223
Synchronising the remote control 223 If the vehicle does not unlock when pressing the remote control, the key may
replace battery in the remote control the auxiliary heating (auxiliary not be synchronised. This can occur when the buttons on the remote control
heating) 223 key are actuated a number of times outside of the operative range of the
equipment or the battery in the remote control key has been replaced.
CAUTION
■ We recommend having faulty rechargeable batteries replaced by a ŠKODA Synchronise the key as follows.
service partner. › Press any button on the remote control key.
■ Pay attention to the correct polarity when changing the battery. › Unlock the door with the key via the lock cylinder within 1 minute of pressing
the button.
Note
If a key has an affixed decorative cover, this will be destroyed when the bat- replace battery in the remote control the auxiliary heating
tery is replaced. A replacement cover can be purchased from a ŠKODA Partner.
(auxiliary heating)
Replacing the battery in the remote control key
Fig. 231
Radio remote control: Battery
cover

 Read and observe on page 223 first.

Fig. 230 Remove cover/take out battery The battery is located under a cover on the back of the radio remote control
» Fig. 231.
 Read and observe on page 223 first. › Insert a flat, blunt object, such as a coin, into the gap of the battery cover.
The battery change is carried out as follows.
› Turn the cover against the direction of the arrow up to the mark to open the
cover.
› Flip out the key. › Replace the battery.
› Press off the battery cover A » Fig. 230 with your thumb or by using a flat › Return the battery cover.
screwdriver in region B . › Turn the cover in the direction of the arrow up to the initial marking, engage.
› Open the battery in the direction of the arrow 1 .
› Remove the discharged battery in the direction of arrow 2.
Emergency equipment, and self-help 223
Emergency unlocking/locking Locking the door without a locking cylinder

 Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Unlocking/locking the driver's door 224
Locking the door without a locking cylinder 224
Unlock the boot lid 224
Selector lever-emergency unlocking 225

Unlocking/locking the driver's door

Fig. 233 Emergency locking: Left/right rear door

An emergency locking mechanism is located on the face side of the doors

which have no locking cylinder, it is only visible after opening the door.
› Remove the panel A » Fig. 233.
› Insert the vehicle key into the slot and turn in the direction of the arrow
(spring-loaded position).
› Replace the cover A.

Unlock the boot lid

Fig. 232 Handle on the driver's door: covered locking cylinder/locking cyl-
inder with key

The driver's door can be unlocked or locked in an emergency.

› Pull on the door handle and hold.
› Insert the vehicle key into the slot on the bottom of the cover » Fig. 232.
› Open the cover in the direction of the arrow.
› Release the door handle.
› For vehicles with LHD, insert the remote control key into the lock cylinder
with the buttons facing upwards and unlock or lock the vehicle.
› For vehicles with RHD, insert the remote control key into the lock cylinder Fig. 234 Unlocking the boot lid: Version 1 / version 2
with the buttons facing downwards and unlock or lock the vehicle.
› Pull on the door handle and hold. The boot lid can be unlocked manually.
› Replace the cap in its original position.
CAUTION
› Fold the rear seat backrest forward » page 87.
› Insert a screwdriver or similar tool into the recess or the opening in the trim
Make sure you do not damage the paint when performing an emergency lock- » Fig. 234 as far as the stop.
ing/unlocking. › Unlock the lid by moving it in the direction of the arrow. 

224 Do-it-yourself
› Open the boot lid. Replacing the windscreen wiper blades
Selector lever-emergency unlocking

Fig. 236 Windscreen wiper blade

Fig. 235 Selector lever-emergency unlocking  Read and observe on page 225 first.

› Firmly apply the handbrake. Before replacing the windscreen wiper blade, put the windscreen wiper arms
› Open the stowage compartment in the front centre console » page 91. into the service position.
› Grab hold of the cover A in the area of the arrows and carefully raise it for- Service position for changing wiper blades
wards in the direction of the arrow 1 and then backwards » Fig. 235.
› Use a finger to press the yellow plastic part in the direction of the arrow 2 . › Closing the bonnet.
› At the same time, press the locking button in the selector lever and move › Switch the ignition on and off again.
the selector lever to position N. › Within 10 seconds, press the lever in position 4 and hold it in position for
around 2 seconds » page 78, Windscreen wipers and washers.
If the selector lever is moved again to position P, it is once again blocked.
The windscreen wiper arms move into the service position.

Replacing windscreen wiper blades Removing the wiper blade

› Lift the wiper arm from the window in the direction of 1 » Fig. 236.
 Introduction › Tilt the wiper blade to the stop in the same direction.
› Hold the upper part of the wiper arm and press the securing mechanism A
This chapter contains information on the following subjects: in the direction of arrow 2 .
Replacing the windscreen wiper blades 225 › Remove the wiper blade in the direction of the arrow 3 .
Replacing the rear window wiper blade 226 Attaching the windscreen wiper blade
WARNING › Push the windscreen wiper blade to the stop until it locks into place.
› Check that the windscreen wiper blade is correctly attached.
Replace the windscreen wiper blades once or twice a year for safety rea- › Fold the windscreen wiper arm back to the windscreen.
sons. These can be purchased from a ŠKODA Partner. › Turn on the ignition and press the lever into position 4 » page 78, Wind-
screen wipers and washers.
The windscreen wiper arms move into the home position.

Emergency equipment, and self-help 225

Replacing the rear window wiper blade Fuses and light bulbs
Fuses

 Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Fuses in the dash panel – LHD 227
Fuses in the dash panel – RHD 227
Assignment of the fuses in the dash panel 228
Fuses in the engine compartment 229
Assignment of fuses in the engine compartment 229
Fig. 237 Rear window wiper blade
Individual electrical circuits are protected by fuses.
 Read and observe on page 225 first.
Switch off the ignition and the corresponding power consuming device before
Removing the wiper blade replacing a fuse.
› Lift the wiper arm from the window in the direction of 1 » Fig. 237. Find out which fuse belongs to the component that is not operating
› Tilt the wiper blade to the stop in the same direction. » page 228, Assignment of the fuses in the dash panel or » page 229, Assign-
› Hold the upper part of the wiper arm and press the securing mechanism A ment of fuses in the engine compartment.
in the direction of arrow 2 .
› Remove the wiper blade in the direction of the arrow 3 . Electrically adjustable seats are protected by automatic circuit breakers, which
switch on again automatically after a few seconds after the overload has been
Attaching the windscreen wiper blade eliminated.
› Push the windscreen wiper blade to the stop until it locks into place.
› Check that the windscreen wiper blade is correctly attached. Colour coding of fuses
› Fold the windscreen wiper arm back to the windscreen. Fuse colour Maximum amperage
light brown 5
dark brown 7.5
red 10
blue 15
yellow/blue 20
white 25
green/pink 30
orange/green 40
red 50 

226 Do-it-yourself
 WARNING › Remove the plastic clip under the cover of the fuse box in the engine room
Always read and observe the warnings before completing any work in the » Fig. 242 on page 229 .
engine compartment » page 194. › Place the clip onto the respective fuse and pull the fuse out.
› Insert a new fuse.
CAUTION › Replace the bracket at the original position.
■ “Never repair” fuses, and do not replace them with fuses of a higher amper-
› Fold back the storage compartment by pressing into the secured position in
the dash panel in the direction of the arrow 2 .
age – risk of fire! This may also cause damage at other points in the electrical
system.
› Close the storage compartment.
■ If a newly inserted fuse blows again after a short time, have the electrical
Fuses in the dash panel – RHD
system checked as quickly as possible by a specialist garage.
■ A blown fuses is recognisable by the molten metal strip. Replace the faulty
fuse with a new one of the same amperage.

Note
■ We recommend always carrying replacement fuses in the vehicle. A box of
replacement fuses and bulbs can be purchased from ŠKODA Original Accesso-
ries.
■ There can be several power consuming devices for one fuse.
■ Multiple fuses may exist for a single power consuming device.

Fuses in the dash panel – LHD

Fig. 239 Storage compartment on the front passenger's side: RHD

Fig. 238  Read and observe and on page 227 first.

Storage compartment on the
driver's side: LHD On right-hand drive vehicles, the fuse box is located on the front passenger's
side behind the stowage compartment in the left-hand section of the dash
panel.
Removing the storage compartment and replacing the fuse
› Insert a screwdriver under the side cover » Fig. 239.
› Unlock the cover in the direction of the arrow 1 .
› Push the cover out in the direction of the arrow 2 .
 Read and observe and on page 227 first. › Open the storage compartment.
› Insert a screwdriver from the side into the dash panel in the direction of ar-
On left-hand drive vehicles, the fuse box is located behind the storage com- row 3 .
partment in the left-hand section of the dash panel. › Use the screwdriver to unlock the brake rod A of the storage compartment
Replacing fuses in the direction of arrow 4 .
› Open the storage compartment » page 90. › Remove the storage compartment in the direction of the arrow 5 .
› Grab hold of the storage compartment in the area of the arrows » Fig. 238. › Remove the plastic clip under the cover of the fuse box in the engine room
› Fold out the storage compartment by pulling in the direction of arrow 1 . » Fig. 242 on page 229 .
› Place the clip onto the respective fuse and pull the fuse out. 

Fuses and light bulbs 227

› Insert a new fuse. No. Consumer
› Replace the bracket at the original position. 12 Radio
Installing the storage compartment 13 Belt tensioner - driver's side
› Move the stop buffer B of the storage compartment behind the brackets C
14 Air blower for air conditioning,heating
» Fig. 239.
› Push in the storage compartment in the opposite direction of the arrow 5 . 15 Electric steering lock
› Insert the brake rod and lock it against the arrow 4 with a screwdriver. 16 Signal amplifier for telephone, telephone preinstallation
› Push in the side cover against the direction of the arrow 2 . 17 Instrument cluster
› Press the side cover fully against the direction of the arrow 1 . 18 Not assigned
› Close the storage compartment.
19 KESSY
Assignment of the fuses in the dash panel 20 Operating lever underneath the steering wheel
21 Not assigned
Fig. 240 22 Towing hitch - contact in the socket
Fuses 23 Light - right
24 Panorama roof
25 Central locking front door - left, power windows - left
26 Heated front seats
27 Music amplifier
28 Towing hitch - left light
29 CNG relay
 Read and observe and on page 227 first.
30 Not assigned
No. Consumer 31 Headlight - left
1 Not assigned 32 Parking aid (Park Assist)
2 Not assigned 33 Airbag switch for hazard warning lights
3 Not assigned TCS, ESC button, tyre control display, pressure sensor for air-condi-
4 Not assigned tioning, reverse light switch, interior mirror with automatic dim-
34 ming, START-STOP button, telephone preinstallation, control for
5 Databus heating of rear seats, sensor for air-conditioning, 230 V power
6 Alarm sensor socket, sport-sound generator
Air conditioning, heating, recipient of the wireless remote control Headlight, headlamp beam adjustment, diagnostic connector, cam-
7 35
for auxiliary heating, selector lever of the automatic transmission era, radar
8 Light switch, rain sensor, diagnostic socket 36 Headlight right
9 Haldex clutch 37 Headlight left
10 Touchscreen 38 Towing hitch - right light 
11 Heated rear seats

228 Do-it-yourself
 No. Consumer
Fig. 242
Central locking front door - right, power windows - front and rear Cover for the fuse box in the en-
39
right gine compartment: Plastic clip
40 12-Volt power socket for fuses
41 Not assigned
Central locking rear door - left, right, headlight washer system,
42
windscreen washer system
43 Visor for gas discharge bulbs, interior lighting
44 Towing hitch - contact in the socket
 Read and observe and on page 227 first.
45 Operating the seat adjustment
46 230-Volt power socket Replacing fuses
47 Rear window wiper › Press together the interlocks of the cover simultaneously in the direction of
the arrow 1 » Fig. 241.
48 Not assigned
› Remove the cover in the direction of the arrow 2 .
49 Coil on starter relay, clutch pedal switch › Replace the appropriate fuse.
50 Opening the boot lid › Place the cover on top of the fusebox.
51 Belt tensioner - front passenger side › Push in the interlocks on the cover and lock.
52 Not assigned CAUTION
53 Relay for rear window heater The cover for the fuse box in the engine compartment must always be applied
correctly. Water may get into the fuse box if the cover is not replaced properly
Fuses in the engine compartment - there is a risk of damage to the vehicle.

Assignment of fuses in the engine compartment

 Read and observe and on page 227 first.

No. Consumer
1 ESC, ABS
2 ESC, ABS
3 Engine control unit
Radiator fan, oil temperature sensor, air volume sensor, control
4 valve for fuel pressure, relay for electrical auxiliary heating, engine
Fig. 241 Removing the fuse box cover/fuses
components
Coil of the relay for the ignition system, coil of the CNG relay, en-
5
gine components
6 Brake sensor
7 Coolant pump, radiator shutter, engine components 

Fuses and light bulbs 229

 No. Consumer Change bulb for long-distance, daytime running lights and parking light
switch 232
8 Lambda probe
Change bulb for additional parking light 232
9 Ignition, glow plug system, engine components
Change bulb for fog light switch - Variant 1 232
10 Fuel pump, ignition Change bulb for fog light switch - Variant 2 233
11 Electrical auxiliary heating system Replacing the bulb for the licence plate light 233
12 Electrical auxiliary heating system Rear Light 234
13 Automatic gearbox Replacing bulbs in the rear light - Variant 1 235
14 Windscreen heater - right Replacing bulbs in the rear light - Variant 2 235
15 Horn Some manual skills are required to change a bulb. For this reason, we recom-
16 Ignition, fuel pump mend having bulbs replaced by a specialist garage or seeking other expert help
in the event of any uncertainties.
17 ABS, ESC, motor control unit, relay coil for the heated windscreen
▶ Switch off the ignition and the relevant lights before replacing a bulb.
18 Databus, battery data module
▶ Faulty bulbs must only be replaced with the same type of bulbs. The designa-
19 Windscreen wipers
tion is located on the light socket or the glass bulb.
20 Alarm
A stowage compartment for replacement bulbs is located in a plastic box in
21 Windscreen heater - left
the spare wheel or underneath the floor covering in the luggage compartment.
22 Engine control unit
We recommend having the headlight settings checked by a specialist garage
23 Starter after replacing a bulb in the low, high or fog beam.
24 Electrical auxiliary heating system
In case of failure of a xenon gas discharge lamp or an LED diode, visit a special-
31 Not assigned ist garage.
32 Not assigned
33 Not assigned WARNING
■ Always read and observe the warnings before completing any work in the
34 Haldex clutch
engine compartment » page 194.
35 Not assigned ■ Accidents can be caused if the road in front of the vehicle is not suffi-
36 Not assigned ciently illuminated and the vehicle cannot or can only be seen with difficul-
37 Aux. heating ty by other road users.
■ Bulbs H7 H8 and H15 are pressurised and may burst when changing the
38 Not assigned
bulb - risk of injury! We therefore recommended wearing gloves and safety
glasses when changing a bulb.
Bulbs ■ Do not carry out any work on the Xenon gas discharge lamps - risk of
death!
 Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects: CAUTION
Do not take hold of the glass bulb with naked fingers (even the smallest
Bulb arrangement in the headlights 231 amount of dirt reduces the working life of the light bulb). Use a clean cloth,
Replacing the low beam bulb 231 napkin, or similar. 

230 Do-it-yourself
 Note Replacing the low beam bulb
■ This Owner's Manual only describes the replacement of bulbs where it is pos-
sible to replace the bulbs on your own without any complications arising. Other
bulbs must be replaced by a specialist garage.
■ We recommend that a box of replacement bulbs always be carried in the ve-
hicle. Replacement bulbs can be purchased from ŠKODAOriginal Accessories.

Bulb arrangement in the headlights

Fig. 243
Principle sketch: Headlights

Fig. 244 Headlight with halogen bulb: Bulb for low beam

 Read and observe and on page 230 first.

› Turn the protective cap A » Fig. 243 on page 231 in direction of the arrow.
› Disconnect the connector with the light bulb in the direction of arrow 1
» Fig. 244.
 Read and observe and on page 230 first. › Remove the connector to the bulb in the direction of arrow 2 .
› Remove the connector.
The vehicle is equipped with headlights with halogen lamps or with a xenon › Insert the connector with the new bulb so that the fixing lug A » Fig. 244
discharge lamp and a halogen bulb. fits the bulb into the recess on the reflector.
Bulb arrangement » Fig. 243 › Remove the hook in the direction of arrow 3 .
A Low beam with halogen bulb or xenon gas discharge lamp › Insert the protective cap A » Fig. 243 on page 231 and turn it opposite to the
direction of the arrow.
B Main beam, daytime running lights and parking lights/additional parking
light

Fuses and light bulbs 231

Change bulb for long-distance, daytime running lights and parking › Grasp the lamp socket at the places marked by arrows.
light switch › Remove the faulty bulb from the holder in the direction of the arrow 2 .
› Insert a new bulb in the bulb holder up to the stop.
› Replace the bulb holder in the headlamp with the bulb.
Fig. 245 › Insert the protective cap B » Fig. 243 on page 231 and turn it in the direction
Bulbs for main beam, daytime opposite to the arrow.
running lights, and parking light
Change bulb for fog light switch - Variant 1

 Read and observe and on page 230 first.

› Turn the protective cap B » Fig. 243 on page 231 in direction of the arrow.
› Pull the holder until it stops in the arrow direction 1 » Fig. 245.
› Remove the holder in the direction of the arrow 2 .
› Insert the bulb holder with the new bulb and turn opposite to arrow direction
1 as far as the stop.
› Insert the protective cap B » Fig. 243 on page 231 and turn it in the direction
opposite to the arrow.

Change bulb for additional parking light

Fig. 247 Remove the fog lamp / bulb change - Version 1

 Read and observe and on page 230 first.

Remove the protective grille and headlight

› Insert in opening A » Fig. 247 the clamps for removing the full wheel covers
» page 212, Vehicle tool kit.
Fig. 246 Headlights with Xenon light: Bulb for additional parking light
› Loosen the protective grille by pulling the hook in the direction of arrow 1 .
 Read and observe and on page 230 first. › Remove the protective grille in the direction of the arrow 2 .
› Unscrew the screws B with the screwdriver from the tool kit.
› Turn the protective cap B » Fig. 243 on page 231 in direction of the arrow. › With the key 2 » page 212, Vehicle tool kit unlock the locking C in direction
› Remove the bulb holder with the bulb by jiggling it out in the direction of the of arrow 3 .
arrow 1 » Fig. 246. › Remove the headlight in the direction of arrow 4 . 

232 Do-it-yourself
Replacing the light bulb  Read and observe and on page 230 first.
› Press the latch on the connector in the direction of arrow 5 .
› Remove the key in the direction of the arrow 6 . Remove cover and headlight
› Pull the lamp holder until it stops in the arrow direction 7 . › Insert in opening A » Fig. 248 the clamps for removing the full wheel covers
› Remove the lamp holder in the direction of the arrow 8 . » page 212, Vehicle tool kit.
› Insert the new bulb into the headlight and turn counter to the direction of › Remove the cover by pulling the hook in the direction of arrow 1 .
arrow 7 as far as the stop. › Unscrew the screws B with the screwdriver from the tool kit.
› Fit the connector. › Remove the headlight in the direction of arrow 2 .
› Remove the headlight in the direction of arrow 3 .
Refit the headlight and grille
› Replace the fog light by inserting it in the opposite direction of the arrow 4 Replacing the light bulb
» Fig. 247 and tighten. › Press the latch on the connector in the direction of arrow 4 .
› Insert the protective grille and carefully press it in. › Remove the key in the direction of the arrow 5 .
The protective grille must engage firmly.
› Pull the lamp holder until it stops in the arrow direction 6 .
› Remove the lamp holder in the direction of the arrow 7 .
› Insert the new bulb into the headlight and turn counter to the direction of
Change bulb for fog light switch - Variant 2 arrow 6 as far as the stop.
› Fit the connector.
Refitting the headlight and grille
› Replace the fog light by inserting it in the opposite direction of the arrow 3
» Fig. 248 and tighten.
› Replace the cover and press in gently.
The cover must engage securely.

Replacing the bulb for the licence plate light

Fig. 248 Remove the fog lamp / bulb change - Version 2 Fig. 249 Remove the number plate light/replace the bulb

 Read and observe and on page 230 first.

› Open the boot lid. 

Fuses and light bulbs 233

› Push in the lamp in the direction of the arrow 1 » Fig. 249. › Insert into opening A 1)» Fig. 250 the clamps for removing the full wheel cov-
ers » page 212, Vehicle tool kit .
The lamp comes loose.
› Remove the cover by pulling the hook in the direction of arrow 1 .
› Swivel out the lamp in the direction of the arrow 2 and remove it. › Unscrew the screws B with the key from the tool kit.
› Remove the faulty bulb from the holder in the direction of the arrow 3. › Grasp the light and carefully remove with shaky movements in the direction
› Insert a new bulb into the holder. of arrow 2 .
› Reinsert the lamp in the opposite direction to the arrow 1 . › Press together the interlocks on the connector 2) in the direction of arrow 3 .
› Push on the light until the spring clicks into place. › Carefully remove the connector from the tail lamp assembly in the direction
Check that the light is securely inserted. of the arrow 4 .
Fitting
Rear Light › Insert the bulb holder in the light.
The locks on the plug must be inserted securely.
› Insert the lamp with the pin A » Fig. 251 on page 235 into the recesses C
» Fig. 250 in the body.
› Carefully push the cover in » .
› Screw the tail lamp into place and install the cover.
The cover must engage securely.
CAUTION
■ Ensure that the cable bundle does not become pinched between the body
and the lamp when it is being refitted – risk of damage to the electrical instal-
lation and risk of water ingress.
■ If you are not sure whether the cable bundle has become pinched, we recom-
mend that you have the light connection checked by a specialist garage.
■ Ensure that the vehicle paintwork and the tail lamp are not damaged when
removing and installing the tail lamp.

Fig. 250 Remove light / pull out connector

 Read and observe and on page 230 first.

Removing
› Open the boot lid.

1) The position of the opening may vary depending on the vehicle model.
2) The design of the plug can vary depending on the vehicle equipment.

234 Do-it-yourself
Replacing bulbs in the rear light - Variant 1 › Turn the respective light bulb » Fig. 252 until it stops counter-clockwise and
remove it from the bulb holder.
› Insert a new bulb into the holder and turn in a clockwise direction to the
stop.
› Insert the bulb holder in the tail lamp assembly.
› Screw on the lamp holder carefully.
Replacing bulbs in the rear light - Variant 2

Fig. 251 Outer part of the light: Basic light/light with LED diodes

Fig. 253 Outer part of the light: Basic light/light with LED diodes

 Read and observe and on page 230 first.

Outer part of the lamp

› Turn the socket with the bulb B in the direction of 1 » Fig. 253.
Fig. 252 Inner part of the light: Basic light/light with LED diodes › Remove the socket with the bulb from the lamp housing in the direction of
arrow 2 .
 Read and observe and on page 230 first. › Push the faulty bulb into the holder, turn in anti -clockwise direction up to
the stop and remove.
Outer part of the lamp › Insert a new bulb into the holder and turn in a clockwise direction to the
› Turn the bulb holder B » Fig. 251 in an anti-clockwise direction and remove stop.
it from the lamp housing. › Reinsert the holder with the bulb into the lamp housing and turn in the op-
› Push the faulty bulb into the holder, turn in anti -clockwise direction up to posite direction of the arrow 1 to the stop.
the stop and remove.
› Insert a new bulb into the holder and turn in a clockwise direction to the
stop.
› Replace the holder with the bulb into the lamp housing and turn in a clock-
wise direction to the stop.
Inner part of the light
› Unscrew the lamp holder » Fig. 251 with the screwdriver from the car tool kit,
and remove the lamp holder from the light assembly.

Fuses and light bulbs 235

 Technical data Vehicle characteristics

Technical data
Basic vehicle data

 Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Vehicle characteristics 236
Operating weight 237
Payload 238 Fig. 254 Vehicle data sticker/type plate
Measurement of fuel consumption and CO2 emissions according to ECE
Regulations and EU Directives 239 Vehicle data sticker
Dimensions - Octavia 240 The vehicle data sticker » Fig. 254 -  is located on the base of the luggage
Dimensions - Octavia estate 241 compartment and is also fixed into the service schedule.
Track gauge front/rear 242 The vehicle data sticker contains the following data.
Departure angle 243 1 Vehicle identification number (VIN)
The details given in the vehicle's technical documentation always take prece- 2 Vehicle type
dence over the details in the Owner's Manual. 3 Gearbox code/paint number/interior equipment/engine output/engine
code
The listed performance values were determined without performance-reduc-
4 Partial vehicle description
ing equipment, e.g. air conditioning system.
5 Approved tyre diameter in inches1)
The values given have been determined in accordance with regulations and in
conditions prescribed by legal or technical provisions for determining the oper- The approved tyres and rim sizes for your vehicle are listed in the vehicle's
ating and technical data of vehicles. technical documentation (the so called COC document) and this also states the
declaration of conformity.
The values listed are for the basic model without optional equipment.
Type plate
The type plate » Fig. 254 -  is located at the bottom of the B-pillar on the
right driver's side.
The type plate contains the following data.
6 Manufacturer
7 Vehicle identification number (VIN)
8 Maximum permissible gross weight
9 Maximum permissible towed weight (towing vehicle and trailer) 

1) Only valid for some countries.

236 Technical data

10 Maximum permissible front axle load Operating weight - Octavia
11 Maximum permissible rear axle load Engine Transmission Operating weight (kg)
Vehicle identification number (VIN) 1.2 l/63 kW TSI MG 1225
The vehicle identification number - VIN (vehicle body number) is stamped into MG 1230
the engine compartment on the right hand suspension strut dome. This num- 1.2 l/81 kW TSI
DSG 1255
ber is also located on a sign on the lower left hand edge below the windscreen
(together with a VIN bar code), and on the type plate. 1.4 l/81 kW TSI G-TEC MG 1394
The VIN number can also be displayed in the Infotainment » Owner´s Manual MG (EU5) 1250
Infotainment, chapter CAR - vehicle settings. MG (EU6) 1255
1.4 l/110 kW TSI
DSG (EU4, EU5) 1265
Engine number
The engine number (three-digit identifier and serial number) is stamped on the DSG (EU6) 1270
engine block. MG 1210
1.6 l/81 kW MPI
Supplementary Information (applies to Russia) AG 1250
The full type approval number of the means of transport is indicated in the MG (EU4, EU5) 1315
registration documents, field 17. MG (EU6) 1320
Maximum permissible trailer weight 1.8 l/132 kW TSI DSG 4x4 1428
The listed maximum allowable trailer weight is only valid for altitudes up to DSG (EU4, EU5) 1330
1000 m above sea level. DSG (EU6) 1335
The engine output falls as the height increases, as does the ability to climb. 1.6 l/66 kW TDI CR MG 1305
Therefore, for every additional 1000 m in height (or part), the maximum per-
MG5 1305
missible towed weight must be reduced by 10%.
MG6 1280
The towed weight is made up of the actual weights of the loaded towing vehi- 1.6 l/81 kW TDI CR
MG 4x4 1413
cle and the loaded trailer.
DSG 1320
WARNING MG 1325
Do not exceed the specified maximum permissible weights – risk of acci- 2.0 l/105 kW TDI CR
DSG 1345
dent and damage!
MG 1332
2.0 l/110 kW TDI CR MG 4x4 1438
Operating weight DSG 1352
This value represents the minimum operating weight without additional 2.0 l/135 kW TDI CR DSG 4x4 1463
weight-increasing equipment such as air conditioning system, spare wheel, or
trailer hitch. Operating weight - Octavia RS

The specified operating weight is for orientation purposes only. Engine Transmission Operating weight (kg)
MG 1420
The operating weight also contains the weight of the driver (75 kg), the weight 2.0 l/162 kW TSI
of the operating fluids, the tool kit, and a fuel tank filled to 90 % capacity. DSG 1440 

Technical data 237

Engine Transmission Operating weight (kg) Engine Transmission Operating weight (kg)
MG 1445 MG 1354
2.0 l/169 kW TSI
DSG 1465 2.0 l/110 kW TDI CR MG 4x4 1458
MG 1445 DSG 1374
2.0 l/135 kW TDI CR DSG 1465 2.0 l/135 kW TDI CR DSG 4x4 1485
DSG 4x4 1550 Operating weight - Octavia Combi RS
Warning triangle – Octavia Combi Engine Transmission Operating weight (kg)
Engine Transmission Operating weight (kg) MG 1442
2.0 l/162 kW TSI
1.2 l/63 kW TSI MG 1247 DSG 1462
MG 1252 MG 1467
1.2 l/81 kW TSI 2.0 l/169 kW TSI
DSG 1277 DSG 1487
1.4 l/81 kW TSI G-TEC MG 1416 MG 1467
MG (EU5) 1272 2.0 l/135 kW TDI CR DSG 1487
MG (EU6) 1277 DSG 4x4 1572
1.4 l/110 kW TSI
DSG (EU4, EU5) 1287 Operating weight - Octavia Combi Scout
DSG (EU6) 1292
Engine Transmission Operating weight (kg)
MG 1232
1.6 l/81 kW MPI 1.8 l/132 kW TSI DSG 4x4 1522
AG 1272
2.0 l/110 kW TDI CR MG 4x4 1526
MG (EU4, EU5) 1337
2.0 l/135 kW TDI CR DSG 4x4 1559
MG (EU6) 1342
1.8 l/132 kW TSI DSG 4x4 1450 Note
DSG (EU4, EU5) 1352 If required, you can find out the precise weight of your vehicle at a specialist
DSG (EU6) 1357 garage.
1.6 l/66 kW TDI CR MG 1327
Payload
MG5 1327
MG6 1280 It is possible to calculate the approximate maximum payload from the differ-
1.6 l/81 kW TDI CR ence between the permissible total weight and the operating weight.
MG 4x4 1435
DSG 1342 The payload consists of the following weights.
▶ The weight of the passengers.
MG 1347 ▶ The weight of all items of luggage and other loads.
2.0 l/105 kW TDI CR
DSG 1367 ▶ The weight of the roof, including the roof rack system.
▶ The weight of the equipment that is excluded from the operating weight.
▶ The trailer drawbar load with trailer operation (max. 75 kg or 80 kg for vehi-
cles with 4-wheel drive or 56 kg for G-TEC vehicles).

238 Technical data

Measurement of fuel consumption and CO2 emissions according to
ECE Regulations and EU Directives
The data on fuel consumption and CO2 emissions were not available at the
time of going to press.
The data on fuel consumption and CO2 emissions are given on the ŠKODA
websites or in the sales and technical vehicle documentation.
The measurement of the intra-urban cycle begins with a cold start of the en-
gine. Afterwards urban driving is simulated.
In the extra-urban driving cycle, the vehicle is accelerated and decelerated in
all gears, corresponding to daily routine driving conditions. The driving speed
varies between 0 and 120 km/h.
The calculation of the combined fuel consumption considers a weighting of
about 37 % for the intra-urban cycle and 63 % for the extra-urban cycle.

Note
■ The fuel consumption and emission levels given on the ŠKODA websites or in
the commercial and technical vehicle documentation have been established in
accordance with rules and under conditions that are set out by legal or techni-
cal rules for the determination of operational and technical data of motor vehi-
cles.
■ Depending on the extent of the equipment, the driving style, traffic condi-
tions, weather influences and vehicle condition, consumption values can in
practice result in fuel economy figures in the use of the vehicle that differ from
the fuel consumption values listed on the ŠKODA websites or in the commer-
cial and technical vehicle documentation.

Technical data 239

 Dimensions - Octavia

Fig. 255 Vehicle dimensions

Vehicle dimensions for operating weight without driver (in mm)

» Fig. 25
Specification Octavia Octavia 4x4 Octavia RS
5
Basic dimensions 1461a)/1458b) 1460a)/1459b) 1449/1464c)
A Height Vehicles with off-road package 1476a)/1474b) 1475a)/1474b) -
Vehicles with SPORT package 1446a)/1444b) - -
B Front track » page 242
C Width 1814 1814 1814
D Rear track » page 242
E Width including exterior mirror 2017 2017 2017
Basic dimensions 140 138 128/142c)
F Clearance Vehicles with off-road package 155 154 -
Vehicles with SPORT package 125 - -
Basic dimensions 2686 2680 2680
G Wheel base Vehicles with 1.8 l/132 kW TSI engine 2680 - -
G-TEC vehicles 2680 - -
H Length 4659 4659 4685
a) Valid for vehicles with 15" brakes
b) Valid for vehicles with 16" brakes
c) Only valid for some countries.

240 Technical data

 Dimensions - Octavia estate

Fig. 256 Vehicle dimensions

Vehicle dimensions for operating weight without driver (in mm)

OCTAVIA Estate OCTAVIA Estate Octavia Combi
» Fig. 256 Specification Octavia Estate
4x4 RS Scout
Basic dimensions 1465a)/1463b) 1465a)/1463b) 1452/1468c) 1531
A Height Vehicles with off-road package 1480a)/1478b) 1480a)/1478b) - -
Vehicles with SPORT package 1450a)/1448b) - - -
B Front track » page 242
C Width 1814 1814 1814 1814
D Rear track » page 242
E Width including exterior mirror 2017 2017 2017 2017
Basic dimensions 140 139 127/142c) 171
F Clearance Vehicles with off-road package 155 154 -
Vehicles with SPORT package 125 - - -
Basic dimensions 2686 2680 2680 2679
G Wheel base Vehicles with 1.8 l/132 kW TSI engine 2680 - - -
G-TEC vehicles 2680 - - -
H Length 4659 4659 4685 4685
a) Valid for vehicles with 15" brakes
b) Valid for vehicles with 16" brakes
c) Only valid for some countries.

Technical data 241

 Track gauge front/rear
Engine Front track Rear track
1.2 l/63 kW TSI 1549 1520
1.2 l/81 kW TSI 1549 1520
1.4 l/81 kW TSI G-TEC 1543 1515
1.4 l/110 kW TSI 1543 1514
1.6 l/81 kW MPI 1549 1520
1.8 l/132 kW TSI 1543/1538a) 1512/1506a)
2.0 l/162 kW TSI 1535 1506
2.0 l/169 kW TSI 1535 1506
1.6 l/66 kW TDI CR 1549 1520
1.6 l/81 kW TDI CR 1549 1520/1518b)
2.0 l/105 kW TDI CR 1543 1514
2.0 l/110 kW TDI CR 1543/1538a) 1514/1506a)/1512b)
2.0 l/135 kW TDI CR 1535/1538a)/1543b) 1506/1512b)
a) Applies to Octavia Combi Scout vehicles.
b) Applies to Octavia 4x4/Octavia Combi 4x4 vehicles.

242 Technical data

 Departure angle
Angle » Fig. 257
A Overhang angle, front
B Overhang angle, rear

Overhang angle
The values shown indicate the maximum incline of an embankment, up which
the vehicle can drive at a slow speed without collision of the bumper or under-
body.
The values listed correspond to the maximum axle load, front or back.

Fig. 257 Departure angle: Octavia/Octavia Combi

Departure angle (°) - Octavia

Octavia Octavia 4x4 Octavia RS
» Fig. 257
A B A B A B
Basic dimension 14 12.3 14.1 12.4 14.1a) 12.8a)
Vehicles with off-road package 15.1 13 15.3 12.2 - -
Vehicles with SPORT package 12.9 12.5 - - 12.9 12.4
a) Only valid for some countries.

Departure angle (°) - Octavia Combi

Octavia Estate OCTAVIA Estate 4x4 OCTAVIA Estate RS Octavia Combi Scout
» Fig. 257
A B A B A B A B
Basic dimension 13.9 12.2 14.2 12.5 14.1a) 12.6a) - -
Vehicles with off-road package 14.9 13.2 15.3 12.4 - - 16.7 13.8
Vehicles with SPORT package 12.8 12.4 - - 12.8 12.3 - -
a) Only valid for some countries.

Technical data 243

 Vehicle-specific information depending on engine type

 Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects: 2.0 l/162 kW TSI engine 246
1.2 ltr. / 63 kW TSI engine 244 2.0 ltr./169 kW TSI engine 246
1.2 ltr. / 81 kW TSI engine 244 1.6 ltr./66 kW TDI CR engine 247
1.4 l/81 kW TSI G-TEC engine 245 1.6 ltr./81 kW TDI CR engine 247
1.4 ltr./110 kW TSI engine 245 2.0 l/105 kW TDI CR engine 247
1.6 l/81 kW MPI engine 245 2.0 ltr./110 kW TDI CR engine 248
1.8 l/132 kW TSI engine 246 2.0 ltr./135 kW TDI CR engine 248

The specified values have been determined in accordance with rules and under conditions set out by legal or technical requirements for determining operational
and technical data for motor vehicles.
The emissions standard is detailed in the technical vehicle documentation as well as in the certificate of conformity (COC document), which can be obtained from
a ŠKODA partnera).
a) Only valid for some countries and some models.

1.2 ltr. / 63 kW TSI engine

Output (kW/rpm) 63/4300-5300
Maximum torque (Nm at rpm) 160/1400-3500
Number of cylinders/displacement (cm3) 4/1197
Body Octavia Octavia Estate
Transmission MG MG
Top speed (km/h) 181 178
Acceleration 0-100 km/h (s) 12 12.2

1.2 ltr. / 81 kW TSI engine

Output (kW/rpm) 81/4600-5600
Maximum torque (Nm at rpm) 175/1400-4000
Number of cylinders/displacement (cm3) 4/1197
Body Octavia Octavia Estate
Transmission MG DSG MG DSG
Top speed (km/h) 199 199 196 196
Acceleration 0-100 km/h (s) 10.1 10.2 10.3 10.4

244 Technical data

1.4 l/81 kW TSI G-TEC engine
Output (kW/rpm) 81/4800-6000
Maximum torque (Nm at rpm) 200/1500-3500
Number of cylinders/displacement (cm3) 4/1395
Body Octavia Octavia Estate
Transmission MG MG
Top speed (km/h) 195 193
Acceleration 0-100 km/h (s) 10.9 11

1.4 ltr./110 kW TSI engine

Output (kW/rpm) 110/5000-6000
Maximum torque (Nm at rpm) 250/1500-3500
Number of cylinders/displacement (cm3) 4/1395
Body Octavia Octavia Estate
Transmission MG DSG MG DSG
Top speed (km/h) 219 219 216 216
Acceleration 0-100 km/h (s) 8.1 8.2 8.2 8.3

1.6 l/81 kW MPI engine

Output (kW/rpm) 81/5800
Maximum torque (Nm at rpm) 155/3800-4000
Number of cylinders/displacement (cm3) 4/1598
Body Octavia Octavia Estate
Transmission MG AG MG AG
Top speed (km/h) 192 190 191 188
Acceleration 0-100 km/h (s) 10.6 12 10.8 12.2

Technical data 245

 1.8 l/132 kW TSI engine
Output (kW/rpm) 132/5100-6200 (132/4500-6200)a)
Maximum torque (Nm at rpm) 250/1250-5000 (280/1350-4500)a)
Number of cylinders/displacement (cm3) 4/1798
Body Octavia Octavia Estate
DSG 4x4
Transmission MG DSG DSG 4x4 MG DSG DSG 4x4
Scout
Top speed (km/h) 231 231 229 229 229 227 216
Acceleration 0-100 km/h (s) 7.3 7.4 7.4 7.4 7.5 7.5 7.8
a) Applies to 4x4 vehicles.

2.0 l/162 kW TSI engine

Output (kW/rpm) 162/4500-6200
Maximum torque (Nm at rpm) 350/1500-4400
Number of cylinders/displacement (cm3) 4/1984
Body Octavia RS Octavia Combi RS
Transmission MG DSG MG DSG
Top speed (km/h) 248 245 244 242
Acceleration 0-100 km/h (s) 6.8 6.9 6.9 7.1

2.0 ltr./169 kW TSI engine

Output (kW/rpm) 169/4700-6200
Maximum torque (Nm at rpm) 350/1500-4600
Number of cylinders/displacement (cm3) 4/1984
Body Octavia RS Octavia Combi RS
Transmission MG DSG MG DSG
Top speed (km/h) 250 249 247 245
Acceleration 0-100 km/h (s) 6.7 6.8 6.8 7

246 Technical data

1.6 ltr./66 kW TDI CR engine
Output (kW/rpm) 66/2750-4800
Maximum torque (Nm at rpm) 230/1400-2700
Number of cylinders/displacement (cm3) 4/1598
Body Octavia Octavia Estate
Transmission MG MG
Top speed (km/h) 186 183
Acceleration 0-100 km/h (s) 12.2 12.3

1.6 ltr./81 kW TDI CR engine

Output (kW/rpm) 81/3200-4000
Maximum torque (Nm at rpm) 250/1500-3000
Number of cylinders/displacement (cm3) 4/1598
Body Octavia Octavia Estate
Transmission MG5 MG6 MG 4x4 DSG MG5 MG6 MG 4x4 DSG
Top speed (km/h) 197 206 193 197 194 204 191 194
Acceleration 0-100 km/h (s) 10.6 10.6 11.3 10.7 10.8 10.7 11.5 10.9

2.0 l/105 kW TDI CR engine

Output (kW/rpm) 105/3500-4000
Maximum torque (Nm at rpm) 320/1750-3000
Number of cylinders/displacement (cm3) 4/1968
Body Octavia Octavia Estate
Transmission MG DSG MG DSG
Top speed (km/h) 215 212 213 210
Acceleration 0-100 km/h (s) 8.7 8.9 8.7 9

Technical data 247

 2.0 ltr./110 kW TDI CR engine
Output (kW/rpm) 110/3500-4000
Maximum torque (Nm at rpm) 320/1750-3000 (340/1750-3000)a)
Number of cylinders/displacement (cm3) 4/1968
Body Octavia Octavia Estate
MG 4x4
Transmission MG MG 4x4 DSG MG MG 4x4 DSG
Scout
Top speed (km/h) 218 215 215 216 213 207 213
Acceleration 0-100 km/h (s) 8.5/8.4a) 8.5 8.6/8.5a) 8.6/8.5a) 8.6 9.1 8.7/8.6a)
a) Applies to cars with the EU6 emission standard.

2.0 ltr./135 kW TDI CR engine

Output (kW/rpm) 135/3500-4000
Maximum torque (Nm at rpm) 380/1750-3250
Number of cylinders/displacement (cm3) 4/1968
Body Octavia Octavia Estate
MG DSG DSG 4x4 MG DSG DSG 4x4 DSG 4x4
Transmission DSG 4x4 DSG 4x4
RS RS RS RS RS Scout RS
Top speed (km/h) 232 230 228 228 230 228 226 219 224
Acceleration 0-100 km/h (s) 7.9 7.9 7.1 7.6 8 8 7.2 7.8 7.7

248 Technical data

 Adjusting the seats 8 Anti-theft wheel bolts 214
Index
Adjusting the seats electronically 82 Armrest
Adjustment Front 86
A
Headlight beam 68 Rear 86
abroad Advance warning/emergency braking artificial leather 187
lead-free petrol 190 Warning light 40 Ashtray 92
Abroad AHL Assembling the
Headlights 74 see xenon headlight 70 bar ball, Step 1 169
ABS Air-conditioning system bar ball, Step 2 169
Operation 136 Air outlet vents 116 Assistance systems
Warning light 34 Airbag 14 OFF ROAD-mode 138
ACC 150 Deactivating 19 Assistance Systems
Control symbol 32 Deactivating the front passenger airbag 19 High-beam assistant 71
Warning lights 40 Deployment 15 Assist systems 135
Acceptance and recycling of used vehicles 181 Front airbag 15 Auto-check control 40
Accessories 178 Head airbag 18 Automatic driving lamp control 70
Adaptive cruise control Knee airbag 17
Automatic gearbox 129
automatic stop-start 151 Modifications and damage to the airbag system 180
Selector lever-emergency unlocking 225
Information messages 155 Side airbag 17
Selector lever lock 130
Operation 150 Warning light 35
Starting-off and driving 131
Operation Overview 152 Airbag system 14 Tiptronic 130
Set/change the desired speed. 153 Air conditioning 112 Using the selector lever 129
special driving conditions 154 Air distribution control 115 Automatic gearbox modes 129
Start control 152 Climatronic 114
Stop/resume control 152 Automatic load deactivation 204
Manual air conditioning 113
Adaptive Cruise Control 150 automatic transmission
Air distribution control 115
Radar sensor 135 selector lever lock defect 130
Air outlet vents 116
Set the clearance level 153 Automatic transmission
Alarm Kickdown 131
Warning lights 40 Enable/disable 58
Adaptive headlight Launch control 131
Switch off 58 Malfunction 37
see xenon headlight 70 Trailer 177 Selector lever lock 130
Adjust Triggering 58 Warning light 37
Auxiliary heating (auxiliary heating and ventila- Alcantara Warning messages 37
tion) 118 cleaning 187 AUX 99
Adjusting Anodized parts
Exterior mirrors 80 Auxiliary heating (auxiliary heating and ventila-
Refer to vehicle maintenance 184 tion) 117
head restraints 82 Anti-lock braking system (ABS) 136
seats 82 Adjust 118
Anti-theft alarm system Switching on/off 118
Steering wheel 9
Enable/disable 58 Auxiliary heating (heating and ventilation)
the seats electronically 82
Trailer 177 Radio remote control 119

Index 249
Avoiding damage to your vehicle 134 Brakes bulb for the parking light 232
Brake booster 127 bulb in the rear light - Version 1 235
B Brake fluid 200 bulb in the rear light - Version 2 235
Bags Braking and stabilisation systems 135 daytime running light bulb 232
on the backs of the front seats 96 Handbrake 127 light bulb in tail light 234
Running-in 132 Changing
Ball head
Check fitting 170 Brakes and parking 126 Engine oil 197
Ready position 168 Brake system 135 Wheels 213
Ball rod Braking Changing a wheel
Ready position 168 Information on braking 126 Follow-up tasks 216
Bulbs Preparation 213
Battery
In the remote control key 223 Replacing 230 Changing wheels
Buttons in the doors Wheel removal and fix 216
Belts 11
electric window lifters 62 Charging a vehicle battery 203
Belt tensioners 13
Check
Bonnet
C Fit ball head properly 170
Closing 195
Opening 195 Camera Checking
Lens care 185 Battery electrolyte level 202
Boot
Camera lens Brake fluid 200
Class N1 vehicles 107
care 185 Coolant 199
See Boot lid 59
Engine oil 198
Boot lid Car computer
Oil level 198
automatic locking 59 see multifunction display 41
Windscreen washer fluid 196
Closing 59 Care and maintenance 178
Checks
Opening 59 Cargo element 106 Statutory checks 178
Brake Caring for the vehicle exterior Children and safety 20
information messages 32 Towing hitch 186
warning light 32 Child safety
Car park 128 Side airbag 22
Brake Assist (HBA) 137 Car park ticket holder 90 Child safety lock 57
Brake booster 127 Carrier Child safety seat
brake fluid Roof rack 110 Use of child safety seats 22
specification 201 Cavity protection 185 Child seat
Brake fluid 200 Central locking 53 Classification 22
Checking 200 Problems 57 ISOFIX 23
information messages 32 Central locking button 55 on the front passenger seat 21
Brake linings Change TOP TETHER 25
warning light 36 bulb for additional parking light 232 Use of ISOFIX child seats 24
Brake pedal (automatic transmission) bulb for fog lights - Version 1 232 Chrome parts
Warning light 37 bulb for fog lights - Version 2 233 Refer to vehicle maintenance 184
bulb for high beam 232 Cigarette lighter 92

250 Index
Clean Climatronic CORNER
Anodized parts 184 air distribution control 115 see Headlights with CORNER function 73
Chrome parts 184 Automatic operation 115 Correct routing of seat belt
Cleaning Operating elements 114 12
Alcantara 187 Clothes hook 96 Correct seated position 8
and maintaining belts 188 CNG 193 Front passenger 10
artificial leather 187 Gas leak 193 Rear seats 10
headlight glasses 185 in a traffic accident 193 Correct seat position
materials 187 Natural gas reserve display 30 Driver 9
natural leather 187 refuelling 192 Counter for distance driven 30
plastic parts 184 Refuelling 192 Crew Protect Assist 160
seats covers of the electrically heated seats 188 Regular checks 193
cruise control
wheels 185 Sticker 193
operation 148
Cleaning safety Warning light 37
operation Description 149
belt 188 Cockpit
Cruise control system
Cleaning seat 12-Volt power outlet 93
Warning light 36
covers 188 Ashtray 92
Cruise Control System 148
Cleaning the interior Cigarette lighter 92
General view 27 Cup holders 91
artificial leather 187
Seat covers 188 Lighting 74
storage compartments 89 D
Cleaning the vehicle exterior
Camera lens 185 useful equipment 89 DAY LIGHT
Cavity protection 185 COMING HOME 73 see Daylight running lights 68
Decorative films 183 compartments 89 Daylight running lights 68
Door locking cylinder 185 Component protection 180 De-icing
Headlight glasses 185 Components of the puncture repair kit 217 windows 184
Protective films 183 Compressed natural gas De-icing the windscreen and rear window 76
Under-body protection 186 see CNG 193 Deactivating an airbag 19
wheels 185 Decorative films 183
Computer
Windows and external mirrors 184
see multifunction display 41 Delayed locking of the boot lid
Cleaning vehicle 181 see boot lid 59
Convenience operation
Cleaning vehicle exterior 182 sliding / tilting roof 65 Departure angle 243
Anodized parts 184 Window 64 Diesel
Chrome parts 184
convenience turn signal 69 refer to Fuel 191
Plastic parts 184
Coolant 198 Diesel fuel
Rubber seals 184
Checking 199 Operation in winter 191
Vehicle paint work 183
Replenishing 200 Diesel particulate filter 38
Wiper blades 186
Temperature gauge 29 information messages 38
Clean interior
Warning light 37 Digital Clock 31
Safety belt 188
Warning messages 37 Dipstick 198

Index 251
Disconnecting and reconnecting Economical driving Engine
vehicle battery 203 Tips 132 Running-in 132
Display 29 EDL 137 Warning messages 37
Compass points 49 Electrical boot lid Engine compartment 194
Coolant temperature 29 set the top position of the lid 61 Brake fluid 200
Gear changes 41 Electric boot lid Overview 196
Natural gas reserve 30 Force limit 60 Vehicle battery 201
Petrol / Diesel reserve 30 Manual operation 60 Engine number 236
Service interval 49 Electric luggage compartment lid engine oil
Disposal Malfunctions 61 specification 197
Acceptance and recycling of used vehicles 181 Operating 60 Engine oil 197
Distance driven 30 Electric window lifter 64 Changing 197
Distance warning Window operation malfunctions 64 Checking 198
Warning light 40 Electric window lifters 62 Replenishing 198
Door Buttons in the driver's door 62 Warning light 38
Child safety lock 57 Electronic differential lock (EDL, XDS) 137 EPC
Closing 57 Electronic immobilizer 120 Warning light 35
Emergency locking 224 ESC
emergency
Emergency locking the driver's door 224 Operation 136
replace battery in the remote control 223
Opening 57 Warning light 34
Emergency
Door warning 40 ESC Sport 136
Changing a wheel 213
double hooks 103 Hazard warning light system 73 Estate instrument
Drive Jump-starting 219 Natural gas reserve display 30
Driving through water 134 Locking the door without a locking cylinder 224 Estate Instrument panel
DriveGreen 133 Locking the driver's door 224 Petrol / Diesel reserve display 30
Driver Steering Recommendation (DSR) 137 Selector lever-unlocking 225 Exhaust inspection system
Driving Switch off the engine by pressing a button 123 Warning light 34
Emissions 239 Towing the using the tow hitch 222
Fuel consumption 239 Towing the vehicle 220 F
through water 134 Tyre repair 217 Fastening elements 101
Driving mode 157 Unlocking the driver's door 224
Fatigue detection 164
driving mode select emergency equipment Function 164
Normal mode 157 reflective vest 211 Information messages 165
Driving Mode Selection 157 Emergency equipment Films 183
DSR 137 Fire extinguisher 212
Fire extinguisher 212
First aid kit 211
Jack 212 First aid kit 211
E Floor covering
Vehicle tool kit 212
ECO-TIP 49 Warning triangle 211 Fixing 103
Eco-tips 49 Emissions 239 in the luggage compartment 103

252 Index
Fog lights 72 Plastic clip 229 Exterior mirrors 80
Warning light 36 Replacing 226 Seats 85
Fold in passenger's mirror 80 HHC 137
Footmats 128 G High-beam assistant 71
see footmats 128 Gear change High beam assistant
Force limit Gear recommendation 41 Warning light 39
Electric boot lid 60 Information on the selected gear 41 Hill Start Assist (HHC) 137
Power windows 63 Gear changing Hitch 167
Sliding/tilting roof 65 Gear stick 128 Drawback load 167
Front airbag 15 General view Hook 103
Front Assist 155 Cockpit 27 Horn 27
Disable/enable 156 Genuine parts 179
Distance warning 156 Glasses compartment 95 I
Information messages 157 Glow plug system
Operation 155 Ice scrapers 184
Warning light 34 Ignition lock 121
Radar sensor 135
Warning and automatic braking 156 Immobilizer 120
H
Warning light 40 Individual settings
Front door warning light 75 Handbrake 127 Locking 56
Warning light 32 Unlocking 56
fuel
lead-free petrol 190 Hazard warning light system 73 Inertia reel 13
Fuel 189 HBA 137 Information system 40
CNG 193 Head airbag 18 Compass point display 49
Diesel 191 Headlight cleaning system Door warning 40
Natural gas reserve display 30 Headlight cleaning system 78 Eco-tips 49
Petrol / Diesel reserve display 30 Headlights Gear recommendation 41
refer to Fuel 189 Bulb arrangement 231 Lap timer 48
Refuelling 189 Driving abroad 74 MAXI DOT display 44
Refuelling - natural gas 192 Headlight cleaning system 78 Multifunction display 41
Warning light 36 Headlights with CORNER function 73 operation 42
Fuel consumption 239 Headrest Service interval display 49
Fuel filter Removing and installing 83 Stop watch 48
Warning messages 39 Head restraints 82 Information system operation 42
Fuel reserve Adjust height 82 Infotainment 4
Warning light 36 Heater Instrument cluster 28
Fuses Windscreen and rear window 76 Auto-check control 40
Assignment 226 Heating 112 Counter for distance driven 30
Assignment of fuses in the dash panel 228 Air distribution control 115 Display 29
Colour coding 226 Controls 113 Overview 28
Fuse assignment in the engine compartment 229 Revolutions counter 29

Index 253
 Temperature gauge 29 Lane Assist Main beam 69
Warning lights 31 see Lane Departure Warning 160 Parking lights 68, 74
Interior care 186 Warning light 36 Switching on and off 68
Natural leather 187 Lane Departure Warning 160 Turn signal 69
Interior light Activation / deactivation 162 Warning lights 31
Front 74 Information messages 162 Load 238
Interior lights Operation 161 Locking
Rear 75 Lap timer 48 Individual settings 56
Interior monitor 58 Leather KESSY 55
iPad holder Natural leather care 187 Key 54
Behind the headrests 99 LEAVING HOME 73 Remote control 54
Handling 99 Lever Locking and unlocking the vehicle from the in-
ISOFIX 23 Main beam 69 side 55
Turn signal 69 Locking the door without a locking cylinder
J Levers Emergency 224
Windscreen wipers 78 Long cargo channel 88
Jack 212
Maintenance 185 Light Low beam 68
Jump-starting 219 Cockpit 74 Low tyre pressure warning
COMING HOME / LEAVING HOME 73 See tyre pressure monitoring 165
K Fog lights 72 Luggage compartment 100
Headlights with CORNER function 73 Compartment with cargo element 106
KESSY High-beam assistant 71 Cover 104
Locking 55 Rear fog light 72 Fastening elements 101
Unlocking 55 Replacing bulbs 230 Fix floor covering 103
Key travel mode 71 Fixing nets 102
Locking 54 Xenon headlight 70 floor covering on both sides 103
Starting the engine 121 Light Assist foldable hook 103
Stopping the engine 121 High-beam assistant 71 Folding double hooks 103
Switching off the ignition 121 lighting Lighting 100
Switching on the ignition 121 entry space 75 Luggage net 104
Unlocking 54 Net partition 109
Lighting
Key CAR Luggage compartment 100 Roll-up cover 105
see Infotainment 4 Storage compartments under the floor cover-
Lights 67
Knee airbag 17 Automatic driving lamp control 70 ing 106
Daylight running 68 Stowing the roof rack 111
L Hazard warning light system 73 unlock manually 224
Lamp failure Headlight beam range regulation 68 Unlock the boot lid 224
Warning light 38 Headlight flasher 69 Variable loading floor 107
Lamps Low beam 68 Luggage compartment cover 104
Warning light 38 Roll-up cover 105

254 Index
Luggage compartment lid 59 Memory 44 Net partition 109
Luggage net 104 Memory Function for the seat 84 behind the front seats 109
Luggage storage Mirror behind the rarer seats 109
Multi-function pocket 107 Exterior mirrors 80 Removing and refitting the housing 110
Interior mirror 79 Nets 102
M Make-up 76 NGVs
Main beam 69 MODE button see CNG 193
Warning light 37 see driving mode selection 157 Notes for driving with a repaired tyre 219
Maintenance Modifications 178 Notes on using wheels 205
see vehicle care 183 Modifications and technical alterations
Manual air conditioning Airbags 180 O
Air distribution control 115 Service 179 OFF ROAD 138
Controls 113 Spoiler 180 ABS 140
Manual gear changing Multi-function display EDS 140
see gear changing 128 operation 42 ESC 140
Manually Multi-function pocket 107 hill descent assistant 139
adjusting seats 82 Multi collision brake (MCB) 138 operation 139
Manually adjusting seats 82 Multifunction display TCS 140
MAXI DOT display 44 Functions 41 OFF ROAD mode
Lap timer 48 Information 42 warning light 40
Main menu 45 Memory 44 Oil
Menu item assist systems 48 Multifunction steering wheel See Engine oil 198
Menu item Audio 47 Operation 46 Warning messages 38
Menu item navigation 46 Multimedia Oil pressure
Menu item telephone 47 AUX 99 Warning messages 38
Operation 45, 46 USB 99 On-board computer
Stop watch 48 Multimedia holder 94 see multifunction display 41
MAXI DOT see Handling 99 Operating weight 237
MAXI DOT display 44 Operation in winter
Maximum N Diesel fuel 191
permissible weights 236 N1 107 Vehicle battery 202
MCB 138 Nameplate 236 Original accessories 179
Mechanical window lifter Natural gas operation Overview
open and close 62 Warning light 37 Engine compartment 196
Mechanical window lifters 61 Navigation Warning lights 31
Media see Infotainment 4
AUX 99
see Infotainment 4
USB 99

Index 255
P Power limit Rear View Camera 143
sliding/tilting roof 65 Function keys 144
Park assist Power outlet Operation 143
Departing from a parallel parking space 147 12 V 93 Orientation Lines 144
Information messages 147 Power steering Rear view mirror
Parking 146 Warning light 33 Interior mirror 79
Park Assist 144 Power windows 61 Rear window - heater 76
Automatic brake assist 147 Button in the front passenger door 63 Refuelling 189
Operation 145 Button in the rear doors 63 Fuel 189
Parking space search 146 Fuel - natural gas 192
Practical equipment
Parking 128 Reflective vest 211 Remote control
Park Assist 144 Locking 54
Practical features
Parking aid 140 Replacing the battery 223
12-Volt power outlet 93
Rear View Camera 143 Synchronisation process 223
Pockets on the backs of the front seats 96
Parking aid 140 Seat backrest with long cargo channel 88 Unlocking 54
Automatic system activation when moving for- Waste container 93 Remote control key
ward 143 Replacing the battery 223
Proactive passenger protection 160
Function 141
Warning light 35 Removable through-loading bag 98
Parking assistance
ProActive passenger protection Removing the
Activation / deactivation 142
Function 160 bar ball, Step 1 170
Display in the Infotainment display 142
Protective films 183 bar ball, Step 2 171
Parking lights 68
Puncture repair kit 217 Repairs and technical alterations 178
Park Pilot 140
Replace
Park the vehicle R the battery in the auxiliary heating (auxiliary
see Parking 128 heating) in the remote control 223
Part replacement 178 Radiator fan 196
Radio Replacing
Passive safety Bulb for the licence plate light 233
Before setting off 8 see Infotainment 4
Bulbs 230
Driving safety 8 Radio remote control
Fuses 226
Passive Safety 8 Auxiliary heating (heating and ventilation) 119
Fuses – engine compartment 229
Pedals 128 Raising the vehicle 215 Fuses – LHD 227
Footmats 128 Rear-view mirror Fuses – RHD 227
Petrol Exterior mirrors 80 Low beam bulb 231
see fuel 190 Fold in passenger mirror 80 Rear window wiper blade 226
Synchronous adjustment of the rear-view mir- Vehicle battery 203
Phonebox 91
ror 80 windscreen wiper blades 225
Plastic parts 184
Rear fog light 72 Replenishing
Polishing vehicle paint work
Warning light 34 Coolant 200
see vehicle care 183
Rear mirror 79 Engine oil 198
Positioning the
jack 215 Windscreen washer fluid 196

256 Index
Reversing camera Seat belts 11 Setting
Lens care 185 Belt tensioners 13 Positions of the variable loading floor 108
Revolutions counter 29 fastening and unfastening 13 Seat belt height 12
Roller blind Seatbelts seats and head restraints 81
Luggage compartment cover 105 Inertia reels 13 Settings
Roof Seat belts Interior mirror 79
Load 112 The physical principle of a head-on collision 12 Setting the
Roof rack 110 Seat features 85 Clock 31
mounting points 111 Seats Side airbag 17
Roof load 112 Folding front passenger seat 86 sliding/tilting roof
Stowing in the luggage compartment 111 Front armrest 86 Sunblind 66
Rubber seals 184 Head restraints 82 Sliding/tilting roof
Running-in Heating 85 Closing 65
Brake linings 132 Memory Function of the electrically adjustable Sliding / tilting roof
Engine 132 seat 84 Malfunction 66
Tyres 132 Rear armrest 86 Malfunction of the sun blind 66
Seat backrests 87 Sliding/tilting roof
S Storing in memory of remote control key 84 Opening and tilting 65
Seats and head restraint 81 Operation 65
SAFE
See Safe securing system 56 see automatic gearbox SmartGate
Manual shifting of gears on the multifunction Connection by searching for a Wi-Fi network 51
SAFELOCK
steering wheel 130 introductory information 50
See Safe securing system 56
see Instrument cluster Password/PIN code change 52
Safe securing system 56
see Instrument cluster 28 Setting 52
Safety 8
Select drive mode Wi-Fi Direct 51
Child safety 20
Individual mode settings 159 SmartLink
Child safety seats 20
Mode selection and Infotainment display 159 see Infotainment 4
Correct seated position 8
Head restraints 82 Select driving mode Snow chains 209
ISOFIX 23 Eco mode 158 Sockets
TOP TETHER 25 Individual mode 158 230 V 97
Off-road mode 158 Spare wheel 207, 208
Saving electrical energy 132
Sport mode 157 Remove 213
Saving fuel 132
Selector lever stow 213
Seals Refer to Selector lever 129
Vehicle care 184 Speed symbol
Selector lever lock see Wheels 208
Seat belt Warning light 37
height adjustment 12 Spoiler 180
Service 179 Stabilisation system 135
warning light 32
Service interval display 49
Warning light 37 Stability Control (ESC) 136
Warning light 40
Staring engine
Jump-starting 219

Index 257
START-STOP 124 Stopping the engine Washing by hand 181
Jump-starting 219 Key 121 Wash system 182
Manually deactivating/activating the system 126 Stop watch 48 TCS
operation 125 Storage 89 Indicator light 33
Warning light 39 Storage compartment Operation 136
START-STOP system 124 Glasses compartment 95 Warning light 33
Starter button in the front centre console 91 Technical data 236
Problems starting the engine 124 in the rear centre console 97 Telephone
Starting the engine 123 on the driver's side 90 see Infotainment 4
Steering column lock locking 122 on the front passenger side 95 Through-loading bag 98
Steering column lock unlocking 122 under the front arm rest 95 Time 31
Switching off the engine 123 Storage compartments 89 Tiptronic 130
Switching off the ignition 123 Storing Tools 212
Switching on the ignition 123 seats 84 TOP TETHER 25
Starting and stopping the engine at the push of Storing skis 88
the button 122 Towing 220
Stowage Towing device
Starting and stopping the engine using the key 120 compartments in the doors 90 Accessories 171
Starting engine Sunblind Description 167
Jump-starting 219 Operation 66 Towing eye
Starting the engine Sun screen 77 front 221
Key 121
sun visors 76 Rear 222
Starter button 123
Switching lights on and off 68 Towing hitch
START STOP
Switching off the engine Operation and maintenance 186
Information messages 126
Starter button 123 Towing protection 58
Steering column lock locking
Switching off the ignition Towing the vehicle 220
Starter button 122
Key 121 Traction control (TCS) 136
Steering column lock unlocking
Starter button 123 Traffic sign recognition 162
Starter button 122
Switching on the ignition Function 163
Steering lock locking
Key 121 Information messages 164
Key 120
Starter button 123 Traffic Sign Recognition
Steering lock unlocking
Synchronous adjustment of the rear-view mir- Additional display 164
Key 120
ror 80 Traffic signs
Steering lock (KESSY system)
Warning light 33 see Traffic sign recognition 162
T
Steering wheel Trailer 172
correct posture 9 Tablet holder 13-pin socket 172
setting 9 Behind the headrests 99 Attaching and detaching 172
Taking care of your vehicle loading 173
Stop
Automatic car wash system 182 Safety eyelet 172
see Parking 128
High-pressure cleaner 182 Trailer operation 176

258 Index
Trailer operation 167, 176 U Safety instructions 201
Trailer stabilization system (TSA) 138 Warning light 37
Transmission Under-body Vehicle care
Warning messages 37 Vehicle care 186 Alcantara 187
Transport Under-body protection 186 Anodized parts 184
Luggage compartment 100 Unlocking Artificial leather 187
Roof rack 110 Individual settings 56 Cavity protection 185
Transporting 89 KESSY 55 Chrome parts 184
Key 54 Cleaning vehicle exterior 182
Transporting children safely 20
Remote control 54 Cleaning wheels 185
TSA 138
Unlocking and locking 53 Decorative and protective films 183
Turn signal 69 Door locking cylinder 185
USB 99
Turn signal system Headlight glasses 185
Used vehicles
Warning light 36 Interior care 186
Acceptance and recycling 181
Tyre Jack 185
Useful equipment
Explanation of the label 208 Maintenance 183
230-volt socket 97
see wheels 208 Materials 187
Ashtray 92
Tyre load-bearing capacity Car park ticket holder 90 Natural leather 187
see Wheels 208 Cigarette lighter 92 Plastic parts 184
Tyre pressure 205 Clothes hook 96 Polishing vehicle paint work 183
Warning light 35 Cup holders 91 Rubber seals 184
Tyre pressure monitoring 165 Glasses compartment 95 Safety belt 188
Display 35 Multimedia holder 94 Seat covers 188
Infotainment display 166 Removable through-loading bag 98 Under-body protections 186
Saving tyre pressure values 165 Storage compartment 89 washing 181
Saving tyre pressure values - button 166 Using the selector lever 129 Vehicle condition
Saving tyre pressure values - Infotainment 166 see Auto-check control 40
Tyre repair V Vehicle data sticker 236
General information 218 Vehicle data sticker and nameplate
Variable loading floor 107
Preparations 218 Vehicle data sticker and nameplate 236
Dividing the luggage compartment 109
Pressure test 219 Vehicle dimensions 240, 241
Folding up 108
Sealing and inflating the tyre 218 Vehicle height 240, 241
Position change 108
Tyres 205 Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) 236
Vehicle battery
Damage 207 Vehicle length 240, 241
Automatic load deactivation 204
new 132
charging 203 Vehicle tool kit 212
Tyre pressure 205
Checking the battery electrolyte level 202 Vehicle width 240, 241
Wear 206
Cover 202 vest
Wear indicator 207
Operation in winter 202 holder for reflective vest 211
Tyre size 208 Replacing 203
see wheels 208 VIN
Vehicle Identification Number 236

Index 259
Visibility 76 Tyre damage 207 Winter operation 209
Visors Tyre pressure 205 De-icing windows 184
see front sun visors 76 Tyre size 208 Snow chains 209
see Sun screen 77 Tyre storage 205 Winter tyres 209
Tyre wear 206 Winter tyres
W Tyre wear indicator 207 See Wheels 209
Wheel balance 206 Wiper blades 186
Warning indicator of a low temperature
Wheel replacement 207 Service position of the windscreen wiper arms 225
Warning light 39
Winter tyres 209 Wiper interval 78
Warning lights 31
Wi-Fi Wipers
Warning symbols Connection 51
see Warning lights 31 Maintaining wiper blades 186
Password 51
Warning triangle 211 Password change 52 X
warning when speeding 43 see Infotainment 4
Washing Setting 52 XDS 137
Automatic car wash system 182 Wi-Fi Direct Xenon headlight 70
by hand 181 Connection 51
High-pressure cleaner 182 Password change 52
Washing vehicles 181 Setting 52
Waste container 93 Window operation
Water in the fuel filter Convenience operation 64
Warning light 39 Malfunctions 64
warning messages 39 Window wiper
Weather conditions 178 Replacing the rear window wiper blade 226
Wheel bolts Windscreen
Anti-theft wheel bolts 214 Heater 76
Caps 214 Windscreen washer fluid
Loosening and tightening 215 Checking 196
Wheel rims 205 Replenishing 196
Wheels Warning light 39
Age of wheels 205 Winter 196
Changing 213 Windscreen washers
Driving style 206 Windscreen washers 78
Full trim 213 Windscreen washer system 196
General information 205 Windscreen wipers
Load index 208 automatic rear window wipers 78
Low-profile tyres 207 operation 78
Remove 213 Replacing the windscreen wipers 225
Snow chains 209 Windscreen washer fluid 196
Speed symbol 208 Windscreen wipers and washers 77
stow 213

260 Index
Index 261
262 Index
Reprinting, duplicating, translating and any other use, either in whole or in Issued by: ŠKODA AUTO a.s.
part, is not permitted without the written consent of ŠKODA AUTO a.s..
© ŠKODA AUTO a.s. 2015
ŠKODA AUTO a.s. expressly reserves all rights relating to copyright laws.
Subject to change.
www.skoda-auto.com

Návod k obsluze
Octavia anglicky 11.2015